JP2022111324A - game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine capable of enhancing a performance effect.

SOLUTION: A game machine is configured to rotate a rotor 800 on whose outer peripheral face, a pattern or a character is decorated, and allow a player to view the outer peripheral face, for performing a performance. The outer peripheral face of the rotor 800 comprises an opening/closing member 870 which is arranged thereon so as to be rotationally displaced. Therefore, in addition to a performance mode in which the player can view the outer peripheral face of the rotor 800, a performance mode in which the opening/closing member 870 is rotationally displaced can be generated. As the result, a change can be applied in the performance mode, so that the performance effect can be enhanced.

SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 69

COPYRIGHT: (C)2022,JPO&INPIT

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pachinko machines.

2. Description of the Related Art Among game machines such as pachinko machines, there is known a game machine having a reel member which is rotatably formed and whose outer peripheral surface is arranged so as to be visible to a player (Patent Document 1).

JP 2009-119140 A

However, the game machine described above has a problem that the presentation effect is insufficient.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of enhancing the performance effect.

In order to achieve this object, a gaming machine according to claim 1 is provided with a rotatable reel member having an outer peripheral surface arranged so as to be visible to a player, and the reel member is arranged to be visible to the player. A displacement member is provided so as to be displaceable on the outer peripheral surface.

A gaming machine according to claim 2 is the gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the displacement member is formed to be displaceable between at least a first position and a second position, and at the first position, the rotary member is formed by the displacement member, and at the second position, at least part of the displacement member protrudes radially outward of the rotary member.

A gaming machine according to claim 3 is the gaming machine according to claim 2, further comprising light emitting means for emitting light, wherein the spinning drum member is formed having an internal space, and the light emitting device is provided in the internal space. When means is provided and the displacement member is displaced to the second position, the outer peripheral surface of the rotary member is opened and the internal space communicates with the outside.

According to the game machine according to claim 1, the performance effect can be enhanced.

According to the gaming machine of claim 2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine of claim 1, interest can be enhanced.

According to the game machine of claim 3, in addition to the effects of the game machine of claim 2, the production effect can be enhanced.

1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to a first embodiment; FIG. 1 is a front view of a game board of a pachinko machine; FIG. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine. 1 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a pachinko machine; FIG. 1 is an exploded perspective front view of a pachinko machine; FIG. It is an exploded perspective front view of an operation unit and a game board. FIG. 4 is a front view of the operating unit; FIG. 4 is a front view of the operating unit; FIG. 4 is a front view of the operating unit; FIG. 4 is a front view of the operating unit; It is a front view of a lower displacement unit. It is a rear view of a lower displacement unit. It is an exploded perspective front view of a lower displacement unit. It is an exploded perspective rear view of a lower displacement unit. It is a front view of a lower displacement unit in a retracted state. FIG. 10 is a front view of the downward displacement unit in the first extended state; FIG. 10 is a front view of the downward displacement unit in the second extended state; It is a rear view of the downward displacement unit in a retracted state. FIG. 10 is a rear view of the downward displacement unit in the first extended state; FIG. 11 is a rear view of the downward displacement unit in the second extended state; FIG. 8A is a rear view of the first link member and the cam member in a retracted state, FIG. 4B in a first extended state, and FIG. FIG. 19 is a schematic cross-sectional view of the lower displacement unit taken along line XXIIa-XXIIa of FIG. 18, and FIG. 19B is a schematic cross-sectional view of the lower displacement unit taken along line XXIIb-XXIIb of FIG. (a) is a front view of a lower displacement member, and (b) is a rear view of the lower displacement member. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective front view of a lower displacement member; FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective rear view of a lower displacement member; (a) and (b) are front views of a lower displacement member. Fig. 10 is a front view of the lower displacement member in the first position; Fig. 10 is a front view of the lower displacement member in the second position; Fig. 10 is a front view of the lower displacement member in a third position; (a) to (c) are partially enlarged views of a lower displacement member. (a) to (c) are front views of a lower displacement member. (a) to (c) are front views of a lower displacement member. (a) to (c) are front views of a lower displacement member. (a) to (c) are front views of a lower displacement member. (a) is a partially enlarged view of the lower displacement member in range XXXVa of FIG. 34(b), and (b) is a partially enlarged view of the lower displacement member in range XXXVb of FIG. 34(a). (a) is a top view of the sorting unit, and (b) is a rear view of the sorting unit. 4 is an exploded front perspective view of the sorting unit; FIG. FIG. 4 is an exploded rear perspective view of the sorting unit; FIG. 37 is a cross-sectional view of the sorting unit taken along line XXXIX-XXXIX of FIG. 36(a); (a) and (b) are partially enlarged views of the sorting unit in range XL of FIG. (a) and (b) are partial enlarged views of a sorting unit. (a) and (b) are partial enlarged views of a sorting unit. (a) and (b) are partial enlarged views of a sorting unit. (a) and (b) are partial enlarged views of a sorting unit. It is a front view of a sorting unit and a lower displacement unit. FIG. 10 is a top view of a sorting unit and a lower displacement unit; It is a front view of a lower displacement unit. FIG. 4 is a cross-sectional view of a sorting unit; It is a front view of a lower displacement unit. FIG. 4 is a cross-sectional view of a sorting unit; It is a front view of a lower displacement unit. FIG. 4 is a cross-sectional view of a sorting unit; It is a front view of a rotation unit. It is a rear view of a rotation unit. It is an exploded perspective front view of a rotation unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the rotation unit. It is a front view of a decoration unit. (a) is a side view of the decoration unit as viewed in the direction of arrow LVIIIa in FIG. 57, and (b) is a side view of the decoration unit as viewed in the direction of arrow LVIIIb in FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective front view of the decoration unit; FIG. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective rear view of the decoration unit; 55, and (b) is the rotation unit in arrow LVb of FIG. 55, and (b) is the rotation unit in arrow LVb of FIG. FIG. 4A is a side view of the decoration unit and the right transmission member in a closed state, (b) in an intermediate state, and (c) in an open state; FIG. 4A is a side view of the decoration unit and the right transmission member in an open state, (b) in an intermediate state, and (c) in a closed state; (a) is a side view of the decoration unit in the closed state, and FIG. 65(b) is a side view of the decoration unit in the open state. (a) is a front view of the rotating body, (b) is a side view of the rotating body viewed in the direction of arrow LXVIb in FIG. 66(a), and (c) is an arrow LXVIc in FIG. It is a side view of a rotary body in direction view. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective front view of a rotating body; It is an exploded perspective rear view of a rotating body. (a) is a side view of the rotating body with the opening/closing member closed, and (b) is a side view of the rotating body with the opening/closing member open. (a) and (b) are side views of the decorative unit. It is a front view of a lower displacement unit and a rotation unit. FIG. 72 is a top view of the downward displacement unit viewed in the direction of arrow LXII in FIG. 71; It is a front view of a lower displacement unit and a rotation unit. (a) is a top view of the ball cradle, (b) is a front view of the ball cradle, and (c) is a sectional view of the ball cradle taken along line LXXIVc-LXXIVc in FIG. 74(a). is. It is an exploded perspective view of a ball cradle. (a) and (b) are sectional views of a ball cradle. 54(a) and (b) are schematic cross-sectional views of the rotation unit taken along line LXXVII-LXXVII in FIG. 53. FIG. It is a front view of an upper displacement unit. It is an exploded perspective front view of an upper displacement unit. It is an exploded perspective rear view of an upper displacement unit. FIG. 10 is a front view of the upper displacement unit in a state where the upper displacement member is arranged at the retracted position; FIG. 11 is a front view of the upper displacement unit in a state where the upper displacement member is arranged at an intermediate position; FIG. 10 is a front view of the upper displacement unit in a state where the upper displacement member is arranged at the extended position; (a) is a front view of a variable part, and (b) is a rear view of the variable part. FIG. 11 is an exploded perspective front view of a lower displacement member in the second embodiment; It is a front view of a lower displacement member. Fig. 10 is a front view of the lower displacement member in a third position; (a) is a front view of a lower displacement member in a third embodiment, and (b) is a rear view of the lower displacement member. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective front view of a lower displacement member; FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective rear view of a lower displacement member; (a) and (b) are front views of a lower displacement member. (a) is a front view of the lower displacement member at the first position, and (b) is a front view of the lower displacement member at the second position. (a) is a front view of the lower displacement member at the third position, and (b) is a front view of the lower displacement member at the second position. It is a front view of the downward displacement unit in 4th Embodiment. It is a front view of a lower displacement unit. It is a front view of a lower displacement unit. (a) is a top view of the sorting unit in the fifth embodiment, and FIG. 97(b) is a rear view of the sorting unit. 4 is an exploded perspective front view of the sorting unit; FIG. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective rear view of the sorting unit; FIG. 97 is a cross-sectional view of the sorting unit taken along line CC of FIG. 97(a); 101(a) and (b) are partial enlarged views of the sorting unit in the area CI in FIG. 100. FIG. It is a front view of the rotation unit in 6th Embodiment. It is an exploded perspective front view of a rotation unit. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective rear view of the sorting unit; 104(a) to (c) are side views of the decoration unit viewed in the direction of arrow CV in FIG. 104. FIG. 104(a) to (c) are side views of the decoration unit viewed in the direction of arrow CV in FIG. 104. FIG. It is a side schematic diagram of the displacement unit in 7th Embodiment. It is a side view schematic diagram of a displacement unit. It is a schematic side view of the displacement unit when a game ball is held by the displacement member. It is a schematic side view of the displacement unit when a game ball is held by the displacement member. It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 8th Embodiment. 4 is an exploded perspective front view of the rotary operation unit; FIG. FIG. 112 is a schematic cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine taken along line CXIII-CXIII in FIG. 111; It is a cross-sectional schematic diagram of a pachinko machine.

BEST MODE FOR CARRYING OUT THE INVENTION Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko game machine (hereinafter simply referred to as "pachinko machine") 10 will be described as a first embodiment with reference to FIGS. 1 to 77. FIG. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 2 whose outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 2 formed in substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 2. and an inner frame 4 supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 2 at two upper and lower positions on the left side in front view (see FIG. 1) to support the inner frame 4, and the side on which the hinges 18 are provided serves as an opening and closing axis. A frame 4 is supported toward the front side so that it can be opened and closed.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning slots 63 and 64, etc. is detachably attached to the inner frame 4 from the back side. A ball (game ball) flows down the front surface of the game board 13 to play a pinball game. The inner frame 4 includes a ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that shoots a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a shooting unit that guides the ball shot from the ball shooting unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 4, a front door 5 covering the front upper side and a lower tray unit 15 covering the lower side are provided. In order to support the front door 5 and the lower tray unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached at two upper and lower positions on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1). 5 and a lower tray unit 15 are supported toward the front side so that they can be opened and closed. The locking of the inner frame 4 and the locking of the front door 5 are unlocked by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front door 5 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electric parts, and the like, and has a window portion 5c having a substantially elliptical opening at its substantially central portion. A glass unit 16 having two sheet glasses 8 is arranged on the back side of the front door 5, and the front side of the pachinko machine 10 can be visually recognized through the glass unit 16.例文帳に追加

An upper tray 17 for storing balls projects forward from the front door 5 and is formed in a substantially box-like shape with an open upper surface. The bottom surface of the upper tray 17 is inclined downward to the right when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the inclination guides the ball thrown into the upper tray 17 to the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4). A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17 . The frame button 22 is operated by the player when, for example, the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) is changed, or the content of the super ready-to-win effect is changed. be.

Light-emitting means such as various lamps are provided around the front door 5 (for example, at corners). These light emitting means are controlled to change the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking in response to changes in the game state such as when a big win is made or when a predetermined ready-to-win state is reached, and play a role of enhancing the effect during the game. Illumination parts 29 to 33 containing light emitting means such as LEDs are provided on the periphery of the window part 5c. In the pachinko machine 10, these electric decoration parts 29 to 33 function as production lamps such as big win lamps, and the respective electric decoration parts 29 to 33 are lit by lighting or blinking of built-in LEDs at the time of a big win or a ready-to-win production. Alternatively, it flashes to indicate that the jackpot is in progress or that the player is in the process of reaching one step before the jackpot. In addition, an indicator lamp 34 is provided at the upper left portion of the front door 5 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1). The indicator lamp 34 has a built-in light emitting means such as an LED and is capable of indicating whether prize balls are being dispensed and when an error has occurred.

In addition, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front door 5 can be visually recognized on the lower side of the right side electric decoration part 32, and a pasting space K1 (Fig. 2) can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, in order to bring out more splendor, a plated member 36 made of ABS resin, which is plated with chrome, is attached to the area around the electric decorations 29-33.

A ball rental operation unit 40 is arranged below the window portion 5c. The ball rental operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41 , a ball rental button 42 and a return button 43 . When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with banknotes, cards, etc. inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the balls are released according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display section 41 is an area in which the balance information of the card or the like is displayed, and the built-in LED is turned on to display the remaining amount in numbers as the balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain lending balls based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and lending balls are supplied to the top tray 17 as long as the card or the like has a balance. be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. A pachinko machine in which balls are directly lent to the upper tray 17 from a ball leasing device or the like without going through the card unit, that is, a so-called cash machine, does not require the ball leasing operation unit 40. A decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation portion to make the parts configuration common. It is possible to achieve commonality between a pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine.

In the lower tray unit 15 positioned below the upper tray 17, a lower tray 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper tray 17 is formed in a substantially box-like shape with an open upper surface. there is On the right side of the lower tray 50, an operating handle 51 is provided which is operated by the player to drive the ball into the front surface of the game board 13. As shown in FIG.

Inside the operating handle 51, there are a touch sensor 51a for permitting the driving of the ball shooting unit 112a, a shooting stop switch 51b for stopping the shooting of the ball during the pressing operation, and a rotation of the operating handle 51. A variable resistor (not shown) for detecting a dynamic operation amount (rotational position) based on a change in electrical resistance is incorporated. When the operating handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes corresponding to the amount of rotation operation. A ball is shot with a strength (shooting intensity) corresponding to , and is hit to the front surface of the game board 13 with a flying amount corresponding to the player's operation. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are turned off.

A ball extraction lever 52 is provided at the lower front portion of the lower tray 50 for operation when discharging the balls stored in the lower tray 50 downward. The ball extracting lever 52 is always biased to the right, and when it is slid to the left against the bias, the bottom opening formed in the bottom of the lower tray 50 is opened. The ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball extracting lever 52 is normally performed with a box (generally called a "senryo box") placed below the lower tray 50 to receive the balls ejected from the lower tray 50 . The operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower tray 50 as described above, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower tray 50 .

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 includes a base plate 60 which is cut into a substantially square shape in a front view. The opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, the variable winning device 65, the first through gate 66, the variable display device unit 80, etc. are assembled, and the peripheral portion thereof is the inner frame 4 (see FIG. 1). attached to the back side of the The base plate 60 is made of wood by pasting together thin plate materials, and is formed so that various structures arranged on the back side of the base plate 60 cannot be seen from the front side of the base plate 60 by the player. The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in through-holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing. It is fixed by a tapping screw or the like from the front side.

The central portion of the front surface of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 4 through the window portion 5c of the front door 5 (see FIG. 1). Mainly referring to FIG. 2, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described below.

An outer rail 77 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and a strip-shaped metal plate similar to the outer rail 77 is placed inside the outer rail 77. An arc-shaped inner rail 76 formed by is erected. The outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rail 76 and the outer rail 77, and the front and rear sides are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area is formed in which a game is played by the behavior of . The game area is the front surface of the game board 13 and is defined by two rails 76 and 77 and a resin-made outer edge member 73 connecting the rails (a prize-winning opening, etc. area where the ball flows down).

The two rails 76 and 77 are provided to guide the ball shot from the ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. As shown in FIG. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 76 (upper left part in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning into the ball guide passage again. be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 77 (upper right in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the ball. is attenuated and rebounded toward the center.

First pattern display devices 37A and 37B provided with a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means and a 7-segment display are arranged in the lower left side of the game area when viewed from the front (lower left side in FIG. 2). The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are for displaying according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly display the game state of the pachinko machine 10. FIG. In this embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are configured to be used properly according to whether the ball has won the first prize winning port 64 or the second prize winning port 640.例文帳に追加Specifically, when the ball enters the first winning hole 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, while when the ball enters the second winning hole 640, the first The pattern display device 37B is configured to operate.

In addition, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B use LEDs to indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the variable probability, the time saving mode, or the normal state by the lighting state, or indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the changing state by the lighting state. Whether the stop pattern is a pattern corresponding to the probability variable jackpot, a pattern corresponding to the normal jackpot, or a missing pattern is indicated by the lighting state, the number of pending balls is indicated by the lighting state, and a 7-segment display device indicates the round during the jackpot. Display numbers and errors. The plurality of LEDs are configured so that each LED has a different emission color (for example, red, green, and blue), and depending on the combination of the emission colors, it is possible to suggest various game states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. can.

Incidentally, in the pachinko machine 10, a lottery is conducted when a prize is won in either the first prize winning port 64 or the second prize winning port 640.例文帳に追加In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big win (big win lottery), and also determines the kind of big win when it is determined as a big win. As the jackpot type determined here, a 15R probability variable jackpot, a 4R probability variable jackpot, and a 15R normal jackpot are prepared. The first pattern display devices 37A and 37B not only indicate whether or not the result of the lottery is a jackpot as a stop pattern after the end of variation, but also indicate a pattern corresponding to the jackpot type when the jackpot is won. .

Here, the “15R probability variable jackpot” is a probability variable jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after the maximum number of rounds is 15 rounds, and the “4R probability variable jackpot” is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 4 rounds. It is a variable jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after . In addition, "15R normal jackpot" is a jackpot that shifts to a low probability state after a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 15 rounds, and a time-saving state during a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations). be.

In addition, the "high probability state" refers to a state in which the probability of a subsequent jackpot is increased as an added value after the end of the jackpot, a time during so-called probability fluctuation (probability change), in other words, a game that is easy to shift to a special game state It is the state of The high-probability state (during variable probability) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which the probability of winning a second symbol, which will be described later, is increased and the ball is likely to enter the second winning hole 640 . "Low probability state" refers to a state in which the odds are not variable, and the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than when the odds are variable. In addition, the time-saving state (during time-saving) of the "low-probability state" is a state in which the jackpot probability is normal, and the jackpot probability remains the same, but only the winning probability of the second symbol is increased, and the second winning port 640 It refers to the state of the game in which the ball is likely to win a prize. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state, it means that the game is in a state of neither variable probability nor time reduction (state in which neither the jackpot probability nor the second pattern winning probability is increased).

During the probability change or the time reduction, not only is the winning probability of the second symbol increased, but also the time during which the first electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is opened is changed, which is longer than during normal. Time is set. When the first electric accessory 640a is in the open state (open state), compared to the case where the first electric accessory 640a is in the closed state (closed state), the second winning port 640 The ball will be in a state where it is easy to win. Therefore, during the probability change or the time reduction, the ball can easily enter the second winning hole 640, and the number of times the big winning lottery is performed can be increased.

In addition, instead of changing the opening time of the first electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 during the probability change or during the time saving, or in addition to changing the opening time, one hit , the number of times the first electric accessory 640a is opened may be changed to increase more than during normal operation. In addition, during the probability change or the time reduction, the winning probability of the second symbol is not changed, and the first electric role product 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is opened and the first electric role product is opened once. At least one of the number of times 640a is opened may be changed. In addition, during the probability change or the time reduction, the time for opening the first electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 and the number of times the first electric accessory 640a is opened per time are not changed. Only the winning probability of the second symbol may be changed so as to be increased as compared with the normal state.

The game area is provided with a plurality of general winning holes 63 through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win. A variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. In the variable display device unit 80, with the winning of either the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 640 (start winning) as a trigger, the third A third pattern display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as a "display device") that displays a variable pattern, and an LED that variably displays the second pattern triggered by the passage of the ball through the first through gate 66. A second pattern display device (not shown) is provided.

A center frame 86 is arranged in the variable display device unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third pattern display device 81 . The third pattern display device 81 can be visually recognized through an opening formed in the center of the center frame 86 .

The third pattern display device 81 is composed of a large 9-inch liquid crystal display, and the display contents are controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4), so that, for example, upper, middle and lower three patterns are displayed. A column of symbols is displayed. Each pattern row is composed of a plurality of patterns (third patterns), and these third patterns are horizontally scrolled for each pattern row to variably display the third pattern on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81.例文帳に追加It's like In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the game state is displayed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B under the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4). Decorative display according to the display of the pattern display devices 37A and 37B is performed. Incidentally, instead of the display device, for example, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using a reel or the like.

The second symbol display device alternately displays a symbol "O" and a symbol "X" as a display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) for a predetermined time each time the ball passes through the first through gate 66. This is to perform a variable display that lights up. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the first through gate 66, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if the winning lottery is won, the second symbol display device stops and displays the symbol "○" after the second symbol is variably displayed. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is a loss, the symbol "x" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variable display of the third symbol.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device stops at a predetermined symbol ("○" symbol in this embodiment), the first electric role object 640a attached to the second winning hole 640 It is configured to be activated (opened) for a predetermined period of time.

The time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set so as to be shorter during the variable probability or during the time reduction than during the normal game state. As a result, the variable display of the second symbol is performed in a short time during the probability change and the time reduction, so that more winning lotteries can be performed than during normal times. Therefore, since the chances of winning in the winning lottery increase, it is possible to give the player more chances to open the first electric accessory 640a of the second winning opening 640.例文帳に追加Therefore, it is possible to create a state in which the ball is likely to enter the second winning hole 640 during the probability variation and the time saving.

In addition, during the probability change or the time reduction, other methods such as increasing the probability of winning, increasing the opening time and the number of openings of the first electric accessory 640a for one hit, etc. The second winning opening during the probability change or time reduction When the ball is in a state where it is easy to win a prize to 640, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be fixed regardless of the game state. On the other hand, if the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set shorter than normal during the variable probability or during the time saving, the winning probability may be constant regardless of the game state, and one winning The opening time and the number of openings of the first electric accessory 640a may be constant regardless of the game state.

The first through gate 66 is attached to the game board in the area on the right side of the variable display unit 80 . The first through gate 66 is configured so that a part of the balls flowing down the game board among the balls shot to the game board can pass through. When the ball passes through the first through gate 66, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, the variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the result of the winning lottery is a win, the symbol "○" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display, and if the result of the winning lottery is a loss. For example, an "x" symbol is displayed as a variable display stop symbol.

The number of times the ball passes through the first through gate 66 is suspended up to four times in total, and the number of suspended balls is displayed by the above-described first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, and the second symbol suspension lamp (not shown) is displayed. ) is also illuminated. Four second pattern holding lamps are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third pattern display device 81 .

In addition, the variable display of the second pattern is performed by switching lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second pattern display device as in the present embodiment. A part of the pattern display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the lighting of the second symbol reservation lamp may be performed by a part of the third symbol display device 81 . Also, the maximum number of held balls for passage of the ball through the first through gate 66 is not limited to 4, and may be set to 3 or less or 5 or more times (e.g., 8 times). . Also, the number of through gates to be assembled is not limited to two, and may be three or more. Also, the mounting position of the through gate is not limited to the right and left sides of the variable display device unit 80, and may be below the variable display device unit 80, for example. In addition, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the lighting display may not be performed by the second symbol reservation lamp.

Below the variable display device unit 80, a first winning hole 64 through which balls can win is arranged. When a ball enters the first winning hole 64, a first winning hole switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main controller 110 is caused to turn on the first winning hole switch. (See FIG. 4), a lottery for a big hit is made, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37A.

On the other hand, on the right side of the first winning hole 64 when viewed from the front, a second winning hole 640 through which a ball can win is arranged. When the ball enters the second winning hole 640, the second winning hole switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main controller 110 ( 4), a lottery for a big hit is made, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is displayed on the first symbol display device 37B.

Also, the first prize winning port 64 and the second prize winning port 640 are also one of the prize winning ports from which five balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win. In this embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when the balls enter the first prize winning port 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when the balls enter the second prize winning port 640 are configured to be the same. , the number of prize balls paid out when the balls enter the first prize winning port 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when the balls enter the second prize winning port 640 are different numbers, for example, the number of balls to the first prize winning port 64 The number of prize balls to be paid out when is won may be set to three, and the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball enters the second prize winning port 640 may be set to be five.

Further, on the left side of the first prize winning port 64 in a front view, a third prize winning port 82 in which a ball can win a prize is arranged. When a ball wins, the third winning hole 82 can throw the winning ball to the first opening 511 of the sorting unit 500 to be described later via the ball throwing unit 600 . That is, the third winning opening 82 is arranged in communication with a first opening 511, which will be described later.

A third electric accessory 82a is attached to the third prize winning port 82. - 特許庁The third electric accessory 82a is configured to be openable and closable by being rotationally displaced with respect to the game board 13. Normally, the third electric accessory 82a is in a closed state (reduced state) and the ball wins the third prize. It is in a state where it is difficult to win a prize to the mouth 82 . On the other hand, when there is a jackpot determination triggered by the winning of the first prize winning port 64 or the second prize winning port 640, the third electric accessory 82a opens (expands) for a predetermined time after, or during the big win state), and the ball is likely to enter the third winning port 82. Further, on the downstream side of the third winning hole 82, a sensor device SE1 for detecting a passing ball is mounted.

The timing of opening the third electric accessory 82a does not have to be triggered by the winning of the first prize winning port 64 and the second prize winning port 5640. As a result of the variable display of the second symbols triggered by the above, when the symbol "O" is displayed on the second symbol display device, it may be released.

A first electric accessory 640a is attached to the second winning hole 640. - 特許庁The first electric accessory 640a is configured to be openable and closable, and normally the first electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (reduced state), making it difficult for the ball to enter the second winning opening 640. there is On the other hand, as a result of the variable display of the second symbol triggered by the passage of the ball through the first through gate 66, when the symbol "○" is displayed on the second symbol display device, the first electric accessory 640a is displayed. It will be in an open state (enlarged state), and the ball will easily enter the second winning port 640 .

As described above, during the variable probability and during the time saving, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher than during normal, and the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is short, so in the variable display of the second symbol "○ , and the number of times the first electric accessory 640a is in the open state (enlarged state) increases. Furthermore, the time during which the first electric accessory 640a is opened is also longer during the variable probability or during the time saving than during the normal time. Therefore, it is possible to create a state in which the ball is more likely to enter the second winning hole 640 during the variable probability or the shorter working hours compared to the normal time.

Here, when the ball enters the first prize winning port 64 and when the ball enters the second prize winning port 640, the probability of winning the jackpot is the same in both the low probability state and the high probability state. However, the probability of the 15R probability variable jackpot as the type of jackpot selected in the event of a jackpot is higher when the ball enters the second winning port 640 than when the ball enters the first winning port 64. is set. On the other hand, the first prize winning port 64 does not have the first electric accessory 640a like the second prize winning port 640, and the ball can always win a prize.

Therefore, during normal operation, the electric accessory attached to the second prize winning port 640 is often closed, and it is difficult to win the second prize winning port 640. Then, a ball is shot so that the ball passes through the left side of the variable display unit 80 (so-called "left-handed hitting"), and by winning the first prize-winning port 64, many chances of a big winning lottery are obtained, and a big win is achieved. It is advantageous for the player to aim at that.

On the other hand, during the probability change or the time reduction, by passing the ball through the first through gate 66, the first electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is likely to be in an open state, and the second winning opening 640 is won. Since it is in an easy state, the ball is shot toward the second winning hole 640 so that the ball passes through the right side of the variable display unit 80 (so-called “right hitting”), and is passed through the first through gate 66. It is more advantageous for the player to open the first electric accessory 640a and aim for a 15R probability variable jackpot by winning the second prize winning port 640.例文帳に追加

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment shoots balls to the player according to the game state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether the game is variable probability, short time, or normal). It is possible to change the way of hitting to "left hitting" and "right hitting". Therefore, it is possible to change the way the player hits the ball, so that the player can enjoy the game.

A variable prize winning device 65 is provided on the right side of the first prize winning port 64, and a horizontally long rectangular specific prize winning port (large open port) 65a is provided in the substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot lottery performed due to the winning of either the first prize winning port 64 or the second prize winning port 640 results in a jackpot, the jackpot is stopped after a predetermined time (fluctuation time) elapses. The first pattern display device 37A or the first pattern display device 37B is lit so as to form a pattern, and the stop pattern corresponding to the big win is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the big win. After that, the game state transitions to a special game state (jackpot) in which the ball is likely to win. As this special game state, the specific winning opening 65a which is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have passed or until 10 balls have been won).

The specific winning opening 65a is closed after a predetermined period of time has passed, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined period of time. The opening and closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated up to 15 times (15 rounds), for example. The state in which this opening and closing operation is performed is one form of a special game state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is given a game value (game value) by paying out a larger amount of prize balls than usual. is done.

Specifically, the variable prize winning device 65 includes a horizontally long rectangular opening/closing plate that covers the specific prize winning opening 65a, and a large opening solenoid (not shown) for opening and closing forward with the lower side of the opening/closing plate as an axis. and The specific prize winning opening 65a is normally in a closed state in which the ball cannot or hardly wins a prize. In the event of a big win, the large opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening/closing plate to the lower front side to temporarily form an open state in which the ball is likely to enter the specific prize winning port 65a, and the open state and the normal closed state are formed. It operates to alternate between states.

Incidentally, the special game state is not limited to the form described above. A large opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the game area, and when the LED corresponding to the big win is lit in the first pattern display devices 37A and 37B, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time, and the A special game is a game state in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times when a ball enters the specific winning opening 65a while the specific winning opening 65a is open. You may make it form as a state. In addition, the number of specific winning holes 65a is not limited to one, and one or more than two (for example, three) may be arranged. It may be on the left side of the variable display device unit 80 .

An affixing space K1 for affixing a certificate stamp, an identification label, etc. is provided at the right corner of the lower side of the game board 13. 35 (see FIG. 1).

The game board 13 is provided with a first outlet 71 . Balls that flow down the game area and do not win any of the winning holes 63, 64, 65a, 640, 82 are guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the first out hole 71. be. The first out port 71 is arranged below the first winning port 64 .

The game board 13 is provided with a large number of nails for properly dispersing and adjusting the falling direction of the balls, and various members (accessories) such as windmills.

As shown in FIG. 3, the back side of the pachinko machine 10 is mainly provided with control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 . The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main controller 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 forming a protective cover and a dispensing unit 93 as a unit. In addition, each control board has an MPU as a 1-chip microcomputer that manages each control, a port that communicates with various devices, a random number generator that is used for various lotteries, and is used for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit or the like is mounted as required.

Main controller 110, sound lamp controller 113, display controller 114, payout controller 111, launch controller 112, power supply 115, and card unit connection board 116 are housed in board boxes 100-104, respectively. . Each of the board boxes 100 to 104 has a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other to accommodate each controller and each board.

In addition, the board box 100 (main controller 110) and the board box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and firing control device 112) connect the box base and the box cover unopenably by a sealing unit (not shown) (caulking structure). consolidation). A sealing seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. The sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if the sealing seal is peeled off in order to open the circuit board boxes 100, 102, or if the circuit board boxes 100, 102 are forcibly opened, the box base and the box cover may be damaged. cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether the substrate boxes 100, 102 have been opened.

The dispensing unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and open upward, a tank rail 131 connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a tank rail 131 downstream of the tank rail 131. a case rail 132 vertically connected to the side of the case rail 132; ing. The tank 130 is successively replenished with balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall, and a payout device 133 pays out the required number of balls as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131 .

In addition, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with an operation knob 121 of a variable resistor, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state recovery switch 120 is operated to eliminate ball clogging (return to normal state) when a dispensing error such as a ball clogging in the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 4) occurs. The operating knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when the pachinko machine 10 is to be returned to its initial state.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG.

The main control unit 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. A RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit are incorporated. In main controller 110, MPU 201 performs main processing of pachinko machine 10 such as jackpot lottery, setting of display in first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display result in second symbol display device. to run.

In addition, various commands are transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers by the data transmission/reception circuit in order to instruct the sub-controllers such as the payout controller 111 and the sound lamp controller 113 to operate. Such commands are sent in only one direction from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers.

The RAM 203 stores various areas, counters, flags, contents of internal registers of the MPU 201, return addresses of control programs executed by the MPU 201, etc., and a stack area for storing various flags, counters, I/O, and the like. and a work area (work area) in which values are stored. The RAM 203 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

When power is interrupted due to power failure or the like, the RAM 203 stores the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of power interruption (including power failure; the same applies hereinafter). On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including when the power is turned on due to the cancellation of the power failure; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203 . Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (not shown) when the power is turned off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed by the start-up process (not shown) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. , NMI interrupt processing (not shown) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

An input/output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 205 includes the payout control device 111, the sound lamp control device 113, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the second symbol display device, the second symbol reservation lamp, and the lower side of the opening/closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for driving opening and closing to the front side and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected. to send.

The input/output port 205 also includes various switches 208 including a group of switches (not shown) and a group of sensors including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotation position detection sensor R, and a RAM erasure switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply 115, which will be described later. , and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erasing signal SG2 output from the RAM erasing switch circuit 253 .

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 storing control programs executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory and the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. , and a work area (work area) in which values such as I/O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (not shown) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 215 is connected to the main controller 110, the dispensing motor 216, the launch controller 112, and the like. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected with a prize ball detection switch for detecting paid prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout controller 111 but not to the main controller 110 .

The shooting control device 112 controls the ball shooting unit 112a so that the shooting strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 when the main controller 110 issues an instruction to shoot the ball. . The ball shooting unit 112a has a shooting solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on the condition that the shooting stop switch 51b for stopping the shooting of the ball is turned off (not operated). A shooting solenoid is energized corresponding to the amount of rotation operation (rotation position) of the handle 51 , and the ball is shot with strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51 .

The audio lamp control device 113 outputs audio from an audio output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing from a lamp display device (electrical parts 29 to 33, an indicator lamp 34, etc.) 227, and changes production (variation It controls the setting of the display mode of the third pattern display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as display) and advance notice effects. The MPU 221, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 222 storing control programs executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory and the like.

An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 225 is connected to the main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the other device 228, the frame button 22, and the like. Other devices 228 include drive motors KM1, KM2, and KM3.

Sound lamp control device 113, based on various commands (fluctuation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from main control device 110, determines the display mode of third symbol display device 81, and sends the determined display mode to the command The display control device 114 is notified by (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). In addition, the sound lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, changes the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or super reach. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the effect contents of the hour. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the stage after the change is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the stage after the change on the third pattern display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third design, which is the main image to be displayed on the third design display device 81 . The display control device 114 displays various images on the third pattern display device 81 in accordance with commands transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 .

Also, the sound lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) representing the display content of the third pattern display device 81 from the display control device 114 . In the audio lamp control device 113, based on the display command received from the display control device 114, in accordance with the display content of the third pattern display device 81, output the audio corresponding to the display content from the audio output device 226, Lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled in accordance with the display contents.

The display control device 114 is connected to the sound lamp control device 113 and the third pattern display device 81, and based on the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, changes the third pattern in the third pattern display device 81, etc. It controls the display. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display contents of the third pattern display device 81 to the sound lamp control device 113 . The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound from the sound output device 226 in accordance with the display contents indicated by this display command, so that the display of the third pattern display device 81 and the sound output from the sound output device 226 are matched. be able to.

The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to power failure, etc., and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). and an erase switch circuit 253 . The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies necessary operating voltages to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an overview, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volts supplied from the outside, various switches such as the various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, a voltage of 12 volts for driving a motor, etc. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, etc. are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts and backup voltages are supplied to the controllers 110 to 114 and the like as necessary voltages.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 at the time of power failure due to power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of stable DC 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power shutdown, power shutdown) has occurred when this voltage is less than 22 volts. Then, a power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute NMI interrupt processing. Even after the stable DC voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the driving voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing. is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main controller 110 clears the backup data when the RAM erase signal SG2 is input, and controls the payout initialization command for clearing the backup data in the payout control device 111. Send to device 111 .

Next, a schematic configuration of the operating unit 200 will be described with reference to FIGS. 5 to 10. FIG. 5 is an exploded perspective front view of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 6 is an exploded perspective front view of the operation unit 200 and the game board 13. FIG. 7 to 10 are front views of the operation unit 200. FIG.

7, the upper displacement member 940 is retracted upward and the lower displacement member 440 is retracted downward. In FIG. 8, the upper displacement member 940 is rotated downward from the state shown in FIG. The displaced state in FIG. 9 is the state in which the lower displacement member 440 extends from the state shown in FIG. 7 to a first overhang position described later, and in FIG. The state displaced to the second overhang position, which is the position, is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 5 and 6, the motion unit 200 includes a box-shaped rear case 300, and an upper displacement unit 900, a lower displacement unit 400, a rotation unit 700 and a A sorting unit 500 and a ball throwing unit 600 attached to the back surface of the game board 13 are accommodated.

The rear case 300 includes a bottom wall portion 301 that is substantially rectangular in front view, and an outer wall portion 302 that is erected from the outer edges of four sides of the bottom wall portion 301 toward the front. It is formed in a box shape with one side (front side) open. A rectangular opening 301a is formed in the center of the bottom wall portion 301. Through the opening 301a, the third pattern display device 81 (see FIG. 2) arranged on the back surface of the bottom wall portion 301 is visible. It is possible.

The upper displacement unit 900 is slidably disposed on a base member 910 which is oblong in a rectangular shape when viewed from the front and which is disposed above the opening 301a of the bottom wall portion 301 of the rear case 300. It is provided with an upper displacement member 940, and is formed so as to be capable of performing an effect of sliding and rotating the upper displacement member 940 on the front side of the opening 301a of the back case 300 (that is, the third pattern display device 81). A detailed description of the upper displacement unit 900 will be given later.

The lower displacement unit 400 includes a horizontally elongated base member 410 arranged in a lower portion of the opening 301a of the bottom wall portion 301 of the rear case 300, and slidably arranged on the base member 410. The lower displacement member 440 is formed so as to be capable of performing an effect of sliding and rotating the lower displacement member 440 on the front side of the rear case opening 301a (that is, the third pattern display device 81). A detailed description of the lower displacement unit 400 will be given later.

The rotating unit 700 includes a substantially rectangular rear base 720 arranged on the right side of the lower portion of the opening 301a of the bottom wall portion 301 of the rear case 300 when viewed from the front, and a rear base 720 arranged in front of the rear base 720. A player can visually recognize an effect of rotationally displacing the rotating body 800 via a transparent plate portion formed on the lower right side of the game board 13 when viewed from the front. A detailed description of the rotation unit 700 will be given later.

The ball throwing unit 600 is attached to the back side of the game board 13, and distributes game balls thrown to the back side of the game board 13 from the third prize winning opening 82 of the game board 13 to the first opening 511 of the sorting unit 500, which will be described later. A throwing path is formed.

The sorting unit 500 includes a path forming member 510 attached to the back side of the game board 13, a base plate 520 disposed with a predetermined gap facing the path forming member 510, and the base plate 520. A distribution member 540 attached to 520 distributes the game balls flowing down between the path forming member 510 and the base plate 520 to respective ball throwing paths (second ball throwing path KR2 or third ball throwing path KR3). A game ball distributed to the distribution member 540 is thrown to the lower displacement unit 400 . A detailed description of the sorting unit 500 will be given later.

Next, a detailed configuration of the downward displacement unit 400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 11 to 35. FIG. First, a structure for displacing the lower displacement member 440 will be described with reference to FIGS. 11 to 14. FIG.

11 is a front view of the lower displacement unit 400, and FIG. 12 is a rear view of the lower displacement unit 400. FIG. 13 is an exploded perspective front view of the lower displacement unit 400, and FIG. 14 is an exploded perspective rear view of the lower displacement unit 400. FIG. 11 to B04 illustrate a state in which the lower displacement member 440 is arranged at the retracted position (the lowest position with respect to the base member 410).

As shown in FIGS. 11 to 14, the downward displacement unit 400 includes a base member 410 provided on the bottom wall portion 301 (see FIG. 6) of the rear case 300, and a transmission member provided on the base member 410. 420, a link member 430 connected to the base member 410 and displaced along with the displacement of the transmission member 420, one end slidably connected to the base member 410 and the other end connected to the link member 430. and a lower displacement member 440 that is displaced by receiving driving force from the link member 430 .

The base member 410 is formed by combining two oblong rectangular plate members in the front-back direction, and includes a front base 411 arranged on the front side and a rear base 412 arranged on the rear side. A transmission member 420 and a link member 430 are arranged between the front base 411 and the rear base 412 facing each other.

The front base 411 has two sliding grooves 411a and 411b penetrating in the front-rear direction (the depth direction of the paper surface of FIG. 11), and two cylindrical shaft support pins 411c and 411d projecting to the rear side, and a shaft support pin 411d. and a curved wall portion 411e protruding in an arc around the axis.

The sliding grooves 411a and 411b are holes through which two projections 472 and 473 protruding from the back side of the lower displacement member 440 are inserted. The sliding grooves 411a and 411b are formed to extend in the horizontal direction. Therefore, by displacing the projections 472 and 473 inserted through the sliding grooves 411a and 411b along the sliding grooves 411a and 411b, the lower displacement member 440 can be slid in the left-right direction.

The sliding grooves 411a and 411b are curved in an arc shape, and extend upward (upward in FIG. 11) from the left (left in FIG. 11) end to the right (right in FIG. 11) end of the front base 411. ). Further, the sliding grooves 411a and 411b are arranged at positions where the arc axes of the respective sliding grooves 411a and 411b are different from each other, and the gap between them in the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 11) is narrowed from the left end to the right end.

Since the distance between projections 472 and 473 of the base member 470 of the lower displacement member 440 to be described later does not change, when the lower displacement member 440 is slid along the sliding groove, the lower displacement member 440 is rotated. It can be displaced while moving. That is, by changing the distance between the two sliding grooves 411a and 411b, the lower displacement member 440 can be rotated as it slides without applying a rotational driving force to the lower displacement member 440. FIG. A detailed displacement mode of the lower displacement member 440 will be described later.

The shaft support pin 411c is a protrusion that is inserted into a shaft portion 422a of a cam member 422 of a transmission member 420, which will be described later, and is formed in a cylindrical shape with an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the shaft portion 422a. Further, the pivot pin 411 c is formed of a metal rod-like body and fitted onto the front base 411 . Therefore, when a force acts on the cam member 422 from its outer peripheral surface in the axial direction, it is possible to prevent the pivot pin 411c from breaking (damage).

The pivot pin 411d is a protrusion that is inserted into a through hole 431a formed at one end of a first link member 431, which will be described later, and is formed in a cylindrical shape with an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the through hole 431a. Further, the pivot pin 411d is formed of a metallic rod-like body and fitted onto the front base 411. As shown in FIG. Therefore, when a force acts on the first link member 431 in the direction of the through hole 431a, it is possible to prevent the pivot pin 411d from breaking (breaking).

The curved wall portion 411e protrudes from the back side of the front base 411 and is curved around the axis of the pivot pin 411d. The protruding distance of the curved wall portion 411e is set to a distance at which the protruding tip surface of the plate-like protrusion 431b of the first link member 431, which will be described later, abuts. Therefore, the first link member 431 is prevented from being displaced forward. In addition, since the curved wall portion 411e is curved around the axis of the pivot pin 411d, even when the first link member 431 is rotated around the axis of the pivot pin 411d, the first link member 431 does not move. The plate-like projection 431b can be brought into contact with the projecting tip surface of the curved wall portion 411e.

The recovery port 411f is an opening for recovering the ball emitted from the emission opening 471 by moving the ball receiving portion 467 of the lower displacement member 440, which will be described later, into the recovery port 411f. The downstream side of the recovery port 411f is connected to a ball recovery path. The recovery port 411f is a hole protruding from the right end of the front base 411, and the opening surface thereof faces the lower displacement member 440 in the retracted state and the lower displacement member 440 in the first extended state. The surface is positioned below the output opening 471 in the direction of gravity.

In addition, the exit opening 471 of the lower displacement member 440 in the retracted state is arranged above the recovery port 411f. Therefore, the ball emitted from the emission opening 471 can be received in the recovery port 411f and recovered quickly.

The rear base 412 has grooves 412a and 412b recessed from the front side (the front side of the paper surface of FIG. 12) toward the rear side, and a locking portion 412c formed near the groove 412b so as to protrude toward the front side. Formed by the Lord.

The groove portion 412a is a hole into which the tip side of the pivot pin 411c of the front base 411 is inserted. recessed in position. Therefore, the cam member 422 is held by the base member 410 so as not to fall off by combining the front base 411 and the rear base 412 after the pivot pin 411c is inserted into the shaft portion 422a. In addition, since the back base 412 can hold the tip of the pivot pin 411c, when force is applied to the cam member 422 in the axial direction from the outer peripheral surface, the pivot pin 411c will not come into contact with the front base 411. It is possible to suppress bending and breaking from the connecting portion.

The groove portion 412b is a hole into which the front end side of the pivot pin 411d of the front base 411 is inserted, and is formed in a circular shape with an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the pivot pin 411d and faces the pivot pin 411d. recessed in position. Therefore, the first link member 431 is held by the base member 410 so as not to fall off by combining the front base 411 and the rear base 412 after the pivot pin 411d is inserted into the through hole 431a. In addition, since the rear base 412 can hold the tip of the pivot pin 411d, when a force acts on the first link member 431 in the direction of the through hole 431a, the pivot pin 411d and the front base 411 are displaced. It is possible to suppress bending and breaking from the connection part of.

The locking portion 412c is a plate that locks one end of the biasing spring SP1, which will be described later, and is formed outside the biasing spring SP1. Thereby, the one end side of the biasing spring SP1 can be locked. A detailed description of the biasing spring SP1 will be given later.

The transmission member 420 includes a transmission gear 421 connected to the shaft of the drive motor KM1 attached to the front side of the front base 411, and a cam meshed with the transmission gear 421 and rotated as the transmission gear 421 is driven. The member 422 is mainly provided.

The transmission gear 421 is a gear having a meshing surface over the entire outer peripheral surface, and is fitted onto the shaft of the drive motor KM1. Therefore, when power is applied to the drive motor KM1 to rotate the shaft, the transmission gear 421 is also rotated.

The cam member 422 is formed of a plate-like body having a predetermined thickness in the front-rear direction and having a shape in which ends of two semicircles having different sizes are combined with each other when viewed from the front. A semicircular portion of the cam member 422 having a small outer shape is provided with a tooth surface 422b that meshes with the transmission gear 421 on the outer peripheral surface thereof, and a shaft portion 422a is formed through the center of the semicircular portion. A semicircular portion of the cam member 422 having a large outer shape is formed with a sliding groove 422c recessed on the rear side facing the link member 430 described later.

The shaft portion 422a is a hole through which the shaft support pin 411c is inserted as described above, and the shaft portion 422a is rotatably supported by the shaft support pin 411c so that the cam member 422 moves the shaft of the shaft support pin 411c. It is rotatably held centrally.

The cam member 422 is arranged on the base member 410 with the tooth surface 422b meshing with the transmission gear 421. Therefore, when the transmission gear 421 is rotated, the cam member 422 rotates about the axis of the shaft portion 422a. can.

The sliding groove 422c is recessed along the outer periphery of the semicircular portion of the cam member 422 having a large radius. Therefore, the distance from the shaft portion 422a increases from one end side toward the other end side. The sliding groove 422c includes a stepped portion 422c1 extending from the sliding projection 431d of the first link member 431 in the direction of the through hole 431a when the lower displacement member 440 is in a retracted state, which will be described later, and a lower displacement groove 422c. A stepped portion 422c3 extending in the direction of the through hole 431a from the sliding projection 431d when the member 440 is positioned in a second extended state, which will be described later, and the lower displacement member 440 are positioned between the retracted state and the second extended state. and a stepped portion 422c2 that extends from the sliding projection 431d toward the through hole 431a when positioned in the intermediate first projecting state.

Link member 430 is formed from two link members, a first link member 431 and a second link member 432 . Further, the link member 430 is formed by rotatably connecting the ends of the first link member 431 and the second link member 432 .

The first link member 431 is bent in a substantially V-shape when viewed from the front, and is formed in a plate shape having a predetermined thickness in the front-rear direction. The first link member 431 is a link that is displaced in accordance with the displacement of the cam member 422. The first link member 431 has a through hole 431a penetrating in the front-rear direction at one end and a columnar connecting projection 431c projecting rearward at the other end. , which mainly includes a plate-like projection 431b projecting to a position facing the curved wall portion 411e, and a cylindrical sliding projection 431d projecting to the front side of the bent portion.

The through hole 431a is a through hole into which the pivot pin 411d is inserted as described above. The first link member 431 is rotatably held with respect to the base member 410 by combining the front base 411 and the rear base 412 with the pivot pin 411d inserted into the through hole 431a.

The plate-like protrusion 431b is a protrusion that suppresses the first link member 431 from being displaced in the front-rear direction and suppresses the first link member 431 from colliding with the cam member 422 arranged in front. The cam member 422 is formed into a plate-like body projecting in a curved shape with the hole 431a as an axis, and the projecting length is set larger than the thickness of the cam member 422 in the front-rear direction. Accordingly, it is possible to suppress collision between the rear surface of the cam member 422 and the front surface of the first link member 431 .

The connecting projection 431c is a shaft portion that is connected to a second link member 432, which will be described later. A large screw or the like is fastened. Thereby, the first link member 431 and the second link member 432 are rotatably connected.

A wall portion 431f that protrudes toward the rear side is formed at the edge of the through hole 431a. The wall portion 431f is a wall surface for fitting and holding an urging spring SP1, which will be described later, on its outer peripheral surface.

The link-side engaging portion 431e is a protrusion that engages the other end side of the biasing spring SP1 fitted in the wall portion 431f, and is formed to protrude in the shape of a hook on the back side of one end side of the first link member 431. . Therefore, one end of the biasing spring SP1 is engaged with the engaging portion 412c of the rear base 412, and the other end thereof is engaged with the link side engaging portion 431e of the first link member 431. be. Therefore, the biasing force of the biasing spring SP1 can act in a direction to rotate the other end side of the first link member 431 upward with respect to the base member 410 . As a result, when the lower displacement member 440 is rotationally displaced, the biasing force of the biasing spring SP1 acts, so that the energy consumption of the drive motor KM1 can be suppressed.

431 d of sliding protrusions are formed in the position spaced apart from the through-hole 431a by substantially the same distance as the separation distance with the axial part 422a of the cam member 422 from the through-hole 431a. Further, the sliding projection 431d has its tip portion inserted inside the sliding groove 422c. That is, the sliding protrusion 431d is formed so that its outer diameter is smaller than the width dimension between the opposing sliding grooves 422c.

431 d of sliding protrusions are arrange|positioned inside the sliding groove 422c, and with the rotational displacement of the cam member 422, they slide inside the sliding groove 422c, and are displaced. That is, by displacing the cam member 422, the first link member 431 is rotationally displaced around the axis of the through hole 431a. A detailed description of the displacement of the first link member 431 will be given later.

In addition, since the sliding protrusion 431d and the plate-like protrusion 431b are formed at positions close to each other, the forward displacement of the first link member 431 is suppressed by the plate-like protrusion 431b. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the sliding protrusion 431d from pushing the cam member 422 forward. As a result, it is not necessary to deepen the recess depth of the sliding groove 422c recessed in the cam member 422, and the rigidity can be ensured without increasing the thickness of the cam member 422 in the front-rear direction.

The second link member 432 is formed in a plate shape with a predetermined thickness in the front-rear direction while being formed in a rectangular shape when viewed from the front, one end of which is long. The second link member 432 is mainly formed with a through hole 432a penetrating in the front-rear direction at one end and a through hole 432b penetrating in the front-rear direction at the other end.

The through hole 432a is a hole for connecting with the first link member 431 as described above, and the connecting protrusion 431c is inserted therein. Thereby, the second link member 432 is rotatably connected to the first link member 431 .

The through hole 432b is connected to a lower displacement member 440, which will be described later, so that the displacement of the link member 430 can be transmitted to the lower displacement member 440. As shown in FIG. The through hole 432b is a hole into which a projection 482a of the rear case 482, which will be described later, is inserted, and the inner diameter thereof is formed to be larger than the outer diameter of the projection 482a. Therefore, by inserting the protrusion 482a into the through hole 432b and fastening a screw or the like having a head larger than the inner diameter of the through hole 432b to the tip of the protrusion 482a, the lower displacement member 440 can move the second link member 432 rotatably held with respect to the Therefore, the driving of the lower displacement member 440 is transmitted through the link member 430 when the cam member 422 is rotationally displaced.

Next, displacement operation of the lower displacement member 440 will be described with reference to FIGS. 15 to 20. FIG. 15 is a front view of the lower displacement unit 400 in the retracted state, FIG. 16 is a front view of the lower displacement unit 400 in the first extended state, and FIG. 17 is a lower displacement unit in the second extended state. FIG. 4 is a front view of 400; 18 is a rear view of the lower displacement unit 400 in the retracted state, FIG. 19 is a rear view of the lower displacement unit 400 in the first extended state, and FIG. 20 is the lower displacement unit in the second extended state. 400 is a rear view. 18 to 20 show a state in which the rear base 412 is transparent.

The retracted state is a state in which the sliding projection 431d arranged inside the sliding groove 422c is arranged between the facing steps 442c1, and the lower displacement member 440 is arranged on the lower side. The second overhanging state is a state in which the sliding protrusion 431d is arranged between the stepped portions 442c3 and the distal end side of the lower displacement member 440 is arranged at the highest position. The first overhanging state is a state in which the sliding projection 431d is arranged between the stepped portions 442c2 and the lower displacement member 440 is arranged in an intermediate state between the retracted state and the second overhanging state.

As shown in FIGS. 15 and 18, the cam member 422 of the lower displacement unit 400 in the retracted state is rotated by the transmission gear 421 so that the other end side of the slide groove 422c (the side of the stepped portion 422c3) moves toward the shaft portion 422a. It is positioned on the right side in rear view (right side in FIG. 18). In this case, the sliding projection 431d of the first link member 431 is guided along the inner wall of the sliding groove 422c and positioned at the stepped portion 422c1. Therefore, the first link member 431 is positioned such that the other end side (connecting protrusion 431c side) is located on the right side of the through hole 431a on the one end side (the right side in FIG. 18) when rotated about the through hole 431a. end side is positioned at the lower end of the rotatable range).

Since the second link member 432 is connected to the first link member 431, one end side (through hole 432a side) connected to the first link member 431 is positioned on the right side in rear view (the right side in FIG. 18). As a result, in the lower displacement member 440 connected to the second link member 432, the projections 472 and 473 connected to the front base 411 are positioned on the right side of the slide grooves 411a and 411b in rear view (the right side in FIG. 18). state. As described above, the distance between the sliding grooves 411a and 411b facing each other in the vertical direction is larger on the right side than on the left side in rear view. It is placed in a state where That is, it is arranged in front of the front base 411 .

The displacement from the retracted state shown in FIGS. 15 and 18 to the first extended state shown in FIGS. 14 and 19 is performed by displacing the cam member 422 .

In the first extended state, the transmission gear 421 is rotated by the driving force of the drive motor KM1, and the cam member 422 is rotated approximately 90 degrees from the retracted state. As a result, the other end of the cam member 422 (the side of the stepped portion 422c3) is positioned above the shaft portion 422a. Due to this rotational displacement, the sliding projection 431d of the first link member 431 guided by the inner wall of the sliding groove 422c is displaced along with the displacement of the sliding groove 422c. In addition, in the first projecting state, the sliding projection 431d is guided between the opposing inner walls of the stepped portion 422c2 of the sliding groove 422c.

Therefore, the first link member 431 is rotated approximately 30 degrees around the through hole 431a by the displacement of the sliding projection 431d, and the other end side (connecting projection 431c side) moves from the retracted position to the upper left position in rear view (FIG. 19). upper left).

Due to the rotational displacement of the first link member 431, the second link member 432 connected to the first link member 431 is displaced, and the lower displacement member 440 connected to the second link member 432 is displaced. In this case, the projections 472 and 473 of the lower displacement member 440 are slidably connected to the sliding grooves 411a and 411b of the front base 411, so that the lower displacement member 440 is displaced along the shape of the sliding grooves 411a and 411b. As described above, the distance between the sliding grooves 411a and 411b facing each other in the vertical direction is narrowed from the right side to the left side in the rear view, so that the lower displacement member 440 slides to the right side in the front view (the right side in FIG. 16). While being displaced, the tip side is rotationally displaced upward.

In addition, in the first overhanging state, the recovery port 411f is positioned on the lower side in the direction of gravity on the tip side. That is, when the lower displacement member 440 is shifted from the retracted state to the first protruding state, the distal end side of the lower displacement member 440 protrudes to the right side of the base member 410 in front view by rotating while slidingly displacing it. can be displaced without As a result, it is possible to easily form a displacement region that is different from the variable regions of other displacement roles. You can suppress collisions with other displaceable objects.

In addition, since the recovery port 411f is positioned below one end of the lower displacement member 440 (the side opposite to the protrusions 472 and 473 connected to the front base 411), the ball receiving portion 467 of the lower displacement member 440, which will be described later, When the shooting operation is performed and the ball falls downward as it is from the emission opening 471, the ball can be thrown to the recovery port 411f.

The displacement from the first extended state shown in FIGS. 16 and 19 to the second extended state shown in FIGS. 17 and 20 is performed by further displacing the cam member 422 from the first extended state.

In the second extended state, the transmission gear 421 is rotated by the driving force of the drive motor KM1 from the first extended state, and the cam member 422 is rotated approximately 90 degrees from the position in the first extended state. Therefore, the other end side of the cam member 422 (stepped portion 422c3 side) is positioned above the shaft portion 422a. The moving projection 431d is displaced along with the displacement of the sliding groove 422c, and is guided between the facing inner walls of the stepped portion 422c1 of the sliding groove 422c in the second overhanging state.

Therefore, the first link member 431 is rotated approximately 30 degrees around the through hole 431a by the displacement of the sliding projection 431d, and the other end side (connecting projection 431c side) of the first link member 431 is shifted from the position of the first projecting state to approximately It is displaced to the upper left (upper left in FIG. 20).

Due to the rotational displacement of the first link member 431, the second link member 432 connected to the first link member 431 is displaced, and the lower displacement member 440 connected to the second link member 432 is displaced. In this case, the projections 472 and 473 of the lower displacement member 440 are slidably connected to the sliding grooves 411a and 411b of the front base 411, so that the lower displacement member 440 is displaced along the shape of the sliding grooves 411a and 411b. As described above, the distance between the sliding grooves 411a and 411b facing each other in the vertical direction is narrowed from the right side to the left side in the rear view, so that the lower displacement member 440 slides to the right side in the front view (the right side in FIG. 17). While being displaced, the tip side is rotationally displaced upward.

In addition, in the same manner as in the first protruding state, in the second protruding state, the recovery port 411f is positioned on the lower side in the direction of gravity on the tip side. That is, when the lower displacement member 440 is shifted from the retracted state to the second protruding state, the distal end side of the lower displacement member 440 protrudes to the right side of the base member 410 in the front view by rotating while slidingly displacing it. can be displaced without As a result, it is possible to easily form a displacement region that is different from the variable regions of other displacement roles, and to suppress collisions with other displacement roles.

Next, referring to FIG. 21, the positional relationship between the first link member 431 and the cam member 422 in each state will be described. FIG. 21(a) is a rear view of the first link member 431 and the cam member 422 in the retracted state, FIG. 21(b) in the first extended state, and FIG. 21(c) in the second extended state. be. 21(a) to 21(c), the portion of the cam member 422 that overlaps the first link member 431 is indicated by a dashed line.

As shown in FIG. 21(a), in the retracted state, the sliding protrusion 431d of the first link member 431 is arranged between the opposing inner walls of the stepped portion 422c1 of the sliding groove 422c. Further, as described above, the sliding projection 431d is formed at a position spaced apart from the through hole 431a by approximately the same distance as the distance between the shaft portion 422a of the cam member 422 and the through hole 431a. Therefore, when a force rotating about the axis of the through hole 431a acts on the first link member 431 positioned in the retracted state, the force can be applied to the shaft portion 422a of the cam member 422 from the sliding projection 431d. can. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the rotation of the cam member 422 by the torque of the first link member 431 . As a result, in the retracted state, displacement of the lower displacement member 440 connected to the first link member 431 via the second link member 432 can be suppressed.

As shown in FIG. 21(b), in the first overhanging state, the sliding projection 431d of the first link member 431 and the inner wall of the stepped portion 422c2 of the sliding groove 422c are arranged between the opposing inner walls. Therefore, as in the retracted state, when a force rotating about the through hole 431a acts on the first link member 431 positioned in the first extended state, the force is transferred from the sliding projection 431d to the cam member 422. It can act on the shaft portion 422a. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the rotation of the cam member 422 by the torque of the first link member 431 . As a result, in the first overhanging state, the displacement of the lower displacement member 440 connected to the first link member 431 via the second link member 432 can be suppressed.

Here, since the first projecting position is the middle position of the displacement of the lower displacement member 440, in order to maintain the stopped state, it is necessary to keep the drive motor KM1 in the stopped state. Therefore, if the lower displacement member 440 is stopped at the first projecting position (intermediate position of displacement), there is a problem that energy consumption increases.

In contrast, in the present embodiment, in the first overhanging state, the sliding projection 431d of the first link member 431 is arranged between the opposing inner walls of the stepped portion 422c2 of the sliding groove 422c. In addition, displacement of the lower displacement member 440 can be suppressed. Therefore, even if the electric power of the drive motor KM1 is stopped when the lower displacement member 440 is stopped at a position in the middle of displacement, the displacement of the lower displacement member 440 can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to suppress an increase in energy consumption of the drive motor KM1 when the lower displacement member 440 is stopped in the middle of displacement.

As shown in FIG. 21(c), in the second protruding state, the sliding protrusion 431d of the first link member 431 and the inner wall of the stepped portion 422c2 of the sliding groove 422c are arranged between the opposing inner walls. Therefore, similarly to the retracted state and the first extended state, when a force rotating about the axis of the through hole 431a acts on the first link member 431 positioned in the second extended state, the force is applied to the sliding projection. 431d can act on the shaft portion 422a of the cam member 422 . Therefore, it is possible to suppress the rotation of the cam member 422 by the torque of the first link member 431 . Therefore, it is possible to suppress the rotation of the cam member 422 by the torque of the first link member 431 . As a result, in the second projecting state, it is possible to suppress displacement of the lower displacement member 440 that is connected to the first link member 431 via the second link member 432 .

Further, since the stepped portions 422c1, 422c2, and 422c3 extend in the direction connecting the sliding protrusion 431d and the through hole 431a, the sliding groove 422c extends in the direction in which the sliding protrusion 431d of the first link member 431 is displaced. width can be reduced. Therefore, the gap between the sliding groove 422c and the sliding protrusion 431d, which allows the first link member 431 to rotate about the axis of the through hole 431a, is reduced at the retracted position, the first projecting position, and the second projecting position. can. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the gap in which the first link member 431 in each state can be rotationally displaced about the axis of the through hole 431a. As a result, the swing width of the lower displacement member 440 in each state due to vibration or inertial force when the displacement is stopped can be reduced, making it easier for the player to visually recognize the stopped state.

Therefore, the transmission member 420 and the link member 430 (driving mechanism) for driving the lower displacement member 440 are arranged so that the lower displacement member 440 is displaced in the reflection direction when the game ball is emitted from the ball receiving portion 467. Since it can be regulated, it is possible to suppress the displacement of the lower displacement member 440 with respect to the base member 410 due to the reaction. As a result, rattling of the lower displacement member 440 can be suppressed.

Next, referring to FIG. 22, the relationship between the link member 430 and the cam member 422 in the front-rear direction will be described. 22(a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the lower displacement unit 400 taken along line XXIIa-XXIIa of FIG. 18, and FIG. 22(b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the lower displacement unit 400 taken along line XXIIb-XXIIb of FIG. be. 19 and 20, the rear base 412 is shown transparently, but FIGS. 22(a) and 22(b) show sectional views of the lower displacement unit 400 in a non-transparent state. .

As shown in FIG. 22( a ), the link member 430 of the lower displacement unit 400 in the retracted state is arranged between the rear base 412 and the cam member 422 . Therefore, it is possible to prevent the lower displacement member 440 from swinging in the front-rear direction. That is, the other end side of the first link member 431 is connected to the lower displacement member 440 configured by combining a plurality of fixtures via the second link member 432, so that the load of the lower displacement member 440 moves forward and backward. Since the cam member 422 is arranged forward where there is a risk of bending, the forward bending of the first link member 431 can be suppressed. As a result, the forward movement of the first link member 431 can be suppressed, so that the lower displacement member 440 can be suppressed from swinging in the front-rear direction.

As shown in FIG. 22(b), the link member 430 of the lower displacement unit 400 in the first extended state is arranged between the rear base 412 and the cam member 422 as in the retracted state. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the lower displacement member 440 from swinging in the front-rear direction.

In addition, in the retracted state and the first extended state, the cam member 422 is arranged on the front side of the connecting portion between the first link member 431 and the second link member 432 of the link member 430 . Therefore, if the link member 430 is formed of two members, it is necessary to make the connecting portion rotatable. Since the member 422 is arranged, it is possible to suppress bending of the connecting portion of the link member 430 . As a result, it is possible to prevent the lower displacement member 440 from swinging in the front-rear direction.

Next, the configuration of the lower displacement member 440 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 23 to 26. FIG. 23(a) is a front view of the lower displacement member 440, and FIG. 23(b) is a rear view of the lower displacement member 440. FIG. 24 is an exploded perspective front view of the lower displacement member 440, and FIG. 25 is an exploded perspective rear view of the lower displacement member 440. FIG. 26(a) and (b) are front views of the lower displacement member 440. FIG.

26(a) shows a state in which the decorative member 450 of the lower displacement member 440 is seen transparently, and in FIG. 26(b), the decorative member 450 of the lower displacement member 440 and the front case 481 are seen transparently. is shown.

As shown in FIGS. 23 to 26, the lower displacement member 440 includes a base member 470 connected to the front base 411, a case member 480 covering the front and rear of the base member 470, and the case member 480 and the base member 470. It mainly includes a transmission mechanism 460 displaceably disposed therebetween and a decorative member 450 formed to cover the front and rear of the case member 480 .

The base member 470 is a plate member that is rectangular and oblong when viewed from the front. , a protruding wall 477 projecting from the upper end of the central portion in the left-right direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 23) to the front side in an upside-down U-shape, and the upper end of the protruding wall 477 on the upper end of the base member 470 is engraved on one end side. A rack gear 476 provided, shafts 474 and 475 protruding to the front side, a rectangular wiring locking portion 478 attached to the rear surface of one end side of the base member 470, and a vertical central portion of the base member 470. It is mainly formed with an opening 479 extending from one end side to the other end side.

The protrusions 472 and 473 are connecting portions that are inserted into the sliding grooves 411a and 411b of the front base 411 and connect the lower displacement member 440 and the front base 411 as described above. Therefore, the sliding grooves 411a and 411b are formed in a cylindrical shape with an outer diameter smaller than the dimension between the facing inner walls of the sliding grooves 411a and 411b.

The erected wall 471a is a wall portion for forming a gap between the facing front case 481 and the base member 470 when the front case 481, which will be described later, is attached to the base member 470. It is set to a standing dimension larger than

The shaft portions 474 and 475 are protrusions that are inserted into the shafts of the transmission gears 462 and 463 of the transmission mechanism 460 to be described later and hold the transmission gears 462 and 463 rotatably. It is formed in a cylindrical shape with a small outer diameter.

The rack gear 476 is engraved with a tooth surface that meshes with a transmission gear 465, which will be described later. As a result, the movable rack 464 , which will be described later, is slidably displaced with respect to the base member 470 , thereby rotating the transmission gear 465 .

The protruding wall 477 allows the ball to fall to the outside of the lower displacement member 440 when the ball thrown from the ball throwing unit 600, which will be described later, is received in front of the base member 470 through the opening 451a of the decorative member 450. is a wall surface for suppressing , and the diameter between the opposing wall portions formed in a substantially U shape is formed larger than the diameter of the sphere.

The wiring locking portion 478 is a member for locking a flexible wiring (not shown) to the control board arranged on the back side of the base member 470 , and one end of the flexible wiring between the base member 470 and the base member 470 . It is attached to the back side of the base member 470 in a state in which the . As a result, even if the lower displacement member 440 is displaceably arranged with respect to the base member 410, it is possible to suppress entanglement of the flexible wiring.

In addition, the wire locking portion 478 has a projection 478a protruding in a columnar shape on the back side. The projecting distance of the projection 478 a is set to a distance that projects further to the rear side than the link member 430 connected to the rear side, and is set to a distance that allows contact with the front side surface of the rear base 412 . As a result, the lower displacement member 440 can be prevented from swinging rearward, and the link member 430 can be prevented from colliding with the rear base 412 .

The opening 469 is an opening that defines the sliding displacement direction of the movable rack 464 disposed on the front side, and a guide plate 464d of the movable rack 464, which will be described later, is inserted therein.

The transmission mechanism 460 is a member arranged in front of the base member 470, and meshes with the transmission gears 4621, 462, and 463, the drive motor KM2 whose shaft portion is connected to the transmission gear 461, and the transmission gear 463. A movable rack 464 having a tooth surface and slidably disposed in front of the base member 470, and a transmission gear rotatably disposed on the movable rack 464 and engaged with the rack gear 476. 465, a rack 466 having a tooth surface that meshes with the transmission gear 465 and slidably disposed in front of the movable rack 464, and a ball rotatably disposed on one end side of the rack 466. It is mainly formed with a receiving portion 467 .

The transmission gear 461 is a gear in which the shaft portion of the drive motor KM2 is fitted in the shaft hole. is placed in

As described above, the transmission gears 462 and 463 are rotatably held by the base member by inserting the shaft portions 474 and 475 of the base member 470 into the shaft holes. The transmission gears 461 to 463 are meshed gear trains, and when the transmission gear 461 is rotated by the drive motor KM2, the terminal transmission gear 463 is rotated.

The movable rack 464 is formed in the shape of a horizontally long rectangular plate when viewed from the front. A contact plate 464c, a guide plate 464d protruding from one end to the other end at a substantially central position in the vertical direction, a rack guide portion 464e protruding to the front side opposite to the guide plate 464d, and protruding to the other lower end. It is mainly formed with a collision portion 464f.

The rack gear 464 a is a tooth surface that meshes with the transmission gear 463 . Therefore, by disposing the rack gear 464a and the transmission gear 463 on the base member 470 in a meshed state, the movable rack 464 can be displaced by driving the drive motor KM2.

The shaft portion 464 b is a shaft portion on which the transmission gear 465 is rotatably held, and is formed in a cylindrical shape with an outer diameter smaller than the shaft hole of the transmission gear 465 .

The contact plate 464c is a contact portion that contacts a sorting member 540 of the sorting unit 500, which will be described later, to displace the sorting member 540. As shown in FIG. That is, the distributing member 540 can be displaced by the displacement of the movable rack 464 . The manner in which the contact plate 464c and the distribution member 540 contact each other will be described later.

As described above, the guide plate 464d is a plate-like body inserted inside the opening 479 of the base member 470, and can define the displacement direction of the movable rack 464 displaced by driving the drive motor KM2. That is, the movable rack 464 that is displaced by driving the drive motor KM2 can be displaced along the extending direction of the opening 479 . In this embodiment, since the opening 479 extends in the left-right direction, the movable rack 464 can be slid in the left-right direction with respect to the base member 470 .

The rack guide portion 464e is a protruding wall for restricting the displacement direction of the rack 466, which will be described later, and protrudes from one end to the other end in the left-right direction.

The collision part 464f is a wall part that abuts on a projection 492b of the displacement member 492 described later to displace the displacement member 492, and is formed so as to protrude from the lower end of the movable rack 464. As shown in FIG. Also, the collision portion 464f is formed in a state where the other end side is inclined. As a result, the projection 492b of the displacement member 492 can be slid and displaced along the inclined surface.

The rack 466 is formed of a horizontally long rod-shaped body that is rectangular when viewed from the front, and includes a rack gear 466a engraved on the upper end surface, a shaft portion 466b projecting from the other end side to the rear in a columnar shape, and a shaft 466b projecting to the front. and a recessed portion 466d recessed from one end to the other end on the back side.

The rack gear 466 a meshes with a transmission gear 465 attached to the movable rack 464 . As a result, when the rack 466 is arranged in front of the movable rack 464, the movable rack 464 is slid, and the transmission gear 465 is rotated along with the sliding displacement, and the driving force is transmitted to the rack 466. . Therefore, rack 466 can be displaced relative to movable rack 464 .

The shaft portion 466b is a protrusion that is inserted into a shaft hole 467b of a ball receiving portion 467, which will be described later, and is formed in a cylindrical shape with an outer diameter larger than the inner diameter of the shaft hole 467b. Thereby, the ball receiving portion 467 can be rotatably held.

The sliding plate 466c is a protrusion inserted into an opening 481a of a front case 481, which will be described later, and is formed of a plate-like body having a predetermined thickness. As a result, when the driving force is transmitted from the transmission gear 465 to the rack 466 and the rack 466 is displaced with respect to the movable rack 464, the displacement direction of the rack 466 can be defined in the direction in which the opening 481a extends. can.

When the rack 466 is arranged in front of the movable rack 464, the concave portion 466d is in a state in which the rack guide portion 464e is arranged inside. As a result, when the driving force is transmitted from the transmission gear 465 to the rack 466 and the rack 466 is displaced with respect to the movable rack 464, the displacement direction of the rack 466 can be defined in the extension direction of the rack guide portion 464e. can.

Here, in order to regulate the displacement direction of the rack 466, if the concave portion 466d and the rack guide portion 464e are formed, the displacement direction of the rack 466 can be defined in the extension direction of the rack guide portion 464e. However, since the lower displacement member 440 is slidably displaced in the left-right direction and rotationally displaced, depending on the displaced state of the lower displaceable member 440, the state of meshing between the transmission gear 465 and the rack 466 changes due to its own weight. There was a possibility that the driving force would not be transmitted well from the gear 465 to the rack 466 .

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, there are two portions that define the displacement direction of the rack 466, namely, the slide plate 466c and the opening 481a, and the concave portion 466d and the rack guide portion 464e. change in the displacement state of the transmission gear 465 and the rack 466 can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the transmission of drive from the transmission gear 465 to the rack 466 from being obstructed.

In addition, the sliding plate 466c is formed so as to protrude from two locations in the left-right direction of the rack 466 (the left-right direction in FIG. At the rack's displacement end position (the position where the rack 466 projects most with respect to the movable rack 464), it is arranged below the transmission gear 465 (lower side in FIG. 23).

Here, at the displacement end position, as will be described later, the ball receiving portion 467 disposed on the shaft portion 466b of the rack 466 performs a shooting operation (rotational displacement), so that the ball receiving portion 467 disposed on one end side of the rack 466 The other end side of the rack tends to be displaced by the inertial force due to the displacement of the portion 467 . Therefore, a load is likely to be applied to the meshing surfaces of the transmission gear 465 and the rack 466, and the transmission gear 465 and the rack 466 may be damaged.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the slide plate 466c on the other end side (opposite side of the shaft portion 466b) is positioned at the displacement end position of the rack (the position where the rack 466 protrudes most with respect to the movable rack 464). 23, the rack 466 is located below the transmission gear 465 (lower side in FIG. 23), so that when the ball receiving portion 467 performs a shooting operation (rotational operation), the transmission gear 465 and the rack 466 mesh with each other. displacement can be suppressed. As a result, damage to the transmission gear 465 and the rack 466 can be suppressed.

The ball receiving portion 467 is a portion that holds a game ball, is formed in a substantially U shape in a front view, and is formed so that the ball can be received in the inner portion of the U shape. That is, the inner side of the U-shape of the ball receiving portion 467 is formed slightly larger than the outer shape of the ball. As a result, one ball can be inserted into the inner portion of the ball receiving portion 467 . Further, the ball receiving portion 467 mainly includes a shaft hole 467b penetrating in the front-rear direction at the lower end of the U shape, and a leg portion 467a projecting downward from the lower outer peripheral surface.

The shaft hole 467b is a shaft hole for rotatably holding the ball receiving portion 467 in the rack 466, as described above, and is formed with an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the shaft portion 466b of the rack 466. Therefore, the ball receiving portion 467 can be rotatably held by inserting the shaft portion 466b of the rack 466 into the shaft hole 467b. After the shaft portion 466b is inserted into the shaft hole 467b, the biasing spring SP2 is arranged around the shaft portion 466b, and a screw or the like having a head larger than the inner diameter of the shaft hole 467b is fastened to the shaft portion 466b. be. As a result, the ball receiving portion 467 is arranged on the rack 466 while being biased clockwise in a front view. A detailed description of the form of the ball receiving portion 467 will be given later.

The leg portion 467a is a protrusion that biases the ball receiving portion 467 to be rotated by the biasing spring SP2. It is set at a position where it contacts the bottom wall portion 481 b of the case 481 . As a result, rotation of the ball receiving portion 467 can be restricted.

The case member 480 is a member that covers the front and rear of the base member 470, and mainly includes a front case 481 arranged on the front side of the base member 470 and a rear case 482 arranged on the rear side.

The front case 481 is formed in the shape of a horizontally long rectangular plate when viewed from the front. It is mainly formed with a shaft hole 481c penetrating in the front-rear direction.

The opening 481a is formed to penetrate in the front-rear direction, and as described above, when the front case 481 is arranged on the base member 470, the slide plate 466c of the rack is inserted therein.

The bottom wall portion 481b protrudes from the lower end portion of the front case 481 toward the back side and extends in the left-right direction. Further, when the front case 481 is arranged on the base member 470, the bottom wall portion 481b is in a state in which the leg portion 467a of the ball receiving portion 467 is in contact with the upper surface thereof.

The rear case 482 is a plate member for arranging the control board 491 on the rear side of the base member 470 , and has a horizontally elongated rectangular shape that is smaller than the base member 470 when viewed from the front. In addition, the rear case 482 has a projection 482a projecting to the rear side.

As described above, the protrusion 482a is a connecting portion that is connected to the through hole 432b of the second link member 432, and is formed in a cylindrical shape with an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the through hole 432b. Therefore, after inserting the projection 482a into the through hole 432b, by fastening a screw or the like with a larger head than the inner diameter of the through hole 432b to the tip of the projection 482a, the rear case 482 and the second link member 432 can be rotated. can be connected in good condition.

The decorative member 450 is formed in an external shape that imitates a pattern or character, and the pattern or character is drawn on the surface. The decorative member 450 mainly includes a front-side decorative portion 451 arranged on the front side of the front case 481 and a rear-side decorative portion 452 arranged on the rear side of the rear case 482 . In this embodiment, a shark pattern (character) is drawn on the decorative member 450 .

The front-side decorative portion 451 is formed to have an outer diameter larger than the outer shape of the front case 481 when viewed from the front, and is attached to the front case 481 . As a result, the members (case member 480, base member 470, etc.) arranged on the back side of the front-side decorative portion can be made invisible to the player.

The back-side decorative portion 452 is arranged behind the upper end of the front-side decorative portion 451 . As a result, the members arranged on the back side of the front-side decorative portion 451 from above the back-side decorative portion 452 can be made invisible to the player.

A displacement member 492 is arranged on the same plane as the front-side decorative portion 451 in the front-rear direction. The displacement member 492 mainly includes a shaft portion 492a projecting to the rear side and a projection 492b.

The shaft portion 492 a is formed in a cylindrical shape with an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the shaft hole 481 c of the front case 481 . Therefore, by inserting the shaft portion 492a into the shaft hole 481c, the displacement member 492 can be rotatably connected to the front case. A biasing spring SP3 is arranged on the tip side of the shaft portion 492a inserted into the shaft hole 481c. As a result, the displacement member 492 can be arranged in a biased state. A detailed description of the displacement of the displacement member 492 will be given later.

The shaft portion 492a collides with the collision portion 464f of the movable rack 464 described above, thereby transmitting a driving force to the displacement member 492 to rotate about the axis of the shaft portion 492a. That is, the movable rack 464 can rotationally displace the displacement member 492 as it is displaced.

Therefore, the lower displacement member 440 includes a displacement member 492 (displacement member) displaceably arranged on the lower displacement member 440 (base member), and the ball receiving portion 467 (displacement member) can hold a game ball. In addition, since the displacement member 492 is formed to be capable of being ejected and is displaceable when the game ball is ejected from the ball receiving portion 467, it is possible to suppress the lower displacement member 440 from rattling.

That is, when a game ball is shot from the ball receiving portion 467, the position of the center of gravity of the lower displacement member 440 is changed by the weight of the game ball. In the case of adopting a configuration in which the displacement member 492 is displaced in the direction to move downward, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of rattling of the lower displacement member 440 due to the change in the position of the center of gravity. Also, when a game ball is shot from the ball receiving portion 467, the lower displacement member 440 receives a reaction due to the shooting of the game ball. When a displacing configuration is adopted, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of rattling of the lower displacement member 440 due to the reaction.

Further, the displacing member 492 is displaced by displacing the ball receiving portion 467 and causing the collision portion 464f to collide with the shaft portion 492a. . In other words, the drive motor KM2 for displacing the ball receiving portion 467 can be used also as a drive means for displacing the displacement member 492 . Therefore, the weight of the lower displacement member 440 can be reduced by that amount, making it easier to suppress rattling.

Further, since the displacement member 492 can be displaced in mechanical synchronization with the displacement of the ball receiving portion 467, for example, the position of the ball receiving portion 467 is detected by a sensor device, and the displacement member 492 is moved according to the detection result. can be made unnecessary, and the product cost can be reduced accordingly, and the reliability of the displacement operation of the displacement member 492 with respect to the ball receiving portion 467 can be ensured.

Next, the transition of transmission mechanism 460 will be described with reference to FIGS. 27 to 30. FIG. 27 is a front view of the lower displacement member 440 in the first position, FIG. 28 is a front view of the lower displacement member 440 in the second position, and FIG. 29 is a front view of the lower displacement member 440 in the third position. It is a diagram. 30(a) to (c) are partially enlarged views of the lower displacement member 440. FIG.

Note that the first position is a position where the ball receiving portion 467 is arranged at a substantially central position in the left-right direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 27) with respect to the base member 470 . The second position is a position where the ball receiving portion 467 is arranged on the lower side of the projecting wall 477 in the direction of gravity (lower side in FIG. 28). The third position is a position where the ball receiving portion 467 is arranged at the right end of the base member 470 in the left-right direction.

27 to 30, the decorative member 450 of the lower displacement member 440 and the front case 481 are seen transparently, and the outer shape of the bottom wall portion 481b of the front case 481 is illustrated by chain lines. Further, FIGS. 30(a) and 30(b) sequentially illustrate transition states immediately before being displaced to the third position, and FIG. 30(c) illustrates the lower displacement member 440 at the third position.

As shown in FIG. 27 , the lower displacement member 440 at the first position is in a state where the movable rack 464 is positioned at the left end in the left-right direction with respect to the base member 470 . At the first position, the rack 466 is arranged in front of the movable rack 464, and the rack 466 and the movable rack 464 overlap in the front-rear direction. That is, like the movable rack 464 , the rack 466 is positioned at the left end in the left-right direction with respect to the base member 470 . Therefore, the ball receiving portion 467 connected to the rack 466 is arranged at the substantially central position in the left-right direction with respect to the base member 470 .

At the first position, as described above, the movable rack 464 and the rack 466 are gathered at the left end of the base member 470 in the left-right direction. Here, since the lower displacement member 440 is slidably displaced and rotationally displaced (displaced from the retracted state to the first and second overhanging states), the position of the center of gravity of the lower displaceable member 440 is arranged near the axis of rotation. It is desirable to be in a state where

According to this embodiment, the transmission mechanism 460 for displacing the ball receiving portion 467 is in a state in which the movable rack 464 and the rack 466 are superimposed on each other (two-stage rack). It can be brought close to the grooves 411a and 411b (rotating shaft side of the lower displacement member 440).

Therefore, when the lower displacement member 440 is displaced from the retracted position to the first and second extended positions as described above, the lower displacement member 440 is set to the first position. It is possible to reduce the driving force when rotationally displacing the . Therefore, the energy consumption of the drive motor KM1 that displaces the lower displacement member 440 can be suppressed.

The displacement from the first position shown in FIG. 27 to the second position shown in FIG. 28 is performed by driving the drive motor KM2.

When the drive motor KM2 is driven from the first position, the transmission gear 461 connected to the shaft of the drive motor KM2 is rotated. Thereby, the transmission gear 462 and the transmission gear 463 are rotated. When the transmission gear 463 is rotated, a driving force is transmitted to the movable rack 464 from the rack gear 464 a meshing with the transmission gear 463 , and the movable rack 464 is slid rightward with respect to the base member 470 .

When the movable rack 464 is slid and displaced, the transmission gear 465 arranged on the movable rack 464 is rotated by the rack gear 476 of the base member 470 along with the sliding displacement. As a result, the driving force is transmitted to the rack 466 by the rack gear 466 a meshing with the transmission gear 465 . As a result, the rack 466 is slid rightward in the horizontal direction with respect to the movable rack 464, and the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced to the second position.

The displacement from the second position shown in FIG. 28 to the third position shown in FIG. 29 is performed by driving the drive motor KM2 in the same manner as the displacement from the first position to the second position. Since the transmission of drive from the drive motor KM2 to the rack 466 is the same as the displacement from the first position to the second position, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 29 and 30, when the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced to the third position, the leg portion 467a of the ball receiving portion 467 is released from contact with the bottom wall portion 481b of the front case 481. , and is rotationally displaced about the axis of the shaft hole 467b by the biasing force of the biasing spring SP2 disposed on the shaft portion 466b.

More specifically, in the first and second positions (the state in which the ball receiving portion 467 is arranged on the left side of the ball receiving portion 467 in the third position in a front view), the tip of the leg portion 467a of the ball receiving portion 467 It is in contact with the upper surface of the bottom wall portion 481b of the case 481, and is restricted from rotating clockwise in the front view about the shaft hole 467b by the biasing force of the biasing spring SP2.

On the other hand, when the tip portion of the leg portion 467a of the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced to the third position, it is arranged on the right side of the end portion of the bottom wall portion 481b in a front view, and the bottom wall portion 481b and the base member 470 stand upright. It is arranged inside the concave portion 481b1 formed between the facing walls 471a. Therefore, the ball receiving portion 467 is rotated about the axis of the shaft hole 467b by the biasing force of the biasing spring SP2. When the ball receiving portion 467 is rotated at the third position, the tip of the leg portion 467a comes into contact with the end surface of the bottom wall portion 481b, thereby restricting the rotation of the ball receiving portion 467 around the shaft hole 467b. As a result, the ball receiving portion 467 is stopped at a position rotated approximately 40 degrees around the shaft hole 467b. In addition, below, the rotational displacement of the ball receiving portion 467 at the third position will be referred to as a shooting operation.

Further, a concave portion 481b1 is provided in a track area when the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced from the first position to the third position direction (first direction). In addition, the leg portion 467a is engaged with the recess 481b1, and the leg portion 467a is engaged with the recess 481b1 so that the attitude can be changed. Structure can be simplified.

Further, when the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced from the second position to the third position, the collision portion 464f is slid rightward in front view due to the displacement of the movable rack 464 and collides with the protrusion 492b of the displacement member 492. As a result, the displacement member 492 is rotationally displaced about the axis of the shaft portion 492a.

That is, when the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced to the third position, the ball receiving portion 467 is rotationally displaced and the displacement member 492 is rotationally displaced. Therefore, the ball receiving portion 467 performs a shooting operation, and the ball is discharged from the inside of the ball receiving portion 467, and the weight of the lower displacement member 440 is reduced. Inertial forces acting in the opposite directions can be applied. As a result, swinging of the lower displacement member 440 when a ball is ejected from the inside of the lower displacement member 440 can be suppressed.

Next, referring to FIG. 31, the operation of receiving the ball into the ball receiving portion 467 will be described. 31(a) to (c) are front views of the lower displacement member 440. FIG. 31(a) to (c), the transition states of receiving operation for receiving a ball into the ball receiving portion 467 are illustrated in order.

31A to 31C, the decorative member 450 of the lower displacement member 440 and the front case 481 are seen transparently, and the outer shape of the bottom wall portion 481b of the front case 481 is illustrated by chain lines.

Further, in FIGS. 31A to 31C, the horizontal direction in which the lower displacement member 440 is in the retracted state is indicated by a two-dot chain line with a symbol of a virtual line H1, and the lower displacement member 440 is in the first tension position. The horizontal direction in the out state is indicated by a phantom line H2. Also, the angle by which the lower displacement member 440 is rotated from the position in the retracted state to the position in the first protruding state is illustrated with the symbol θ. Note that the virtual line H1, the virtual line H2, and the angle θ are also illustrated in the drawings after FIG. 31 .

As shown in FIG. 31(a), in the lower displacement unit 400 in the retracted state (the longitudinal direction of the lower displacement member 440 is parallel to the imaginary line H1), the ball receiving portion 467 of the lower displacement member 440 is moved to the first position. , a game ball T1 is thrown from a sorting unit 500 (to be described later) to an opening 451a formed in the front-side decorative portion 451 of the lower displacement member 440. As shown in FIG. The game ball T1 thrown to the opening 451a is thrown to the inside of the projecting wall 477 and is thrown to the inside of the lower displacement member 440. - 特許庁

As shown in FIG. 31(b), when the game ball T1 is thrown to the opening 451a, the lower displacement member 440 is displaced to the second position. Therefore, as described above, in the second position, the ball receiving portion 467 is arranged below the projecting wall 477, so that the game ball T1 thrown to the inside of the projecting wall 477 is moved to the inside of the ball receiving portion 467. I can throw. By receiving the game ball T1 in the ball receiving portion 467, the game ball T1 can be displaced with the operation of the ball receiving portion 467.

As shown in FIG. 31(c), when the game ball T1 is thrown to the ball receiving portion, the lower displacement member 440 is displaced to the first position. As a result, the game ball T1 is arranged in the ball receiving portion 467, and the ball receiving portion 467 is arranged at the first position.

Here, a game machine is known that includes a base member, a base member displaceably arranged on one side of the base member, and a displacement member displaceably arranged on the base member. According to this gaming machine, in addition to an effect in which the base member is displaced between a projecting position in which the base member is projected into the game area and is visible to the player, and a retracted position in which the base member is retreated from the game area, It is possible to perform an effect of displacing the displacement member in the state of being arranged at the overhanging position.

However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, one side of the base member is displaceably disposed on the base member, so that when the displacement member is displaced, the base member rattles with respect to the base member with the one side as the dead point. There was a problem that sticking was likely to occur. In particular, when the displacement member is displaced from a stopped state, the change in acceleration is maximized, so the base member is likely to rattle due to the influence of inertial force.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the ball receiving portion 467 starts to be displaced from the second position and from the first position closer to one side of the lower displacement member 440 (base member) than the first position. At least the lower displacement member 440 is arranged at a predetermined position with respect to the base member 410 (for example, the lower displacement member 440 protrudes into the game area and is visible to the player). In the first overhanging state, the displacement starts from the first position, so rattling of the lower displacement member 440 of the base member can be suppressed. That is, the first position is closer to one side of the lower displacement member than the second position. The weight can be kept close to the dead center when the lower displacement member 440 rattles with respect to the base member 410, and the effect of the inertial force when the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced from the stopped state can be reduced accordingly. It can be made difficult to act on the displacement member 440 . As a result, rattling of the lower displacement member 440 can be easily suppressed.

Further, as described above, the lower displacement member 440 is slidably displaced and rotationally displaced (displaced from the retracted state to the first and second extended states). Therefore, when the lower displacement member 440 is rotationally displaced while the game ball T1 is disposed far from the rotation axis, centrifugal force is likely to occur in the game ball T1, and the game ball T1 moves to move the inner wall of the ball receiving portion 467. There was a problem that a collision sound was generated due to collision with the game ball T1, or the ball receiving part 467 was damaged.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the lower displacement member 440 can be displaced to the first position after the game ball T1 is received in the ball receiving portion 467. It can be placed in the vicinity (brought closer). Therefore, when the lower displacement member 440 is rotationally displaced (displaced from the retracted state to the first and second overhanging states) while the game ball T1 is received by the lower displacement member 440, centrifugal force is applied to the game ball T1. You can prevent it from happening. As a result, when the game ball T1 collides with the ball receiving portion 467, it is possible to suppress the generation of a collision sound or the breakage of the ball receiving portion 467.

Further, in the present embodiment, the lower displacement member 440 has a transmission mechanism 460 for operating the ball receiving portion 467, which is formed by a movable rack 464, a transmission gear 465 (pinion gear), and a rack 466 (rack member). Since the portion 467 is provided, when the movement of the ball receiving portion 467 is started from the first position, not only the weight of the rack 466 but also the weights of the movable rack 464 and the rack 466 are applied to one side of the lower displacement member 440 . (the fulcrum when the lower displacement member 440 rattles with respect to the base member 410). As a result, rattling of the lower displacement member 440 when the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced from the stopped state can be easily suppressed.

Further, in the state where the game ball T1 is received in the ball receiving portion 467, the load of the lower displacement member 440 is increased by the load of the game ball T1. Therefore, as described above, by setting the lower displacement member 440 to the first position, the position of the center of gravity of the lower displacement member 440 is moved toward the slide grooves 411a and 411b of the front base 411 (the rotational axis of the lower displacement member 440). side). Therefore, when displacing the lower displacement member 440 from the position of the retracted state to the positions of the first and second extended states, the lower displacement member 440 is rotationally displaced by setting it to the first position. driving force can be reduced. Therefore, the energy consumption of the drive motor KM1 that displaces the lower displacement member 440 can be suppressed.

Next, referring to FIG. 32, the ball payout operation will be described. 32(a) to (c) are front views of the lower displacement member 440. FIG. 32(a) to 32(c) sequentially show transition states of the lower displacement member 440 during the ball dispensing operation. 32(a) to 32(c), the decorative member 450 of the lower displacement member 440 and the front case 481 are seen transparently, and the outline of the bottom wall portion 481b of the front case 481 is illustrated by chain lines. Furthermore, the ball payout operation is an operation to pay out the game ball T1 received in the ball receiving portion 467 of the lower displacement member 440 from the emission opening 471 to the outside of the lower displacement member 440. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 32( a ) to 32 ( c ), the dispensing operation of dispensing the ball received in the ball receiving portion 467 of the lower displacement member 440 displaces the lower displacement member 440 sequentially from the first position to the third position. It is done by

That is, by receiving the game ball T1 inside the ball receiving portion 467 in the receiving operation and displacing the lower displacement member 440 arranged at the first position to the third position, the game ball T1 is moved to the ball receiving portion 467. As it is displaced, it is transported to the exit opening 471 side. The game ball T1 moved to the side of the exit opening 471 is given an inertial force toward the exit opening 471 by the sliding displacement of the ball receiving portion 467 and the shooting operation of the ball receiving portion 467 at the third position. It pops out from the inside of the portion 467 . As a result, the ball can be ejected from inside the lower displacement member 440 .

Here, since the direction of displacement when the ball receiving portion 467 (displacement member) starts to be displaced from the first position is the direction away from the position side of the lower displacement member 440, the ball receiving portion 467 is moved to the first position. In the arranged state, the rack 466 (rack member) can be brought closer to the base member 410 from one side of the lower displacement member 440 . That is, in order for the ball receiving portion 467 (rack 466) to be displaced away from one side of the lower displacement member 440, the rack 466 must move the transmission gear 465 ( The portion on the side of the rack gear 466 a with which the pinion gear is meshed is directed toward one side of the lower displacement member 440 . Therefore, the weight of the rack 466 can be brought closer to one side of the lower displacement member 440 (the fulcrum when the lower displacement member 440 rattles with respect to the base member 410). It is possible to easily suppress rattling of the lower displacement member 440 when it is displaced from the stopped state.

The ball receiving portion 467 is displaced in the direction of the third position (first direction), and when it reaches the third position, it is formed so that the posture can be changed. While making it easy to maintain the state held by the part 467, it is possible to suppress the falling of the game ball T1 from the ball receiving part 467, while when reaching the second position, the change in the attitude of the ball receiving part 467 is used. Thus, the game ball T1 can be easily paid out from the inside of the ball receiving portion 467.例文帳に追加

32(a) to 32(c), the ball receiving portion 467 shown in FIGS. When performing the action, the game ball put out to the outside of the lower displacement member 440 is thrown into the recovery port 411f.

On the other hand, when the lower displacement member 440 is in the first extended state (a state in which the longitudinal direction of the lower displacement member 440 is rotated by an angle θ from the virtual line H1), the ball receiving portion 467 is dispensed. A game ball put out to the outside of 440 is thrown to the upper part of the ball cradle 710 of the rotating unit 700 .

Next, referring to FIGS. 33 and 34, the ejection operation when two or more balls are thrown into the lower displacement member 440 will be described. 33(a) to (c) and FIGS. 34(a) to (c) are front views of the lower displacement member 440. FIG.

11(a) to (c) and FIGS. 12(a) to (c) illustrate transition states of the discharging operation in order. 11(a) to (c) and FIGS. 12(a) to (c), the decorative member 450 of the lower displacement member 440 and the front case 481 are transparent, and the bottom wall portion 481b of the front case 481 is shown transparently. is indicated by a two-dot chain line.

As shown in FIGS. 33(a) to 33(c), when two or more balls are consecutively thrown from a sorting unit 500, which will be described later, the lower displacement member 440 is operated to receive the second ball. The game ball T2 can be dropped onto the displacement path of the ball receiving portion 467.

That is, the ball receiving portion 467 can be displaced from the first position to the second position to throw the first game ball T1 inside the ball receiving portion 467, and the second game ball T2 can be moved to the first ball. 33(b)). By displacing the ball receiving portion 467 to the first position after receiving the first game ball T1 at the second position, the ball receiving portion 467 receives the first game ball T1. 467 is displaced to the first position, and the second game ball T2 can be dropped onto the displacement path of the ball receiving portion 467.

Here, in a game machine that displaces a ball received in the ball receiving portion 467 at the second position to the third position by displacing the ball receiving portion 467, if a distributing member 540 of the distributing unit 500, which will be described later, malfunctions. There is a possibility that more than a specified number of game balls are thrown into the orbital area of the ball receiving portion 467, and in this case, there is a problem that the game balls exceeding the specified number may cause a problem. For example, game balls exceeding the specified number enter the transmission mechanism 460 that drives the ball receiving portion 467, and are caught in the movable portion, which may cause damage. Alternatively, there is a risk that game balls exceeding the specified number may flow out of the game area (for example, the back side of the game board 13 or the inside of the back case 300).

In contrast, according to the present embodiment, the ball receiving portion 467 is formed to be displaceable from the second position to the first position opposite to the throwing direction of the ball. The track area can be expanded. Therefore, for example, even if the distributing member 540 malfunctions and more than the specified number of game balls are thrown, the ball receiving portion 467 expands the orbital area, so that the game balls exceeding the specified number are thrown. Can be accepted in the orbital area. As a result, the game balls exceeding the prescribed number can be moved as the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced to the third position. Therefore, the game balls exceeding the specified number can be prevented from entering the transmission mechanism 460 for driving the ball receiving portion 467 and flowing out of the game area. It is possible to make it difficult to cause problems caused by the ball.

In addition, the ball receiving portion 467 is capable of receiving and holding one game ball T1 thrown from a sorting unit 500 (described later) at the second position, and moving from the second position to the first position (second direction). ), so that after receiving one game ball at the second position, the ball receiving portion 467 is moved from the second position to the third direction (first direction ), it is possible to throw game balls exceeding the prescribed number to the trajectory region of the ball receiving portion 467 (the region in the first direction from 467 of the ball receiving portion). Therefore, the second and subsequent game balls T2 can be moved as the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced in the third position direction (first direction).

In this case, the ball receiving portion 467 holds the first game ball T1, and the second and subsequent game balls T2 can be thrown to the trajectory area of the ball receiving portion 467. The game ball T2 after the ball can be separated. Therefore, for example, by displacing the ball receiving portion 467 in the third position direction (first direction), while maintaining the state in which the ball receiving member holds the game ball T1 of the first ball, it is possible to play the second and subsequent balls. An operation of ejecting only the ball T2 from the trajectory area becomes possible.

Further, after the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced to the second position to receive the first ball, it is displaced to the third position to discharge the game ball T1 from the inside of the ball receiving portion 467. , the second game ball T2 falls to the upper part of the rack 466, the second game ball T2 is thrown between the ball receiving portion 467 and the transmission gear 465, and the second game ball T2 is moved to the lower displacement member 440. There is a risk that it will not be possible to discharge to the outside of the

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, after receiving the game ball T1 inside the ball receiving portion 467 at the second position, the receiving operation for receiving the ball in the ball receiving portion 467 is performed at the first position opposite to the exit opening 471. Since the second game ball T2 can be displaced to the outside of the lower displacement member 440, it can be suppressed that it cannot be discharged.

In other words, in a gaming machine equipped with a role object that performs a discharge operation for discharging a game ball thrown into the role object, the motion of the member for discharging the ball (the ball receiving portion 467 in this embodiment) is adjusted to the position where the ball is received. (second position) and the ball discharging position (third position), when two or more game balls are thrown into the accessory, the ball is discharged from the member for discharging the ball. Although there is a possibility that the second game ball T2 is discharged to the side opposite to the exit (exit opening 471), in the present embodiment, after receiving the first game ball T1, the ball receiving portion 467 is moved to the exit opening 471. By displacing it to the first position on the opposite side, the second game ball T2 can be thrown between the ball receiving portion 467 and the exit opening 471.

As shown in FIGS. 34(a) to (c), after throwing the second game ball T2 onto the displacement path of the ball receiving portion 467, the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced to the third position before the shooting operation. By doing so, the second game ball T2 can be rolled toward the exit opening 471 while being in contact with the ball receiving portion 467 . As a result, the second game ball T2 can be ejected from the ejection opening 471. FIG.

In this case, the lower end surface of the U-shaped portion of the ball receiving portion 467 is above the center position of the second game ball T2 that is thrown on the displacement path of the ball receiving portion 467 (upward in FIG. 34(a)). placed in In addition, when the leg portion 467a is in contact with the upper surface of the bottom wall portion 481b, it is arranged in a state of being inclined approximately 45 degrees with respect to the contact surface with the bottom wall portion 481b. Furthermore, since the side surface of the U-shaped right side of the ball receiving portion 467 (the right side in FIG. 34(a)) is arranged at the same position in the vertical direction as the right end portion of the leg portion 467a, the second game ball The outer surface of T2 can abut leg 467a.

In addition, since the leg portion 467a is inclined approximately 45 degrees with respect to the upper surface of the bottom wall portion 481b, the outer surface of the lower hemisphere of the second game ball T2 (lower hemisphere on the side of the bottom wall portion 481b) abutted. As a result, when the second game ball T2 rolls toward the exit opening 471, the inclined surface of the leg portion 467a can generate a force that lifts the second game ball T2 upward. Therefore, the frictional force between the second game ball T2 and the bottom wall portion 481b can be reduced when the second game ball T2 rolls on the upper surface of the bottom wall portion 481b. As a result, when the second game ball T2 rolls toward the exit opening 471, it is possible to prevent the ball receiving portion 467 from being stopped.

In other words, the leg portion 467 a protrudes from the ball receiving portion 467 in the direction from the first position to the third position (first direction), and the tip of the projecting portion extends along the track of the ball receiving portion 467 . Since the ball receiving portion 467 is formed so as to be able to contact the lower half surface of the game ball (that is, the game ball T2 after the second ball) thrown to the area, the ball receiving portion 467 moves from the first position to the third position direction (first direction). When the game ball is displaced, the lower half of the game ball can be moved while being pushed by the leg portion 467a. As a result, the second and subsequent game balls T2 can be easily discharged from the orbit area of the ball receiving portion 467. FIG.

In addition, the leg portion 467a is provided between the first game ball T1 held by the ball receiving portion 467 and the game ball (the second and subsequent game balls T2) thrown to the trajectory area of the ball receiving portion 467. By interposing, the distance between the first game ball T1 and the second and subsequent game balls T2 can be ensured by the projecting length of the leg portion 467a. Therefore, while maintaining the state in which the ball receiving portion 467 holds the first game ball T1, only the second and subsequent game balls T2 can be easily discharged from the track area.

Furthermore, since the leg portion 467a serves both to change the posture of the ball receiving portion 467 and to move the game ball while pushing its lower half surface, the number of parts can be reduced accordingly. It is possible to reduce the product cost by reducing it.

Also, since the size of the concave portion 481b1 in the direction from the first position to the third position (first direction) is smaller than the diameter of the game ball, the game ball thrown to the trajectory area of the ball receiving portion 467 (that is, When the second and subsequent game balls T2) are moved along with the displacement of the ball receiving portion 467 in the first direction, they can easily pass through the recessed portion 481b1. As a result, the second and subsequent game balls T2 can be easily ejected from the trajectory area.

As described above, when the lower displacement unit 400 is arranged in the retracted state, the recovery port 411 f is arranged below the emission opening 471 of the lower displacement member 440 . Therefore, the game ball T2 ejected in the retracted state is thrown to the recovery port 411f.

On the other hand, when the lower displacement unit 400 is arranged in the first overhanging state, the recovery port 411f is positioned below the emission opening 471 . Further, the opening of the recovery port 411f is opened on the upper side. Therefore, the ejected game ball T2 is thrown to the recovery port 411f.

That is, the recovery port 411f is disposed vertically below the end portion of the base member 470 on the first direction side (upright wall 471a side) and has an opening in the vertical direction. The game balls (that is, the second and subsequent game balls T2) that are moved along with the movement in the three-position direction (first direction) and discharged from the track area of the ball receiving portion 467 are received from the opening of the recovery port 411f. can be recovered.

In addition, the opening of the recovery port 411f is perpendicular to the end of the base member 470 on the first direction side (upright wall 471a side) at least in each of the retracted state, the first protruding state, and the second protruding state. direction downward. As a result, even when the lower displacement unit 400 is displaced to any of the retracted position, the first extended state, and the second extended state, the game balls (that is, two balls) are ejected from the track area of the ball receiving portion 467. The game balls T2) after the second can be received and collected from the opening of the collecting member.

33(a) to 34(c) and FIGS. 2, the game ball put out to the outside of the lower displacement member 440 is thrown into the recovery port 411f. Further, when the ball receiving portion 467 is ejected while the lower displacement member 440 is in the first extended state (the longitudinal direction of the lower displacement member 440 is rotated by an angle θ from the virtual line H1), the lower displacement member The game balls put out to the outside of 440 are thrown to the recovery port 411f as described above.

Next, referring to FIG. 35, the configuration when the second game ball T2 is ejected from the ejection opening 471 will be described. 35(a) is a partially enlarged view of the lower displacement member 440 in the range XXXVa of FIG. 34(b), and FIG. 35(b) is a partially enlarged view of the lower displacement member 440 in the range XXXVb of FIG. 34(a). It is a diagram.

As shown in FIG. 35, when the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced to the third position immediately before the shooting operation, the game ball T2 is brought into contact with the side surface of the ball receiving portion 467 on the side of the standing wall 471a, and the exit opening is opened. 471 can be extruded to the outside of the lower displacement member 440 .

In this case, when the leg portion 467a of the ball receiving portion 467 is inserted between the bottom wall portion 481b and the standing wall 471a and the ball receiving portion 467 rotates, the game ball T2 and the ball receiving portion 467 come into contact with each other. By doing so, the rotational force of the ball receiving portion 467 can be transmitted to the game ball T2. As a result, the game ball T2 can be easily discharged from the exit opening 471. - 特許庁In addition, it is possible to return the ball receiving portion 467 to the state before the rotating operation by utilizing the repulsive force when the ball receiving portion 467 is brought into contact with the game ball T2. Therefore, when the game ball T2 thrown to the track area of the ball receiving portion 467 is discharged, the first game ball T1 held in the ball receiving portion 467 can be prevented from falling off.

Further, the lower displacement member 440 is erected at a height lower than the radius of the game ball in the track region when the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced from the second position to the third position direction (first direction), and is recessed. Equipped with a standing wall 471a located on the first direction side of 481b1, the second and subsequent game balls thrown to the orbital area of the ball receiving portion 467 move along with the displacement of the ball receiving portion 467 in the first direction. When the game ball T2 is moved, it is brought into contact with the standing wall 471a and the ball receiving portion 467, and the posture change of the ball receiving portion 467 is formed to be regulated. While maintaining the state held by the ball receiving part 467, only the game balls after the second ball can be easily discharged from the track area.

That is, the erected wall 471a is erected so that the height from the upper surface of the bottom wall portion 481b to the erected tip is lower than the radius of the game ball, so that the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced in the first direction. When the game ball T2 is moved by being pushed by the leg along with this, the lower half surface of the game ball T2 is brought into contact with the standing wall 471a, and the game ball can easily climb over the standing wall 471a. In this case, the game ball T2 is brought into contact with the ball receiving portion 467 (that is, the game ball T2 is interposed between the ball receiving portion 467 and the standing wall 471a), and the reaction force from the game ball T2 to the ball receiving portion 467 can be applied, the change in posture of the ball receiving portion can be regulated, and the first game ball held by the ball receiving portion 467 can be prevented from falling off. As a result, while maintaining the state in which the ball receiving portion 467 holds the first game ball, only the second and subsequent game balls T2 can be easily discharged from the game area.

On the other hand, when the second and subsequent game balls T2 are not thrown into the trajectory area of the ball receiving portion 467, no game ball is interposed between the erected wall 471a and the ball receiving portion 467. The posture of the ball receiving portion 467 can be changed by engaging the portion 467a with the concave portion 481b1. As a result, the first game ball T1 (that is, the game ball held in the ball receiving portion 467) can be easily discharged from the ball receiving portion 467 by utilizing the change in the posture of the ball receiving portion 467.

Next, the sorting unit 500 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 36 to 38. FIG. 36(a) is a top view of the sorting unit 500, and FIG. 36(b) is a rear view of the sorting unit 500. FIG. 37 is an exploded front perspective view of the sorting unit 500, and FIG. 38 is an exploded rear perspective view of the sorting unit 500. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 36 to 38, the sorting unit 500 includes a base plate 520 formed in a substantially rectangular plate-like body when viewed from the front, and a base plate 520 attached to the front side of the base plate 520 and facing the base plate 520. A path forming member 510 that forms a plurality of flow-down paths in which balls can flow down, a distribution member 540 that is rotatably attached to the back side of the base plate 520, and an end surface of the base plate 520 that is attached to the base plate 520 , and an extension path member 530 that extends the flow-down path of the spheres formed between the opposing path formation members 510 .

The base plate 520 includes a columnar shaft portion 523 protruding toward the rear side, a first opening 521 penetrating in an arc shape centering on the axis of the shaft portion 523 , and a radius larger than that of the first opening 521 . A second opening 522 penetrating in a large circular arc shape, a rolling part 525 having a U-shaped cross section with an open upper end side and extending in the left-right direction, and a hook-like protrusion on the back side. It is mainly formed with a locking portion 524 that engages.

The shaft portion 523 is a shaft that is inserted into a shaft hole 545 of the distribution member 540 to be described later and attaches the distribution member 540 to the base member in a rotatable state. be done.

The first opening 521 and the second opening 522 are openings through which the regulation plate 541 and the storage plate 542 of the distribution member 540, which will be described later, are inserted. It is formed. In addition, since the distribution member 540 is attached to the base plate 520 in a rotatable state, the first opening 521 and the second opening 522 are larger than the circumferential dimensions of the regulation plate 541 and the storage plate 542 when viewed from the front. A large arc is formed.

The locking portion 524 is an engaging portion that locks the urging spring SP4 with a locking portion 544 formed in the distribution member 540, and one end of the urging spring SP4 is locked.

The rolling part 525 is a bottom surface on which the ball rolls, and is inclined downward toward one end on the left side in a rear view (left side in FIG. 36(b)) and has a U-shaped curved shape. It is formed larger than the outer shape of the sphere. Therefore, the ball rolling on the rolling portion 525 can be prevented from stopping at the rolling portion, and the ball can roll toward the one end side.

The rolling part 525 has a plurality of protrusions 525b projecting from the front and rear side surfaces toward the inner side of the U shape, and an opening 525a opening toward the rear side at one end.

The projections 525b are formed on the front and rear side surfaces at regular intervals, and are formed at positions such that the projections 525b formed on the front side and the projections 525b formed on the back side are alternated when viewed from the front. Therefore, the ball rolling on the rolling portion 525 can collide with the projection 525b, so that the rolling speed of the ball rolling on the rolling portion 525 can be reduced.

Here, as described above, the ball is thrown to the ball receiving portion 467 of the lower displacement unit 400 with the ball receiving portion 467 placed at the first position (FIGS. 31(a) and 31(b)). )reference). Therefore, when the game ball rolling on the rolling portion 525 of the third ball path KR3 is thrown faster, the game ball is thrown into the lower displacement member 440 before the ball receiving portion 467 moves to the second position. there is a risk of being

On the other hand, in this embodiment, a plurality of projections 525b projecting from the inner surface of the rolling portion 525 of the third ball-throwing route KR3 are formed so that a game ball passing through the rolling portion 525 of the third ball-throwing route KR3 Since resistance can be applied, the speed of the game ball passing through the third throwing path KR3 can be slowed down. Therefore, the time required for the ball receiving portion 467 to be displaced from the switching position (first position) to the receiving position (second position) can be lengthened accordingly, so that the game ball can be reliably delivered to the ball receiving portion 467. can be received by In addition, the output of the displacement speed of the drive motor KM2 can be reduced by the amount that the displacement speed required for the ball receiving portion 467 can be reduced, and the product cost can be reduced.

The opening 525a is formed open on the back side of one end of the rolling portion 525, and its outer shape when viewed from the back is formed to be larger than the size of a sphere. Therefore, the ball rolling on the rolling portion 525 toward one end is discharged from the opening 525a.

The path forming member 510 is formed in the shape of a rectangular plate having a width in the left-right direction smaller than that of the base plate 520, and a plurality of walls larger than the outer diameter of the game ball are formed on the back side. By forming the space between the opposing spheres to be larger than the outer diameter of the sphere, a plurality of flow-down paths of the sphere are formed inside.

The path forming member 510 has a first opening 511 that opens in the upper end surface, a first ball throwing path KR1 formed between opposing side walls of the first opening 511, and a second ball throwing path connected to the first ball throwing path KR1. A second opening 512 and a third opening 513 that open in the side surface of the path forming member 510 at the ends of KR2 and the third ball throwing path KR3, and the second opening 512 and the third opening 513 that are formed to penetrate in the front-rear direction. a plurality of openings 514, 515, 516, a fourth ball throwing path KR4 formed by walls on the back side of the openings 514, 515, 516; It is mainly formed with a fourth opening 517 that opens.

The first opening 511 is an opening for allowing a ball thrown from a ball-throwing unit 600, which will be described later, to flow into the sorting unit. formed large. Also, the first opening 511 is connected to the ball-throwing unit 600 so that the ball thrown from the ball-throwing unit 600 can enter.

The first ball feeding path KR1 is a path through which the ball that has flowed in from the first opening 511 flows down between the base plate 520 and the path forming member 510, and is formed extending downward. In addition, the fourth ball throwing path KR4 is formed by extending approximately one third of the path forming member 510 in the vertical direction, and the downstream end is connected to the second ball throwing path KR2 and the third ball throwing path KR3. be done. That is, the ball flowing down the first ball-throwing path KR1 is formed so as to be able to flow down the second ball-throwing path KR2 or the third ball-throwing path KR3.

The second ball-throwing route KR2 is a route formed by being connected to the first ball-throwing route KR1, and the downstream end thereof is connected to the second opening 512, as described above. That is, when the ball flowing down the first ball path KR1 through the first opening 511 flows down the second ball path KR2, it is ejected outside the sorting unit 500 through the second opening 512 .

The second opening 512 is connected to a recovery path (not shown) for recovering balls. Therefore, the balls discharged from the second opening are recovered by the recovery path. Further, inside the second opening 512 (downstream end of the second ball throwing path KR2), a sensor device SE2 for detecting passage of a game ball is arranged. Therefore, the sensor device SE1 detects the number of game balls passing through the third winning hole 82, and the sensor device SE2 detects the number of game balls passing through the second ball throwing path KR2. The number of game balls passing through the route KR3 can be detected.

In other words, it is possible to detect whether or not a predetermined number (one ball) of game balls are stored upstream of the regulating plate 541, which will be described later, based on the difference between the sensor devices SE1 and SE1. For example, when the third electric accessory 82a is opened once, the number of balls passing through the third prize winning opening 82 (sensor device SE1) is eight, and the ball passing through the second ball throwing route KR2 (sensor device SE2). When the number is seven, it can be detected that one game ball has flowed down (stored) in the third throwing path KR3.

As described above, the third ball throwing route KR3 is a route formed by being connected to the first ball throwing route KR1, and the downstream end thereof is connected to the third opening 513 . That is, when the ball flowing down through the first opening 511 and down the first ball-throwing path KR1 flows down the third ball-throwing path KR3, it is ejected through the third opening 513 .

The third opening 513 is formed above the other end of the rolling portion 525 of the base plate 520 (the end opposite to the opening 525a). Therefore, the ball discharged from the third opening 513 is thrown inside the rolling part 525 . That is, the ball thrown to the third ball path KR3 is thrown to the rolling portion 525 through the third opening 513. As shown in FIG.

The openings 514 to 516 are respectively formed on the back side of the third prize winning opening 82 formed in the game board 13, and the winning ball in the third prize winning opening 82 is thrown. That is, when the ball flowing down the game area on the front side of the game board 13 wins the third prize winning opening 82, the ball is sent to the inside of the sorting unit 500 from the openings 514 to 516.

The fourth ball throwing path KR4 is formed by connecting to the openings 514 to 516, is connected to one path on the downstream side, and is connected to the fourth opening formed in the lower end surface of the path forming member 510. The fourth opening is connected to a recovery path (not shown) for recovering balls. Therefore, the ball that has won the third prize winning port 82 of the game board 13 is ejected from the fourth opening 517 and collected after being thrown to the fourth ball throwing path KR4 of the sorting unit 500 .

The extension path member 530 is formed to have a U-shaped cross section with an open bottom and extends in the left-right direction. Further, the extension path member 530 is formed such that the inner diameter of the U-shape is larger than the outer diameter of the sphere. Therefore, by being arranged above the rolling portion 525 of the base plate 520, a ball thrown to the upper portion of the rolling portion 525 can be thrown inside the rolling portion 525 and the extension path member 530. , the ball rolling on the rolling portion can be prevented from falling from the rolling portion 525 .

Further, the extension path member 530 has projections 531 formed at the same positions in the left-right direction as the projections 525b formed on the rolling portion 525 at regular intervals. As a result, the rolling speed of the ball rolling on the rolling portion 525 can be slowed down, similar to the projection 525b.

The distribution member 540 is formed in a rectangular shape in front view with one side being longer, and is formed with a predetermined thickness in the front-rear direction. The distribution member 540 includes a regulating plate 541 and a storage plate 542 that protrude as plate-shaped bodies on the front side, a shaft hole 545 that is formed through one end of the upper side, and a hook-shaped locking portion 544 that is formed on the back side. and are formed mainly.

The shaft hole 545 is a through hole into which the shaft portion 523 of the base plate 520 is inserted, as described above, and is formed to penetrate in the front-rear direction. The distribution member 540 is rotatable on the base plate 520 by inserting the shaft portion 523 of the base plate 520 through the shaft hole 545 and fastening a screw or the like having a larger head than the shaft hole to the shaft portion 523 from the rear side. attached in good condition.

The restricting plate 541 is arranged at the connecting portion between the first ball-throwing path KR1 and the second ball-throwing path KR2 through the first opening 521, and prevents the ball flowing down the first ball-throwing path KR1 from flowing into the second ball-throwing path KR2. It is formed so as to protrude forward from the front end face of the shaft hole 545, and the distance from the base plate 520 to the front side is set larger than the radius of the sphere.

Further, the regulation plate 541 is curved in an arc shape centering on the axis of the shaft hole 545 . As a result, when the distribution member 540 is rotationally displaced about the axis of the shaft hole 545, the displacement area of the regulation plate 541 can be minimized.

The storage plate 542 is a plate member that is arranged on the second ball-throwing path KR2 through the second opening 522 and stores the ball flowing down the second ball-throwing path KR2 on the upstream side of the storage plate 542. It is formed to protrude toward the front side from the end face on the front side, and the distance from the base plate 520 to the front side is set larger than the radius of the sphere.

Further, the storage plate 542 is curved in an arc shape centering on the axis of the shaft hole 545 , and the radius of the arc is formed larger than the radius of the curved portion of the regulation plate 541 . Therefore, the reservoir plate 542 is formed at a position spaced apart from the shaft hole 545 more than the regulation plate 541 . As a result, the restricting plate 541 can be protruded from the connecting portion between the first ball-throwing route KR1 and the second ball-throwing route KR2, and the storage plate 542 can be arranged on the second ball-throwing route KR2. Furthermore, the displacement area when the distribution member 540 is rotationally displaced about the axis of the shaft hole 545 can be minimized.

The projecting portion 543 is a drive transmission member that applies a rotational driving force to the distributing member 540 by colliding with the contact plate 464c of the lower displacement member 440 described above. It is formed. That is, a projection 543 to which driving force is transmitted is formed on the side opposite to the one end side where the shaft hole 545 serving as the rotating shaft of the distribution member 540 is formed. Thereby, the force with which the contact plate 464c of the lower displacement member 440 collides can be reduced.

Therefore, the driving force of the drive motor KM3 that displaces the contact plate 464c can be reduced, so that the energy consumption of the drive motor KM3 can be reduced. In addition, since the energy generated when the contact plate 464c collides with the protrusion 543 during driving can be reduced, the collision noise can be reduced when the contact plate 464c and the protrusion 543 collide. A detailed aspect of the collision between the contact plate 464c and the projecting portion 543 will be described later.

Further, a bulging portion 543a that bulges in a circular shape is formed at a portion of the projecting tip of the projection 543 that contacts the contact plate 464c. By bringing the contact plate 464c into contact with the bulging portion 543a, the contact area between the contact plate and the distribution member 540 can be reduced. Therefore, when the distribution member 540 is rotationally displaced, the frictional resistance between the protrusion 543 (the bulging portion 543a) and the contact plate 464c can be reduced. As a result, it is possible to suppress an increase in the energy consumption of the drive motor KM3.

The locking portion 544 is a portion that locks the biasing spring SP4 with the locking portion 524 of the base plate 520 as described above. Therefore, since the other end side of the distribution member 540 can always apply a rotating force toward the locking portion 524 side, the vibration of the distribution member 540 due to the vibration of the pachinko machine 10 or the like can be suppressed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 39, the flow-down route of the ball of the sorting unit 500 will be described in detail. FIG. 39 is a cross-sectional view of the sorting unit 500 taken along line XXXIX-XXXIX in FIG. 36(a). In addition, in FIG. 39, the distribution member 540 is illustrated with a dashed line. Also, FIG. 39 illustrates a state in which the sorting member 540 is arranged at the storage position.

Here, the state in which the sorting member 540 is arranged at the storage position means the state in which the sorting member 540 is rotated by the biasing force of the biasing spring SP4 and the storage plate 542 is arranged on the second ball throwing path KR2. .

As shown in FIG. 39, the lower end of the flow-down path of the first ball throwing path KR1 is tilted toward the central portion of the base plate 520 in the left-right direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 39), and the tilted portion is gentle. It is curved in an S shape. In addition, the S-shaped curved tip portion is connected to the third throwing path KR3, and the second throwing path KR2 is tilted at the end of the first throwing path KR1 in the direction opposite to the tilting direction of the first throwing path KR1. are linked together.

As a result, the ball flowing down the first ball path KR1 collides with the lower surface of the tilting portion, so that the flowing direction of the ball can be directed from the gravity direction to the tilting direction of the first ball path KR1. Therefore, the ball can flow down toward the entrance of the third ball-throwing route KR3 (the connecting portion between the first ball-throwing route KR1 and the third ball-throwing route KR3). Therefore, in a state where the distribution member 540 is not arranged, the ball flowing down the first ball throwing route KR1 can be thrown to the third ball throwing route KR3.

Here, a flow-down path along which a game ball flows down, a first branch passage and a second branch passage branched from the flow-down passage, and a game ball flowing down the flow-down passage to either the first branch passage or the second branch passage A game machine that distributes is known.

However, the conventional game machine has a structure in which the game balls flowing down the flow-down passage are alternately distributed one by one to the first branch passage and the second branch passage. It is distributed evenly (that is, by half) to the passage and the second branch passage. That is, there is a problem that the number of game balls distributed to the first branch passage cannot be changed.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, a ball receiving portion 467 formed displaceably and receiving a game ball from the third ball-throwing path KR3 is provided, and an abutment plate 464c interlocking with the ball receiving portion 467 contacts the distribution member 540. Since the distributing member 540 is displaced by contacting and displacing, the number of game balls distributed to the third ball throwing path KR3 or the second ball throwing path can be changed according to the displacement of the ball receiving portion 467 . That is, the number of game balls distributed to the third throwing route KR3 can be changed.

Displacement member 540 can be displaced by utilizing the displacement of ball receiving portion 467. Therefore, it is not necessary to separately provide a driving means or a transmission mechanism for displacing distribution member 540. can be unnecessary. Therefore, the number of parts can be reduced accordingly, and the product cost can be reduced.

Further, for example, in a structure that controls the displacement of the sorting member 540 by utilizing position detection by a sensor device and driving by a driving means, malfunction due to detection failure or control failure may reduce the reliability of the sorting operation of the sorting member. Inevitably, according to this embodiment, the distribution destination by the distribution member 540 can be switched in mechanical synchronization with the displacement of the ball receiving portion 467, so that the reliability of the distribution operation can be improved.

In particular, since the ball receiving portion 467 is a member that receives a game ball from the rolling portion 525 of the third ball throwing route KR3, it is synchronized with the displacement of the ball receiving portion 467 to shift the distribution destination of the distribution member 540 to the third ball throwing route. By switching to , the game ball distributed to the third throwing path KR3 can be reliably received by the displacement member.

Furthermore, in conventional gaming machines, game balls flowing down the flow-down path are only distributed to either the first branch passage or the second branch passage.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, when the destination of distribution by the regulation plate 541 (distribution means) is set to the third ball throwing route KR3 (first branch passage), the downflow of the game ball in the third is regulated. In the state where the distribution destination by the distribution member 540 is set to the second ball throwing route KR2 (second branch passage), a storage plate 542 (flowing state changing means) is provided to allow the game ball to flow down the third ball throwing route KR3. , can provide interest to the player.

That is, when the distribution destination by the regulation plate 541 is set to the third ball-throwing route, the game balls distributed to the third ball-throwing route KR3 are restricted from flowing down, and the game balls are stored in the third ball-throwing route KR3. When the allocation destination by 541 is set to the second ball-throwing route KR2, it is possible to allow the game balls to flow down the third ball-throwing route KR3 and allow the game balls accumulated in the third ball-throwing route KR3 to flow (release). can. As a result, in addition to the action of allocating game balls flowing down the first ball-throwing path KR1 (flowing-down path) to either the third ball-throwing path KR3 or the second ball-throwing path KR2, the game balls allocated to the third ball-throwing path KR3 are A flowing (opening) action can be formed. Furthermore, these storage and release operations can be alternately formed in conjunction with the sorting operation. As a result, it is possible to give interest to the player.

In addition, since the distribution member 540 (integral member) in which the regulation plate 541 (distribution means) and the storage plate 542 (flow state changing means) are integrally formed, the regulation plate 541 and the storage plate 542 are operated. It is possible to simplify the structure and improve the reliability of operation. This complicates the structure of the motor and lowers the operational reliability.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, since the regulation plate 541 and the storage plate 542 can be formed as a single part, the structure can be simplified accordingly, and the product cost can be reduced and the reliability of operation can be improved. be able to.

Furthermore, the distribution member 540 is formed to be displaceable between a storage position (first state position) and a regulation position (second state position). The 3 ball throwing route KR3 (first branch passage) is arranged at a position where the distribution destination is, and the storage plate 542 is arranged at a position that restricts the flow of game balls in the 3rd ball throwing route KR3, and the distribution member 540 is displaced to the regulating position. In this state, the regulation plate 541 is arranged at the position where the second ball throwing route KR2 is the distribution destination, and the storage plate 542 is arranged at the position allowing the game balls to flow down the third ball throwing route. is displaced between two positions (storage position and regulating position), in addition to the operation of distributing the game ball flowing down the first ball throwing route KR1 (flowing down passage) to either the third ball throwing route KR3 or the second ball throwing route, 3 It is possible to form an operation to temporarily stop (store) the flow of the game balls distributed to the throwing route KR3 and an operation to make the stopped (stored) game balls flow down (release), and these storage and opening operations can be alternately formed in conjunction with the sorting operation. That is, it is possible to simplify the structure, reduce the product cost, and improve the operational reliability.

The distribution member 540 (integral member) is rotatably formed, and the storage plate 542 (flowing state changing means) is formed so as to be able to protrude and retract from the third ball throwing route KR3 (first branch passage). By protruding to KR3, the game ball is restricted from flowing down, and since it is formed in an arcuately curved shape centering on the rotation axis of the distribution member 540, the control plate 541 appears and disappears on the third ball throw path KR3. The area of the hole (recess 519) opened in the inner wall of the can be reduced.

Since the storage plate 542 (flowing-down state changing means) is arranged in such a manner that the upstream side of the third ball throwing route KR3 (first branch passage) is concave, the storage plate 542 protrudes toward the third ball throwing route KR3. In the initial state (that is, the state in which only the tip side of the flow state changing means protrudes into the passage), the shape of the tip side of the storage plate 542 can be arranged in a direction that facilitates regulating the flow of the game ball, It is possible to easily regulate the flow of game balls distributed to the third throwing route KR3.

In addition, in a state where the storage plate 542 protrudes to the third ball-throwing path to the maximum and restricts the downflow of the game ball, the concave portion of the storage plate 542 can stably hold the game ball, so that the game ball can be prevented from running wild.

The sorting unit 500 applies a biasing force to the sorting member 540 (integral member), and a biasing spring SP4 (biasing means ), and the distance from the regulating plate 541 to the rotating shaft of the distributing member 540 is made larger than the distance from the regulating plate 541 to the rotating shaft of the distributing member 540, so that the biasing force of the biasing spring SP4 is used. , the distribution member 540 can be easily maintained in a posture (that is, a storage position) in which the storage plate 542 protrudes toward the third emergency route.

In this case, since the distance from the storage plate 542 to the rotation axis of the distribution member 540 is made larger than the distance from the regulation plate 541 to the rotation axis of the distribution member 540, when the falling game balls collide, the rotation axis Even if the same impact force is applied, the urging direction of the urging spring SP4 is the direction in which the accumulating plate 542 protrudes toward the third throwing path KR3. By doing so, it is possible to suppress the storage plate 542 from sinking into the recess 519 by the amount of the urging force.

In addition, since the distribution member 540 (integrated member) is rotated in the direction in which the storage plate 542 (flowing-down state changing means) protrudes into the third ball throwing path (first branch path) due to its own weight, the weight of the distribution member 540 is utilized. The distribution member 540 can be easily maintained in the posture (that is, the storage position) in which the storage plate 542 protrudes toward the third ball throwing path KR3. Therefore, when the game ball collides, it is possible to suppress the storage plate 542 from sinking into the concave portion 519 by its own weight.

Further, even if the biasing spring SP4 (biasing means) falls off, the distribution member 540 is maintained in a posture in which the regulation plate 541 protrudes toward the third ball throwing route KR3 due to its own weight, and the game moves toward the third ball throwing route KR3. You can suppress the ball from flowing down.

Further, a biasing spring SP4 is provided to apply a biasing force to the distribution member 540 to maintain the distribution destination of the distribution member 540 to either the third ball throwing route KR3 or the second ball throwing route KR2. By displacing the ball 540 in the direction against the direction of the biasing spring SP4, the distribution destination by the distribution member 540 is switched to the other of the third ball throwing route KR3 and the second ball throwing route KR2, and the biasing force of the biasing spring , the distribution destination by the distribution member 540 is returned to either the third ball throwing route KR3 or the second ball throwing route KR2.

Therefore, it is possible to prevent the distribution destination of the distribution member 540 from being carelessly switched. In this case, the distributing member 540 is displaced with the displacement of the ball receiving portion 467, and after the distributing destination is switched, the return to the distributing destination before switching can be performed by the biasing force of the biasing spring SP4. Therefore, the contact plate 464c interlocked with the ball receiving portion 467 does not need to be in contact with the distribution member 540. FIG. That is, the abutment plate 464 c interlocked with the ball receiving portion 467 can be separated from the distribution member 540 . Therefore, the degree of freedom in designing the movable range of the ball receiving portion 467 can be increased.

Next, displacement of the distribution member 540 will be described with reference to FIG. 40(a) and (b) are partial enlarged views of the sorting unit 500 in the range XL of FIG. 39. FIG. 40(a) shows a state where the distribution member 540 is located at the storage position, and FIG. 40(b) shows a state where the distribution member 540 is located at the regulation position. Further, the state in which the distribution member 540 is arranged at the regulated position means that the contact plate 464c of the lower displacement member 440 collides with the protrusion 543 of the distribution member 540, and the distribution member 540 moves about the axis of the shaft hole 545. It is a state in which the regulating plate 541 is arranged at the connecting portion between the first ball-throwing path KR1 and the third ball-throwing path KR3 after being rotated.

As shown in FIG. 40(a), when the sorting member 540 is arranged at the storage position, the storage plate 542 is arranged on the third ball throwing path KR3, and the regulation plate 541 is positioned on the back side of the path forming member 510. is located inside a recess 518 formed in the wall of the

In this case, the distance L1 between the end of the tip of the storage plate 542 protruding inside the third ball throwing path KR3 and the inner wall of the third ball throwing path KR3 facing the tip is made smaller than the diameter of the ball. Therefore, the ball thrown from the upstream of the third ball-throwing path KR3 (the first ball-throwing path KR1) is stopped on the upstream side of the storage plate 542.

Further, the distance dimension L2 from the inside of the curved portion of the storage plate 542 to the connecting portion between the first ball-throwing path KR1 and the first ball-throwing path KR1 is set to be larger than the radius of the ball, and is also larger than the diameter of the ball. set small. As a result, the number of balls stopped on the upstream side of the storage plate 542 can be reduced to one. Hereinafter, the state of the sorting unit 500 in which one ball is stopped on the upstream side of the storage plate 542 is referred to as a storage state.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 40(b), when the sorting member 540 is arranged at the regulating position, the regulating plate 541 is arranged at the connecting portion between the first ball-throwing route KR1 and the third ball-throwing route KR3. , the storage plate 542 is arranged inside the recess 519 formed in the wall portion on the back side of the path forming member 510 .

In this case, the distance dimension L3 between the end of the tip of the regulating plate 541 protruding inside the first ball-throwing path KR1 and the inner wall of the entrance of the third ball-throwing path KR3 is made smaller than the diameter of the ball. Therefore, the ball flowing down the first ball-throwing route KR1 collides with the regulation plate 541 and is thrown to the second ball-throwing route KR2.

That is, by switching the distribution member 540 between the regulating position and the storage position, the ball that is thrown along the first ball-throwing path KR1 is thrown to the third ball-throwing path KR3 and stopped on the third ball-throwing path KR3; A state can be formed in which the ball flowing down the first ball path KR1 cannot flow into the third ball path KR3 and is thrown to the second ball path KR2.

Therefore, by displacing one distributing member 540, when one flow path is divided into two flow paths, the flow path of the sphere can be reliably switched to one of them.

Further, the biasing spring SP4 applies a biasing force to the distribution member 540 to maintain the distribution destination of the distribution member 540 on the second ball throwing path KR2. It is possible to suppress switching of the distribution destination by the distribution member 540 to the third throw path.

Furthermore, the regulation plate 541 (distribution means) is formed so as to be able to appear and retract with respect to the first ball throwing route KR1 (downflow passage) or the third ball throwing route KR3 (first branch passage), and its appearance position is Since it is the inner wall on the downstream extension line of the downstream end of the first ball-throwing route KR1, the regulation plate 541 can be protruded at a position close to the game ball flowing down from the lower end side of the first ball-throwing route KR1. Therefore, it is possible to shorten the time required from when the regulating plate 541 starts to protrude into the downstream passage or the third ball throwing route KR3 (first branch passage) to when the game balls can be sorted. As a result, it is possible to reliably switch the distribution destination by the regulation plate 541 .

In addition, the regulation plate 541 (distribution means) protrudes into the third ball-throwing route KR3 (first branch passage), thereby diverting the game ball flowing down the first ball-throwing route KR1 (flow-down passage) into the second ball-throwing route ( second branch path), and the projecting direction of the regulating plate 541 is set in a direction pointing to the upstream end of the second ball-throwing path KR2, so the game ball flowing down the first ball-throwing path KR1 projects When the game ball comes into contact with the regulating plate in the middle, the game ball can be pushed into the second ball-throwing path KR as the regulating plate protrudes. As a result, the distribution to the second throwing route KR2 can be performed more reliably.

In this embodiment, the regulation plate 541 of the distribution member 540 is arranged at a position closer to the shaft hole 545 than the storage plate 542, but the regulation plate 541 is located farther from the shaft hole 545 than the regulation plate 541. may be placed in 40(a) and 40(b), the axis of the distribution member 540 may be arranged at the position of the point P on the rear surface on the downstream side of the third ball throwing path KR3. . In this case, the arrangement positions of the regulating plate 541 and the storage plate 542 formed on the distribution member 540 are formed at the same positions as in the present embodiment.

When the shaft hole 545 is arranged at the point P, the displacement speed of the regulation plate 541 can be faster than that of the storage plate 542 when the distribution member 540 is rotationally displaced. Therefore, as will be described later, when the distribution member 540 is displaced from the storage position to the regulation position, the regulation plate 541 can be quickly protruded onto the flow-down path. As a result, at the timing when the distribution member 540 is switched from the regulating position to the storage position, it is possible to suppress the game balls flowing down the first ball-throwing path KR1 from flowing into the third ball-throwing path KR3.

Also, in this case, the shapes of the regulation plate 541 and the storage plate 542 in a front view are arcuate with the point P as the center. As a result, the displacement regions of the regulation plate 541 and the storage plate 542 can be minimized when the distribution member 540 is displaced from the regulation position to the storage position (or vice versa). Furthermore, recessed portions 518 and 519 for receiving the restricting plate 541 and the storage plate 542 outside the third throwing path KR3 are recessed along the displacement trajectory of the restricting plate 541 and the restricting plate 541 .

Next, with reference to FIGS. 41 and 42, a case where two or more balls are thrown from the ball-throwing path when the sorting member 540 is arranged at the storage position will be described. 41(a) and (b) are partial enlarged views of the sorting unit 500. FIG. 42(a) and (b) are partial enlarged views of the sorting unit 500. FIG.

44(a) and (b) correspond to a partially enlarged view of the sorting unit 500 in FIG. 40(a). Also, FIGS. 41(a) to 42(b) sequentially illustrate the transition states of the sphere when the sphere is introduced. Further, FIGS. 41(a) to 42(b) show a state in which the sorting member 540 is arranged at the storage position.

As shown in FIGS. 41(a) and 41(b), when the first game ball T1 is thrown to the first ball path KR1 with the sorting member 540 arranged at the storage position, as described above, , the game ball T1 is thrown to the third ball-throwing path KR3 and stopped above the storage plate 542. As shown in FIG.

In this case, the storage plate 542 is located downstream of the upper end of the third throwing path KR3 by a distance between the radius and the diameter of the ball. protrudes toward the first throwing path KR1 (see FIG. 41).

Therefore, as described above, the third ball throwing path KR3 (first branch path) is formed so as to be inclined downward toward the downstream, and the game ball is formed to roll on the inner wall in the direction of gravity, Since the storage plate 542 (flowing state changing means) is formed so as to be able to protrude into the third ball throwing route KR3 from the inner wall on the lower side in the direction of gravity, the game ball is started to protrude into the third ball throwing route KR3. It is possible to shorten the time required to reach a state in which the flow of water can be regulated. As a result, the distribution destination of the regulating plate 541 is switched from the second ball throwing route KR2 (second branch passage) to the third ball throwing route KR3, and when the game ball is distributed to the third ball throwing route KR3, the game ball The projection of the storage plate 542 can be easily made in time to regulate the flow.

In addition, the regulation plate 541 is formed so as to be retractable with respect to the third ball-throwing route KR3, and when it protrudes to the third ball-throwing route KR3 to the maximum, a force component in the projecting direction acts on the storage plate 542 from the game ball. Therefore, when restricting the flow of the game ball distributed to the third ball throwing route KR3, it is possible to suppress the storage plate 542 from sinking into the concave portion 519 due to the impact when the game ball collides. Therefore, it is possible to easily regulate the flow of the game ball.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 42(a) and (b), when the sorting unit 500 is in the storage state and the second game ball T2 is thrown to the first ball-throwing path KR1, the game ball T2 The ball is thrown from the first throwing path KR1 to the upper end of the third throwing path KR3. Since the game ball T1 is stopped at the upper end of the third ball-throwing path KR3, the game ball T2 collides with the game ball T1 and is thrown to the second ball-throwing path KR2.

In this case, as described above, the game ball T1 protrudes toward the first ball-throwing path KR1. Since it can be guided, the game ball T2 can be thrown to the second ball path KR2 without remaining inside the third ball path KR3. Therefore, it is possible to stabilize the ball throwing on the first ball-throwing path KR1 and the second ball-throwing path KR2.

That is, the inner wall of the first ball-throwing route KR1 (flowing-down passage) on the side facing the second ball-throwing route KR2 (second branching passage) is configured to pass the game ball flowing down the first ball-throwing route KR1 to the third ball-throwing route KR3 (first branch passage). Of the specified number (one ball) of game balls stored in the branch passage), the last game ball can be guided to the side of the third ball-throwing route KR3, so that the game ball flows down the first ball-throwing route KR1. can be easily made to flow down to the second ball throwing route KR2 after colliding with the last game ball among the prescribed number of game balls.

Among the prescribed number of game balls, the last game ball means a game ball located on the upstream side (the side opposite to the regulation plate 541). Also, in the present embodiment, the prescribed number is set to one ball. In this case, the last game ball means the game ball itself stored in the third throwing route KR3.

Further, as described above, the first ball throwing path KR1 (downstream passage) is tilted toward the central portion of the base plate 520 in the left-right direction (left-right direction in FIG. 39) at the lower end side of the downflow path. A portion is formed in a gentle S-shaped curve. That is, since the downstream end of the first ball-throwing route KR1 (flowing-down passage) flows in the downstream direction of the upstream end of the third ball-throwing route KR3, the game ball flowing down the first ball-throwing route KR1 flows in the third ball-throwing route KR1. When the last game ball among the specified number of game balls stored in the ball-throwing path collides, the direction of the repulsive force acting on the last game ball must be different from the flowing direction of the upstream end of the third ball-throwing path KR3. can let As a result, it is possible to prevent the trailing game ball from jumping out of the upstream end of the third ball-throwing path KR3 and flowing into the second ball-throwing path KR2 due to the repulsive force at the time of collision.

Furthermore, the upper end of the third ball path KR3 is inclined in the direction of inclination of the lower end of the first ball path KR1. In addition, it can be on the side of the second throwing path KR2. Therefore, the rebound direction of the game ball T2 that has collided with the game ball T1 can be the entrance (upper end) side of the second ball throwing route KR2. Therefore, the game ball T2 that collides with the game ball T1 can be easily thrown to the second ball-throwing path KR2. As a result, it is possible to suppress the stagnation of the ball on the first ball-throwing path KR1 and the second ball-throwing path KR2.

Further, the distribution destination by the regulation plate 541 is set to the third ball-throwing route KR3 (first branch passage), and the downflow of the game ball in the third ball-throwing route KR3 is regulated by the storage plate 542 (flowing-down state changing means). 3 In a state where a specified number (one ball) of game balls is stored in the ball-throwing route KR3, game balls flowing down the first ball-throwing route KR1 (flowing-down passage) can flow down to the second ball-throwing route KR2 (second branch passage). Therefore, when more than the specified number of game balls flow down the flow-down passage, the game balls exceeding the specified number (game balls T2 after the second ball) are prevented from staying in the first ball throwing route KR1. can. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the displacement of the regulating plate 541 (the operation of setting the distribution destination to the second ball-throwing route KR2) from being hindered by the game balls stuck on the first ball-throwing route KR1.

Next, with reference to FIG. 43, a case where a ball is thrown to the ball-throwing path when the sorting member 540 is arranged at the regulating position will be described. 43(a) and (b) are partial enlarged views of the sorting unit 500. FIG.

43(a) and (b) correspond to the partially enlarged view of the sorting unit 500 in FIG. 40(a). Also, FIGS. 43(a) and (b) illustrate transition states of the sphere when the sphere is introduced. Further, FIGS. 43(a) and 43(b) show a state in which the distribution member 540 is arranged at the restricted position.

As shown in FIGS. 43(a) and 43(b), when a ball is thrown along the first throwing path KR1 with the sorting member 540 arranged at the regulating position, the thrown game ball T1 is placed on the first throwing path KR1. It collides with the regulation plate 541 at the lower end of the route KR1. As a result, the game ball T1 is guided to the second ball-throwing route KR2 and flows down the second ball-throwing route KR2.

Next, with reference to FIG. 44, the operation for causing the ball to flow downstream on the third throwing path KR3 will be described. 44(a) and (b) are partial enlarged views of the sorting unit 500. FIG.

44(a) and (b) correspond to a partially enlarged view of the sorting unit 500 in FIG. 40(a). Also, FIGS. 44(a) and (b) respectively illustrate the transition states of the sphere when the sphere is introduced. Further, FIG. 44(a) shows a state where the distribution member 540 is arranged at the storage position, and FIG. 44(b) shows a state where the distribution member 540 is arranged at the regulation position.

As shown in FIGS. 44(a) and 44(b), when the sorting unit 500 is in the storage state (the state shown in FIG. 44(a)), the sorting member 540 is displaced and placed at the restricted position. , the game ball T1 stagnated above the storage plate 542 flows down to the downstream side of the third ball throwing path KR3.

That is, only the ball stagnated above the storage plate 542 flows down the third throwing path KR3. In addition, as described above, the number of balls stagnating above the storage plate 542 is set to 1, so that the balls can flow down to the third throwing path KR3 one by one. Therefore, it is possible to stabilize the number of balls flowing down the third ball-throwing route KR3, thereby suppressing an unintended number of balls from flowing down the third ball-throwing route KR3.

Therefore, the distributing member 540 (distributing means) includes a regulating plate 541 (first retractable portion) formed so as to be retractable with respect to the third ball throwing path (first branch path) as the distributing member 540 is displaced. Equipped with a storage plate (second retractable portion), the regulating plate 541 protrudes into the third ball-throwing path so that the game ball flowing down the first ball-throwing path KR1 (flowing-down passage) is directed to the second ball-throwing path KR2 (second branching path). The storage plate 542 is located downstream of the regulation plate 541 in the third throwing path KR3 and protrudes into the third throwing path KR3 to distribute the ball to the third throwing path KR3. When one of the regulation plate 541 and the storage plate 542 protrudes into the passage of the third ball-throwing route KR3, the other is outside the passage of the third ball-throwing route KR3 (recessed portion). 518, 519), displacing the distributing member 540 in accordance with the displacement of the ball receiving portion 467 (displacement member), so that only the prescribed number (one ball) of the game balls are transferred to the third throwing route KR3. , and can be received by the ball receiving portion 467 .

That is, the regulation plate 541 protrudes into a first state in which game balls flowing down the first ball-throwing path KR1 are distributed to the second ball-throwing path. A second state in which the game balls distributed to the third ball-throwing path are distributed to the third ball-throwing path, and a third state in which the game balls distributed to the third ball-throwing path KR3 are restricted from flowing down (game balls are stored) by projecting the second protruding part. and a fourth state in which the game balls stored in the third ball throwing path are made to flow down and received by the ball receiving portion by retracting the second haunting portion. By combining , only a prescribed number (one ball) of game balls can be distributed to the third ball throwing route KR3 and received by the ball receiving portion 467.

In addition, since the distribution member 540 is provided with the regulation plates 541 and 542, that is, formed as one component, the structure of the distribution member 540 (for operating the regulation plate 541 and the storage plate 542 and exerting their functions) structure) can be simplified. Furthermore, when one of the restricting plate 541 and the storage plate 542 protrudes into the passage of the third ball-throwing route KR3, the other is retracted out of the passage of the third ball-throwing route KR3. It is sufficient that the distribution member 540 is also formed so as to be displaceable between two positions according to the positions (first position and second position). That is, by displacing the distribution member 540 at two positions, the first to fourth states described above can be formed. Therefore, the structure of the distributing member 540 and the structure for displacing the distributing member 540 in accordance with the displacement of the ball receiving portion 467 can be simplified, and the reliability of the game ball distributing operation can be improved accordingly.

Next, the sorting unit 500 and the lower displacement unit 400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 45 to 46. FIG. 45 is a front view of the sorting unit 500 and the downward displacement unit 400. FIG. 46 is a top view of the sorting unit 500 and the downward displacement unit 400. FIG. It should be noted that the lower displacement unit 400 is illustrated in a state of being arranged at the retracted position.

As shown in FIGS. 45 and 46, the sorting unit 500 is arranged on the front side of the lower displacement unit 400 (lower side in FIG. 46). In this case, the opening 525a formed in the rolling portion 525 of the distribution unit 500 and the opening 451a formed in the decorative member 450 of the lower displacement member 440 are arranged at positions overlapping each other in the front-rear direction. Therefore, the ball rolling on the rolling portion 525 is thrown into the lower displacement member 440 through the opening 525a and the opening 451a.

In other words, the ball is thrown to the lower displacement member 440 by passing the ball flowing down the game area in front of the game board 13 through the third winning hole 82 formed in the game board 13 through the ball throwing unit 600 and the distribution unit 500. is done.

Therefore, the distribution unit 500 includes the rolling portion 525 that communicates with the track area of the ball receiving portion 467, and the distribution member 540 regulates passage of game balls in the rolling portion 525. To surely throw the second and subsequent game balls T2 to the track area of a distribution member 540 via a rolling part 525 even when the second and subsequent game balls T2 are thrown due to malfunction. can be done. As a result, it is possible to prevent troubles caused by the game ball T2 after the second ball.

Next, the relationship between the distribution member 540 and the lower displacement member 440 will be described with reference to FIGS. 47 to 52. FIG. 47, 49 and 51 are front views of the lower displacement unit 400, and FIGS. 48, 50 and 52 are sectional views of the sorting unit 500. FIG. 47, 49 and 51, the decorative member 450 and the front case 481 of the displacement member 440 are shown transparently, and only the sorting member 540 of the sorting unit 500 arranged on the front side is illustrated. 48, 50 and 52, the distributing member 540 is illustrated with a chain line, and the contact plate 464c of the lower displacement member 440 arranged on the back side is illustrated with a chain line.

47 and 48 show a state in which the ball receiving portion 467 of the lower displacement member 440 is at the first position and the distribution member 540 is at the regulating position, and the lower displacement member 440 is in the retracted state. The position is illustrated. 49 and 50 show a state in which the ball receiving portion 467 of the lower displacement member 440 is arranged at the second position and the distributing member 540 is arranged at the storage position, and the lower displacement member 440 is positioned in the retracted state. The states are illustrated. 51 and 52 show a state in which the ball receiving portion 467 of the lower displacement member 440 is arranged at the first position, and the distributing member 540 is arranged at the storage position. is shown.

As shown in FIGS. 47 and 48, in the state where the lower displacement member 440 is arranged in the retracted state and in the state where the ball bearing portion 467 of the lower displacement member 440 is arranged in the first position, the ball bearing portion A rack 466 for driving 467 is arranged on the other end side of the lower displacement member 440 (on the left side of the lower displacement member 440 when viewed from the front), and a movable rack 464 is arranged on the back side so as to overlap in the front-rear direction.

That is, the movable rack 464 is arranged on the other end side of the lower displacement member 440 (on the left side of the lower displacement member 440 when viewed from the front), similarly to the rack 466 . Therefore, the contact plate 464 c formed on the movable rack 464 is positioned on the other end side of the lower displacement member 440 . In this case, the side surface of the contact plate 464c on the other end side (the left side surface in the front view) is brought into contact with the projecting portion 543 of the distribution member 540 . As a result, the distribution member 540 is subjected to a driving force to rotate about the axis of the shaft hole 545, and is displaced to a position (restriction position) where the regulation plate 541 protrudes into the first ball throwing path KR1.

Therefore, when the lower displacement member 440 is retracted and the ball receiving portion 467 is placed at the first position, the ball thrown on the first ball-throwing path KR1 of the sorting unit 500 is not on the third ball-throwing path KR3. The ball is thrown to the second throw route KR2 without flowing down. Further, as described above, by displacing the sorting member 540 from the storage state in which the balls are stored above the storage plate 542 to the regulating position, the game player moves to the downstream side of the third ball-throwing path KR3 (downstream side of the storage plate 542). You can throw the ball. At this time, the game ball can be thrown to the inside of the ball receiving portion 467 by causing the ball receiving portion 467 to receive the ball.

In addition, the opening operation of the third electric accessory 82a for putting the game balls in the sorting unit 500 is performed before the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced to the first position. When displaced to the position, the third electric accessory 82a is closed. As a result, when the distribution member 540 is displaced from the storage position to the regulation position, the game balls passing through the first ball-throwing path KR1 are not restricted from flowing down by the regulation plate 541 and the storage plate 542, and unintended game balls It is possible to suppress the ball from being thrown to the downstream side of the 3-throwing route KR3.

In addition, since the distribution member 540 is formed to be operable in conjunction with the displacement of the ball receiving portion 467, the throwing of the game ball to the track area of the ball receiving portion 467 is restricted according to the displacement of the ball receiving portion 467. Or acceptable. That is, the control or permission of throwing a game ball can be switched mechanically in synchronization with the displacement of the ball receiving portion 467. Driving means for driving the distribution member 540 according to the detection result of 540, or control of each of these means, can be eliminated. can be planned.

Further, the distribution member 540 throws the game ball T2 to the track area of the ball receiving portion 467 in conjunction with the displacement of the ball receiving portion 467 from the second position in the first position direction (second direction). , the game ball can be reliably thrown to the area on the first direction side of the ball receiving portion 467 in the track area of the ball receiving portion 467 .

The ball receiving portion 467 is formed to be displaceable between a switching position for switching the distribution member 540 and a receiving position (second position) set at a position different from the switching position (first position). When the portion 467 is displaced to the switching position, the distribution destination by the distribution member 540 is switched to the third throwing path KR3. 467 can receive the game ball, and the distribution destination by the distribution member 540 is switched to the second ball throwing route KR2, so that the prescribed number (one ball in this embodiment) that the ball receiving portion 467 can receive the ball is set. It is possible to suppress the game ball exceeding the number from being distributed to the third throwing route KR3.

That is, when the switching position and the receiving position are set to the same position, the ball receiving portion 467 receives the game ball while the destination of distribution by the distribution member 540 is switched to the third ball throwing path. There is a risk that game balls exceeding the prescribed number that can be received by the ball receiving portion 467 will be distributed to the third ball throwing route KR3. If a separate means for restricting the inflow of game balls into the third ball throwing path KR3 is provided, the structure becomes complicated, the reliability is lowered, and the product cost is increased.

On the other hand, in the embodiment, after the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced to the switching position and a specified number (one ball in this embodiment) of game balls are distributed to the third ball throwing route KR3, the distribution member 540 is moved to the receiving position. , the distribution destination is switched to the second ball throwing route KR2, so that more than one game ball can be prevented from flowing down to the third ball throwing route. Therefore, the ball receiving portion 467 can suppress the game balls exceeding the defined number (one ball) that can be received from being distributed to the third ball throwing route KR3. Further, since there is no need to separately provide the aforementioned means (means for regulating the inflow of game balls into the third ball throwing path KR3), reliability can be improved and product costs can be reduced.

Moreover, when the power is turned on (turned on), the pachinko machine 10 starts from the position where each operation unit is turned off (turned off). Furthermore, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, only the control may be reset. In this case, if the sorting member 540 is provided with a driving means, when the power is turned on, the sorting unit 500 in the storage state operates during the initial operation to flow the game balls down the third ball throwing path KR3, A game ball may be thrown to the withdrawal side (first position side) of the ball receiving portion 467 arranged at the third position.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the displacement of the distribution member 540 and the displacement of the ball receiving portion 467 are synchronized. When the machine 10 is powered on, it is possible to prevent unintended game balls from being thrown to the trajectory area of the ball receiving part 467.例文帳に追加As a result, clogging of game balls inside the lower displacement member 440 can be suppressed.

Furthermore, when the power is turned off with the game ball left in the track area of the lower displacement member 440, the ball receiving part 467 is caused to perform the above-described discharging operation, so that the game ball is left in the track area of the ball receiving part 467. The game ball can be discharged to the outside of the lower displacement member 440 and recovered from the recovery port 411f.

Next, description will be made with reference to FIGS. 49 and 50. FIG. As shown in FIGS. 49 and 50, the lower displacement member 440 is arranged in the retracted state and the ball receiving portion 467 of the lower displacement member 440 is arranged at the second position or the third position (a position other than the first position). In this state, as described above, the rack 466 for driving the ball receiving portion 467 is arranged at the substantially central position of the lower displacement member 440 in the left-right direction (the left-right direction in FIG. 49), and the movable rack 464 is moved from the other end (the left side in the left-right direction in FIG. 49) to one end.

Therefore, the contact plate 464c formed on the movable rack 464 is arranged at a position spaced from the other end of the lower displacement member 4440 toward one end. In this case, the surface of the contact plate 464 c on the other end side (the surface on the left side in front view) is separated from the projecting portion 543 of the distribution member 540 . As a result, the distributing member 540 is rotated about the axis of the shaft hole 545 by the biasing force of the biasing spring SP4 interposed between the distributing member 540 and the base plate 520, and the storage plate 542 is moved to the third throw. It is displaced to a position (storage position) projected onto the route KR3.

Therefore, when the lower displacement member 440 is in the retracted state and the ball receiving portion 467 is arranged at the second position or the third position (position other than the first position), the first ball throwing path of the sorting unit 500 is A ball thrown to KR1 is in a state of being stopped above the storage plate 542 . Further, as described above, when the sorting unit 500 is in the storage state, the ball thrown to the first ball path KR1 collides with the ball stopped above the storage plate 542 and is thrown to the second ball path KR2. .

Next, description will be made with reference to FIGS. 51 and 52. FIG. As shown in FIGS. 51 and 52, when the lower displacement member 440 is arranged in the first extended state or the second extended state, the lower displacement member 440 slides relative to the front base 411 as described above. It is displaced and rotationally displaced. Therefore, the contact plate 464 c formed on the movable rack 464 is displaced with the displacement of the lower displacement member 440 and separated from the projecting portion 543 of the distribution member 540 . As a result, the distributing member 540 is rotated about the axis of the shaft hole 545 by the biasing force of the biasing spring SP4 interposed between the distributing member 540 and the base plate 520, and the storage plate 542 is moved to the third throw. It is displaced to a position (storage position) projected onto the route KR3.

Therefore, when the lower displacement member 440 is in the first protruding state or the second protruding state, the ball thrown to the first ball throwing path KR1 of the sorting unit 500 is stopped above the storage plate 542. be done. Further, as described above, when the sorting unit 500 is in the storage state, the ball thrown to the first ball path KR1 collides with the ball stopped above the storage plate 542 and is thrown to the second ball path KR2. .

That is, when the lower displacement member 440 is in the first protruding state and the second protruding state (states other than the retracted state), the opening 451a of the decorative member 450 is opened as the lower displacement member 440 is displaced. Since the position is displaced, the state of ball communication between the opening 451a and the opening 525a of the sorting unit 500 is released. Therefore, when a ball flows down the third ball throwing path KR3, there is a risk that the ball will be discharged into the interior of the rear case 300 through the opening 451a. It is possible to suppress the ball from flowing down the downstream side of the route KR3. As a result, it is possible to suppress the balls of the rear case 300 from being discharged inside.

In other words, the lower displacement member 440 of the lower displacement unit 400 is formed to be displaceable between the retracted state, the first extended state, and the second extended state. Since the ball receiving portion 467 is disposed on the lower displacement member 440, there is a state in which the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced while the lower displacement member 440 is disposed in the retracted state, and a state in which the ball receiving portion 467 is disposed in the first or second extended state. , the ball receiving portion 467 can be displaced. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect accordingly.

In this case, when the lower displacement member 440 is arranged in the first or second overhanging state, the ball receiving portion 467 cannot receive the game ball from the rolling portion 525 of the third ball throwing route KR3. The rolling portion 525 and the opening 451a of the lower displacement member 440 are in a state of non-communication). Therefore, in a state in which the ball receiving portion 467 cannot receive a game ball (a state in which the lower displacement member 440 is arranged in the first protruding state or the second protruding state), the distribution destination by the distribution member 540 is the third ball path. It is possible to suppress switching to KR3.

Further, since the distributing member 540 is arranged on the base plate 520 of the distributing unit 500 which is formed as a separate member from the base member 470 of the lower displacement member 440, the size of the base member 470 of the lower displacement member 440 is correspondingly increased. can be suppressed.

Here, the displacement of the lower displacement member 440 from the first protruded state to the retracted state is not only laterally rotationally displaced but also rotationally displaced. In addition, there is a possibility that the protrusion 543 of the distributing member 540 contacts the upper surface of the contact plate 464c and the distributing member 540 cannot be rotationally displaced.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, when the lower displacement unit 400 is displaced from the first overhang position shown in FIG. (second position or third position). As a result, the contact plate 464 c of the displacement member 440 displaced to the retracted state can be prevented from colliding with the projecting portion 543 . As a result, it is possible to prevent the distribution member 540 from being rotationally displaced due to the protrusion 543 of the distribution member 540 coming into contact with the upper surface of the contact plate 464c.

Further, since the distributing member 540 is formed with the bulging portion 543a as described above, when the lower displacement unit 400 is displaced from the first extended state to the retracted state due to control failure or the like, the abutment plate 464c may be displaced. Even when the projecting portion 543 of the distribution member 540 comes into contact with the upper surface, the distribution member 540 can be rotationally displaced.

That is, since the contact area with the contact plate 464c can be reduced by the bulging portion 543a, the bulging portion 543a can be easily slid along the surface when the contact plate 464c contacts. Therefore, the distribution member 540 can be easily rotationally displaced. As a result, it is possible to prevent the distribution member 540 from being rotationally displaced due to the protrusion 543 of the distribution member 540 coming into contact with the upper surface of the contact plate 464c.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 53 to 56, the configuration of the drive transmission portion of rotation unit 700 will be described. 53 is a front view of the rotation unit 700, FIG. 54 is a rear view of the rotation unit 700, FIG. 55 is an exploded perspective front view of the rotation unit 700, and FIG. It is a rear perspective view.

As shown in FIGS. 53 to 56, the rotation unit 700 includes a decoration unit 750 composed of a plurality of displacement members, a ball bearing base 710 arranged above the decoration unit 750 in the gravitational direction, and a ball bearing base 710 arranged above the decoration unit 750 in the direction of gravity. 710 and a rear base 720 arranged on the rear side of the decoration unit 750, a left transmission member 730 arranged on the left side of the decoration unit 750 when viewed from the front, and a right transmission member arranged on the right side of the decoration unit 750 when viewed from the front. 740 and .

The ball receiving base 710 is a member for dropping the game ball emitted from the emission opening 471 on one side of the lower displacement member 440 of the lower displacement unit 400 described above. As a result, the ball thrown to the inner side of the lower displacement member 440 can be thrown to the rotation unit 700 . A detailed configuration of the ball cradle 710 will be described later.

The decoration unit 750 is a substantially D-shaped block with a curved portion arranged upward in a side view, and the front side is decorated with characters and patterns. Also, the decoration unit 750 is composed of a plurality of members, and is configured to be displaceable by transmission of a driving force, which will be described later. Note that the configuration of the decoration unit 750 will be described later.

The rear base 720 is a plate member that connects the rear side of the ball holder 710 and the rear side of the decoration unit 750, and is formed in a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the front. As described above, since the decoration unit 750 is composed of a plurality of movable members, the fastening portion thereof is limited. By connecting , the decorative unit 750 and the ball receiving base 710 can be assembled as one unit while securing the movable range of the decorative unit 750 .

The left transmission member 730 is mounted with a drive motor KM4 disposed on the left side (left side of FIG. 53) of the decoration unit 750, a transmission member 730 for transmitting the driving force of the drive motor KM4, and the drive motor KM4. It mainly includes a motor base 732, a gear cover 733 that covers the transmission member 730, and a ball throw path cover 734 that is attached to the gear cover 733 and forms a predetermined gap between the gear cover 733 and the gear cover 733. be.

The drive motor KM4 is a drive source for moving each member of the decoration unit 750, which will be described later. Drive of the drive motor KM4 is transmitted by a transmission member 730, which will be described later.

The transmission member 730 includes a transmission gear 731a attached to the shaft of the drive motor KM4, a transmission gear 731b meshing with the transmission gear 731a, a transmission gear 731c meshing with the transmission gear 731b, and a transmission gear 731c. and a transmission gear 731d arranged coaxially with a shaft 735, and a load gear 731e meshing with the transmission gear 731d.

The transmission gear 731a is attached to the drive motor KM4 as described above, and rotates when the drive motor KM4 is rotationally driven.

A one-way clutch OW1 is disposed inside the transmission gear 731b, and the inner ring of the one-way clutch OW1 is connected to a shaft portion JB1 that transmits the rotational driving force of the decoration unit 750 to the right transmission member 740 on the right side.

The one-way clutch OW1 includes an inner ring having a cam surface formed on its outer peripheral surface, an outer ring arranged outside the inner ring, and a plurality of springs and rollers between the inner ring and the outer ring. When the outer ring tries to rotate in one direction with respect to the inner ring, the contact surface pressure between the cam surface and the roller increases, acting as resistance and transmitting power to the inner ring, causing the outer ring to rotate in the other direction with respect to the inner ring. This is a cam-type clutch that slides and disconnects the power transmission when the roller rotates to the right, the contact surface pressure between the cam surface and the roller decreases.

Therefore, when the driving force in one direction is transmitted from the drive motor KM4, the transmission gear 731b can transmit the rotational driving force to the shaft portion JB1, and when the driving force in the other direction is transmitted from the driving motor KM4, The outer ring slips with respect to the inner ring and the transmission of the driving force to the shaft portion JB1 is interrupted.

The transmission gear 731c is internally provided with a one-way clutch OW1 like the transmission gear 731b. A shaft 735 is arranged inside the one-way clutch OW1 of the transmission gear 731c.

Therefore, the transmission gear 731c can transmit the rotational driving force to the shaft 735 when the driving force in one direction is transmitted from the driving motor KM4, and can transmit the driving force in the other direction from the driving motor KM4. The outer ring slides against the shaft 735 and the transmission of the driving force to the shaft 735 is interrupted. The transmission gear 731c is meshed with the transmission gear 731b, and the directions of rotation thereof are opposite to each other. Therefore, when the transmission gear 731b rotates in one direction, the transmission gear 731c rotates in the other direction. On the other hand, when the transmission gear 731b is rotated in the other direction, the transmission gear 731b is rotated in one direction. That is, by switching the rotation direction of the drive motor KM4, the mode is switched to the mode in which the shaft portion JB1 rotates or the mode in which the shaft 735 rotates.

Transmission gear 731 d is attached to shaft 735 . As described above, shaft 735 is rotated only when transmission gear 731c is rotated in one direction. Therefore, the transmission gear 731c rotates in one direction only when the transmission gear 731c is rotated in one direction, and does not rotate in the other direction.

The load gear 731 e is connected to a shaft portion 791 a of a resistance member 791 having a shaft hole attached to the box member 760 . The resistance member 791 is formed with a shaft portion 791 a rotatable with respect to a base portion fastened to the box member 760 . The resistance member 791 is formed to provide a predetermined amount of resistance when the shaft portion 791a rotates with respect to the base portion. That is, since a predetermined amount of force is required to rotate the shaft portion 791a, a force equal to or greater than the predetermined amount is also required to rotate the load gear 731e connected to the shaft portion 791a.

As a result, when the rotating body 800 meshing with the transmission gear 731d is rotated by the rotation of the transmission gear 731d and stopped, it is possible to suppress the rotation due to the inertial force. That is, the resistance when the shaft portion 791a rotates with respect to the base portion is set larger than the inertial force acting around the axis of the rotating body 800 when the rotation of the rotating body 800 stops.

In addition, the load gear 731e is connected to a transmission gear 731d coaxially arranged with the transmission gear 731c. Therefore, the resistance of the load gear 731e applied to the drive motor KM4 can be limited to one-way rotation of the transmission gear 731d. That is, when the transmission gear 731c rotates in the other direction, the transmission of drive between the transmission gear 731c and the transmission gear 731d is interrupted, so that the resistance of the load gear 731e can be suppressed. As a result, when the transmission gear 731b is rotated in one direction, it is possible to suppress the resistance of the load gear 731e.

The motor base 732 is formed in a box-like body that is open on the decoration unit 750 side, and the drive motor KM4 is arranged outside the bottom of the box (left side in FIG. 53) with its shaft inserted through the inside of the box. Thereby, the transmission gear 731 a connected to the shaft of the drive motor KM4 can be arranged inside the motor base 732 . That is, the depth dimension of the box of the motor base 732 is set larger than the width dimension of the transmission gear 731a. As a result, the drive motor KM4 and the transmission gear 731a can be installed in the decoration unit 750 with the drive motor KM4 and the transmission gear 731a attached to the motor base 732, and the transmission gear 731a can be prevented from colliding with the decoration unit 750. FIG.

The gear cover 733 is formed in a vertically long rectangular shape when viewed from the rear, and is fastened to the decoration unit 750 with the left transmission member 730 disposed therebetween. A through hole 733a is formed through the decoration unit 750 at a position facing the shaft hole of the rotating body 800, which will be described later. As a result, the ball rolling inside the rotating body 800 can be ejected to the outside through the through hole 733a. The ball thrown to the rotating body 800 will be described later.

The ball feed path cover 734 is a member arranged outside the gear cover 733 (on the left side in FIG. 53). As a result, a gap can be formed between the gear cover 733 and the ball feed path cover 734, and the ball inserted through the through hole 733a of the gear cover 733 can be passed through the gap and discharged to the outside of the rotation unit 700. can be done. The ball ejected from the gap between the gear cover 733 and the ball throwing path cover is thrown to a recovery path (not shown) and recovered.

The right transmission member 740 includes a rotating member 741 connected to the other end of the shaft portion JB1, an arm member 742 having one end connected to the rotating member 741, and the rotating member 741 and the arm member 742. A crank cover 743 arranged in the decoration unit 750 in a closed state is formed.

The rotating member 741 includes a main body portion 741b formed in a disk-like plate shape, a one-way clutch OW1 fitted to the shaft of the main body portion 741b, and a cylindrical member projecting to the opposite side of the decoration unit 750 (the right side in FIG. 53). The projection 741a is mainly provided.

One-way clutch OW1 attached to rotating member 741 has an inner ring shaft hole inserted into the other end side of shaft portion JB. In addition, the one-way clutch OW1 is arranged so that the inner ring and the outer ring are not transmitted when rotation opposite to the rotation direction of the shaft portion JB1 is input to the inner ring.

As a result, when a driving force having a rotational speed higher than the rotational speed transmitted from the shaft portion JB1 to the rotating member 741 is input to the outer ring of the one-way clutch OW1, only the outer ring is rotated and the rotating member 741 is driven by the drive motor KM4. It can be rotated by driving force other than drive. As a result, the rotating member 741 can be rotated at two or more different speeds.

The arm member 742 has a shape combining a C shape and an I shape when viewed from the side, and is formed by connecting one end of the C shape to the other end of the I shape. In addition, the arm member 742 includes a shaft hole 742a penetrating through the connecting portion between the C-shaped portion and the I-shaped portion, an elliptical first sliding groove 742b penetrating through one end of the I-shaped portion, A second elliptical sliding groove 742c penetrating through the other end of the letter portion is formed.

The shaft hole 742a is a hole into which a shaft portion 764a formed on a right side plate 764 of the box member 760, which will be described later, is inserted, and is formed to have an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the shaft portion 764a. Therefore, the arm member 742 is arranged in the decoration unit 750 with the shaft portion 764a inserted into the shaft hole 742a, so that the arm member 742 is rotatable with respect to the decoration unit 750. As shown in FIG.

The first sliding groove 742b is a hole into which the protrusion 741a of the rotating member 741 is inserted, and the width dimension in the lateral direction of the oval is set larger than the outer diameter of the protrusion 741a. Therefore, the protrusion 741a can be inserted inside the first sliding groove 742b, and the rotation of the rotating member 741 can cause the arm member 742 to be rotationally displaced.

The rotary member 741 has an outer diameter that is smaller than the longitudinal dimension of the I-shaped portion of the arm member 742, and a shaft that extends from the shaft hole 742a of the arm member 742 to half the longitudinal dimension of the I-shaped portion. placed farther apart than Accordingly, by rotating the rotating member 741, the arm member 742 can be caused to reciprocate in rotation about the axis of the shaft hole 742a.

The second sliding groove 742c is a hole into which a projection 773a of the right lid portion 773, which will be described later, is inserted. Therefore, the projection 773a can be inserted inside the second sliding groove 742c. Also, the right lid portion 773 is formed to be rotatably displaceable with respect to the box member 760 . Therefore, the rotating member 741 is rotated as described above, and the arm member 742 reciprocates in rotation, thereby rotating the right lid portion 773 connected to the other end of the arm member 742 with respect to the box member 760. be able to.

The crank cover 743 mainly includes an elliptical portion 743a formed in an elliptical shape when viewed from the rear, and a ball-throwing portion 743b formed continuously on the rear side of the elliptical portion 743a.

The elliptical portion 743a is a cover that covers the arm member 742, and has an outer shape larger than the arm member 742 and the displacement region of the arm member 742 when viewed from the side. A wall is formed which protrudes more than the thickness of the . Accordingly, when the crank cover 743 is arranged on the decoration unit 750, the arm member 742 can be arranged between the crank cover 743 and the decoration unit 750 facing each other.

The ball throwing part 743b is a path member for throwing the ball to the recovery path when the ball flowing down the flow-down area in front of the game board 13 is recovered from a predetermined recovery port. It is shaped like a bar with a space of height. The ball feeding portion 743b is connected at its upper end to an opening of the game board 13 and connected to an opening formed in the decoration unit 750 at its lower end. As a result, the balls collected on the game board 13 can be passed through the interior of the decoration unit 750 via the ball feeding portion 743b and guided to a collection path (not shown).

Next, the decoration unit 750 will be described with reference to FIGS. 57 to 61. FIG. 57 is a front view of the decoration unit 750. FIG. 58(a) is a side view of the decoration unit 750 as viewed in the direction of arrow LVIIIa in FIG. 57, and FIG. 58(b) is a side view of the decoration unit 750 as viewed in the direction of arrow LVIIIb in FIG. 59 is an exploded perspective front view of the decoration unit 750, and FIG. 60 is an exploded perspective rear view of the decoration unit 750. FIG. 57(b) and 57(c), the right side plate 764 and the left side plate 765 of the box member 760 are illustrated in a transparent state.

As shown in FIGS. 57 to 60, the decoration unit 750 includes a box member 760 serving as a decoration portion on the outside of the decoration unit 750 and a lid disposed above the box member 760 in the gravitational direction (upper side in FIG. 57(a)). It mainly includes a member 770 and a rotating body 800 arranged inside the box member 760 and the lid member 770 .

The box member 760 includes a base member 762 arranged below the rotating body 800, a front plate 761 arranged in front of the base member 762, a lower plate 763 arranged on the bottom surface of the base member 762, It mainly includes a right side plate 764 arranged on the right side of the base member 762 in front view, and a left side plate 765 arranged on the left side of the base member 762 in front view.

The base member 762 is formed in a horizontally elongated rectangular shape that is larger than the rotating body 800 when viewed from above, and is formed with a thickness in the direction of gravity greater than the outer diameter of the sphere. The base member 762 has a curved upper surface coaxial with the axis of the rotating body 800 . As a result, collision between the base member 762 and the rotating body 800 can be suppressed when the base member 762 is arranged in the vicinity of the rotating body 800 .

The base member 762 mainly includes a recess 762a recessed downward in the left-right direction on the top surface and a ball-throwing part 762b recessed in a substantially L shape on the bottom surface.

The concave portion 762a is a groove in which the shaft portion JB1 described above is arranged, and is recessed on the shaft of the transmission gear 731b arranged on the side surface of the decoration unit 750. As shown in FIG. Thereby, the driving force of the driving motor KM4 can be transmitted via the shaft portion JB1.

The ball-throwing part 762b is bent in an L-shape and recessed on the bottom surface. connected to Also, the recessed width of the ball feeding portion 762b is formed to be larger than the diameter of the ball. Accordingly, the ball can be thrown inside the box member 760 by arranging the lower surface plate 763 on the lower side.

The front plate 761 is formed to have a horizontally long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and is formed to have a predetermined thickness on the back side. In addition, the front plate 761 is formed with a winning opening 761a having a size that allows a ball to be inserted on the front side. The prize winning opening 761a is connected to the ball throwing portion 762b of the base member 762 arranged on the back side as described above. Therefore, the ball thrown into the winning opening 761 a is thrown to the ball-throwing portion 762 b of the base member 762 .

The right side plate 764 is formed in a D shape with an upwardly curved outer shape when viewed from the side. The right side plate 764 includes a shaft portion 764a protruding outside the decoration unit 750, a bearing portion 764c penetrating below the shaft portion 764a, and a curved shape having the same axis as the rotation axis of the rotating body 800. an opening 764b that opens at a position facing the lower end of the ball feeding portion 762b of the crank cover 743; It is formed mainly including an engaging portion 764e.

The opening 764b is a hole for allowing the ball thrown from the ball-throwing portion of the crank cover 743 to be thrown to the base member 762, and is formed larger than the outer diameter of the ball. As a result, the ball thrown to the crank cover 743 can be thrown to the base member 762 .

The bearing portion 764c is a hole into which the above-described shaft portion JB1 is inserted, and is formed with an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the shaft portion JB1. Thereby, the driving force can be transmitted to the right transmission member 740 described above.

The curved opening 764d is an opening through which a protrusion 773a protruding from the right lid portion 773 is inserted. Further, the curved opening 764d is formed in an arc shape coaxial with the rotation axis of the lid member 770 because the lid member 770 is rotationally displaced. Thereby, when the lid member 770 is rotationally displaced, it is possible to suppress collision between the projection 773a and the curved opening 764d.

The engaging portion 764e is a member that engages with the right end portion of the base plate 810 disposed inside the rotating body 800 in a front view to hold the base plate 810 so as not to rotate. That is, the tip portion 811a of the right end portion 811 of the base plate 810 is inserted into the engaging portion 764e. This makes the base plate 810 non-rotatable.

The left side plate 765 is formed to have substantially the same outer shape as the right side plate 764 when viewed from the side. The left side plate 765 includes a through hole 765a formed through the shaft of the rotating body 800, a shaft portion 765b projecting toward the rotating body 800, and a through hole into which the shaft portion 791a of the resistance member 791 is inserted. It is formed mainly with holes 765c.

The through-hole 765a is an opening for inserting the ball ejected from the opening on the left side of the rotating body 800 in front view into the through-hole 733a of the motor base 732 described above. That is, the through hole 765a is formed on the axis of the rotating body 800, and its inner diameter is set to be the same size as the inner diameter of the opening of the rotating body 800 on the left side in the front view.

The shaft portion 765b is inserted into a shaft hole 781 formed in a rotation restricting member 780, which will be described later, and can hold the rotation restricting member 780 in a rotatable state. Displacement of the rotation restricting member 780 will be described later.

The through hole 765c is a hole through which the shaft portion 791a of the resistance member 791 is inserted as described above, and is formed at a position facing the side surface of the load gear 731e described above.

The lower surface plate 763 is a plate member that is disposed on the lower surface of the base member 762 so that the ball throwing portion 762b of the base member 762 and the lower surface plate 763 form a ball-throwing path through which the ball can pass. In addition, the bottom plate 763 is formed with an opening 763a penetrating in the vertical direction. The opening 763a is an opening for throwing a ball thrown inside the ball-throwing portion 762b to a recovery path (not shown). Therefore, the winning ball and the ball sent from the winning hole 761 a of the front plate 761 and the game area to the ball feeding portion 743 b of the right transmission member 740 can be ejected from the interior of the decoration unit 750 .

The lid member 770 includes a curved lid portion 771 formed in a curved shape coaxial with the axis of the rotating body 800 , a right lid portion 773 fastened to the right side surface of the curved lid portion 771 when viewed from the front, and the curved lid portion 771 . It mainly includes a left lid portion 772 that is fastened to the left side surface of the front view.

As described above, the curved lid portion 771 has a curved shape coaxial with the axis of the rotating body 800 and has a radius larger than that of the rotating body 800 when viewed from the side. The curved lid portion 771 has a transparent portion 771a formed of a transparent plate on a part of the front side.

The transparent portion 771a is a plate that allows the player to visually recognize patterns, characters, and the like drawn on the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 800 from the player. That is, the player can visually recognize the display of the rotating body 800 through the transparent portion 771a even when the upper end side of the rotating body 800 is covered with the lid member 770. FIG.

The right lid portion 773 is formed in an annular shape when viewed from the side, and the radius of the outer side of the annular ring is set substantially equal to the radius of the curved lid portion 771 . In addition, the inner diameter of the right lid portion 773 is formed to be larger than the size of the outer shape of the right end portion 811 of the rotating body 800 when viewed from the side. As a result, the right lid portion 773 is disposed in a state in which the right end portion 811 of the rotating body 800 is inserted through the annular inner portion.

Further, the right lid portion 773 is mainly formed with a projection 773a projecting to the outside (right side in front view) of the decoration unit 750 and a recess 773b recessed radially inward in the outer peripheral edge portion. . The projection 773a is a projection inserted into the second sliding groove 742c of the decoration unit 750 of the arm member 742, as described above.

The concave portion 773b can rotate the opening/closing member 870 by inserting a protrusion 871 of the opening/closing member 870, which will be described later. Therefore, the width of the recessed portion 773 b is set to be larger than the outer shape of the projection 871 . Further, the recess 773b is formed at a position substantially opposite to the edge of the right lid portion 773 where the curved lid portion 771 is arranged.

The left lid portion 772 is formed in an annular shape when viewed from the side, and the radius of the outer side of the annular ring is set substantially equal to the radius of the curved lid portion 771 . In addition, the inner diameter of the left lid portion 772 is formed to be larger than the outer diameter of the tooth surface 881a of the left rotating portion 880, which will be described later. As a result, the left lid portion 772 is arranged in a state in which the left rotating portion 880 of the rotating body 800 is inserted through the annular inner portion.

Further, the left lid portion 772 is formed with a plate-shaped sensor plate 772a projecting to the outside of the decoration unit 750 (left side in front view). The sensor plate 772a can detect the position of the left side lid portion 772 by being arranged between opposing bifurcated sensors (not shown).

Here, the lid member 770 for the rotating body 800 will be described. The arrangement of the lid member 770 in the assembled state of the rotating body 800 is the state in which the right and left ends of the rotating body 800 are respectively inserted inside the right lid portion 773 and the left lid portion 772 (separate members) before assembly. do. Then, the rotating body 800 and the lid member 770 are connected by assembling the right lid portion 773 , the left lid portion 772 , and the curved lid portion 771 . Therefore, the lid member 770 is rotatable about the axis of the rotating body 800 with respect to the rotating body.

The rotation restricting member 780 is bent in a substantially L-shape when viewed from the side. The rotation restricting member 780 mainly includes a shaft hole 781 passing through the bent portion, a protrusion 782 projecting in the bending direction on one end side, and a flat contact surface 783 formed on the tip of the other end side. be done.

The shaft portion 765b of the left side plate 765 is inserted into the shaft hole 781 as described above. Thereby, the rotation restricting member 780 is rotatably held with respect to the left side plate 765 . Also, a biasing spring SP5 is inserted into the shaft portion. As a result, a unidirectional rotational force acts on the rotation restricting member 780 .

The protrusion 782 can regulate the rotational displacement of the rotating body 800 by engaging with an engaging protrusion 882 of the left rotating portion 880 described later. The abutment surface 783 is a surface with which the rear end of the lid member 770 abuts, and the rotation restricting member 780 can be rotated by the abutment of the lid member 770 . It should be noted that the manner in which the rotation restricting member 780 and the rotating body 800 are restricted will be described later.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 61 and 62, the drive force transmission path when the drive motor KM4 is rotated will be described. 61(a) and 62(a) show the rotation unit 700 as viewed in the direction of arrow LVa in FIG. 55, and FIGS. be.

In FIG. 61, the direction of displacement of each member when the shaft of the drive motor KM4 is rotated in the positive direction (clockwise) is indicated by a chain double-dashed line. In FIG. 62, the direction of displacement of each member when the shaft of the drive motor KM4 is rotated in the negative direction (counterclockwise) is indicated by a chain double-dashed line.

As shown in FIGS. 61(a) and 61(b), when the drive motor KM4 is driven in the forward direction, the transmission gear 731a rotates in the forward direction. When the transmission gear 731a rotates in the positive direction, the transmission gear 731b rotates in the negative direction, and the transmission gear 731c rotates in the positive direction.

In this case, the one-way clutch OW1 provided in the transmission gear 731b does not transmit the rotation of the outer ring to the inner ring, and the shaft portion JB1 does not rotate. Therefore, the driving force is not transmitted to the rotating member 741 connected to the shaft portion JB1, and the arm member 742 is brought into a stopped state.

On the other hand, the one-way clutch OW1 provided in the transmission gear 731 is in a state of transmitting the rotation of the outer ring to the inner ring, and the shaft 735 is rotated. Therefore, the transmission gear 731d connected to the shaft 735 is rotated. As a result, the load gear 731e meshing with the transmission gear 731d and the tooth surface 881a of the rotor 800 are rotated. That is, when the driving motor KM4 rotates forward, the driving force to the lid member 770 is not transmitted, and the driving force to the rotating body 800 is transmitted.

As shown in FIGS. 62(a) and 62(b), when the drive motor KM4 is driven in the negative direction, the transmission gear 731a is rotated in the negative direction. When the transmission gear 731a is rotated in the negative direction, the transmission gear 731b is rotated in the positive direction, and the transmission gear 731c is rotated in the negative direction.

In this case, the one-way clutch OW1 provided in the transmission gear 731b is in a state of transmitting the rotation of the outer ring to the inner ring, and the shaft portion JB1 is rotated. Therefore, the driving force is transmitted to the rotating member 741 connected to the shaft portion JB1, and the rotating member 741 is rotated. As a result, the arm member 742 rotates and reciprocates about the axis of the shaft hole 742a, and the cover member 770 is displaced.

On the other hand, the one-way clutch OW1 arranged on the transmission gear 731 does not transmit the rotation of the outer ring to the inner ring, and the shaft 735 does not rotate. Therefore, the driving force is not transmitted to the transmission gear 731d connected to the shaft 735, and the rotating body 800 and the load gear 731e are brought into a non-rotating state. That is, when the driving motor KM4 rotates in the negative direction, the driving force to the lid member 770 is transmitted, and the driving force to the rotating body 800 is not transmitted.

Therefore, a transmission gear 731c (rotating side driving means) for transmitting the driving force from the drive motor KM4 to the rotating body 800 and a transmission gear 731b (displacement side transmitting means) for transmitting to an opening/closing member 870 to be described later via the cover member 770. In addition, by disposing the one-way clutch OW1, it is possible to transmit the torque to one of the transmission gear 731c or the transmission gear 731b and block the transmission to the other depending on the direction of rotation of the drive motor KM4. . As a result, only by switching the rotation direction of the drive motor KM4, it is possible to switch the driven target driven by the rotational driving force. It is possible to switch between stopping and displacing and stopping the opening/closing member 870, thereby simplifying the structure while making it possible to form a plurality of modes.

Here, in a structure in which the one-way clutch OW1 is used to switch the object to be driven (the rotating body 800 or the opening/closing member 870 (cover member 770) according to the rotation direction of the driving means, transmission of the driving force from the driving motor KM4 is When cut off, it becomes free to rotate or displace in the direction in which it was driven by the driving force.Therefore, for example, the driven object of the driving means is switched from the rotating body 800 to the opening/closing member 870 (cover member 770). When the transmission of the driving force is interrupted, the rotating body 800 becomes rotatable and may continue to rotate (rotate) due to inertial force.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, since the load gear 731e (loading gear) meshing with the transmission gear 731d driven by the transmission gear 731c is provided, transmission of the rotational driving force from the drive motor KM4 is interrupted. However, the load (resistance) generated when the load gear 731e is rotated can be used to prevent the rotating body 800 from continuing to rotate.

Next, displacement of the lid member 770 will be described with reference to FIGS. 63 and 64. FIG. Figures 63(a) and 64(c) are in the closed state, Figures 63(b) and 64(b) are in the intermediate state, and Figures 63(c) and 64(a) are in the open state. FIG. 7 is a side view of the decoration unit 750 and the right transmission member 740;

63(a) to 63(c) and FIGS. 64(a) to 64(c) illustrate a state in which the crank cover 743 of the right transmission member 740 is removed. The closed state of the decoration unit 750 is a state in which the lid member 770 is arranged to cover the upper half of the rotating body 800 (upper side in FIG. 63(a)). It is displaced and arranged on the back side of the rotating body 800 (the right side in FIG. 63(c)). The intermediate state is a state in which lid member 770 is positioned between the closed state and the open state.

Further, in FIGS. 63(a) to 63(c), the state of being displaced from the closed state to the open state is illustrated in order, and in FIGS. 64(a) to 64(c), the displacement from the open state to the closed state is illustrated. The states to be executed are illustrated in order.

First, referring to FIG. 63, the displacement of the lid member 770 when it is displaced from the closed state to the open state will be described. The drive force is transmitted to the arm member 742 by rotating the drive motor KM4 in the negative direction as described above.

In the closed state, the protrusion 741a of the rotating member 741 is arranged on the rear side (right side in FIG. 63(a)) of the shaft hole 742a of the arm member 742. As shown in FIG. Therefore, in the arm member 742, the first sliding groove 742b into which the protrusion 741a is inserted is arranged on the rear side of the shaft hole 742a.

The shaft hole 742a of the arm member 742, the first sliding groove 742b and the second sliding groove 742c are formed substantially on the same straight line. Therefore, the second sliding groove 742c formed at the opposite end of the first sliding groove 742b is positioned closer to the front side (left side in FIG. 63(a)) than the shaft hole 742a. As a result, the protrusion 773 a protruding from the right side surface of the lid member 770 is guided by the second slide groove 742 c so that the curved lid portion 771 of the lid member 770 is arranged above the rotating body 800 .

Next, as shown in FIG. 63(b), when the rotating member 741 is rotated approximately 90 degrees to position the projection 741a below the shaft of the rotating member 741, the first sliding groove 742b of the arm member 742 is moved. , along with the displacement of the projection 741a, the shaft hole 742a is displaced downward in the gravitational direction (downward in FIG. 63(b)).

Therefore, the second sliding groove 742c formed at the opposite end of the first sliding groove 742b is positioned above the shaft hole 742a in the gravitational direction (upper side in FIG. 63(b)). As a result, the protrusion 773a of the lid member 770 is guided by the second slide groove 742c, and the curved lid portion 771 of the lid member 770 is placed in a position where it is rotationally displaced toward the back side of the rotating body 800. .

In this case, the center of gravity of lid member 770 is arranged on the back side of the rotation axis of lid member 770 (the center position of rotating body 800 formed in a cylindrical shape). Therefore, due to the load of the lid member 770, a rotational force acts in the direction of displacing the lid member 770 from the closed state to the open state. As described above, the rotating member 741 is provided with the one-way clutch OW1 so that the outer ring can rotate ahead of the inner ring. , the cover member 770 can be continuously rotated.

As shown in FIG. 63(c), when the lid member 770 is displaced to the rear side of the rotating body, the projection 741a of the rotating member 741 is stopped at a position rotated approximately 90 degrees from the position of the intermediate state. That is, it is the leftmost (left side in FIG. 63) end of the displacement area of the projection 741a. Therefore, the rotation of the arm member 742 is restricted and the rotation of the lid member 770 is stopped.

That is, the displacement of the lid member 770 from the closed state to the open state is performed by driving the drive motor KM4 to displace it to the intermediate state and by dropping the lid member 770 under load.

As a result, when the lid member 770 is displaced from the closed state to the open state, the section in which the drive motor KM4 is driven can be reduced to half of the entire section, so the energy consumption of the drive motor KM4 can be reduced.

Furthermore, the speed of displacement from the closed state to the intermediate state can be made to follow the rotation speed of the drive motor KM4, and the speed of displacement from the intermediate state to the open state can be made to follow the load of the lid member 770. The displacement speed from the closed state to the open state can be changed in two stages. Therefore, since the displacement speed of the lid member 770 can be changed without changing the displacement speed of the drive motor KM4, it is not necessary to complicate the control. As a result, the control can be simplified, and the occurrence of control failure can be suppressed.

A section in which the cover member 770 is displaced according to the rotation speed of the drive motor KM4 is called a first section, and a section in which the cover member 770 is displaced according to the load of the cover member 770 is called a second section. will be described with reference numeral DK2 attached to the second interval.

Next, referring to FIG. 64, the displacement of the lid member 770 when it is displaced from the open state to the closed state will be described.

As described above, in the open state, the projection 741a of the rotating member 741 is arranged on the front side (left side in FIG. The portion 771 is arranged on the back side of the rotating body 800 .

Next, as shown in FIG. 64(b), when the rotating member 741 is rotated approximately 90 degrees to position the protrusion 741a above the shaft of the rotating member 741, the first sliding groove 742b of the arm member 742 is moved. As the projection 741a is displaced, the shaft hole 742a is displaced downward in the gravity direction (downward in FIG. 64(b)).

Therefore, the second sliding groove 742c formed at the opposite end of the first sliding groove 742b is positioned above the shaft hole 742a in the gravitational direction (upper side in FIG. 64(b)). As a result, the protrusion 773a of the lid member 770 is guided by the second sliding groove 742c, and the curved lid portion 771 of the lid member 770 is rotated upward by about 45 degrees from the state where it is located on the back side of the rotating body 800. It is placed in the position where the

In addition, the lid member 770 displaced to the closed position (the position of FIG. 63(a)) is arranged in the game area (the front side of the game board 13), and is placed in the open position (the position of FIG. 63(c)). position) is placed outside the game area (on the back side of the game board 13). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game ball flowing down the game area from colliding with the rotating body 800 and rotating the rotating body 800 . In particular, in the present embodiment, as will be described later, the rotating body 800 is provided with an opening/closing member 870 that displaces toward the game area side. It is possible to suppress the opening (extending) of the opening/closing member 870 .

Also, since the lid member 770 is placed outside the game area in the open position, the displacement of the lid member 770 to the open position creates a space for the opening/closing member 870 to protrude into the game area. can be secured. Accordingly, the outer surface of the rotating body 800 can be brought closer to the game area side, and the opening/closing member 870 can be easily recognized by the player.

Further, the cover member 770 is rotatable about an axis substantially parallel to the rotation axis of the rotating body 800 and is formed in a curved plate shape along the outer surface of the rotating body 800. The space required for shifting between the position (covered position) and the open position (retracted position) can be reduced, so that space for arranging other members can be secured accordingly. In addition, by forming the lid member 770 in such a curved manner, the game ball flowing down the game area is suppressed from being stopped on the lid member 770 arranged in the position of the closed state, and is smoothly opened. can flow down to

Next, as shown in FIG. 64(c), when the rotating member 741 is further rotated approximately 90 degrees to displace the projection 71a to the right side of the axis of the rotating member 741, the first sliding groove 742b of the arm member 742 is displaced. is displaced to the rear side (right side in FIG. 64(c)) from the shaft hole 742a as the projection 741a is displaced.

Therefore, the second sliding groove 742c formed at the opposite end of the first sliding groove 742b is arranged on the front side (left side in FIG. 64(c)) of the shaft hole 742a. As a result, the protrusion 773 a of the lid member 770 is guided by the second sliding groove 742 c to place the curved lid portion 771 of the lid member 770 above the rotating body 800 .

In this case, as the lid member 770 is displaced, the center of gravity of the lid member 770 is displaced from the rotation axis of the lid member 770 to the front side. Therefore, during the transition from the intermediate state to the closed state, the load of the lid member 770 acts on the rotational force in the direction of displacing the lid member 770 from the open state to the closed state. Therefore, even when the driving of the drive motor KM4 is stopped, the lid member 770 can be continuously rotated by the load of the lid member 770 .

Therefore, the lid member 770 can be brought into the closed state by the load of the lid member 770, so that the lid member 770 can be reliably brought into the closed state.

Here, if the rotational displacement of the lid member 770 is caused only by the drive motor KM4, there is a possibility that the lid member 770 cannot be stopped at the normal position if the driving stop operation of the drive motor KM4 is deviated. Further, in the case where the rotating member 741 rotates in one direction as in the present embodiment, if the stopping operation of the drive motor KM4 is delayed, one rotation is required to return it to the normal position.

In contrast, in the present embodiment, the position where the lid member 770 is to be stopped can be mechanically stopped by using the load of the lid member 770, so that the deviation of the stop position of the lid member 770 can be suppressed. can.

Here, a game machine is known that includes driving means for generating a driving force, a displacement member displaced by the driving force of the driving means, and transmission means for transmitting the driving force to the displacement member. However, in the above-described conventional game machine, the state of transmission of the driving force from the driving means to the displacement member by the transmission means is always constant. It is displaced at a speed, and the displacement mode of such a displacement member cannot be changed. Therefore, there is a problem that the performance effect of the performance accompanying the displacement of the displacement member is insufficient.

The displacement speed of the displacement member can be changed by increasing or decreasing the driving speed of the driving means. In order to achieve the speed, it is necessary to arrange a sensor device that detects the position of the displacement member, and to control the output of the drive means to increase or decrease according to the detection result of the sensor device. Invite. In addition, the structure and control become complicated, resulting in a decrease in reliability.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the transmission means (the rotating member 741 and the arm member 742) includes the one-way clutch OW1, and the inner ring (first member) of the one-way clutch OW1 is connected to the outer ring (second member) of the one-way clutch OW1. On the other hand, when displaced in one direction, the rollers are engaged with the inner ring and the outer ring to transmit the driving force, and when the inner ring is displaced in the other direction with respect to the outer ring, the inner ring and the outer ring are displaced in the other direction. The engagement of the rollers with the outer ring is released, the transmission of the driving force is cut off, and in the second section DK2 (predetermined section) of the displacement section of the lid member 770 (displacement member), the outer ring moves against the inner ring. Since it is displaced in one direction, regardless of the driving state of the rotating member 741, the displacement speed of the lid member 770 in the second section DK2 can be made faster than the displacement speed of the lid member 770 in the other sections. . Therefore, the cover member 770 can be varied to enhance the presentation effect associated with the displacement of the cover member 770 .

In addition, regardless of the drive state of the drive motor KM4, the outer ring can be driven ahead of the inner ring in one direction. It can be driven, and there is no need to increase or decrease the drive speed of the drive motor KM4 in the middle of the displacement section of the lid member 770 (that is, depending on whether it is the first section DK1 or the second section DK2). As a result, the control can be simplified, the control cost can be reduced, and the operational reliability can be improved. Alternatively, in the second section DK2, the operation of the driving means can be stopped, and in this case, it is possible to reduce energy consumption.

In addition, in the driving state in which the inner ring is displaced in the other direction with respect to the outer ring, the engagement of the roller is released and the transmission of the driving force is interrupted, so that the displacing member is brought into a stopped state (driven state). The driving force of the driving means (driving motor KM4) in such a driving state can be used as the driving force for driving the rotating body 800. FIG. That is, by switching the driving direction of the driving means (driving motor KM4), the lid member 770 and the rotating body 800 can be displaced.

Further, the lid member 770 is formed rotatably, and its center of gravity is arranged at a position eccentric from the center of rotation. In the second section DK2, the weight of the lid member 770 displaces the outer ring in one direction. Since it is formed to be operable in one direction, the weight of the lid member 770 can be used to displace the outer ring in one direction ahead of the inner ring. That is, the displacement speed of the lid member 770 in the second section DK2 can be made faster than the displacement speed of the lid member 770 in the first section DK1. As a result, it is possible to change the displacement mode of the lid member 770 and enhance the presentation effect associated with the displacement of the displacement member.

Further, the driving force is transmitted by a main body portion 741b to which the outer ring of the one-way clutch OW1 is attached, and a projection 741a (pin portion) that protrudes from the main body portion 741b and is displaced from the rotation center of the main body portion 741c. and the arm member 742, the rotating member 741 is rotated by the outer ring, and the protrusion 741a is slid along the first sliding groove 742b. can be reciprocated on the other end side (second sliding groove 742c side). In this case, the other end side of the arm member 742 can reciprocate the lid member 770 between the open state position and the closed state position as the lid member 770 reciprocates. That is, the displacement direction of the lid member 770 can be switched without switching the driving direction of the drive motor KM4.

Further, in this case, the section of the second section DK can be formed in both of the reciprocating motions. The displacement speed of the lid member 770 can be increased. As a result, the displacement mode of the lid member 770 can be changed, and the presentation effect associated with the displacement of the lid member can be enhanced.

Next, displacement of the rotation restricting member 780 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 65(a) is a side view of the decoration unit 750 in the closed state, and FIG. 65(b) is a side view of the decoration unit 750 in the open state. 65(a) and 65(b) show a state in which the left side plate 765 of the box member 760 is seen transparently.

As shown in FIG. 65(a), when the lid member 770 is closed, the rotation restricting member 780 is pushed downward on the projection 782 side by the biasing force of the biasing spring SP5 (see FIG. 65). (a) is rotated clockwise about the axis of the shaft hole 781).

Therefore, the distance dimension L4 from the rotation axis of the rotating body 800 to the outside of the engaging projection 882 is made smaller than the distance dimension L5 from the rotation axis of the rotating body 800 to the tip of the projection 782 of the rotation restricting member 780 (L4 <L5).

Therefore, the rotating body 800 and the rotation restricting member 780 are not engaged with each other, and the rotating body 800 is allowed to rotate.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 65(b), when the lid member 770 is in the open state, the rotation restricting member 780 has a contact surface 783 displaced toward the rear side of the rotating body 800. The contact surface 783 is pressed downward (the state in which the shaft hole 781 is rotated counterclockwise about the axis of the shaft hole 781 in FIG. 65(b)).

Therefore, the distance dimension L4 from the rotation axis of the rotating body 800 to the outer side of the engaging projection 882 is made larger than the distance dimension L6 from the rotation axis of the rotating body 800 to the tip of the projection 782 of the rotation restricting member 780 (L6 <L4).

As a result, the protrusion 782 of the rotation restricting member 780 can be inserted inside the engaging protrusion 882 of the rotating body 800 in which the engaging protrusion 882 of the left rotating portion 880 is arranged at the lowest position in the gravity direction. That is, since the rotating body 800 and the rotation restricting member 780 are engaged with each other, the rotating body 800 cannot rotate. In the present embodiment, the position where the rotation of the rotating body 800 is disabled (the position where the protrusion 782 is inserted inside the engaging protrusion 882) is the position where the opening/closing member 870 of the rotating body 800, which will be described later, is in the open state. is set to

That is, the rotation restricting member 780 (rotation restricting means) that restricts the rotation of the rotating body 800 is such that the opening/closing member 870 (displacement member) is displaced to the open position (second position), and the other side of the displacement member is extended to the game area. Since the rotation of the rotator 800 is restricted when it is pulled out, the rotator 800 is rotated with the opening/closing member 870 extended, and the opening/closing member 870 interferes with other members positioned on the rotation trajectory. can be suppressed. In addition, it is possible to suppress the rotating body 800 from rotating due to the weight of the game ball rolling on the upper surface of the displacement member and the load acting when the displacement member receives the game ball flowing down the game area.

Here, a displaceable first member and a second member are provided, the first member covering at least a part of the second member invisibly, and a state arranged at the covering position. A gaming machine is known that is formed to be displaceable between a retracted position that reduces the area that covers the second member invisibly. According to this gaming machine, the second member is exposed by displacing the first member to the retracted position from a state in which the first member is arranged at the covering position and the second member is invisible to the player. It is possible to perform an effect that is visually recognized by the player.

However, in the above-described conventional game machine, the second member is formed to be displaceable, so there is a possibility that the second member will be displaced when the second member is exposed. Therefore, there is a problem that the player cannot visually recognize the second member in a proper state, and the presentation effect is lowered.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the lid member 770 (first member) can restrict the displacement of the rotating body 800 (second member) in the state of being displaced to the open position (retracted position). Since it is formed, the rotating body 800 can be visually recognized by the player in an appropriate state, and the production effect can be ensured. That is, when performing the effect of displacing the lid member 770 to the open position and exposing the rotating body 800 , the displacement of the lid member 770 to the open position, which is unavoidable for the effect, is performed by rotating the lid member 770 . It is used as means for restricting the displacement of body 800 . Therefore, there is no need to separately provide a mechanism for restricting the displacement of the rotating body 800 or perform control, and the structure can be simplified accordingly.

Further, the rotating body 800 has an outer peripheral surface formed asymmetrically with respect to the center of rotation, as will be described later (see FIG. 67). Therefore, the rotating body 800 is formed to be rotatable and its center of gravity position is eccentric from the center of rotation, so that the degree of freedom in designing the rotating body 800 can be increased. That is, the rotating body 800 does not need to have a shape in which the center of gravity is positioned at the center of rotation, and a shape asymmetrical with respect to the rotation axis can be adopted, so that the rendering effect of the rotating body 800 can be enhanced. On the other hand, if the center of gravity of the rotating body 800 is eccentric in this way, the rotating body 800 will be displaced to the closed state position due to its gravity rotating around the center of rotation (there is a risk of being rotated). A configuration in which the lid member 770 is formed so as to be capable of regulating the displacement of the rotating body 800 is particularly effective, whereby the rotating body 800 can be visually recognized by the player in an appropriate state, and the production effect can be ensured.

Note that the rotating body 800 may be formed symmetrically about the axis. In this case, by forming the rotor 800 from two or more members having different specific gravities, the center of gravity can be arranged at a different position from the rotation axis. For example, by forming one half of the surface from a metal material and forming the other half from a flexible material, the center of gravity can be positioned on the side of the metal material, which generally has a higher specific gravity than the flexible material.

Next, the configuration of rotating body 800 will be described with reference to FIGS. 66 to 68. FIG. 66(a) is a front view of the rotating body 800, FIG. 66(b) is a side view of the rotating body 800 as viewed in the direction of arrow LXVIb in FIG. 66(a), and FIG. Fig. 66(a) is a side view of the rotating body 800 as viewed in the direction of arrow LXVIc in Fig. 66(a); 67 is an exploded perspective front view of the rotating body 800, and FIG. 68 is an exploded perspective rear view of the rotating body 800. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 66 to 68, the rotating body 800 is formed in a cylindrical shape by combining a plurality of members. Rotating body 800 includes a base plate 810 arranged on a shaft portion, and a first display portion 830, a second display portion 840, a third display portion 850 and a fourth display portion 830, which are arranged to surround the base plate 810 and are combined in an annular shape. A display portion 860, a right rotating portion 89 arranged at one end in the axial direction, a left rotating portion 880 arranged at the other end in the axial direction, and an opening/closing member arranged inside the first display portion 830. 870.

The base plate 810 has a substantially L-shaped cross section when viewed in the axial direction, and is formed in a shape extending in the axial direction. The base plate 810 is formed with a right end portion 811 and a left end portion 812 protruding outward from both left and right ends.

The right end portion 811 is formed to protrude from the right side of the base plate 810 in a front view (the right side in FIG. 66(a)) in an annular shape. The right end portion 811 is mainly formed with a tip portion 811a that partially protrudes from the projecting tip of the right end portion 811 and a communication hole 811b in the annular inner portion.

The tip portion 811a further protrudes in the axial direction from the tip portion of the right end portion 811, and the protruding region in the right side view (viewed in the direction of FIG. 66(c)) extends inside the engaging portion 764e of the right side plate 764. is set smaller than the area of The tip portion 811a is inserted inside the engaging portion 764e of the right side plate 764 as described above. As a result, the base plate 810 and the right side plate 764 (cover member 770) are engaged with each other. As a result, the base plate 810 can be stopped against rotational displacement of each display surface (first display section 830, second display section 840, third display section 850, and fourth display section 860) to be described later.

The communication hole 811b is an opening through which a wiring (not shown) connected to the LED board 820 described later is inserted, and is formed through the right side surface of the base plate 810 in front view. Thereby, wiring can be inserted.

The left end portion 812 is formed to protrude from the left side of the base plate 810 in a front view (the left side in FIG. 66(a)) in an annular shape. The left end portion 812 is mainly formed with a tip portion 812a projecting from the lower semicircle of the left end portion 812 and a communication hole 812b in the annular inner portion.

The tip portion 812a further protrudes in the axial direction from the tip portion of the left end portion 812, and has a lower semicircular shape in a left side view (viewed in the direction of FIG. 66(b)).

The communication hole 812b is a path through which a ball thrown into the rotating body 800 by an opening/closing member 870, which will be described later, is discharged to the outside of the rotating body 800. FIG. The communication hole 812 b has an inner diameter larger than that of the ball and substantially the same as the through hole 733 a formed in the gear cover 733 .

The communication hole 812b is an opening connected to the through hole 733a of the gear cover 733, and the projection distance of the left end portion 812 is set to a distance that contacts the through hole 733a. Furthermore, a projection 733b is formed on the upper hemisphere of the end face of the through hole 733a. The protrusion distance of the protrusion 733b is set substantially equal to the protrusion distance of the tip portion 812a. As a result, base plate 810 and gear cover 733 (left transmission member 730) are engaged with each other. As a result, the base plate 810 can be stopped against rotational displacement of each display surface (first display section 830, second display section 840, third display section 850, and fourth display section 860) to be described later.

A reverse rotation prevention member 813 is rotatably disposed on the bottom surface of the base plate 810 . The reverse rotation prevention member 813 is formed in a substantially circular shape when viewed from the top, and has an inclined projection 813a formed on one end side. A biasing spring SP6 is arranged between the reverse rotation prevention member 813 and the base plate 810, thereby always biasing the protrusion 813a to the left side (left side in FIG. 66(a)) when viewed from the front. It is said that

The right rotating portion 890 is formed in a plate shape with a predetermined thickness and has an annular shape when viewed from the side. The right rotation part 890 is formed such that the inside diameter of the ring is larger than the size of the right end part 811 of the base plate 810 . Thereby, the right end portion 811 of the base plate 810 can be inserted inside the right rotating portion 890 . Further, the right rotating portion 890 is mainly formed with a shaft hole 891 penetrating in the left-right direction and a sliding groove 892 curved around the shaft hole 891 and opened.

The shaft hole 891 is a hole into which the shaft portion 872 of the opening/closing member 870 described later is inserted, and is formed with an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the shaft portion 872 . Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the shaft portion 872 of the opening/closing member 870 from being displaced with respect to the first display portion 830 .

The sliding groove 892 is formed in a curved shape centering on the shaft hole 891 , and its radius is set to be the same as the separation distance between the projection 871 and the shaft portion 872 of the opening/closing member 870 . Accordingly, by inserting the projection 871 of the opening/closing member 870 into the sliding groove 892 , the projection 871 can slide inside the sliding groove 892 when the opening/closing member 870 is displaced.

The counterclockwise rotating portion 880 is formed in a plate shape with a predetermined thickness and has an annular shape when viewed from the side. The left rotating portion 880 is formed such that the inside diameter of the ring is larger than the size of the left end portion 812 of the base plate 810 . Thereby, the left end portion 812 of the base plate 810 can be inserted inside the left rotating portion 880 . The counterclockwise rotation portion 880 mainly includes a wall portion 881 projecting from the inner edge portion in an annular shape, an engaging projection 882 projecting from the side wall, and a locking portion 883 in which inclined surfaces are continuously arranged on the inner edge portion. formed with.

The wall portion 881 is formed so as to protrude to the left side of the rotating body 800 when viewed from the front. The wall portion 881 has a gear tooth surface 881a engraved on the outer peripheral surface of the projecting tip, and has a communicating hole 881b that opens inward. The tooth surface 881a meshes with the transmission gear 881d as described above. Thereby, the driving force of the driving motor KM4 can be transmitted to the rotating body 800. FIG.

The communication hole 881b is an opening that communicates the internal space and the external space of the rotating body 800, and can discharge the ball thrown into the rotating body 800 by opening the opening/closing member 870, which will be described later.

The engagement protrusion 882 is a protrusion with which the rotation restricting member 780 is engaged, as described above. The engaging protrusion 882 is formed to protrude from the left side surface of the left rotating portion 880 in a front view. Two engaging projections 882 are formed at positions spaced apart by a predetermined distance, and the projection 782 of the rotation restricting member 780 can be inserted between them.

The locking portion 883 has a serrated cross section. When the counterclockwise rotation portion 880 is arranged on the base plate 810 , the tip of the protrusion 813 a of the reverse rotation prevention member 813 is in contact with the locking portion 883 . As a result, when a rotational force that rotates the left rotating portion 880 in one direction acts, the protrusion 813a can be slid along the inclined surface of the locking portion 883 to rotate the left rotating portion 880. , when a rotational force that rotates the counterclockwise rotating portion 880 in the other direction acts, the surface of the engaging portion 883 is caught by the projection 813a and rotation is suppressed.

As a result, it is possible to restrict the rotating body 800 from rotating in the direction opposite to the direction in which it is rotated by the rotational driving force of the drive motor KM4. It is possible to suppress reverse rotation of the rotating body due to a collision or the like.

The first display portion 830 to the fourth display portion 860 are each formed in the same curved shape, and can be formed into a single circular ring shape by connecting the end surfaces thereof. In addition, the inner diameters of the first display portion 830 to the fourth display portion 860 formed into one ring are set to be substantially the same as the outer diameters of the left and right rotating portions 880 and 890 . Accordingly, by arranging the respective display portions 830 to 860 on the left and right rotating portions 880 and 890, the first display portion 830 to the fourth display portion 860 can be formed in one columnar shape.

Characters and patterns are drawn on each of the first display portion 830 to the fourth display portion 860, and as described above, the driving force is transmitted from the counterclockwise rotation portion 880 to rotate and display each character. The pattern can be visually recognized by the player.

The first display portion 830 mainly includes an opening 831 opened in its curved surface and a bearing portion 832 that opens toward the shaft and protrudes in a U-shape.

The opening 831 is an opening in which an opening/closing member 870 to be described later is arranged, and is formed to have an inner diameter substantially the same as the outer shape of the opening/closing member 870 . The bearing portion 832 is formed in a size that allows the shaft portion 872 of the opening/closing member 870 to be inserted into the opened U-shaped portion. Therefore, by inserting the opening/closing member 870 into the opening 831 and inserting the shaft portion 872 of the opening/closing member 870 into the bearing portion 832 , the opening/closing member 870 can be rotationally displaced with respect to the first display portion 830 . A description of the displacement mode of the opening/closing member 870 will be given later.

When power is supplied to the LED board 820, the LED lights mounted on the LED board 820 can emit light. Also, the LED board 820 is attached to the back side of the base plate 810 .

Next, with reference to FIG. 69, opening and closing of the opening/closing member 870 will be described. FIG. 69(a) is a side view of the rotating body 800 with the opening/closing member 870 closed. FIG. 69(b) is a side view of the rotating body 800 with the opening/closing member 870 in the open state. In FIG. 69, when the opening/closing member 870 overlaps another member, the outer diameter thereof is indicated by a dashed line.

The closed state of the opening/closing member 870 is a state in which the outer peripheral surface of the opening/closing member 870 is arranged substantially parallel to the outer peripheral surface of the first display section 830 . On the other hand, the open state of the opening/closing member 870 is a state in which the outer peripheral surface of the opening/closing member 870 intersects with the outer peripheral surface of the first display portion 830 .

As shown in FIG. 69(a), the rotating body 800 in which the opening/closing member 870 is in the closed state is such that the projection 871 of the opening/closing member 870 is aligned with one end side of the sliding groove 892 of the right rotating portion 890 (in FIG. 69(a), the shaft portion 872).

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 69(b), when the opening/closing member 870 is in the open state, the projection 871 of the opening/closing member 870 is located on the other end side of the sliding groove 892 of the right rotating portion 890. As shown in FIG. That is, the opening/closing member 870 is displaced by the protrusion 871 sliding inside the sliding groove 892 of the right rotating portion 890 .

Next, displacement of the projection 871 will be described with reference to FIG. 70(a) and (b) are side views of the decoration unit 750. FIG. 70(a) and 70(b), the right side plate 764 of the box member 760 is shown transparently.

FIG. 70(a) shows a state in which the decoration unit 750 is closed and the opening/closing member 870 is closed. FIG. 70(b) shows a state in which the decoration unit 750 is in the open state and the opening/closing member 870 is in the open state.

As shown in FIG. 70( a ), when the decorative unit 750 is closed, the outer edge of the right lid portion 773 is brought into contact with the projection 871 . When the decoration unit 750 is in the closed state, the outer diameter L7 from the rotation axis of the lower half surface of the right lid portion 773 is made smaller than the distance L8 from the axis of the right rotation portion 890 to one end side of the slide groove 892 (L7 <L8).

Also, the difference in dimension between L7 and L8 is set to be substantially the same as the outer diameter of the projection 871 . Therefore, when the outer edge of the right lid portion 773 is in contact with the protrusion 871 , the protrusion 871 is displaced toward one end of the slide groove 892 . As a result, the opening/closing member 870 is closed. That is, when the decoration unit 750 is closed, it is possible to prevent the opening/closing member 870 from being displaced to the open state.

As shown in FIG. 70(b), when the decoration unit 750 is opened, the concave portion 773b formed in the outer edge portion is displaced as the right lid portion 773 is displaced. In this case, the projection 871 is inserted inside the recess 773b. Thereby, the projection 871 can be displaced to the other side of the sliding groove 892 . As a result, the opening/closing member 870 is opened by the biasing force of the biasing spring SP7 arranged between the shaft portion 872 and the first display portion 830 .

As described above, the opening/closing member 870 can be displaced to the open state according to the displacement of the lid member 770 . Therefore, since it is not necessary to dispose a drive source for driving the opening/closing member 870 in the rotating body 800, the rotating body 800 can be made small.

Further, the drive motor KM4 for displacing the opening/closing member 870 can also be used as driving means for displacing the cover member 770. FIG. In this case, when the opening/closing member 870 and the lid member 770 are displaced by driving forces of separate driving means, the opening/closing member 870 and the lid member 770 may interfere with each other if control failure occurs. and lid member 770 can be mechanically connected to synchronize their displacements, so that interference between opening/closing member 870 and lid member 770 can be suppressed.

As shown in FIG. 70( b ), when the opening/closing member 870 is opened, the leading end side of rotation is arranged above the winning opening 761 a of the box member 760 . As a result, a ball thrown from a ball throwing portion 711c of the ball receiving base 710, which will be described later, can be dropped onto the upper surface of the opening/closing member 870. As shown in FIG.

In this case, the open/close member 870 is arranged above the shaft portion 872 on the rotating distal end side. Therefore, the ball falling on the upper surface can be rolled toward the inside of the rotating body 800 . A game ball rolled into the rotating body 800 rolls on the upper surface of a base plate 810 arranged inside the rotating body 800 . Further, since the base plate 810 is inclined downward toward the left end portion 812 side, the ball rolling on the upper surface of the base plate 810 rolls toward the left end portion 812 side and rotates from the inside thereof. It can be discharged outside the body 800 . That is, the inside of the rotating body 800 can be used as a ball-throwing path.

Further, as described above, the rotating body 800 is provided with the rotation restricting member 780 that restricts the rotation of the rotating body 800. Therefore, the cover member 770 is displaced to the open position to expose the rotating body 800. Further, by displacing the opening/closing member 870, the effect of the presentation can be enhanced. On the other hand, the rotating body 800 may be rotated (rotated). Therefore, the configuration in which the cover member 770 displaced to the open position is formed so as to be able to regulate the displacement of the rotating body 800 is particularly effective, thereby allowing the player to visually recognize the rotating body 800 in an appropriate state. It is possible to secure the performance effect.

Here, a game machine is known which is provided with a rotating member which is rotatably formed and whose outer surface around the rotation axis is arranged so as to be visible to the player. According to this gaming machine, the rotating member is formed in a cylindrical shape, and the display (pattern) on the outer peripheral surface can be visually recognized by the player while rotating the rotating member or stopping the rotating member. However, in the above-described conventional game machine, there is a problem that the rotating member is used only as a member for holding a display on its outer surface for the player to see, and the utilization of the rotating member is insufficient. . That is, the rotating member is formed relatively large because it is necessary to maintain a display that is visible to the player. Therefore, while the occupied space increases, the portion other than the outer surface is not utilized.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the rotating body 800 (rotating member) communicates the internal space formed therein with the outside, and has an opening 831 and a communicating hole 881b through which a game ball can pass. Since the (communication port) is provided, the game ball flowing down the game area can flow into or out of the internal space through the opening 831 and the communication hole 881b. Therefore, the internal space of the rotating body 800, which is a dead space, can be made to function as a game ball storage space or a ball-throwing passage, and the rotating body 800 can be utilized accordingly.

In addition, in the above-described conventional game machine, it is only possible to form an effect mode in which the display on the outer peripheral surface is visually recognized by the player when the rotating member is stopped. There was a problem that

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, since the opening/closing member 870 (displacement member) is displaceably disposed on the outer surface of the rotating body 800 (rotating member), the outer surface of the rotating body 800 rotates or stops. In addition to the presentation mode in which the player visually recognizes the display of , it is possible to form the presentation mode in which the opening/closing member 870 is displaced.

When the cover member 770 (displacement member) is displaced to the closed position (first position), a part of the outer surface of the rotating body 800 (rotating member) is formed by the open/close member 870, so that the outer shape of the rotating body 800 is changed. It can be made smaller, and the space required for the rotating body 800 to rotate can be made smaller accordingly. On the other hand, when the opening/closing member 870 is displaced to the open position (second position), the opening/closing member 870 protrudes outward in the radial direction of the rotating body 800, so that the displacement of the opening/closing member 870 can easily be visually recognized by the player. It is possible to enhance the performance effect. Further, by rotating the rotating body 800 with the opening/closing member 870 placed at the closed position, and disposing (displacing) the opening/closing member 870 at the open position when the rotation is stopped, the outer surface of the rotating body 800 can be The visually recognizable portion (opening/closing member 870) can be projected outward in the radial direction of the rotating body 800, which can enhance interest.

Also, an LED board 820 that emits light is arranged on the base plate 810 in the internal space of the rotating body 800 . Therefore, by setting the opening/closing member 870 to the open position, the outer surface of the rotating body 800 is opened, the internal space is communicated with the outside, and the light emitted from the LED board 820 can be emitted to the outside. On the other hand, when the opening/closing member 870 is in the closed position, the outer surface of the rotating body 800 is closed, and the light emission from the LED board 820 can be blocked from being emitted to the outside. As a result, the performance effect can be enhanced.

Here, in order to make the rotating body 800 rotatable and displaceably displace the opening/closing member 870 on the rotating body 800, a driving means is required for each of the rotating body 800 and the opening/closing member 870, which increases the product cost. increases. Moreover, if the driving means for displacing the opening/closing member 870 is mounted on the rotating body 800, the weight of the rotating body 800 increases, making it difficult to start or stop the rotation of the rotating body 800 smoothly.

In contrast, according to the present embodiment, the opening/closing member 870 is displaced along with the displacement of the lid member 770, and the lid member 770 and the rotating body 800 are displaced by the same driving motor KM4. KM4 can also be used to rotate the rotating body 800 and displace the opening/closing member 870 . Therefore, it is possible to reduce the product cost. Further, since it is not necessary to mount a driving means for displacing the opening/closing member on the rotating body 800, the weight of the rotating body 800 can be reduced, and the rotation of the rotating body 800 can be smoothly started or stopped.

In addition, since the opening 831 (first communication port) and the communication hole 881b (second communication port) are formed at different positions, the opening 831 is used as an inflow port for inflowing game balls from the outside into the internal space, and the communication hole 881b can be used as an outlet for discharging game balls from the internal space to the outside. That is, even if the rotating body 800 (rotating member) is not rotated (maintained in a stopped state), the rotating body 800 can be utilized as a ball-throwing passage for game balls.

Furthermore, since the opening 831 is formed in the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 800 and the communication hole 881b is formed in the axial end surface of the rotating body 800, the game ball can flow into the internal space of the rotating body 800 (rotating member). The inflow can be easily visually recognized by the player, and the game ball can be discharged while the rotating body 800 is maintained in a stopped state.

That is, the rotating body 800 has an outer surface that is visible to the player, and an opening 831 (inflow port) is formed on the outer surface, so that the player can easily see the inflow of the game ball. On the other hand, if the communication hole 881b is formed on the outer surface of the rotating body 800, and the rotating body 800 is arranged at the rotational position where the communicating hole 881b is upward, the game ball cannot flow out from the internal space. Since the communication hole 881b (outflow port) is formed in the end surface of the rotating body 800 in the rotation axis direction, regardless of the rotational position of the rotating body 800, a state in which the game ball can flow out from the internal space can be formed.

A displaceable opening/closing member 870 (displacement member) is disposed inside the opening 831 (first communication port), and when the opening/closing member 870 is displaced to the closed position (first position), the opening 831 When the opening/closing member 870 is blocked and the opening/closing member 870 is displaced to the open position (second position), the opening 831 is opened, so that the inflow of game balls through the opening 831 is switched between the blocking state and the allowing state. be able to.

Furthermore, one side of the opening/closing member 870 (displacement member) is rotatably supported by the rotating body 800 (rotating member), and when the opening/closing member 870 is displaced to the open position (second position), the one side and the opposite side are rotatably supported. Since the other side is projected to the game area, the upper surface of the opening/closing member 870 can receive the game ball flowing down the game area. Therefore, when the opening 831 is formed as an inflow port, the opening/closing member 870 can be used to make it easier for the game ball flowing down the game area to flow into the internal space of the rotating body 800 .

In addition, it is possible to make it easier to stop the game ball flowing down the game area on the upper surface of the opening/closing member 870 . Therefore, for example, when an inlet for game balls is formed in the rotating body 800, the opening/closing member 870 can be used to make it easier for the game balls flowing down the game area to flow into the inlet. In this case, if the opening/closing member 870 catches the game ball flowing down the game area, the rotating body 800 may be rotated by the load acting at that time and the weight of the game ball rolling on the upper surface of the displacement member. . Therefore, the configuration in which the cover member 770 displaced to the open state position displaces the rotation restricting member 780 to restrict the displacement of the rotating body 800 is particularly effective. It is possible to easily maintain a state in which the area protrudes at a predetermined position.

A shaft portion 872 of the opening/closing member 870 is arranged on the rotating direction side of the rotating body 800 . In other words, one side of the opening/closing member 870 (displacement member) is positioned forward of the other side in the rotational direction of the rotating body 800 (rotating member). Therefore, even if the opening/closing member 870 interferes with a member disposed around the rotating member when the rotating body 800 is rotated, the force generated by such interference closes the opening/closing member 870 (displaces it to the closed position). It can be made to act in the direction of That is, it is possible to prevent the opening/closing member 870 from interfering with other members and being displaced to the overhang (second position) when the rotating body 800 rotates. In addition, it is possible to prevent the opening/closing member 870 from engaging with another member and hindering the rotation of the rotating body 800 .

In addition, since the base plate 810 (fixed member) arranged in the internal space of the rotating body 800 is non-rotatable with respect to the box member 760 (base member) in which the rotating body 800 is rotatably arranged, By rolling the game ball flowing into the internal space of the rotating body 800 from the opening 831 toward the communication hole 881b on the upper surface of the base plate 810, the game ball rampages in the internal space as the rotating body 800 rotates. Alternatively, it is possible to prevent the game ball from staying in the internal space due to hindrance to rolling.

As described above, the opening/closing operation of the opening/closing member 870 is restricted by the displacement of the lid member 770, so that the opening/closing member 870 displaced to the open state (second position) does not interfere with members around the rotating body 800. can be suppressed.

As described above, the rotator 800 has the communication hole 811b through which the wiring to the LED board 820 attached to the back side of the base plate 810 is inserted, opposite to the end face of the rotator 800 in which the communication hole 881b is formed. formed on the end face of the Therefore, it is possible to easily secure a space that can be used for each of the communication hole 881b and the communication hole 811b.

That is, when electrical wiring is to be performed on an LED substrate disposed inside the rotating body 800, if the wiring is inserted from the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 800, the wiring will get entangled due to the rotation of the rotating body 800. Although it is preferable to wire from the rotator 800, if an opening into which the game balls flow in and an opening from which the game balls flow out are formed on both axial end surfaces of the rotating body 800, it becomes difficult to secure a space for the wiring to pass through.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, since the inlet of the game ball of the rotating body 800 can be the outer peripheral surface, one of the axial end faces of the rotating body 800 is used as the outlet of the game ball, and the other is used for inserting the wiring. Since it can be used as an opening, it is possible to easily secure a space for inserting the wiring.

As a result, the game ball can be discharged smoothly through the communication hole 881b, and the wiring work to the opening of the electrical connection line (the wiring to the LED board 820) can be easily performed. In addition, since the communicating holes 881b and 811b can be separated from each other as much as possible, interference between the game ball rolling in the internal space of the rotating body 800 to the communicating hole 881b and the electrical connection line can be easily suppressed.

Next, the lower displacement unit 400 and the rotation unit 700 will be described with reference to FIGS. 71 and 72. FIG. 71 is a front view of the lower displacement unit 400 and the rotation unit 700, and FIG. 72 is a top view of the lower displacement unit 400 as viewed in the direction of arrow LXXII in FIG. 71 and 72 show the lower displacement unit 400 in the retracted state.

As shown in FIGS. 71 and 72, the lower displacement unit 400 and the rotation unit 700 are arranged adjacent to each other in the left-right direction. In addition, the lower displacement unit 400 and the rotation unit 700 in the front-rear direction (vertical direction in FIG. 72) have the emission opening 471 of the lower displacement member 440 arranged at the approximately central position of the ball bearing base 710 in the front-rear direction.

Next, with reference to FIG. 73, a manner of throwing a ball from the lower displacement unit 400 to the rotation unit 700 will be described. 73 is a front view of the lower displacement unit 400 and the rotation unit 700. FIG. Note that FIG. 73 illustrates a state in which the lower displacement unit 400 is arranged in the first extended state.

As shown in FIG. 73, the lower displacement unit 400 is in the first extended state, and the ball receiving portion 467 provided inside the lower displacement member 440 receives the ball inside (the ball receiving operation is performed). ), the ball placed inside the ball receiving portion 467 is ejected to the outside of the lower displacement member 440 through the emission opening 471 of the lower displacement member 440, as described above.

The ball ejected from the exit opening 471 of the lower displacement member 440 freely falls onto the ball receiving base 710 of the rotating unit 700 arranged on the right side in the front view. As a result, the ball can be thrown from the lower displacement unit 400 to the rotor 800 .

Next, with reference to FIGS. 74 and 75, the configuration of ball cradle 710 will be described. 74(a) is a top view of the ball cradle 710, FIG. 74(b) is a front view of the ball cradle 710, and FIG. 74(c) is LXXIVc-LXXIVc of FIG. 74(a). 7 is a cross-sectional view of ball cradle 710 at line; FIG. FIG. 75 is an exploded perspective view of the ball cradle 710. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 74 and 75, the ball cradle 710 includes a box-shaped plate receiving portion 711, a solenoid 712 disposed inside the plate receiving portion 711, and a solenoid 712 connected to the plate receiving portion 711. and a cover member 714 covering the solenoid 712 .

The plate receiving portion 711 includes a bottom plate 711a forming a bottom surface, a standing portion 711b erected on the edge of the bottom plate 711a, a ball throwing portion 711c protruding from a portion of the outer edge of the bottom plate 711a, and a ball throwing portion 711c. and a shaft hole 711d penetrating a standing portion 711b erected on the edge of the shaft.

The bottom plate 711a is bent downward toward the ball feeding portion 711c, which will be described later. As a result, the ball thrown to the upper portion of the bottom plate 711a can roll toward the ball-throwing portion 711c due to its deflection (inclination).

The bottom plate 711a is made of a flexible material, and the bottom surface of the bottom plate 711a (bottom surface in FIG. 74(c)) is textured to form fine irregularities on the surface. As a result, when the bottom plate 711a is molded, the heat shrinkage ratio is made different between the top surface and the bottom surface, so that the bottom plate 711a can be easily bent toward the bottom surface. That is, when the bottom surface to which texturing is applied is thermally shrunk due to the unevenness, it is difficult for a force to act in the direction of convexly curving the bottom plate side. On the other hand, since the upper surface side is formed flat, a pulling force acts in the horizontal direction when thermally shrunk, and the end portion tends to change upward (the upper surface side tends to form a concave curve). Therefore, it is possible to easily bend in the direction in which the balls roll easily when thermally shrunk. As a result, it is possible to suppress defective products when the bottom plate 711a is molded.

The erected portion 711b is a wall portion erected upward in the gravitational direction (upper side in FIG. 74(c)) from the outer edge of the ball feeding portion 711c. The erected distance of the erected portion 711b is set larger than the outer diameter of the sphere. As a result, it is possible to prevent the ball thrown to the upper part of the bottom plate 711a from falling downward from the edge thereof. In this embodiment, the standing dimension of the standing portion 711b is set to approximately 1.5 times the diameter of the sphere.

Also, the standing portion 711b is formed by connecting a central standing portion 711b1 that divides the area of the bottom plate 711a into two to the standing portion 711b. The upper area of the bottom plate 711a is divided into an area in which a ball is thrown on one side and an area in which a solenoid 712 (to be described later) is arranged on the other side by the central standing portion 711b1.

The ball feeding portion 711c is formed on the front side of the bottom plate 711a. In addition, the position in the left-right direction (left-right direction in FIG. 74(a)) is arranged on the right side (right side in FIG. 74) of the substantially central position of the bottom plate 711a. Further, the ball feeding portion 711c protrudes from the bottom plate and thus is curved downward. As a result, the ball thrown from the bottom plate 711a can drop downward through the ball-throwing portion 711c. A prize winning opening 761a of the cover member 770 is provided on the lower side of the ball throwing section 711c (see FIG. 72), and the ball falling from the ball throwing section 711c can be thrown into the prize winning opening 761a.

A shaft portion 713a of a displacement member 713, which will be described later, is inserted into the shaft hole 711d. As a result, the displacement member 713 can be rotationally displaced about the axis of the shaft hole 711d.

The solenoid 712 can piston-displace the shaft inserted inside the solenoid 712 by applying electric power. A transmission member 712 a is attached to the shaft of the solenoid 712 . The transmission member 712a is a member that transmits the driving force of the solenoid 712 to a displacement member 713, which will be described later.

The displacement member 713 is formed to have a C-shaped cross section, and mainly includes a protrusion 713b protruding outward from the C-shape at one end and a shaft portion 713a protruding inward from the C-shape at both ends.

The protrusion 713b is a protrusion inserted into the communication hole 712a1 of the solenoid 712, and is formed in a cylindrical shape with an outer diameter larger than the inner diameter of the communication hole 712a1. Thereby, the displacement of the solenoid 712 is transmitted to the displacement member 713 via the transmission member 712a.

The shaft portion 713a is a shaft inserted into the shaft hole 711d. By inserting the shaft portion 713a into the shaft hole 711d, the displacement member 713 can rotate about the axis of the shaft portion 713a. That is, the displacement member 713 is driven by the displacement of the solenoid 712 .

The cover member 714 is formed to have an external shape larger than the external shape of the solenoid 712 , is arranged above the solenoid 712 arranged on the upper part of the bottom plate 711 a, and is fastened and fixed to the plate receiver 711 . Thereby, the solenoid 712 can be fixed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 76, a description will be given of the ball falling onto the ball receiving base 710. FIG. 76(a) and 76(b) are cross-sectional views of the ball cradle 710. FIG. 76(a) and 76(b) correspond to the cross section of the ball cradle 710 of FIG. 74(c).

As shown in FIG. 76, the ball thrown from the lower displacement member 440 of the lower displacement unit 400 freely falls in the direction of gravity, and the shooting action of the ball receiving portion 467 causes the ball to fall toward the rotation unit 700 (right side in FIG. 76(a)). ). That is, the ball is dropped onto the bottom plate 711a of the ball receiving table 710 in the lower right direction in a front view.

In this case, as described above, the bottom plate 711a is bent downward toward the ball-feeding portion 711c, and the ball-feeding portion 711c is formed on the right side of the bottom plate 711a. can be made into an inclined surface that slopes downward toward the right side. Therefore, the displacement direction of the ball and the tilting direction of the bottom plate 711a on which the ball falls can be made parallel to each other.

As a result, as shown in FIG. 76(b), it is possible to prevent the ball falling on the bottom plate 711a from bouncing upward (upward in FIG. 76(b)). Therefore, the ball thrown from the lower displacement member 440 of the lower displacement unit 400 to the ball cradle 710 of the rotary unit 700 can be prevented from falling from the ball cradle 710 .

Furthermore, the ball that has fallen to the bottom plate 711a can be rolled toward the ball feeding portion 711c by the momentum of the drop. Therefore, the rolling time of the ball up to the ball feeding portion 711c can be shortened. As a result, the ball thrown from the lower displacement member 440 to the ball receiving base 710 can be thrown smoothly.

Next, with reference to FIG. 77, light emission of ball cradle 710 will be described. 77(a) and (b) are schematic cross-sectional views of the rotation unit 700 along line LXXVII-LXXVII in FIG. FIG. 77(a) shows the decoration unit 750 in the closed state, and FIG. 77(b) shows the decoration unit 750 in the open state.

As shown in FIG. 77(a), when the decorative unit 750 is arranged in the closed state, light is emitted to the ball receiving base 710 by an LED base 721 arranged on the rear side of the rear base 720. .

More specifically, the light emitted from the LEDs 721 a of the LED base 721 is reflected toward the back side of the lid member 770 to enter the bottom plate 711 a of the ball receiving base 710 . Further, as described above, since the bottom surface of the bottom plate 711a is textured, incident light can be diffusely reflected due to unevenness of the texture. Thereby, the entire bottom surface of the ball receiving base 710 can be illuminated.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 77(b), when the decoration unit 750 is arranged in the open state, the transparent portion 771a is formed on the lid member 770 as described above, so that the LEDs 721a of the LED base 721 are The light is transmitted without being reflected by the lid member 770 . Since the rotating body 800 is formed inside the cover member 770 , the light can be reflected by the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 800 and made incident on the ball support 710 .

Further, in this case, by rotating the third display portion 850 of the rotating body 800 toward the ball receiving base 710 (the upper side in FIG. 77(b)), the LEDs 821 of the LED board 820 arranged on the back side of the base plate 810 emit light. The light can be reflected by the inner wall of the rotating body 800 and emitted from the third display unit 850 .

As described above, the inner wall of the third display portion 850 is textured to form a plurality of unevenness on the surface. Therefore, the third display unit 850 makes it easier to emit light to the outside of the rotating body 800 than other display units. Therefore, it is preferable to dispose the third display unit 850 on the ball cradle 710 side.

Next, the detailed configuration of the upper displacement unit 900 will be described with reference to FIGS. 78 to 84. FIG. First, the structure for displacing the upper displacement member 940 will be described with reference to FIGS. 78 to 80. FIG.

78 is a front view of the upper displacement unit 900. FIG. 79 is an exploded perspective front view of the upper displacement unit 900. FIG. 80 is an exploded rear perspective view of the upper displacement unit 900. FIG. 78 to 80 illustrate a state in which the upper displacement member 940 is arranged at the retracted position (the position that is arranged highest with respect to the base member 910).

As shown in FIGS. 78 to 80, the upper displacement unit 900 includes a base member 910 arranged on the bottom wall portion 301 (see FIG. 6) of the rear case 300, and a base member 910 arranged inside the base member 910. a transmission member 920, a rotation member 930 rotatably connected to the base member 910 and displaced along with the displacement of the transmission member 920, and a rotation member 930 having one end slidably displaceably connected to the base member 410. and an upper displacement member 940 that is displaced by being connected to the rotary member 930 and driven by the rotation member 930 .

The base member 910 is formed by combining two oblong rectangular plate members in the front-back direction, and includes a front base 911 arranged on the front side and a rear base 912 arranged on the rear side. A transmission member 920 and a rotation member 930 are arranged between the front base 911 and the rear base 912 facing each other.

The front base 911 includes three sliding grooves 911c, 911d, and 911e penetrating in the front-rear direction (the depth direction of the paper surface of FIG. 78), a pivot pin 911b projecting toward the rear side at the center position in the circumferential direction, and one end side of the front base. (left side in front view) and an opening 911a penetrating in the front-rear direction on one end side.

The opening 911a is an opening through which the shaft of the drive motor KM5 arranged on the front base 911 is inserted on the rear side. As a result, the shaft of the drive motor KM5 arranged on the front side of the front base 911 can be inserted through the rear side of the front base 911 .

The shaft support pins 911g and 911b are inserted through shaft holes of a transmission gear 922 and a transmission gear 923, which will be described later, and can hold the transmission gear 922 and the transmission gear 923 rotatably. That is, the pivot pins 911g and 911b are formed in a cylindrical shape with an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameters of the shaft holes of the transmission gears 922 and 923 .

The sliding groove 911c is penetratingly formed in an arc shape around the axis of the pivot pin 911b. The slide groove 911c is an opening through which a shaft support pin 923a of a transmission gear 923, which will be described later, is inserted. set. Accordingly, when the transmission gear 923 is rotated with the shaft support pin 923a inserted into the slide groove 911c, collision between the shaft support pin and the inner wall of the slide groove 911c can be suppressed.

The sliding grooves 911d and 911e are grooves into which the pivot pins 951 and 952 of the upper displacement member 940, which will be described later, are inserted. be done.

The sliding groove 911e is formed linearly in the longitudinal direction of the front base 911 (horizontal direction in front view). On the other hand, the sliding groove 911d is formed in an arc shape centering on the lower side of the front base 911. As shown in FIG. That is, the sliding grooves 911e and 911d are formed non-parallel. Therefore, at different positions in the left-right direction, the two sliding grooves 911e and 911d are formed so that the distance between them in the vertical direction is different. As a result, when the pivot pins 951 and 952 are slid inside the sliding grooves 911e and 911d, the upper displacement member 940 is rotated and slid due to the difference in the distance between the vertically opposed portions. be.

The shaft portion 911f is formed to protrude in a columnar shape toward the front side. The shaft portion 911f can be inserted into a through hole 931 formed at one end of the rotating member 930, which will be described later, and hold the rotating member 930 in a rotatable state. That is, the shaft portion 911f is formed to have an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the through hole 931 of the rotating member 930 .

The rear base 912 is a plate member attached to the rear side of the front base 911 with a predetermined space therebetween. Rear base 912 is formed from a metallic material. Thereby, the rigidity of the entire base member 910 can be improved. As a result, twisting of the base member 910 can be suppressed when the relatively heavy upper displacement member 940 is disposed on the base member 910 formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape.

The transmission member 920 is disposed between the front base 911 and the rear base 912 facing each other. The transmission member 920 mainly includes a transmission gear 921 connected to the shaft of the drive motor KM5, a transmission gear 922 meshing with the transmission gear 921, and a transmission gear 923 meshing with the transmission gear 922. formed by

The transmission gear 921 is connected to the drive motor KM5 by inserting the shaft of the drive motor KM5 arranged on the front side of the front base 911 into the shaft hole as described above. As a result, the transmission gear 921 can be rotationally displaced by the driving force of the driving motor KM5.

The transmission gear 922 meshes with the transmission gears 921 and 923 as described above. Thereby, the driving force for rotation of the transmission gear 921 can be transmitted to the transmission gear 923 .

The transmission gear 923 is formed with a pivot pin 923a protruding frontward from its outer peripheral edge. Therefore, when the transmission gear 923 is rotated, the pivot pin 923a is rotationally displaced around the axis of the transmission gear 923. As shown in FIG.

The rotary member 930 is formed in the shape of a long bar on one side, and mainly has a through hole 931 penetrating in the front-rear direction at one end side and an opening 932 extending in the longitudinal direction substantially at the center in the longitudinal direction. formed with.

As described above, the through-hole 931 is an opening into which the shaft portion 911f of the front base 911 is inserted. can hold. A biasing spring SP8 is arranged at the tip of the shaft portion 911f. As a result, the rotating member 930 is biased in a direction to lift the other end side upward with respect to the front base 911 .

The opening 932 is a groove into which the shaft support pin 923a of the transmission gear 923 is inserted, and the shaft support pin 923a is slidably formed therein. As described above, when the transmission gear 923 is rotationally displaced and the arrangement of the pivot pin 923 a is displaced, the pivot pin 923 a is displaced inside the opening 932 . Therefore, since the rotating member 930 is arranged with one end rotatably supported, the rotating member 930 is rotated around the one end by the displacement of the shaft supporting pin 923a.

Further, on the other end side of the rotary member 930, an annular member 933 is arranged which is formed in an annular shape in a front view and is formed in a plate shape having a predetermined thickness on the back side.

The front side of the annular member 933 is formed with two sliding grooves 933a recessed at symmetrical positions along the outer peripheral edge thereof. The annular member 933 is a portion connected to an upper displacement member 940, which will be described later, and the shaft portion 953 of the upper displacement member 940 is inserted inside. The annular member 933 and the upper displacement member 940 are rotatably connected, and the upper displacement member 940 can be displaced as the rotary member 930 is rotationally displaced.

A projection 961 of the upper displacement member 940 is inserted inside the sliding groove 933a, and the projection 961 slides inside the sliding groove 933a by rotationally displacing the upper displacement member 940 with respect to the rotating member. can.

Also, the arc axis of the sliding groove 933 a is arranged at a position different from the rotation axis of the upper displacement member 940 with respect to the rotation member 930 . This allows the first opening portion 960 to be displaced when the upper displacement member 940 is rotationally displaced with respect to the rotating member 930 . A detailed description of the first opening portion 960 will be given later.

On one end side (rotating shaft side) of the rotating member 930, a shaft portion cover 913 and a deformation restricting cover 914 formed of a plate-like body are arranged in front. The shaft cover 913 is arranged in front of the rotating shaft portion of the rotating member 930 and suppresses the rotating member 930 from rattling in the front-rear direction. The deformation restricting cover 914 is arranged at a position spaced apart from the rotating shaft by a predetermined distance, and can prevent the rotating member 930 from being deformed in the longitudinal direction by the weight of the upper displacement member 940 arranged on the other end side.

The upper displacement member 940 includes a base body 950 connected to the front base 911 and the rotating member 930, two first openings 960 rotatably disposed on the back side of the base body 950, and the base body 950. It mainly includes two second open portions 970 rotatably arranged on the front side and a variable portion 980 arranged on one end side.

The base body 950 mainly includes two pivot pins 951 and 952 projecting from the rear surface of one end and a shaft portion 953 projecting from the rear surface of the other end.

The pivot pins 951 and 952 are projections inserted into the sliding grooves 911e and 911d of the front base 911 as described above. Therefore, when the upper displacement member 940 is driven by the rotating member 930, the pivot pins 951 and 952 slide along the sliding grooves 911e and 911d, thereby sliding the upper displacement member 940 in the left-right direction. and the other end side can be rotationally displaced downward.

The shaft portion 953 is a projection that is inserted into the annular member 933 and coupled to the rotating member 930 as described above, and is formed in a cylindrical shape with an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the annular member 933 . Thereby, the upper displacement member 940 can be rotatably connected to the rotating member 930 . Therefore, when the rotating member 930 is rotated around one end by the driving force of the driving motor KM5, the driving force is transmitted to the upper displacement member 940 due to the displacement of the annular member 933 . As a result, the upper displacement member 940 can be displaced along the sliding grooves 911e and 911d.

The first opening portion 960 is a plate member having a predetermined thickness in the front-rear direction, and two of the first opening portions 960 are arranged on the back side of the base body 950 . The first open portion 960 is rotatably pivotally supported on the other end side of the base body 950 . The first opening 960 also has a protrusion 961 that protrudes rearward and is disposed inside the sliding groove 933 a of the annular member 933 . Accordingly, when the upper displacement member 940 is rotationally displaced with respect to the rotation member 930 due to the displacement of the rotation member 930, the projection 961 can slide inside the slide groove 933a.

In this case, as described above, the curved axis of the slide groove 933a is arranged at a position different from the rotation axis of the upper displacement member 940 with respect to the rotary member 930, so that the projection 961 slides inside the slide groove 933a. Along with this, the first open portion 960 pivotally supported by the base body 950 can be rotationally displaced.

The second opening portion 970 is a plate member having a predetermined thickness in the front-rear direction, and two of the second opening portions 970 are arranged on the front side of the base body 950 . The second open portion 970 is rotatably supported on the other end side of the base body 950 . Also. The second opening 970 is formed with an engaging protrusion (not shown) that engages when the first opening 960 is displaced to a predetermined extent. As a result, as described above, when the upper displacement member 940 is rotated by a predetermined amount, the first opening portion 960 engages with the second opening portion 970 when it is rotated about the pivotal portion. The second open portion 970 can be rotationally displaced.

Next, displacement of the upper displacement member 940 will be described with reference to FIGS. 81 to 83. FIG. FIG. 81 is a front view of the upper displacement unit 900 with the upper displacement member 940 arranged at the retracted position. FIG. 82 is a front view of the upper displacement unit 900 with the upper displacement member 940 arranged at the intermediate position. FIG. 83 is a front view of the upper displacement unit 900 with the upper displacement member 940 arranged at the extended position.

The retracted position of the upper displacement member 940 is the position where the pivot pins 951 and 952 are arranged on the other end side of the sliding grooves 911d and 911e of the front base 911 (the right side of the front base 911 when viewed from the front). is. The overhang position is a position in which the pivot pins 951 and 952 are arranged on one end side of the sliding grooves 911d and 911e of the front base 911 (on the left side of the front base 911 when viewed from the front). Furthermore, the intermediate position is a position in which the upper displacement member 940 is displaced to a position intermediate between the retracted position and the extended position.

As shown in FIGS. 81 to 83, when the upper displacement member 940 is displaced with respect to the front base 911, the longitudinal direction of the upper displacement member 940 changes from substantially horizontal direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 81) to substantially vertical direction ( (vertical direction in FIG. 83).

In addition, along with the rotational displacement, the position of one end of the upper displacement member 940 is displaced from the position of the right end of the front base 911 in front view to substantially the center position in front view. That is, the upper displacement member 940 is slidably displaced and rotationally displaced when the rotating member 930 is rotated by the driving force of the drive motor KM5 as described above.

82 to the extended position shown in FIG. 83, the first opening portion 960 provided in the upper displacement member 940 is rotationally displaced with respect to the base body 950. The second opening portion 970 that is displaced by engaging with the rotational displacement of the first opening portion 960 is also rotationally displaced with respect to the base body 950 . Therefore, at the extended position, the longitudinal direction of the upper displacement member 940 is oriented vertically, and the first opening portion 960 and the second opening portion 970 are displaced.

In this embodiment, the upper displacement member 940 is formed in a shape imitating a human arm (including a hand). Therefore, by displacing the first opening portion 960 and the second opening portion 970 from the first position to the third position, it is possible for the player to visually recognize the displacement that makes the human arm thicker. .

Next, with reference to FIG. 84, a detailed description of variable section 980 will be provided. 84(a) is a front view of the variable portion 980, and FIG. 84(b) is a rear view of the variable portion 980. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 84(a) and 84(b), the variable portion 980 is formed in a shape that imitates a human hand. Fingers 982-986 that are connected to form finger portions of a hand.

A drive motor (not shown) is arranged inside the body portion 981, and a variable plate (not shown) arranged inside can be piston-displaced in the front-rear direction (vertical direction in FIG. 84(a)). be done.

The finger portion 982 is a portion corresponding to the thumb, and the base side thereof is connected to the variable plate of the main body portion 981 . As a result, the finger portion 982 can be displaced by the piston movement of the variable plate.

The finger portions 983 to 986 are mainly formed with a first link RB1 arranged on the base side and a second link RB2 arranged on the tip side inside thereof.

The first link RB<b>1 is rotatably connected to the second link RB<b>2 at its distal end and connected to the variable plate of the main body 981 at its base. Therefore, the piston movement of the variable plate of the body portion 981 can displace the first link RB1 and the second link RB2 via the first link RB1. This allows the fingers 983-986 to be displaced. In this embodiment, by displacing the finger portions 982 to 986, the player can visually recognize the action of opening and closing the fingers of the hand.

The front base 411 has two sliding grooves 411a and 411b penetrating in the front-rear direction (the depth direction of the paper surface of FIG. 11), and two cylindrical shaft support pins 411c and 411d projecting to the rear side, and a shaft support pin 411d. and a curved wall portion 411e protruding in an arc around the axis.

The sliding grooves 411a and 411b are holes through which two projections 472 and 473 protruding from the back side of the lower displacement member 440 are inserted. The sliding grooves 411a and 411b are formed to extend in the horizontal direction. Therefore, by displacing the projections 472 and 473 inserted through the sliding grooves 411a and 411b along the sliding grooves 411a and 411b, the lower displacement member 440 can be slid in the left-right direction.

The sliding grooves 411a and 411b are curved in an arc shape, and extend upward (upward in FIG. 11) from the left (left in FIG. 11) end to the right (right in FIG. 11) end of the front base 411. ). Further, the sliding grooves 411a and 411b are arranged at positions where the arc axes of the respective sliding grooves 411a and 411b are different from each other, and the gap between them in the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 11) is narrowed from the left end to the right end.

Since the distance between the projections 472 and 473 of the base member 470 of the lower displacement member 440 does not change, when the lower displacement member 440 is slid along the sliding groove, the lower displacement member 440 is rotated. can be displaced. That is, by changing the distance between the two sliding grooves 411a and 411b, the lower displacement member 440 can be rotated as it slides without applying a rotational driving force to the lower displacement member 440. FIG.

The shaft support pin 411c is a protrusion that is inserted into a shaft portion 422a of a cam member 422 of a transmission member 420, which will be described later, and is formed in a cylindrical shape with an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the shaft portion 422a. Further, the pivot pin 411 c is formed of a metal rod-like body and fitted onto the front base 411 . Therefore, when a force acts on the cam member 422 from its outer peripheral surface in the axial direction, it is possible to prevent the pivot pin 411c from breaking (damage).

Next, the lower displacement member 2440 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 85 to 87. FIG. In the first embodiment, the movable rack 464 and the rack 466 are displaced in the same direction by the driving force of the drive motor KM2. It is displaced in the opposite direction by the driving force of the driving motor KM2. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the part same as the said 1st Embodiment, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

First, the overall configuration of the lower displacement member 2440 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 85 and 86. FIG. FIG. 85 is an exploded perspective front view of the lower displacement member 2440 in the second embodiment. 86 is a front view of the lower displacement member 2440. FIG. 86 shows a state in which the decorative member 450 of the lower displacement member 2440 and the front case 481 are seen transparently.

As shown in FIGS. 85 and 86, the lower displacement member 2440 in the second embodiment includes a base member 2470 connected to the front base 411, a case member 480 covering the front and rear of the base member 2470, and a case member 480. It mainly includes a transmission mechanism 2460 displaceably disposed between the base member 2470 and a decorative member 450 formed to cover the front and rear of the case member 480 .

The base member 2470 is a plate member that is rectangular and horizontally long when viewed from the front. A protruding wall 477 projecting from the upper end of the central portion in the left-right direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 86) in a U-shape opposite to the vertical direction toward the front side; 475 is formed mainly by shaft portions 2470a and 2470b protruding upward.

The shaft portion 2470a is a shaft member on which a transmission gear 2468a, which will be described later, is rotatably supported, and is formed smaller than the shaft hole of the transmission gear 2468a.

The shaft portion 2470b is a shaft member on which a transmission gear 2468b, which will be described later, is rotatably supported, and is formed smaller than the shaft hole of the transmission gear 2468b. As will be described later, the transmission gear 2468a and the shaft portion 2470a are arranged in a state in which the gear tooth flanks engraved on the outer peripheral surfaces thereof are in mesh with each other. That is, the distance between the shaft portions 2470a and 2470b in a front view is set to the distance corresponding to the radius of the transmission gears 2468a and 2468b.

The transmission mechanism 2460 is arranged in front of the base member 470, and includes transmission gears 461, 462, and 463, a drive motor KM2 whose shaft portion is connected to the transmission gear 461, and a tooth surface that meshes with the transmission gear 463. A movable rack 2464 slidably disposed in front of the base member 470, a transmission gear 2468a meshing with the movable rack 2464, a transmission gear 2468b meshing with the transmission gear 2468a, and It mainly includes a rack 46 meshing with the transmission gear 2468b and a ball receiving portion 467 rotatably disposed on one end side of the rack 466. As shown in FIG.

The movable rack 2464 is formed as a horizontally long rectangular plate when viewed from the front. is formed mainly with

The rack gear 2464g meshes with a transmission gear 2468a, which will be described later. As a result, when the drive is transmitted from the drive motor KM4 and the rack 466 is displaced, the transmission gear 2468a can be rotated along with the displacement.

The transmission gears 2468a and 2468b are supported by the shaft portions 2470a and 2470b of the base member 2470, respectively, while meshing with each other as described above. Accordingly, when the transmission gear 2468a is rotated, the transmission gear 2468b is rotated. The transmission gear 2468b is meshed with the rack gear 466a of the rack 466, and when the transmission gear 2468b is rotated, the driving force is transmitted to the rack 466 and the rack 466 is displaced.

That is, the rack 466 can be driven by the driving force of the drive motor KM4. The transmission gears 2468a and 2468b are partially arranged at positions shifted in the front-rear direction, so that the transmission gears 2468a and 2468b are prevented from colliding with the rack 466 and the movable rack 2464, respectively.

Next, displacement of the lower displacement member 2440 will be described with reference to FIG. 87 is a front view of the lower displacement member 2440. FIG. 87, similarly to FIG. 86, the decorative member 450 of the lower displacement member 2440 and the front case 481 are shown transparently.

As shown in FIG. 87, when power is applied to the drive motor KM2 and the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced to the shooting position by the transmission mechanism 2460, the movable rack 464 and the rack 466 are displaced in different directions. be.

More specifically, when the drive motor KM4 is rotated, the movable rack 464 is displaced toward the other end of the lower displacement member 440 (left side in FIG. 87). Accompanying this displacement, the transmission gears 2468a and 2468b are rotated, and the rack 466 is displaced to one end side (right side in FIG. 3). Thereby, the ball receiving portion 467 can be displaced to the third position.

Therefore, when the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced from the first position, a displacement component can be formed in the direction opposite to the displacement direction of the ball receiving portion 467. The displacement of the movable rack 464 can reduce the change in the position of the center of gravity of the displacement member 2440 . As a result, rattling of the lower displacement member 2440 due to changes in the position of the center of gravity can be suppressed.

Next, the lower displacement member 3440 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 88 to 93. FIG. In the first embodiment, the ball receiving portion 467 is slidably displaced by the rack and pinion mechanism, but in the lower displacement member 3440 in the third embodiment, the ball receiving portion 467 is slidably displaced by the link mechanism. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

First, the overall configuration of the lower displacement member 3440 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 88 to 91. FIG. 88(a) is a front view of the lower displacement member 3440 in the third embodiment, and FIG. 88(b) is a rear view of the lower displacement member 3440. FIG. 89 is an exploded perspective front view of the lower displacement member 3440, and FIG. 90 is an exploded perspective rear view of the lower displacement member 3440. FIG. 91(a) and 91(b) are front views of the lower displacement member 3440. FIG.

91(a) shows a state in which the decorative member 450 of the lower displacement member 3440 is seen transparently, and in FIG. 91(b), the decorative member 450 of the lower displacement member 3440 and the front case 3481 are seen transparently. is shown.

As shown in FIGS. 88 to 91, the lower displacement member 3440 in the third embodiment includes a base member 3470 connected to the front base 411, a case member 480 covering the front and rear of the base member 3470, the case member 480 and the base. It mainly includes a transmission mechanism 3460 displaceably disposed between the member 3470 and a decorative member 450 formed to cover the front and rear of the case member 480 .

The base member 3470 is a plate member that is rectangular and horizontally long when viewed from the front. A sliding wall 3470c formed continuously from the base end side of the standing wall 471a and erected at the lower edge of the base member 3470, and the upper end of the central portion in the left-right direction (left-right direction in FIG. 88(a)). and an opening 479 extending from one end side to the other end side and recessed in the center portion of the base member 470 in the vertical direction. It is formed.

The sliding wall 3470c is a wall portion for contacting the leg portion 467a of the ball receiving portion 467 to regulate the position (mode) of the ball receiving portion 467c. That is, the projection is formed to a position below the ball receiving portion 467 . As a result, the ball receiving portion 467 can be held with the opening of the U-shaped portion facing upward.

In addition, the sliding wall 3470c is formed with a concave portion 3470c1 recessed below the end portion on the side of the standing wall 471a. The recessed portion 3470c1 is a groove that receives the tip of the leg portion 467a of the ball receiving portion 467 therein. As a result, when the ball receiving portion 467 is slid toward the standing portion by a transmission mechanism 3460, which will be described later, the ball receiving portion 467 can be received in the recess and rotated. As a result, the ball receiving portion 467 can be caused to perform a shooting operation (an operation of ejecting the ball held inside the U shape to the outside of the lower displacement member 3440).

The transmission mechanism 3460 includes a drive motor KM2 attached to a front case 3480, which will be described later, a first link member 3468 connected to the shaft of the drive motor KM2 and rotatably disposed, and the first link member 3468. It mainly includes a second link member 3469 that is rotatably connected and a ball receiving portion 467 that is connected to one end of the second link member 3469 .

The first link member 3468 is formed of a rectangular horizontally long plate-like body, and has a shaft hole 3468b formed through one end, a connecting hole 3468a connected to the shaft of the drive motor KM2, and a A load portion 3468c is formed.

The shaft hole 3468b is a through hole through which a rotating shaft 3469a of a second link member 3469, which will be described later, is inserted.

The connecting hole 3468a is a hole that is fastened to the shaft of the drive motor KM2 as described above, and is formed with an inner diameter that is approximately the same as the outer diameter of the shaft of the drive motor KM2. The first link member 3468 can be rotated by the driving force of the drive motor KM2 by fitting the shaft of the drive motor KM2 into the connecting hole 3468a and fastening it.

The load portion 3468c is formed to protrude toward the other end side from the connecting hole 3468a. The load portion 346c is a member for applying a load for positioning the center of gravity of the first link member 3468 on the other end side of the connecting hole 3468a, and is formed to bulge outward from the one end side.

The second link member 3469 is formed in a horizontally elongated rectangular shape and arranged on the back side of the first link member 3468 . The second link member 3469 mainly includes a rotating shaft 3469a projecting from the other end toward the front in a cylindrical shape, and a through hole 3469b penetrating in the front-rear direction at one end.

The rotating shaft 3469a is inserted into the shaft hole 3468b of the first link member 3468 as described above. This allows the first link member 3468 and the second link member 3469 to be rotatably connected.

The through hole 3469 b is an opening for connecting the ball receiving portion 467 to the second link member 3469 . Further, the through hole 3469b is formed smaller than the inner diameter of the shaft hole 467b of the ball receiving portion 467. As shown in FIG. Therefore, the shaft hole 467b of the ball receiving portion 467 and the through hole 3469b are arranged coaxially, and a screw having a head larger than the width of the opening 469 in the lateral direction is inserted from the rear side of the base member 3470 to the opening 479 and the shaft hole 467b. is inserted and fastened to the through hole 3469b, the ball receiving portion 467 is rotatably connected to the second link member.

The case member 480 is a member that covers the front and rear of the base member 470, and mainly includes a front case 3481 arranged on the front side of the base member 470 and a rear case 482 arranged on the rear side.

The front case 3481 is formed in the shape of a horizontally long rectangular plate when viewed from the front. It is mainly formed with a shaft hole 481c penetrating in the front-rear direction.

The opening 3481d is a hole through which the shaft of the drive motor KM2 disposed on the front side of the front case 3481 is inserted through the back side, and is formed with an outer diameter larger than the shaft of the drive motor KM2. As a result, the driving force of the drive motor KM2 arranged on the front side of the front case 3481 can be transmitted to the first link member 3468 arranged on the rear side.

Next, displacement of the lower displacement member 3440 will be described with reference to FIGS. 92 and 93. FIG. 92(a) is a front view of the lower displacement member 440 at the first position, and FIG. 92(b) is a front view of the lower displacement member 440 at the second position. 93(a) is a front view of the lower displacement member 440 at the third position, and FIG. 93(b) is a front view of the lower displacement member 440 at the second position.

92(a) to 93(b), transition states of the lower displacement member 440 are illustrated in order. Also, FIGS. 92(a) and 92(b) or FIGS. 93(a) and 93(b) illustrate a state in which the decorative member 450 of the lower displacement member 3440 and the front case 481 are seen transparently.

As shown in FIGS. 92 and 93, the lower displacement member 440 at the first position is such that the first link member 3468 and the second link member 3469 extend in the longitudinal direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 92(a)) of the base member 3470. As shown in FIG. The first link member 3468 and the second link member 3469 are arranged so as to overlap each other in the front-rear direction while being substantially parallel to the direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 92(a)).

That is, the connecting portion between the first link member 3468 and the second link member 3469 is arranged on the one end side of the base member 3470 (the left side in FIG. 92(a)). Thereby, the second link member 3469 is arranged on the one end side. As a result, the ball receiving portion 467 is arranged at the first position.

Next, as shown in FIG. 92(b), when the driving motor KM2 is rotated from the state of the first position and the first link member 3468 is rotationally displaced, one end side of the first link member 3468 is moved to the base member 3470. is displaced with respect to Thereby, the second link member 3469 connected to one end side of the first link member 3468 is displaced. In this case, one end side of the second link member 3469 is connected to the ball receiving portion 467 and is slidable along the opening 479 of the base member 3470 . is extruded to the other end side of the As a result, the ball receiving portion 467 connected to the other end side of the second link member 3469 can be displaced to the second position.

Next, as shown in FIG. 93(a), when the drive motor KM2 is further rotationally displaced from the state of the second position and the first link member 3468 is rotated approximately 180 degrees from the state of the first position. , the connecting portion between the first link member 3468 and the second link member 3469 is arranged on the other end side of the base member 3470 with respect to the rotation axis. Accordingly, one end side of the second link member 3469 is further pushed out to the other end side of the base member 3470, and the ball receiving portion 467 is arranged at the third position.

In this case, the tip of the leg portion 467a of the ball receiving portion 467 is arranged inside the recess 3470c1, so that the ball receiving portion 467 is rotated by the biasing spring SP2 to perform the shooting operation.

Further, the load portion 3468c of the first link member 3468 is displaced toward one end of the base member 3470. As shown in FIG. As a result, it is possible to suppress a change in the position of the center of gravity of the lower displacement member 3440 when the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced with respect to the base member. As a result, rattling of the lower displacement member 3440 can be suppressed.

That is, when the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced from the first position, a displacement component can be formed in the direction opposite to the displacement direction of the ball receiving portion 467. The change in the position of the center of gravity of the displacement member 3440 can be reduced by the displacement of the load portion 3468c. As a result, rattling of the lower displacement member 440 due to changes in the position of the center of gravity can be suppressed.

Further, in the third embodiment, as shown in FIG. 93(b), by continuing the rotation of the first link member 3468, the ball receiving portion 467 can be retracted to the second position and the first position. Therefore, there is no need to switch the control of the drive motor KM2, and the displacement to the second position or the first position can be performed quickly.

Therefore, when a game ball is ejected from the inside of the ball receiving portion 467, the position of the center of gravity of the lower displacement member 440 changes. By quickly bringing the position of the center of gravity closer to the rotation axis of the lower displacement member 440, rattling of the lower displacement member 3440 can be suppressed.

Further, by immediately displacing the ball receiving portion 467, it is possible to suppress the wobbling of the lower displacement member 3440 due to the reaction of the discharge operation when the game ball is discharged from the inside of the ball receiving portion 467.

That is, when the game ball is ejected from the inside of the ball receiving portion 467, the load of the lower displacement member 440 is reduced by the amount of the ejected game ball, and the lower displacement member 3440 tends to be displaced upward due to the reaction. By immediately displacing the ball receiving portion 467, the reaction due to the rotational displacement of the ball receiving portion 467 acts to displace the base member 470 downward, thereby canceling the reaction when the ball is ejected from the lower displacement member 3440. be able to.

Next, a lower displacement unit 4400 in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 94 to 96. FIG. In the first embodiment, the case where the lower displacement member 440 arranged in the retracted state is configured to be capable of shooting has been described. The firing motion of 440 is restricted. The same reference numerals are given to the same parts as those of the above-described embodiments, and the description thereof will be omitted.

First, the overall configuration of the lower displacement unit 4400 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 94 . FIG. 94 is a front view of the lower displacement unit 4400 in the fourth embodiment. In FIG. 94, the decoration member 450 of the lower displacement member 440 and the front case 481 are shown transparently, and the bottom wall portion 481b of the front case 481 is shown with a chain line. Also, FIG. 94 illustrates a state in which the lower displacement member 440 is in the retracted state and the ball receiving portion 467 is arranged at the first position.

As shown in FIG. 94, a lower displacement unit 4400 according to the fourth embodiment has an opening formed in a base member 470 of a lower displacement member 440 between an upstanding wall 471a and a bottom wall portion 481b of a front case 481. 4471b is formed.

A tip portion 4411g1 of an engagement wall 4411g, which will be described later, is inserted into the opening 4471b. That is, the opening 4471b is opened larger than the tip portion 4411g1.

The front base 411 is formed with an engagement wall 4411g formed in a substantially L shape that is continuous with the bottom surface of the recovery port 411f.

The engaging wall 4411g can restrict the rotation of the ball receiving portion 467 at the third position (shooting operation) by inserting the substantially L-shaped tip portion 4411g1 into the opening 4471b. . That is, the tip position of the tip portion 4411g1 is set substantially at the same height as the top surface of the bottom wall portion 481b of the lower displacement member 440 positioned in the retracted state.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 95 and 96, a state in which each member of the lower displacement unit 4400 is displaced will be described. 95 and 96 are front views of the lower displacement unit 4400. FIG. 95 and 96 show a state in which the decorative member 450 of the lower displacement member 440 and the front case 481 are seen transparently as in FIG. 94, and the bottom wall portion 481b of the front case 481 is shown illustrated.

Also, FIG. 95 illustrates a state in which the lower displacement member 440 is in the retracted state and the ball receiving portion 467 is arranged at the third position. FIG. 96 illustrates a state in which the lower displacement member 440 is in the first overhanging state and the ball receiving portion 467 is arranged at the first position.

As shown in FIG. 95, when the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced to the third position, the tip of the leg portion 467a of the ball receiving portion 467 comes into contact with the upper surface of the tip portion 4411g1 of the engaging wall 4411g, thereby forming the recess 481b1 or the opening. 4471b is restricted. This restricts the rotation of the ball receiving portion 467 .

Therefore, when ball receiving portion 467 is caused to perform a payout operation in order to discharge the ball thrown onto the track area of ball receiving portion 467 to the outside of lower displacement member 440, ball receiving portion 467 is positioned at the third position. rotates and discharges the game ball held inside the ball receiving portion 467 can be suppressed.

That is, when the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced to the third position, the posture of the ball receiving portion 467 is changed when game balls exceeding the specified number (one ball) are ejected from the orbit area of the ball receiving portion 467. can be regulated. Therefore, it is possible to easily discharge only the game balls exceeding the specified number from the trajectory area.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 96 , when the lower displacement member 440 is displaced to the position of the first extended state (not the position of the retracted state), the lower displacement member 440 is displaced with respect to the base member 470 . Therefore, the opening 4471b of the lower displacement member 440 and the engaging wall 4411g are separated. Therefore, in the first protruding state, the ball receiving portion 467 can be displaced to the third position for shooting.

That is, as the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced to the third position, when game balls exceeding the specified number (one ball) are ejected from the track area of the ball receiving portion 467, the attitude of the ball receiving portion 467 is By suppressing the change, it is possible to easily maintain the state in which the ball receiving portion 467 holds the prescribed number of game balls, while the lower displacement member 440 is engaged when displaced to the first and second projecting positions. Since the wall 4411g is separated from the inner space of the opening 4471b, the leg 467a is engaged with the opening 4471b as the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced to the third position, thereby changing the posture of the ball receiving portion 467. This makes it possible to easily discharge the prescribed number of game balls from the ball receiving portion 467.例文帳に追加

Next, a sorting unit 5500 according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 97 to 101. FIG. In the first embodiment, the distribution member 540 rotates to form the storage state and the regulation state, but in the fifth embodiment, the distribution member 540 slides to form the storage state and the regulation state. do. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

First, the overall configuration of the sorting unit 5500 according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 97 to 100. FIG. 97(a) is a top view of the sorting unit 5500 in the fifth embodiment, and FIG. 97(b) is a rear view of the sorting unit 5500. FIG. 98 is an exploded perspective front view of the sorting unit 5500, and FIG. 99 is an exploded perspective rear view of the sorting unit 5500. FIG. FIG. 100 is a cross-sectional view of the sorting unit 5500 taken along line CC of FIG. 97(a). Note that in FIG. 100, the outer shape of the distribution member 550 is illustrated with a dashed line.

As shown in FIGS. 97 to 99, a sorting unit 5500 according to the fifth embodiment includes a base plate 5520 formed in a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and a base plate 5520 attached to the front side of the base plate 5520 and facing the base plate 5520. A path forming member 510 that forms a plurality of flow-down paths between which balls can flow down; 5520 and an extension path member 530 that extends the flow-down path of the spheres formed between the opposing path formation members 510 .

The base plate 5520 includes two cylindrical shafts 5526 protruding to the back side, a first opening 5521 and a second opening 5522 formed in a rectangular shape, and a U-shaped cross section whose upper end side is open to the side surface of the upper end. It is mainly formed with a rolling portion 525 that is formed in a shape and extends in the left-right direction, and a locking portion 524 that protrudes like a hook on the back side.

Two shaft portions 5526 are formed so as to protrude on the back side, and are inserted into two sliding grooves 5546, which will be described later.

The first opening 5521 and the second opening 5522 are openings through which the regulating plate 541 and the storage plate 5542 of the distribution member 5540, which will be described later, are inserted. It is formed. In addition, since the distribution member 5540 is attached to the base plate 5520 in a slidable state, the first opening 5521 and the second opening 5522 are larger than the regulation plate 5541 and the storage plate 5542 in the sliding direction of the distribution member 5540. formed in the opening.

The distribution member 5540 is formed in a rectangular shape in front view with one side being longer, and is formed with a predetermined thickness in the front-rear direction. The sorting member 5540 includes a regulation plate 5541 and a storage plate 5542 projecting in a plate shape toward the front side, and a sliding groove 5546 formed as an elongated hole in substantially the same direction as the extension direction of the regulation plate 5541 and the storage plate 5542. and a locking portion 544 formed in a hook shape on the back side.

The regulating plate 5541 is disposed at the connecting portion between the first ball-throwing route KR1 and the second ball-throwing route KR2 via the first opening 5521, so that the game ball flowing down the first ball-throwing route KR1 passes through the second ball-throwing route KR2. It is a plate member that regulates the flow into, and the distance projected from the first opening 5521 is set to a distance larger than the radius of the game ball.

In addition, the regulation plate 5541 is formed in a straight line shape when viewed from the front, and its extending direction is set to be substantially the same as the sliding direction of the distribution member 540 . Thereby, when the distribution member 5540 is slid and displaced, the displacement area of the regulation plate 5541 can be minimized. As a result, the opening area of the first opening 5521 can be minimized, and the rigidity of the base plate 5520 can be secured.

The reservoir plate 5542 is a plate member that is arranged on the second ball-throwing route KR2 via the second opening 5522, and allows game balls that flow down the second ball-throwing route KR2 to flow upstream of the reservoir plate 5542. The distance projected from the opening 5522 is set to a distance larger than the radius of the game ball.

In addition, the storage plate 5542 is formed in a straight line shape when viewed from the front, and the direction in which it extends is set to be substantially the same as the sliding direction of the distribution member 540 . Thereby, when the distribution member 5540 is slid and displaced, the displacement area of the storage plate 5542 can be minimized. As a result, the opening area of the second opening 5522 can be minimized, and the rigidity of the base plate 5520 can be secured.

The sliding groove 5546 is an elongated hole penetrating in the front-rear direction. The shaft portion 5526 of the base plate 5520 is inserted into the slide groove 5546 . Therefore, by inserting the shaft portion 5526 into the sliding groove 5546 and fastening a screw or the like to the tip of the shaft portion 5526 from the back side, the distribution member 5540 is held in a state in which it can be slidably displaced with respect to the base plate 5520. be able to.

The sliding grooves 5546 are formed at two locations with their longitudinal directions parallel to each other. As a result, the distribution member 5540 can be slidably displaced while suppressing the rotational displacement of the distribution member 5540 .

Next, referring to FIG. 101, displacement of the distribution member 5540 will be described. 101(a) and 101(b) are partial enlarged views of the sorting unit 5500 in the range CI of FIG. 100. FIG. FIG. 101(a) shows a state in which the sorting member 5540 is arranged at the storage position, and FIG. 101(b) shows a state in which the sorting member 5540 is arranged at the restricting position.

As shown in FIG. 101(a), when the sorting member 5540 is placed at the regulating position, the storage plate 5542 is arranged along the third ball throwing path KR3, and the regulating plate 5541 is located on the back side of the path forming member 510. It is located inside a recess 518 formed in the wall.

In this case, the distance dimension L9 between the tip of the storage plate 5542 protruding inside the third ball throwing path KR3 and the inner wall of the third ball throwing path facing the tip is made smaller than the diameter of the game ball. Therefore, the ball thrown from the upstream of the third ball-throwing path KR3 (first ball-throwing path KR1) is stopped on the upstream side of the storage plate 5542 .

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 101(b), when the sorting member 5540 is arranged at the regulating position, the regulating plate 5541 is arranged at the connecting portion between the first ball-throwing route KR1 and the third ball-throwing route KR3. , the regulating plate 5541 is arranged at the connecting portion between the first ball-throwing path KR1 and the third ball-throwing path KR3, and the storage plate 5542 is arranged inside the recess 519 formed in the wall on the back side of the path forming member 510. be.

In this case, the distance dimension L10 between the end of the tip of the regulating plate 5541 protruding inside the first ball-throwing path KR1 and the inner wall of the entrance of the third ball-throwing path KR3 is made smaller than the diameter of the game ball. Therefore, the ball flowing down the first ball-throwing route KR1 collides with the regulation plate 5541 and is thrown to the second ball-throwing route KR2.

That is, by switching the distribution member 5540 between the regulating position and the storage position, the ball thrown on the first ball path KR1 is thrown to the third ball path KR3 and stopped on the third ball path KR3; A state can be formed in which the ball flowing down the first ball path KR1 cannot flow into the third ball path KR3 and is thrown to the second ball path KR2.

Therefore, by slidingly displacing one distribution member 5540, when one flow path is divided into two flow paths, the flow path of the ball can be reliably switched to either one.

In addition, the regulation plate 5541 (distribution means) is formed so as to be able to appear and retract with respect to the first ball throwing route KR1 (downstream passage) or the third ball throwing route KR3 (first branch passage). It is the inner wall on the downstream extension line of the downstream end of the 1 ball throwing path KR1. Therefore, the regulation plate 5541 can be projected at a position close to the game ball flowing down from the lower end side of the first throwing path KR1. Therefore, it is possible to shorten the time required from when the regulating plate 5541 starts to protrude into the downstream passage or the third ball throwing route KR3 (first branch passage) to when the game balls can be sorted. As a result, it is possible to reliably switch the allocation destination by the regulation plate 5541 .

In addition, the regulation plate 5541 (distribution means) protrudes into the third ball-throwing route KR3 (first branch passage), so that the game ball flowing down the first ball-throwing route KR1 (flow-down passage) is diverted to the second ball-throwing route ( second branch path), and the projecting direction of the regulating plate 5541 is set in the direction pointing to the upstream end of the second ball-throwing path KR2. When the game ball comes into contact with the regulating plate in the middle, the game ball can be pushed into the second ball-throwing path KR as the regulating plate protrudes. As a result, the distribution to the second throwing route KR2 can be performed more reliably.

Next, a rotation unit 6700 in the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 102 to 106. FIG. In the first embodiment, the case where the load gear 731e is connected to drive the rotating body 800 and the rotating body 800 is restricted from operating by inertial force has been described. Gear 731e is removed. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

First, the overall configuration of the rotating unit 6700 in the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 102 to 104. FIG. 102 is a front view of a rotation unit 6700 in the sixth embodiment, and FIG. 103 is an exploded perspective front view of the rotation unit 6700. FIG. 104 is an exploded perspective rear view of the sorting unit 6500. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 102 to 104, the rotation unit 6700 includes a decoration unit 6750 having a rotating body 800 that is rotationally displaced, a ball bearing table 710 arranged above the decoration unit 6750 in the direction of gravity, and 710 and a rear base 720 arranged on the rear side of the decoration unit 6750, a left transmission member 730 arranged on the left side of the decoration unit 6750 when viewed from the front, and a crank cover 743 arranged on the right side of the decoration unit 6750 when viewed from the front. and .

The decoration unit 6750 mainly includes a box-shaped box member 760 whose upper side is open in the gravitational direction, and a rotor 800 rotatably disposed inside the box member. That is, in the first embodiment, the decoration unit 750 has the rotor 800 disposed inside the box member 760 and the lid member 770, but in the sixth embodiment, the decoration unit 750 is formed with the lid member 770 removed. be.

The left transmission member 730 is mounted with a drive motor KM4 disposed on the left side (left side of FIG. 102) of the decoration unit 750, a transmission member 6731 for transmitting the driving force of the drive motor KM4, and the drive motor KM4. A motor base 732, a gear cover 733 that covers the transmission member 6731, and a ball throw path cover 734 that is attached to the gear cover 733 and formed with a predetermined gap between facing the gear cover 733. formed with.

The transmission member 6731 includes a transmission gear 731a attached to the shaft of the drive motor KM4, a transmission gear 6731b meshing with the transmission gear 731a, a transmission gear 731c meshing with the transmission gear 6731b, and a transmission gear 731c. and a transmission gear 731 d arranged adjacent to and coaxially arranged by a shaft 735 .

The transmission gear 6731b is a gear that transmits driving force to the transmission gear 731c. Although the one-way clutch OW1 is attached inside the transmission gear 731b in the first embodiment, the one-way clutch OW1 is removed from the transmission gear 6731b in the sixth embodiment. Further, since the transmission gear 731c and the transmission gear 731d are the same as in the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Therefore, when the driving force is transmitted in one direction from the drive motor KM4, the rotational driving force can be transmitted to the shaft 735, and when the driving force in the other direction is transmitted from the drive motor KM4, the inner ring of the one-way clutch OW1 is rotated. As a result, the outer ring slips (idles) and the transmission of the driving force to the shaft 735 is interrupted.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 105 and 106, the rotation of rotating body 800 will be described. 105(a) to 105(c) are side views of the decoration unit 6750 viewed in the direction of arrow CV in FIG. 104, and FIGS. 106(a) to 106(c) are views in the direction of arrow CV in FIG. is a side view of the decoration unit 6750 in FIG.

105 and 106, the left side plate 765 of the box member 760 is shown transparently. FIGS. 105(a) to 105(c) sequentially show modes in which the center of gravity G of the rotating body 800 is displaced in the second section DK2, and FIGS. Modes in which the center of gravity G of 800 is displaced in the first section DK1 are sequentially illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 105, the rotating body 800 is rotationally displaced to the left (as viewed in the direction of FIG. 105) to the right (clockwise) when a driving force in one direction is transmitted from the drive motor KM4.

The rotating body 800 is formed asymmetrically about the rotation axis as described above, and the center of gravity G is arranged at a position different from the rotation axis. Therefore, the rotating body 800 is rotated from the state in which the center of gravity G shown in FIG. 106(a) is arranged above the rotation axis, and the center of gravity G shown in FIG. 106(b) is displaced to a position substantially horizontal to the rotation axis. When started, the load exerts a rotating force in the direction of rotation.

Therefore, the engagement of the roller interposed between the outer ring and the inner ring of the one-way clutch OW1 arranged in the transmission gear 731c is released, and the outer ring (rotating body 800 side) precedes the inner ring (drive motor side). and drive. That is, in the second interval, the rotating body 800 can be rotated at a higher rotational speed than the driving motor KM4.

Note that the rotating body 800 that rotates the second section DK2 with the load is rotated to a position where the center of gravity G shown in FIG. 105(c) is positioned below the rotation axis.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 106, when the center of gravity G of the rotating body 800 is displaced in the first section DK1, the load of the rotating body 800 acts in the direction opposite to its rotating direction. Therefore, the rotating body 800 is rotated according to the rotational speed of the drive motor KM4.

Therefore, in the sixth embodiment, the displacement speed of the rotor 800 in the second section DK2 can be made faster than the displacement speed of the rotor 800 in the first section DK1. As a result, it is possible to change the displacement mode of the rotating body 800 and enhance the presentation effect according to the displacement of the rotating body 800 .

Next, a seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 107 to 110. FIG. In the above-described first embodiment, the cover member 770 causes the outer ring of the one-way clutch OW1 to lead the inner ring by its own weight (that is, the displacement speed of the cover member 770 is increased). The displacement member 7710 in the form makes the outer ring of the one-way clutch OW1 ahead of the inner ring by using the weight of the game ball (that is, speeds up the displacement speed of the displacement member 7710). In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

107 and 108 are schematic side views of the displacement unit 7700 in the seventh embodiment. 107 schematically illustrates a state in which the displacement member 7710 is arranged at the raised position, and FIG. 108 schematically illustrates a state in which the displacement member 7710 is arranged at the lowered position.

As shown in FIGS. 107 and 108, the displacement unit 7700 includes a displacement member 7710 formed to be slidably displaceable, and a rotational driving force of a driving means (not shown, such as an electric motor) transmitted to the displacement member 7710. and a load gear 7730 that rotates as the displacement member 7710 slides.

The displacement member 7710 is supported by a support mechanism (not shown) so as to be linearly displaceable along the virtual line L1. It mainly includes a rack gear 7712 engraved along the imaginary line L1 and a ball receiving member 7713 rotatably supported at the tip of the displacement member 7710 .

The imaginary line L1 is set as a straight line that slopes downward from the raised position shown in FIG. 107 toward the lowered position shown in FIG. That is, at the raised position, the displacement member 7710 is positioned higher in the gravitational direction than at the lowered position.

The driven pin 7711 is a member that is slidably inserted into the drive groove 7723b in the arm member 7723 of the transmission member 7720, and is formed as a cylindrical body with an outer shape slightly smaller than the groove width of the drive groove 7723b. A load gear 7730 is meshed with the rack gear 7712 , and the load gear 7730 is rotated as the displacement member 7710 slides.

The ball receiving member 7713 is a member for holding a game ball on the upper surface of the displacement member 7710, and by rotating around a rotating shaft 7713a, the upright state shown in FIG. 107 and the tilted state shown in FIG. Formable. In the upright state, one end protrudes from the upper surface of the displacement member 7710 so that the game ball can be held (see FIG. 109). On the other hand, in the tilted state, the game ball can be ejected from the upper surface of the displacement member 7710 by positioning the one end side below the upper surface of the displacement member 7710 (see FIG. 110).

The ball receiving member 7713 is maintained in an upright state by a biasing force acting from a biasing spring (for example, a torsion spring) (not shown). An engagement pin 7740 is fixed on the track of the displacement member 7710 (ball receiving member 7713). By engaging 7740, the ball receiving member 7713 is rotated into a tilted state. On the other hand, when the displacement member 7710 is slid to the raised position, the ball receiving member 7713 is rotated by the elastic recovery force of the urging spring and returned to the tilted state.

The transmission member 7720 is a disk-shaped rotating member 7721 that is rotationally driven by the above-described driving means (not shown), and the transmitting member 7720 protrudes from the axial end surface of the rotating member 7721 and is positioned eccentrically from the rotation center of the rotating member 7721. It mainly comprises a columnar drive pin 7722 and an arm member 7723 having a driven groove 7723a formed at one end thereof so that the drive pin 7722 is slidably inserted.

A one-way clutch OW1 is interposed between the rotating member 7721 and the driving means. Specifically, the one-way clutch OW1 has an inner ring connected to the driving means and an outer ring connected to the rotating member 7721. When the inner ring is driven to rotate in the direction of arrow A (clockwise in FIG. 107) by the driving means, When the rotational driving force is transmitted to the outer ring (that is, the rotating member 7721 is rotated in the direction of arrow A) while the inner ring is rotationally driven in the direction opposite to the direction of arrow A (counterclockwise in FIG. 107) by the drive means, , disconnects the power transmission to the outer ring (rotating member 7721).

The arm member 7723 has a driving groove 7723b formed on the other end opposite to the driven groove 7723a, through which the driven pin 7711 of the displacement member 7710 is slidably inserted. A rotating shaft 7723c rotatably supports the portion between the driven groove 7723a and the driving groove 7723b (intermediate portion).

The drive pin 7722 is formed as a cylindrical body having an outer shape slightly smaller than the groove width of the driven groove 7723a. Further, the driven groove 7723a and the driving groove 7723b are formed as linear grooves along the longitudinal direction of the arm member 7723. As shown in FIG.

According to the displacement unit 7700 formed as described above, when the rotating member 7721 is rotated in the direction of arrow A (clockwise in FIG. 107) from the state in which the displacement member 7710 is arranged at the raised position shown in FIG. , the driving pin 7722 acts on the inner wall surface of the driven groove 7723a, and the arm member 7723 is rotated clockwise in FIG. 107 around the rotating shaft 7723c. As the arm member 7723 rotates clockwise, the inner wall surface of the drive groove 7723b acts in a direction to push down the driven pin 7711, thereby causing the displacement member 7710 to slide along the virtual line L1, as shown in FIG. is placed in the lowered position shown in FIG.

On the other hand, when the rotating member 7721 is further rotated in the direction of arrow A (clockwise in FIG. 107) from the state in which the displacement member 7710 is arranged at the lowered position shown in FIG. Acting on the wall surface, the arm member 7723 is rotated counterclockwise in FIG. 107 around the rotating shaft 7723c. As the arm member 7723 rotates counterclockwise, the inner wall surface of the drive groove 7723b acts in a direction to push up the driven pin 7711, thereby sliding the displacement member 7710 along the imaginary line L1. It is placed in the raised position shown at 107 .

Here, like the load gear 731e in the first embodiment, the load gear 7730 is formed so as to generate a predetermined amount of resistance when rotating. As a result, the weight (self weight) of the displacement member 7710 acts on the arm member 7723 to rotate the rotating member 7721 in the direction of arrow A (clockwise in FIG. 107), thereby moving the outer ring of the one-way clutch OW1 relative to the inner ring. leading in one direction (direction of arrow A). That is, in a state in which no game ball is held, it is possible to suppress the increase in the displacement speed of the displacement member 7710 when moving from the raised position to the lowered position.

That is, while the rotating member 7721 is rotated in the direction of arrow A (clockwise in FIGS. 107 and 108) by the rotational driving force of the driving means, it is displaced at the sliding speed corresponding to the rotational driving speed of the rotational driving means. The member 7710 is reciprocatingly displaced (slide displaced) between the raised position and the lowered position.

109 and 110 are schematic side views of the displacement unit 7700 when a game ball is held by the displacement member 7710. FIG. 109 schematically illustrates a state in which the displacement member 7710 is arranged at the raised position, and FIG. 110 schematically illustrates a state in which the displacement member 7710 is arranged at the lowered position.

As shown in FIGS. 109 and 110, the displacement member 7710 is formed to hold a game ball on its upper surface. That is, in this embodiment, the displacement unit 7700 is arranged in the area where the game ball flows down in the game area, and the displacement member 7710 is formed so that the upper surface of the displacement member 7710 can receive the falling game ball. In addition, in FIG. 109, a state in which four game balls indicated by symbol T are held on the upper surface of the displacement member 7710 is illustrated.

In this case, in the state where the displacement member 7710 holds the game ball, the weight of the displacement member 7710 as a whole is increased (heavy) by the weight of the game ball, and the resistance accompanying the rotation of the load gear 7730 is exceeded. can be made That is, the weight of the displacement member 7710 as a whole (the weight including the game ball) is applied to the arm member 7723, and the rotation member 7721 is rotated in the direction of arrow A (clockwise in FIG. 109) to rotate the outer ring of the one-way clutch OW1. can be advanced in one direction (arrow A direction) with respect to the inner ring. As a result, the displacement speed of the displacement member 7710 when moving from the raised position to the lowered position can be made faster than the displacement speed when the game ball is not held (see FIG. 107).

Also, the weight of the displacement member 7710 as a whole can be varied according to the number of game balls being held. Thereby, the displacement speed of the displacement member 7710 can be varied (changed) not only depending on whether or not the displacement member 7710 holds game balls, but also according to the number of game balls held. As a result, the variation of the displacement speed of the displacement member 7710 can be increased, and the presentation effect associated with the displacement of the displacement member 7710 can be enhanced accordingly.

As described above, the displacement member 7710 is provided with the ball receiving member 7713 at its tip (the end on the downwardly inclined side). Therefore, when the displacement member 7710 (the upper surface thereof or the ball receiving member 7713) receives the game ball flowing down the game area, the force acting on the displacement member 7710 from the game ball slides toward the lowered position. It can act as a displacing force. That is, the force can be applied via the arm member 7723 and the rotating member 7721 in a direction to move the outer ring of the one-way clutch OW1 ahead of the inner ring in one direction (arrow A direction).

Thereby, when the displacement member 7710 (its upper surface or the ball receiving member 7713) catches the flowing game ball, the kinetic energy of the game ball is used to slide the displacement member 7710 in the direction toward the lowered position. The displacement speed of the displacement can be made faster.

In this case, the flowing game balls have different flowing directions and flowing velocities. Therefore, the force (magnitude of kinetic energy) acting on the displacement member 7710 can be varied according to the difference in the flow state (flow direction and flow speed) of the game ball to be received. As a result, the displacement speed of the displacement member 7710 is varied (variation can be made). As a result, the variation of the displacement speed of the displacement member 7710 can be increased, and the presentation effect associated with the displacement of the displacement member 7710 can be enhanced accordingly.

In addition, in the seventh embodiment, the rotating member 7721 rotates in one direction, so there is no need to switch the driving direction of the driving means. In other words, the displacement member 7710 can be reciprocated by continuously rotating the rotating means in one direction. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the time required to switch the driving direction of the driving means. As a result, the displacement member 7710 can be displaced immediately, since switching of the driving means is not required.

In this case, by immediately displacing the displacement member 7710, the ball receiving member 7713 is rotationally displaced and the game ball received by the displacement member 7710 (its upper surface or the ball receiving member 7713) is dropped. Rattling of the displacement member 7710 can be suppressed.

That is, when the game ball is dropped from the displacement member 7710 (ball receiving member 7713), the load of the displacement member 7710 is reduced by the amount of the dropped game ball, and the displacement member 7710 tends to be displaced upward due to the reaction. However, by immediately displacing the displacement member 7710, the reaction due to the displacement of the ball receiving member 7713 acts to displace the displacement member 7710 downward, canceling the reaction when the ball is dropped from the displacement member 7710. be able to.

The game ball flowing down the game area is not limited to the game ball moving in the direction of gravity on the front surface of the game board 13, but also includes the game ball moving in a direction different from the direction of gravity. Game balls that move in a direction different from the direction of gravity include, for example, game balls that collide with nails, tulips, accessories, etc. A game ball that moves in a direction different from the direction of gravity is exemplified.

Here, in this embodiment, by providing the load gear 7730, in a state where the displacement member 7710 does not hold the game ball (see FIG. 107), when the displacement member 7710 is slid toward the lowered position , the outer ring of the one-way clutch OW1 does not lead the inner ring in one direction (the direction of arrow A) (that is, the displacement speed of the displacement member 7710 does not increase).

On the other hand, when the load gear 7730 is omitted or the resistance of the load gear 7730 is set to a small value, when the displacement member 7710 is slid toward the lowered position, the outer ring of the one-way clutch OW1 is moved with respect to the inner ring. may be configured to lead in one direction (direction of arrow A) (that is, the displacement speed of the displacement member 7710 increases). That is, even when only the weight (self weight) of the displacement member 7710 is applied to the arm member 7723 and the rotating member 7721 is rotated in the direction of arrow A (clockwise in FIG. 107), the outer ring of the one-way clutch OW1 does not move to the inner ring. You may make it precede to it.

Next, the upper plate 8017 in the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 111 to 114. FIG. A rotation operation unit 8650 is arranged at the upper plate 8017 in the eighth embodiment at a substantially central position in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

First, the overall configuration of the rotation operation unit 8650 according to the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 111 to 113. FIG. FIG. 111 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 in the eighth embodiment. 112 is an exploded perspective front view of the rotary operation unit 8650. FIG. FIG. 113 is a schematic cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine 10 along line CXIII-CXIII in FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 111 to 113, the rotary operation unit 8650 is arranged in the inner space of the upper plate 8017 of the pachinko machine 10, and the outer peripheral surface of the rotary operation portion 8654, which will be described later, protrudes outward from the upper plate 8017. It is arranged in a state where

The rotation operation unit 8650 includes a drive motor KM6, a transmission gear 8651 connected to the shaft of the drive motor KM6, a transmission gear 8652 meshed with the outer peripheral surface of the transmission gear 8651, and a shaft of the transmission gear 8652. It mainly includes a shaft portion 8653 fitted inside a hole, a one-way clutch OW1 having an inner ring fitted onto the shaft portion 8653, and a rotation operation portion 8654 having an outer ring of the one-way clutch OW1 fitted inside. .

Transmission gear 8651 is coupled to the shaft of drive motor KM6. Therefore, the transmission gear 8651 can be rotated by applying a rotational driving force to the drive motor KM6. As described above, the transmission gear 8651 is arranged in mesh with the transmission gear 8652 . Therefore, when a rotational driving force is applied to the drive motor KM6, the transmission gear 8652 can be rotated via the transmission gear 8651. FIG.

The shaft portion 8653 is a rod member formed in a columnar shape, and its axial length is formed longer than the lateral width dimension of the rotation operation portion 8654 . One end of the shaft portion 8653 is fitted into the shaft hole of the transmission gear 8652, and the other end is inserted into the inner ring of the one-way clutch OW1, as described above. As a result, the driving force generated when the transmission gear 8652 is rotated can be transmitted to the one-way clutch OW1.

As described above, the one-way clutch OW1 is composed of an inner ring, an outer ring, and rollers engaged therebetween. When the inner ring rotates in one direction, the rotation of the inner ring can be transmitted to the outer ring, and the inner ring rotates in the other direction. When rotated, the rotation of the inner ring can be non-transmitted to the outer ring.

The rotation operation part 8654 is formed in an annular shape, and is disposed with a part of its outer peripheral surface protruding from the upper plate 8017 . In addition, the outer ring of the one-way clutch OW1 is fitted in the inner circular portion of the rotation operating portion 8654. As shown in FIG. That is, the inward inclination of the rotation operating portion 8654 is formed to be substantially the same as the outer diameter of the one-way clutch OW1. Therefore, rotation is transmitted to the rotation operation portion 8654 by rotating the outer ring of the one-way clutch OW1.

As a result, when the drive motor KM6 is driven and rotated in one direction, the rotation is transmitted to the outer ring of the one-way clutch OW1 via the transmission gears 8651, 8652 and the inner ring of the one-way clutch OW1, and the rotation operation portion 8654 is rotated. is rotated. On the other hand, when the drive motor KM6 is driven to rotate in the other direction, transmission between the inner and outer rings of the one-way clutch OW1 is disabled, and transmission of rotational drive to the rotation operation portion 8654 is interrupted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 114, the case where the player operates the rotation operation section 8654 will be described. 114 is a schematic cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine 10. FIG. Note that the cross section of FIG. 114 corresponds to that of FIG.

As described above, the rotation operation unit 8654 rotates when the drive motor KM6 is rotated, and rotates the rotation operation unit 8654 by making the rotation of the drive motor KM6 non-rotating. A mode in which the displacement is stopped can be formed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 114, when the drive motor KM6 is rotated in one direction and the rotation operation portion 8654 is rotated in the A direction, the player operates the outer peripheral surface of the rotation operation portion 8654 to rotate the rotation operation portion. When a rotational force is generated in 8654 in the same direction as the direction of rotation A, the outer peripheral surface of one-way clutch OW1 and rotation operating portion 8654 are rotated first. That is, the rotation operation section 8654 can be operated by the player's operation to rotate at a speed faster than the rotation speed of the driving motor KM6.

Further, when the rotation operation part 8654 is not rotated (the drive motor KM6 is not rotated), the player applies a driving force to the rotation operation part 8654 in the direction of rotation A, thereby rotationally displacing the rotation operation part 8654. be able to.

Therefore, in the eighth embodiment, the rotation operation unit 8654 not only forms a non-rotating or rotating state by driving the drive motor KM6, but also rotates from a stopped state by a player's operation. And the rotation operation part 8654 can be configured to be rotated at a faster speed from the rotating state by the player's operation.

As a result, it is possible to form a plurality of modes in which the player can visually recognize the displacement mode of the rotation operation portion 8654, so that the player can be entertained. Also, by forming a plurality of rotation modes of the rotary operation part 8654, a plurality of performance modes of the pachinko machine 10 can be formed, so that the player can be entertained by the increased performance.

A sensor device or the like that measures the number of rotations is arranged on the side surface of the rotation operation unit 8654, and effects that change based on the number of rotations or the rotation speed of the rotation operation unit 8654 can be performed.

The present invention has been described above based on the above embodiments, but the present invention is not limited to the above embodiments, and various modifications and improvements are possible without departing from the scope of the present invention. can be easily guessed.

In each of the above embodiments, a gaming machine may be configured by replacing or combining part or all of one embodiment with part or all of another one or more embodiments.

In the first embodiment, the drive motor KM2 is driven to retract the ball receiving portion 467 from the third position to the second position or the first position. The drive for retracting to the 1 position may be driven by a biasing spring. For example, an urging spring is provided between the rack 466 or the movable rack 464 and the base member 470 so that elastic force is applied as the rack 466 or the movable rack 464 is displaced.

In this case, when the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced to the third position and performs the dispensing operation, the drive motor KM3 is turned off, so that the ball receiving portion 467 is moved to the second position or the second position by the biasing force of the biasing spring. It can be displaced to the 1 position side.

Therefore, the ball receiving portion 467 can be displaced by utilizing the time until the driving force of the driving motor KM2 is switched to the third position. It is possible to suppress wobbling of the lower displacement member 440 due to the reaction to the movement.

That is, when a game ball is ejected from the inside of the ball receiving portion 467, the load of the lower displacement member 440 is reduced by the amount of the ejected game ball, and the reaction causes the lower displacement member 440 to be easily displaced upward. By immediately displacing the ball receiving portion 467, the reaction due to the rotational displacement of the ball receiving portion 467 acts to displace the base member 470 downward, canceling the reaction when the ball is ejected from the lower displacement member 440. be able to.

In the first embodiment described above, two engaging protrusions 882 for restricting the rotation of the rotating body 800 are formed on the side surface of the rotating body 800 with a predetermined interval, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. do not have. For example, a plurality of them may be continuously provided on the side wall of the rotating body 800 at predetermined intervals. In this case, the rotation of the rotating body 800 can be restricted at any position, and the rotation of the rotating body 800 by an external force can be restricted when the lid member 770 is opened.

In the first embodiment, the opening 831 is formed on the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 800, and the game ball is thrown from the opening 831. may be formed on the side of the That is, openings may be formed on both axial side surfaces of the rotating body 800, one of which may serve as a ball inlet and the other may serve as a ball outlet. In this case, since the ball-throwing path can be formed inside the rotating body 800, the accessory (rotating body 800) can be used as the ball-throwing path especially when there is no space for arrangement on the back side of the game board 13. , the ball throwing path can be secured without increasing the size of the game board 13. - 特許庁

In the above-described first embodiment, the rotating body 800 has been described as having a cylindrical outer shape, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be polygonal, elliptical, or a combination thereof. In this case, since the shape of the rotating body 800 can be made complicated, it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize that the effect has been switched due to the rotational displacement of the rotating body 800 .

In the eighth embodiment, the case where the outer peripheral surface of the rotary operation portion 8654 is formed so as to be operable by the player has been described. In this case, the player can not only apply a rotational force to the rotation operation unit 8654, but also press a push button or perform an operation combining the rotation operation and the pressing operation of the rotation operation unit 8654. . As a result, since it is possible to form a plurality of operation modes of the rotation operation part 8654, it is possible to give interest to the player.

In the eighth embodiment, the case where the transmission gear 8651 and the transmission gear 8652 are meshed has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a torque limiter or the like may be interposed between the transmission gear 8651 and the transmission gear 8652 to interrupt the transmission of driving force when an overload is applied.

In this case, when the player stops the rotation of the rotating operation part 8654, it is possible to prevent the rotation of the rotation operation part 8654 from continuing by interrupting the transmission of the rotational driving force from the drive motor KM6. . As a result, it is possible to prevent the rotation operation unit 8650 from being broken when the player inputs rotation in the direction opposite to the rotation in the A direction to the rotation operation unit 8654 .

Furthermore, when the player operates the rotation operation part 8654, when the player's finger or clothes are caught between the rotation operation part 8654 and the upper plate 8017 on the side of the rotation direction, the rotation is stopped. Further pinching of the player's fingers or clothes can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being injured by being caught between the rotation operating portion 8654 and the upper tray 8017 .

In the eighth embodiment, the rotation direction of the rotation operation portion 8654 is the A direction, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the rotation direction of the rotation operation unit 8654 may be the horizontal direction with respect to the pachinko machine 10 . In this case, the player can be made to perform an action associated with the performance of the game machine, and the performance effect can be improved. For example, by hitting the rotary operation unit 8654 with the left hand so as to rotate it in the right direction and operating it, it is possible to produce an effect such as hitting (slapping) the character or the like displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

The present invention may be applied to a different type of pachinko machine or the like from the above embodiments. For example, once the jackpot hits, the expected value of the jackpot is increased until the jackpot state occurs multiple times (for example, 2 times, 3 times) including the pachinko machine (commonly known as 2 times rights product, 3 times rights product) may be implemented as Further, after the big winning pattern is displayed, the pachinko machine may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game in which a predetermined game value is given to the player under the condition that the ball enters a predetermined area. Also, a pachinko machine having a prize winning device having a special area such as a V-zone and entering a special game state as a necessary condition for winning a ball in the special area may be implemented. Furthermore, in addition to pachinko machines, various game machines such as arepachi, mammoth, slot machines, and so-called game machines combining a pachinko machine and a slot machine may be implemented.

In the slot machine, for example, the pattern is changed by operating the control lever in a state where the pattern effective line is determined by inserting a coin, and the pattern is stopped and fixed by operating the stop button. It is. Therefore, the basic concept of a slot machine is "provided with a display device that confirms and displays identification information after variably displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of pieces of identification information, The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stopping (for example, a stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has passed, and the stop is displayed. It is a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value under the condition that the combination of time identification information is a specific one. In this case, the game medium is represented by coins, medals, etc. Examples include:

Further, as a specific example of a game machine that combines a pachinko machine and a slot machine, it is equipped with a display device for displaying a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols in a variable manner and then confirming and displaying the symbols, and is equipped with a ball launching handle. There are things that are not. In this case, after throwing a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the pattern starts to change due to the operation of the control lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or a predetermined As time elapses, the fluctuation of the symbols is stopped, and a special game is generated in which a predetermined game value is given to the player under the condition that the determined symbols at the time of the stop are so-called jackpot symbols, and the player is given a special game. A lot of balls are paid out to the tray at the bottom. If such a game machine is used instead of a slot machine, only the balls can be treated as game value in the game hall. It is possible to solve the problems such as the burden on the equipment due to the separate handling of the medals and the balls and the restrictions on the installation location of the game machine.

In the following, concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention are shown.

<Regarding the Concept of the Invention Taking the Lower Displacement Unit 400 as an Example>
a displacement member formed to be displaceable in a first direction from a reference position and capable of moving a game ball along with the displacement in the first direction; A gaming machine comprising a restricting means for restricting the ball from being thrown, wherein the displacement member is formed so as to be displaceable from the reference position in a second direction opposite to the first direction. Gaming machine A1.

Here, a displacement member formed to be displaceable in the first direction from the reference position and capable of moving the game ball along with the displacement in the first direction, and a trajectory area of the displacement member from outside the trajectory area of the displacement member A gaming machine is known that includes a regulation means that regulates the throwing of a game ball to a game ball (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-166997). According to this gaming machine, it is possible to prevent game balls exceeding the specified number from being thrown to the track area of the displacement member by the regulation of the regulation means. However, in the above-described conventional game machine, if the restricting means malfunctions due to sticking or wear, for example, there is a risk that more than a specified number of game balls will be thrown toward the track area of the displacement member. However, in this case, there is a problem that the number of game balls exceeding the prescribed number may cause a problem. That is, for example, there is a risk that game balls in excess of the specified number may enter the drive mechanism of the displacement member and be caught in the movable portion, resulting in damage. Alternatively, there is a risk that game balls exceeding the specified number may flow out of the game area (for example, the back side of the game board).

On the other hand, according to the game machine A1, the displacement member is formed so as to be displaceable from the reference position in the second direction opposite to the first direction, so that the track area of the displacement member can be expanded accordingly. Therefore, for example, even if the regulating means malfunctions and more than the specified number of game balls are thrown, the track area of the displacement member is expanded, and game balls exceeding the specified number are moved to the track area. can accept. As a result, the number of game balls exceeding the prescribed number can be moved along with the displacement of the displacement member in the first direction. Therefore, game balls in excess of the specified number can be prevented from entering the driving mechanism of the displacement member or flowing out of the game area. It can be difficult.

In the gaming machine A1, a passage member is formed as a passage through which a game ball can pass, and a downstream portion of the passage member communicates with a track area of the displacement member. Characterized game machine A2.

According to the game machine A2, in addition to the effects of the game machine A1, the passage member is formed as a passage through which the game ball can pass, and the downstream portion communicates with the track area of the displacement member. Since the passage of the balls is restricted, for example, even if the restricting means malfunctions and more game balls than the specified number are thrown, the game balls exceeding the specified number are transferred to the displacement member via the passage member. It is possible to reliably throw the ball to the trajectory area. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to cause problems due to game balls exceeding the specified number.

In the gaming machine A2, the displacement member is formed so as to be capable of receiving and holding a specified number of game balls thrown from the passage member at the reference position, and at least the diameter of the game ball from the reference position in the second direction. A gaming machine A3 characterized in that it is formed to be displaceable by a distance exceeding .

According to the game machine A3, in addition to the effects of the game machine A2, the displacement member is formed so as to be able to receive and hold the specified number of game balls thrown from the passage member at the reference position, and to move the second position from the reference position. Since it is formed to be displaceable in the direction at least by a distance exceeding the diameter of the game ball, after receiving the specified number of game balls at the reference position, by displacing the displacement member in the second direction from the reference position, the specified number can be obtained. It is possible to throw the game balls exceeding the trajectory area of the displacement member (the area on the first direction side of the displacement member). Therefore, the number of game balls exceeding the prescribed number can be moved along with the displacement of the displacement member in the first direction.

In this case, the displacement member holds the specified number of game balls, and the game balls exceeding the specified number can be thrown to the track area, so that the specified number of game balls are separated from the game balls exceeding the specified number. can do. Therefore, for example, by displacing the displacement member in the first direction, it is possible to discharge only game balls exceeding the prescribed number from the track area while maintaining the state in which the displacement member holds the prescribed number of game balls. It becomes possible.

The gaming machine A4 is characterized in that in the gaming machine A3, the displacement member is formed so as to change its posture when it is displaced in the first direction and reaches a predetermined position.

According to the game machine A4, in addition to the effects of the game machine A3, the displacement member is formed so that its posture can be changed when it is displaced in the first direction and reaches the predetermined position. While making it easy to maintain the state in which the ball is held by the displacement member, it is possible to prevent the game ball from falling out of the displacement member, and when reaching a predetermined position, the game ball can be controlled by utilizing the change in the attitude of the displacement member. can be easily discharged from the displacement member.

In the gaming machine A4, a concave portion is provided in a track region when the displacement member is displaced in the first direction from the reference position, and the displacement member is positioned in the concave portion when the displacement member is displaced in the first direction. A game machine A5, characterized in that it has a protrusion to be engaged and is formed such that its attitude can be changed by engaging said protrusion with said recess.

According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A4, the displacement member is provided with a concave portion recessed in the track area when the displacement member is displaced in the first direction from the reference position, and the displacement member is displaced in the first direction. Since the protrusion is engaged with the recess when the displacement member is engaged with the recess, and the protrusion is engaged with the recess, the attitude of the displacement member can be changed. Therefore, the structure for changing the attitude of the displacement member can be simplified.

In the gaming machine A5, the projection projects from the displacement member in the first direction, and the tip of the projection hits the lower half of the game ball sent to the trajectory region of the displacement member. A gaming machine A6 characterized by being touched.

According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A5, the protrusion is provided to project from the displacement member in the first direction, and the tip of the projection is a game ball thrown to the track area of the displacement member. (That is, the game balls exceeding the specified number) are formed so as to be able to abut on the lower half of the surface. You can push and move. As a result, game balls exceeding the specified number can be easily discharged from the track area.

In addition, the protrusion is interposed between the specified number of game balls held by the displacement member and the game balls sent to the track area of the displacement member (the game balls exceeding the specified number). The distance between the specified number of game balls and the game balls exceeding the specified number can be secured by the projecting length of the part. Therefore, it is possible to easily discharge only the game balls exceeding the prescribed number from the track area while maintaining the state in which the prescribed number of game balls are held by the displacement member.

Furthermore, since the projecting part has the role of changing the posture of the displacement member by engaging with the recessed part and the role of moving the game ball while pushing the lower half of the game ball, the number of parts can be reduced accordingly. Cost can be reduced.

A gaming machine A7 in the gaming machine A5 or A6, wherein the size of the recess in the first direction is smaller than the diameter of the game ball.

According to the game machine A7, in addition to the effects of the game machine A5 or A6, the size of the concave portion in the first direction is smaller than the diameter of the game ball, so that the game ball thrown to the track area of the displacement member (That is, game balls exceeding the prescribed number) can easily pass through the concave portion when moved in accordance with the displacement of the displacement member in the first direction. As a result, game balls exceeding the specified number can be easily discharged from the track area.

In any one of the game machines A5 to A7, the displacement member is erected at a height lower than the radius of the game ball in the trajectory area when the displacement member is displaced from the reference position in the first direction, and is higher than the recess. A wall portion located on the first direction side is provided, and when a game ball sent to the track area of the displacement member is moved along with the displacement of the displacement member in the first direction, the game ball is moved to the wall portion. A game machine A8 characterized in that a position change of the displacement member is regulated by being brought into contact with the portion and the displacement member.

According to the game machine A8, in any one of the game machines A5 to A7, the displacement member is erected at a height lower than the radius of the game ball in the trajectory area when the displacement member is displaced in the first direction from the reference position, and the concave portion When a game ball sent to the track area of the displacement member is moved along with the displacement of the displacement member in the first direction, the game ball is positioned on the first direction side of the wall portion. Since the position change of the displacement member can be regulated by contacting the displacement member, only the game balls exceeding the prescribed number are retained while the displacement member holds the prescribed number of game balls. It can be easily ejected from the orbital area.

That is, since the wall portion is erected at a height lower than the radius of the game ball, when the game ball is moved by being pushed by the projecting portion as the displacement member is displaced in the first direction, the game ball is moved. A game ball can easily run over the wall part by bringing the lower half surface of the ball into contact with the wall part. In this case, the game ball is brought into contact with the displacement member (that is, the game ball is interposed between the displacement member and the wall portion), and a reaction force can be applied from the game ball to the displacement member. Posture change can be regulated, and the specified number of game balls held by the displacement member can be suppressed from dropping out. As a result, it is possible to easily discharge only the game balls exceeding the prescribed number from the track area while maintaining the state in which the prescribed number of game balls are held by the displacement member.

On the other hand, when game balls (that is, game balls exceeding the specified number) are not thrown into the track area of the displacement member, no game balls are interposed between the wall and the displacement member, so that the protrusion becomes the recess. By being engaged, the posture of the displacement member can be changed. As a result, it is possible to easily discharge a prescribed number of game balls (that is, game balls held by the displacement member) from the displacement member by using the change in posture of the displacement member.

A gaming machine A9 is characterized in that, in any one of the gaming machines A1 to A8, the restricting means is operable in conjunction with the displacement of the displacement member.

According to the game machine A9, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines A1 to A8, the restricting means is formed to be operable in conjunction with the displacement of the displacement member. It is possible to restrict or allow the throwing of a game ball into the track area of the member. That is, since the regulation or permission of throwing a game ball can be switched mechanically in synchronization with the displacement of the displacement member, for example, a sensor device for detecting the position of the regulation means and the detection result of the sensor device can be used. It is possible to eliminate the need for driving means for driving the regulating means or control of each of these means, thereby reducing the product cost and improving the reliability of the operation.

In the gaming machine A9, the restricting means allows the game ball to be thrown to the track area of the displacement member in conjunction with the displacement of the displacement member in the second direction from the reference position. Characterized game machine A10.

According to the gaming machine A10, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A9, the restricting means moves the game ball to the track area of the displacement member in conjunction with the displacement of the displacement member from the reference position in the second direction. Since the ball is allowed to be thrown, the game ball can be reliably thrown to the area on the first direction side of the displacement member, which is the track area of the displacement member.

In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A10, a base member on which the displacement member is displaceably disposed, and a base member disposed vertically downward and vertically upward from an end portion of the base member on the first direction side A gaming machine A11 characterized by comprising a collection member having an opening in the bottom.

According to the game machine A11, in addition to the effects of the game machine A10, the displacement member is disposed vertically below the base member displaceably disposed and the end portion of the base member on the first direction side. and a recovery member having an opening vertically upward, so that the game balls are moved as the displacement member moves in the first direction and discharged from the track area of the displacement member (i.e., the number exceeding the prescribed number). A game ball) can be received and recovered from the opening of the recovery member.

In the gaming machine A11, the base member is formed so as to be displaceable between a retracted position and a displaced position, and the opening of the recovery member is located at least at the first position in the base member displaced to the retracted position or the displaced position. A gaming machine A12 characterized in that it is formed in a size positioned vertically below the end on the direction side.

According to the game machine A12, in addition to the effects of the game machine A11, the base member is displaceable between the retracted position and the displaced position, and the opening of the recovery member is displaced to at least the retracted position or the displaced position. Since the base member has a size positioned vertically below the first direction end of the base member, the displacement member is ejected from the track area of the displacement member regardless of whether the base member is displaced to the retracted position or the displaced position. It is possible to receive and collect the game balls (that is, the game balls exceeding the specified number) from the opening of the collecting member.

A gaming machine A13 characterized in that in any of the gaming machines A5 to A8, the gaming machine A13 comprises an insertion member that is inserted into the recessed space of the recess to restrict the protrusion from engaging with the recess. .

According to the gaming machine A13, any one of the gaming machines A5 to A8 includes an insertion member that restricts engagement of the protrusion with the recess by being inserted into the recessed space of the recess. With the displacement in the first direction, it is possible to suppress the change in the posture of the displacement member when ejecting game balls exceeding the specified number from the track area of the displacement member. Therefore, it is possible to easily discharge only the game balls exceeding the prescribed number from the track area while maintaining the state in which the prescribed number of game balls are held by the displacement member.

In the gaming machine A13, a base member is formed to be displaceable between a retracted position and a displaced position, and the displacement member is arranged to be displaceable, and the insertion member is adapted to displace the base member to the retracted position The game machine A14 is characterized in that when the base member is displaced to the displaced position, it is separated from the recessed space of the recess while being inserted into the recessed space of the recess.

According to the game machine A14, in addition to the effects of the game machine A13, when the base member is displaced to the retracted position, the insertion member is inserted into the recessed space of the recess, so that the displacement member is displaced in the first direction. Accordingly, when game balls in excess of the specified number are discharged from the track area of the displacement member, the state in which the displacement member holds the specified number of game balls by suppressing the change in the posture of the displacement member. On the other hand, when the base member is displaced to the displaced position, the insertion member is separated from the recessed space of the recess. By combining them, the attitude of the displacement member can be changed, and the prescribed number of game balls can be easily discharged from the displacement member.

<Regarding the Concept of the Invention Taking the Distribution Unit 500 as an Example>
A downflow passage for a game ball to flow down, a first branch passage and a second branch passage branched from the downflow passage, and a game ball flowing down the downflow passage to either the first branch passage or the second branch passage. A game machine having a sorting means for sorting comprises a displaceable member formed to be displaceable and receiving game balls from the first branch passage, wherein the displacement member contacts the sorting means and is displaced. , the game machine B1 is characterized in that the distribution means is displaced and the distribution destination is switched.

Here, a downflow passage through which game balls flow down, a first branch passage and a second branch passage branched from the downflow passage, and a game ball flowing down the downflow passage to either the first branch passage or the second branch passage A gaming machine equipped with sorting means for sorting is known (for example, JP-A-2014-223176). However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, since the game balls flowing down the flow passage are alternately distributed one by one to the first branch passage and the second branch passage, the game balls flowing down the flow passage are It is evenly distributed to the first branch passage and the second branch passage (that is, divided by half). That is, there is a problem that the number of game balls distributed to the first branch passage cannot be changed.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B1, the displacement member is formed to be displaceable and receives the game ball from the first branch passage. Since the means is displaced and the distribution destination is switched, the number of game balls distributed to the first branch passage or the second branch passage can be changed according to the displacement of the displacement member. That is, the number of game balls distributed to the first branch path can be changed.

In addition, according to the game machine B1, the distributing means can be displaced using the displacement of the displacing member, so there is no need to separately provide a driving means or a transmission mechanism for displacing the distributing means. can. Therefore, the number of parts can be reduced accordingly, and the product cost can be reduced.

In addition, for example, in a structure that controls the displacement of the sorting means using position detection by a sensor device and driving by a drive means, malfunction due to detection failure or control failure lowers the reliability of the sorting operation of the sorting means. However, according to the game machine B1, the allocation destination by the allocation means can be switched in mechanical synchronization with the displacement of the displacement member, so that the reliability of the allocation operation can be improved.

In particular, since the displacement member is a member that receives game balls from the first branch passage, it is possible to switch the distribution destination of the distribution means to the first branch passage in synchronization with the displacement of the displacement member. The game balls distributed to the passage can be surely received by the displacement member.

In the game machine B1, a biasing means is provided for applying a biasing force to the distribution means to maintain a distribution destination of the distribution means at one of the first branch passage and the second branch passage, and the displacement member displaces the distributing means in a direction against the direction of the urging force, thereby switching the destination of distribution by the distributing means to the other of the first branch passage and the second branch passage, and the urging force A gaming machine B2 characterized in that the destination of distribution by the distribution means is returned to one of the first branch passage and the second branch passage by the biasing force of the means.

According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B1, a biasing force is applied to the sorting means to maintain the sorting destination of the sorting means at either the first branch passage or the second branch passage. Since the force means is provided, it is possible to prevent the distribution destination from being carelessly switched by the distribution means. In this case, the distribution means is displaced with the displacement of the displacement member, and after the distribution destination is switched, the return to the distribution destination before switching can be performed by the biasing force of the biasing means. It is possible to eliminate the need for the member to be in contact with the distribution means. That is, the displacement member can be separated from the sorting means. Therefore, it is possible to increase the degree of freedom in designing the movable range of the displacement member.

In the game machine B2, the urging means imparts an urging force to the allocating means to keep the second branch path as the destination of allocation by the allocating means.

According to the game machine B3, in addition to the effects of the game machine B2, the biasing means applies a biasing force to the distribution means to maintain the distribution destination of the distribution means in the second branch passage. is incapable of receiving game balls, it is possible to suppress the switching of the sorting destination by the sorting means to the first branch passage.

The game machine B3 includes a base member that is displaceable between a first position and a second position and on which the displacement member is disposed. , the displacement member is capable of receiving a game ball from the first branch passage and is capable of abutting against the distribution means, and in a state in which the base member is arranged at the second position, the displacement A gaming machine B4 characterized in that the member is not capable of receiving game balls from the first branch passage and is not capable of coming into contact with the sorting means.

According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B3, the base member is formed to be displaceable between the first position and the second position, and the displacement member is disposed on the base member. , a mode in which the displacement member is displaced with the base member arranged at the first position, and a mode in which the displacement member is displaced with the base member arranged at the second position can be formed. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect accordingly.

In this case, when the base member is arranged at the second position, the displacement member cannot receive the game ball from the first branch passage, but in such a state, the displacement member cannot contact the distribution means. Therefore, in a state in which the displacement member cannot receive the game ball (a state in which the base member is arranged at the second position), it is possible to prevent the distribution destination from being switched to the first branch passage by the distribution means.

A gaming machine B5 characterized in that the gaming machine B4 comprises a second base member formed as a separate member from the base member, and the distribution means is disposed on the second base member.

According to the game machine B5, in addition to the effects of the game machine B4, the second base member is formed as a separate member from the base member, and the distribution means is disposed on the second base member. Accordingly, it is possible to suppress an increase in the size of the base member.

In any one of game machines B1 to B5, the displacement member is formed to be displaceable at least between a switching position and a receiving position set to a position different from the switching position, and the displacement member is displaced to the switching position. In this state, the distribution destination by the distribution means is switched to the first branch passage, and in the state in which the displacement member is displaced to the receiving position, the displacement member can receive the game ball from the first branch passage. and a game machine B6 characterized in that the distribution destination by the distribution means is switched to the second branch passage.

According to the game machine B6, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines B1 to B5, the displacement member is formed to be displaceable at least between the switching position and the receiving position set at a position different from the switching position, In a state in which the displacement member is displaced to the switching position, the distribution destination by the distribution means is switched to the first branch passage, and in a state in which the displacement member is displaced to the receiving position, the displacement member receives the game ball from the first branch passage. Since the ball can be received and the distribution destination by the distribution means is switched to the second branch passage, it is possible to suppress the game balls exceeding the specified number that the displacement member can receive from being distributed to the first branch passage.

That is, when the switching position and the receiving position are set to the same position, the displacement member receives the game ball while the distribution destination by the distribution means is switched to the first branch passage. There is a possibility that game balls exceeding the prescribed number that can be received are distributed to the first branch passage. If a separate means for restricting the inflow of game balls into the first branch passage is provided, the structure becomes complicated, the reliability is lowered, and the product cost is increased.

On the other hand, according to the game machine B6, the displacement member is displaced to the switching position, and after the specified number (or less than the specified number) of game balls are distributed to the first branch passage, the displacement member is displaced to the receiving position. Then, since the distribution destination is switched to the second branch passage, it is possible to prevent game balls exceeding the specified number from flowing down to the first branch passage. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the game balls exceeding the specified number that can be received by the displacement member from being distributed to the first branch passage. Moreover, since there is no need to separately provide the means described above, reliability can be improved and product costs can be reduced.

In the game machine B6, the first branch passage is formed as one or more protrusions or recesses protruding or recessed on the inner wall surface thereof, and has a resistance that imparts resistance to game balls passing through the first branch passage. A gaming machine B7 characterized by comprising means.

According to the game machine B7, in addition to the effects of the game machine B6, the first branch passage is formed as one or a plurality of projections or recesses protruded or recessed on the inner wall surface, and the first branch passage is passed through. Since the game ball is equipped with resistance means for applying resistance to the game ball passing through the first branch passage, the speed of the game ball passing through the first branch passage can be slowed down. Therefore, the time required for the displacement member to be displaced from the switching position to the receiving position can be lengthened accordingly, so that the displacement member can reliably receive the game ball. In addition, the output of the drive means can be reduced to the extent that the displacement speed required for the displacement member can be reduced, and the product cost can be reduced.

In game machine B6 or B7, the sorting means includes a first retractable portion and a second retractable portion which are formed to be retractable with respect to the first branch passage as the sorting means is displaced; The 1 haunting part is formed so as to be able to distribute the game balls flowing down the flow path to the second branch path by protruding into the first branch path, and the second haunting part is formed from the first haunting part is also positioned downstream of the first branch passage and protrudes into the first branch passage so that the game balls distributed to the first branch passage can be restricted from flowing down, and the first haunting portion and a second retractable part, one of which protrudes into the passage of the first branch passage, the other retracts out of the passage of the first branch passage.

According to the game machine B8, in addition to the effects of the game machine B6 or B7, the sorting means includes the first retractable portion formed so as to be retractable with respect to the first branch passage as the sorting means is displaced; A second haunting part is provided, and the first haunting part protrudes into the first branch passage so that the game balls flowing down the flow-down passage can be distributed to the second branch passage, and the second haunting part is the first branch passage. Positioned on the downstream side of the first branch passage from the haunting portion and projecting into the first branch passage, the game balls distributed to the first branch passage are formed so as to be capable of regulating the flow down, and the first haunting portion is formed. and the second projecting/retracting part, when one protrudes into the passage of the first branch passage, the other retracts out of the first branch passage. , only the prescribed number of game balls can be distributed to the first branch passage and received by the displacement member.

That is, a first state in which the game balls flowing down the flow path are distributed to the second branch path by the protrusion of the first haunting part, and a game ball flowing down the flow path by retreating the first haunting part. A second state in which the game balls are distributed to the first branch passage; By retracting the 2 haunting part, it is possible to form a fourth state in which the game balls stored in the first branch passage are flowed down and received by the displacement member. Only a certain number of game balls can be distributed to the first branch passage and received by the displacement member.

In addition, according to the game machine B8, the distribution means is provided with the first retractable part and the second retractable part, that is, formed as a single part, so the structure of the sorting means (the first retractable part and the second retractable part and the structure for exhibiting their functions) can be simplified. Furthermore, since one of the first projecting and retracting portion and the second projecting and retracting portion projects into the passage of the first branch passage, the other retracts out of the passage of the first branch passage. and receiving position), it is sufficient that the distributing means is formed so as to be displaceable to two positions. That is, by displacing the distributing means at two positions, the first to fourth states described above can be formed. Therefore, the structure of the distributing means and the structure of displacing the distributing means according to the displacement of the displacement member can be simplified, and the reliability of the game ball distributing operation can be improved accordingly.

<Regarding the Concept of the Invention Taking the Distribution Unit 500 as an Example>
A downflow passage for a game ball to flow down, a first branch passage and a second branch passage branched from the downflow passage, and a game ball flowing down the downflow passage to either the first branch passage or the second branch passage. A gaming machine comprising a sorting means for sorting, characterized by comprising a flow state changing means positioned downstream of the sorting means for restricting or permitting the game balls to flow down in the first branch passage. Game machine C1.

Here, a downflow passage through which game balls flow down, a first branch passage and a second branch passage branched from the downflow passage, and a game ball flowing down the downflow passage to either the first branch passage or the second branch passage. A gaming machine equipped with sorting means for sorting is known (for example, JP-A-2014-223176). However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, the game balls flowing down the flow-down passage are only distributed to either the first branch passage or the second branch passage, which is insufficient to provide interest to the player. There was a problem.

On the other hand, according to the game machine C1, since it is provided with the flow state changing means which is located downstream of the distribution means and regulates or permits the flow of the game balls in the first branch passage, it is interesting to the players. can give

That is, by the operation of the flow state changing means, the game balls distributed to the first branch passage are restricted from flowing down, the game balls are stored in the first branch passage, and the game balls are allowed to flow down in the first branch passage. , the game balls stored in the first branch passage can flow down (released). As a result, in addition to the operation of distributing the game balls flowing down the flow-down passage to either the first branch passage or the second branch passage, the operation of temporarily stopping (accumulating) the flow of the game balls distributed to the first branch passage. , and the action of causing the stopped (stored) game ball to flow down (release). As a result, it is possible to give interest to the player.

In the game machine C1, an integral member is provided in which the distribution means and the flow state change means are integrally formed, and in a state where the destination of distribution by the distribution means is the first branch passage, the first branch passage is restricted by the flow state changing means, and the distribution destination of the distribution means is the second branch passage, the flow of the game balls in the first branch passage is controlled by the flow state change means. Gaming machine C2 characterized by being allowed.

According to the game machine C2, in addition to the effects of the game machine C1, since an integrated member in which the distribution means and the flow state change means are integrally formed is provided, the distribution means and the flow state change means are operated. It is possible to simplify the structure and improve the reliability of operation. That is, when the distribution means and the flowing-down state changing means are formed separately, they are two parts, so the structure for operating these two parts is complicated and the reliability of the operation is lowered. On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C2, since the distribution means and the flow state changing means can be formed as a single part, the structure can be simplified accordingly, and the product cost can be reduced and the reliability of the operation can be improved. can be planned.

Further, in this case, when the distribution destination by the distribution means is set to the first branch passage by the operation of the integrated member, the flow down of the game balls distributed to the first branch passage is regulated by the flow-down state changing means and the first branch passage is controlled. When the game balls are stored in the branch passage and the distribution destination of the distribution means is set to the second branch passage, the flow down of the game balls in the first branch passage is allowed by the flow state changing means, and the game balls are accumulated in the first branch passage. It is possible to let down (release) the game ball that has been held. That is, in addition to the action of allocating the game balls flowing down the flow-down passage to one of the first branch passage and the second branch passage, the action of temporarily stopping (accumulating) the flow of the game balls distributed to the first branch passage; Not only can the stopped (stored) game ball flow down (release) operation, but also these storage and release operations can be alternately formed in conjunction with the sorting operation.

In the game machine C2, the integrated member is formed to be displaceable between a first state position and a second state position, and in a state in which the integrated member is displaced to the first state position, the distribution means is shifted to the first state position. 1 branch passage is arranged at a position where the distribution destination is, and the flowing state changing means is arranged at a position for regulating the flow of game balls in the first branch passage, and the integral member is displaced to the second state position. In the state, the distribution means is arranged at a position where the second branch passage is the distribution destination, and the flow state changing means is arranged at a position allowing the game balls to flow down in the first branch passage. Gaming machine C3.

According to the game machine C3, in addition to the effects of the game machine C2, the integrated member is formed to be displaceable between the first state position and the second state position, and when the integrated member is displaced to the first state position, , the distributing means is arranged at a position where the first branch path is the distribution destination, and the flow state changing means is arranged at a position for regulating the flow of game balls in the first branch path, and the integrated member is displaced to the second state position. In this state, the distribution means is arranged at a position where the second branch passage is the distribution destination, and the flow state changing means is arranged at a position allowing the game balls to flow down in the first branch passage. By displacing at two positions (first state position and second state position), in addition to the operation of distributing the game ball flowing down the downflow passage to either the first branch passage or the second branch passage, the first branch passage It is possible to form an operation to temporarily stop (store) the flow of distributed game balls and an operation to make the stopped (stored) game balls flow down (release), and these storage and release operations can be performed. , can be formed alternately in conjunction with the sorting operation. That is, it is possible to simplify the structure, reduce the product cost, and improve the operational reliability.

In the game machine C3, the integrated member is rotatably formed, and at least the flowing-down state changing means is formed so as to be able to appear and withdraw with respect to the first branch passage. A game machine C4 characterized in that it is formed in an arc-shaped curved shape centering on the rotation axis of the integrated member while restricting the flow of the integrated member.

According to the game machine C4, in addition to the effects of the game machine C3, the integral member is formed rotatably, and at least the flow state changing means is formed so as to be able to appear and disappear with respect to the first branch passage. Since it is formed in an arc-shaped curved shape centered on the rotation axis of the integrated member, the inner wall of the first branch passage for the appearance and disappearance of the flow state changing means It is possible to reduce the area of the hole opened to the

The gaming machine C5 in the gaming machine C4 is characterized in that the flowing-down state changing means is arranged in a posture in which the upstream side of the first branch passage is concave.

According to the game machine C5, in addition to the effects of the game machine C4, the flow state changing means is arranged in a posture in which the upstream side of the first branch passage is concave, so that the flow state change to the first branch passage. In the initial state when the means begins to protrude (that is, in a state in which only the tip side of the flow state changing means protrudes into the passage), the shape of the tip side of the flow state changing means is such that it is easy to regulate the flow of the game ball. It can be arranged in the direction, and the flow down of game balls distributed to the first branch passage can be easily regulated.

Further, in a state in which the flowing-down state changing means protrudes to the first branch passage to the maximum and restricts the flowing down of the game ball, the game ball can be stably held by the concave portion of the flowing-down state changing means, so that the rampage of the game ball can be suppressed. .

In game machine C4 or C5, biasing means for applying a biasing force to the integral member to bias the flowing state changing means in a direction in which the flowing state changing means protrudes into the first branch passage, A game machine C6 characterized in that the distance to the rotation axis of the integrated member is set larger than the distance from the distribution means to the rotation axis of the integrated member.

According to the gaming machine C6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C4 or C5, it is provided with an urging means for imparting an urging force to the integral member and urging the flowing-down state changing means in the direction of protruding into the first branch passage. Therefore, by utilizing this urging force, the integrated member can be easily maintained in a posture (that is, the first state position) in which the flow-down state changing means protrudes into the first branch passage.

In this case, in the game machine C6, since the distance from the flowing state changing means to the rotation axis of the integrated member is made larger than the distance from the sorting means to the rotation axis of the integrated member, the falling game balls collide. Since the distance from the rotation axis is large, even if the same impact force acts, the flow state changing means is likely to be retracted. By setting it in the direction to do so, it is possible to suppress the sinking of the flowing-down state changing means by the amount of the urging force.

In the game machine C6, the integrated member is rotated by its own weight in a direction in which the flowing state changing means protrudes into the first branch passage.

According to the game machine C7, in addition to the effects of the game machine C6, the integrated member rotates in the direction in which the flowing-down state changing means protrudes into the first branch passage by its own weight. The member can be easily maintained in a posture (that is, the first state position) in which the flow-down state changing means protrudes into the first branch passage. Therefore, when the game ball collides, it is possible to further suppress the sinking of the flowing-down state changing means by its own weight.

Further, even if the urging means falls off, the flowing-down state changing means maintains the posture of protruding into the first branch passage by the weight of the integral part, thereby preventing the game ball from flowing down to the first branch passage. can be suppressed.

In any one of the game machines C2 to C7, the distribution destination by the distribution means is the first branch passage, and the flow down of the game ball in the first branch passage is regulated by the flow state changing means, and the first The gaming machine C8 is characterized in that, in a state where a specified number of game balls are stored in the branch passage, game balls flowing down the flow passage are formed so as to flow down to the second branch passage.

According to the game machine C8, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines C2 to C7, the distribution destination by the distribution means is the first branch passage, and the flow of game balls in the first branch passage is controlled by the flow state changing means. When a specified number of game balls are stored in the first branch path, the game balls flowing down the flow-down path are formed to be able to flow down to the second branch path, so that the specified number or more of game balls flow down. When flowing down the passage, it is possible to suppress the game balls exceeding a prescribed number from remaining in the flow-down passage. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the displacement of the distribution means (the operation of setting the distribution destination to the second branch passage) from being hindered by the game balls stuck in the flow-down passage.

In the game machine C8, the inner wall of the flow path facing the second branch path is configured to store the game balls flowing down the flow path at the end of the specified number of game balls stored in the first branch path. A gaming machine C9 characterized in that it is formed so as to be able to guide a game ball to the side surface on the second branch path side.

According to the game machine C9, in addition to the effects of the game machine C8, the inner wall of the flow-down passage on the side facing the second branch passage allows the game balls flowing down the flow-down passage to reach the prescribed number stored in the first branch passage. Since the game balls at the end of the game balls are formed so as to be able to be guided to the side surface of the second branch passage side, the game balls flowing down the flow-down passage are caused to collide with the game balls at the end of the prescribed number of game balls. After that, it can be easily made to flow down to the second branch passage.

The game ball at the end of the specified number of game balls means a game ball located on the upstream side (on the side opposite to the flow state changing means). Further, when the prescribed number is 1, the last game ball means the game ball itself stored in the first branch passage.

In the game machine C8 or C9, the game machine C10 is characterized in that the flow direction of the downstream end of the flow passage is formed in a direction different from the flow direction of the upstream end of the first branch passage.

According to the gaming machine C10, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C8 or C9, the downstream end of the flow path is formed in a direction different from the flow direction of the upstream end of the first branch path. When the falling game ball collides with the last game ball of the specified number of game balls stored in the first branch passage, the direction of the repulsive force acting on the last game ball is changed to the direction of the first branch passage. It can be different from the downstream direction of the upstream end. As a result, it is possible to prevent the last game ball from jumping out of the upstream end of the first branch passage and flowing into the second branch passage due to the repulsive force at the time of collision.

In any one of game machines C2 to C10, the sorting means is formed so as to be able to appear in and out of the flow path or the first branch path, and its haunt position is in the flow direction at the downstream end of the flow path. A game machine C11 characterized in that it is an inner wall on an extension line of.

According to the game machine C11, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines C2 to C10, the sorting means is formed to be able to appear and disappear with respect to the downstream passage or the first branch passage, Since it is the inner wall on the extension line of the downstream end of the passage in the flow direction, the distribution means can be protruded at a position close to the game balls flowing down from the downstream end of the flow passage. Therefore, it is possible to shorten the time required from when the distributing means is started to protrude into the downstream passage or the first branch passage to when the game balls can be distributed. As a result, switching of distribution destinations by the distribution means can be performed more reliably.

In the gaming machine C11, the distribution means projects into the flow passage or the first branch passage to distribute game balls flowing down the flow passage to the second branch passage. A gaming machine C12 characterized in that the projecting direction of the means is set to the upstream end of the second branch passage.

According to the gaming machine C12, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C11, the sorting means protrudes into the downstream passage or the first branch passage, thereby sorting the game balls flowing down the downstream passage to the second branch passage. , and since the projecting direction of the distribution means is set in the direction pointing to the upstream end of the second branch passage, when the game ball flowing down the flow-down passage comes into contact with the distribution means in the middle of the projecting operation, can push such a game ball into the second branch passage along with the projecting action of the sorting means. As a result, the distribution to the second branch passage can be performed more reliably.

In any one of the game machines C1 to C12, the first branch passage is formed to be inclined downward toward the downstream, and the inner wall on the lower side in the gravity direction is formed so that the game ball can roll, and the flowing state The game machine C13 is characterized in that the changing means is formed so as to be able to protrude into the first branch passage from the inner wall on the lower side in the direction of gravity.

According to the game machine C13, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines C1 to C12, the first branch passage is formed downwardly inclined toward the downstream, and the inner wall on the lower side in the direction of gravity allows the game ball to pass through. Since it is formed to be rotatable and the flowing-down state changing means is formed so as to be able to protrude into and out of the first branch passage from the inner wall on the lower side in the gravity direction, the game is started after the flowing-down state changing means is started to protrude into the first branch passage. It is possible to shorten the time required to reach a state in which the downflow of the ball can be regulated. As a result, the distribution destination of the distribution means is switched from the second branch passage to the first branch passage, and when the game ball is distributed to the first branch passage, the flow state changing means is used to regulate the flow of the game ball. Protrusion can be easily made in time.

In any one of the game machines C1 to C13, the flowing-down state changing means is formed so as to be able to appear and withdraw with respect to the first branch passage, and at least in a state in which it protrudes to the first branch passage to the maximum, it moves in the projecting direction. A game machine C14 characterized in that a force component is applied from a game ball to said flowing state changing means.

According to the game machine C14, in any one of the game machines C1 to C13, the flowing-down state changing means is formed so as to be able to appear and withdraw with respect to the first branch passage, and at least when it protrudes to the first branch passage to the maximum, it protrudes. Since the force component in the direction of movement is applied from the game ball to the flowing-down state changing means, when the game ball distributed to the first branch passage is restricted from flowing down, the impact caused by the collision of the game ball causes the game ball to flow down. It is possible to suppress the immersion of the state changing means. Therefore, it is possible to easily regulate the flow of the game ball.

<Regarding the Concept of the Invention Taking the Lower Displacement Unit 400 as an Example>
A game machine comprising a base member, a base member displaceably arranged on one side of the base member, and a displacement member arranged displaceably on the base member, wherein the base member accompanies displacement of the displacement member. The game machine D1 is characterized by comprising suppressing means for suppressing reaction of members.

Here, a game machine is known that includes a base member, a base member displaceably arranged on one side of the base member, and a displacement member displaceably arranged on the base member (for example, , JP 2015-029849). According to this gaming machine, in addition to the effect of displacing the base member between a protruding position where the base member protrudes into the game area and is visible to the player, and a retracted position where it retreats from the game area, the base member is displaced. An effect of displacing the displacement member can be performed in the state of being arranged at the extended position.

However, in the above-described conventional game machine, one side of the base member is displaceably disposed on the base member, so when the displacement member is displaced, the base member rattles with respect to the base member with the one side as the fulcrum. There was a problem that it is easy to occur.

On the other hand, according to the game machine D1, since the suppressing means for suppressing the reaction of the base member due to the displacement of the displacement member is provided, the occurrence of looseness of the base member with respect to the base member when the displacement member is displaced is suppressed. can do.

The reaction force associated with the displacement of the displacement member may be, for example, the force generated by the change in the center of gravity associated with the displacement of the displacement member, or the action of the inertial force associated with the increase or decrease in displacement speed (change in acceleration) of the displacement member. , and those generated with the reaction force when the displacement member is displaced and the game ball is ejected are exemplified.

In the game machine D1, the suppressing means includes an arrangement member displaceably arranged on the base member, the displacement member is formed so as to be capable of holding and ejecting a game ball, and the arrangement member is A gaming machine D2 characterized by being formed so as to be displaceable when a game ball is ejected from the displacing member.

According to the game machine D2, in addition to the effects of the game machine D1, the suppressing means includes an arrangement member displaceably arranged on the base member, and the displacement member is formed so as to be capable of holding and ejecting game balls. Since the disposing member is formed to be displaceable when the game ball is ejected from the displacing member, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of rattling of the base member with respect to the base member. That is, when a game ball is shot from the displacement member, the position of the center of gravity of the base member is changed by the weight of the game ball. When a configuration in which the mounting member is displaced is adopted, it is possible to suppress rattling of the base member due to a change in the position of the center of gravity. Also, when a game ball is shot from the displacement member, the base member receives a reaction accompanying the shooting of the game ball. When employed, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of rattling of the base member due to the reaction.

The game machine D3 is characterized in that, in the game machine D1 or D2, when the displacement member is displaced, a reverse member is displaced having at least a displacement component in a direction opposite to the displacement direction of the displacement member.

According to the game machine D3, in addition to the effects of the game machine D1 or D2, when the displacement member is displaced, a reverse member is displaced having at least a displacement component in the direction opposite to the displacement direction of the displacement member. Since it is provided, it is possible to reduce the change in the center-of-gravity position of the base member due to the displacement of the displacement member by the displacement of the reverse member. As a result, rattling of the base member due to changes in the position of the center of gravity can be suppressed.

If the displacement of the opposite member is started when the displacement of the displacement member is started, at least a part of the inertial forces of both can be canceled out. As a result, rattling of the base member when the displacement member is displaced from the stopped state can be easily suppressed.

The game machine D2 or D3 is characterized by comprising a transmission mechanism for transmitting the displacement of the displacement member to the arrangement member or (and) the reverse member to displace the arrangement member or (and) the reverse member. game machine D4.

According to the game machine D4, in addition to the effects of the game machine D2 or D3, a transmission mechanism for transmitting the displacement of the displacement member to the arrangement member or (and) the reverse member to displace the arrangement member or (and) the reverse member , there is no need to provide separate drive means for displacing the disposing member and/or the reverse member. That is, the driving means for displacing the displacement member can be used also as the driving means for displacing the arrangement member and/or the reverse member. Therefore, the weight of the base member can be reduced accordingly, and rattling can be easily suppressed.

In addition, since the arrangement or (and) the inverse member can be displaced in mechanical synchronization with the displacement of the displacement member, for example, the position of the displacement member can be detected by a sensor device, and the position of the displacement member can be arranged according to the detection result. It is possible to eliminate the need for control to drive the member and/or the reverse member by the driving means, thereby reducing the product cost and increasing the reliability of the displacement operation of the displacement member and/or the reverse member with respect to the displacement member. can be ensured.

In any one of the game machines D1 to D4, the displacement member has a mode in which displacement starts from a second position, and a mode in which displacement starts from a first position closer to one side of the base member than the second position. , and at least in a state where the base member is arranged at a predetermined position with respect to the base member, the game machine D5 starts to be displaced from the first position.

Here, when the displacement member is displaced from the stopped state, the change in acceleration is maximized, so the base member is likely to rattle due to the influence of inertial force.

On the other hand, according to the game machine D5, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines D1 to D4, the displacement member has a mode in which the displacement starts from the second position, and a state in which at least the base member is arranged at a predetermined position with respect to the base member (for example, the base member protrudes into the game area and is displaced from the player In the visible overhang position), the displacement starts from the first position, so rattling of the base member can be suppressed. That is, the first position is closer to one side of the base member than the second position. The member can be brought closer to the fulcrum at which the member rattles with respect to the base member, so that the base member is less likely to be affected by the inertial force when the displacement member is displaced from the stopped state. As a result, rattling of the base member can be easily suppressed.

A gaming machine D5 comprising a pinion gear arranged on the base member and a rack member having a rack gear meshed with the pinion gear, wherein the displacement member is arranged on the rack member. Machine D6.

According to the game machine D6, in addition to the effects of the game machine D5, the pinion gear arranged on the base member and the rack member formed with the rack gear meshing with the pinion gear are provided, and the rack member is provided with the displacement member. is disposed, when starting the displacement of the displacement member from the first position, not only the weight of the rack member but also the weight of the rack member is applied to one side of the base member (the base member It can be kept close to the fulcrum when rattling). As a result, rattling of the base member when the displacement member is displaced from the stopped state can be easily suppressed.

In the game machine D6, a game machine D7 is characterized in that a displacement direction when the displacement member starts to be displaced from the first position is a direction away from one side of the base member.

According to the gaming machine D7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D6, the displacement direction when the displacement member starts to be displaced from the first position is the direction away from one side of the base member. , the rack member can be brought closer to one side of the base member. That is, in order for the displacement member (rack member) to be displaced in a direction away from one side of the base member, the rack member should be based on the portion on the rack gear side with which the pinion gear meshes after the displacement of the displacement member is started. It will be directed to one side of the member. Therefore, the weight of the rack member can be kept closer to one side of the base member (the fulcrum when the base member rattles with respect to the base member). It is possible to easily suppress rattling of the base member.

In any one of game machines D1 to D7, a support structure that supports one side of the base member on the base member so as to be displaceable, and a drive mechanism that drives the base member supported by the support structure, The displacement member is formed so as to be capable of holding and ejecting a game ball, and the drive mechanism is restricting means for restricting the displacement of the base member in the direction of reaction when the game ball is ejected from the displacement member. A gaming machine D8 characterized by comprising:

According to the game machine D8, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines D1 to D7, the support structure that displaceably supports one side of the base member on the base member and the base member supported by the support structure are driven. The displacement member is formed so as to be capable of holding and ejecting the game ball, and the drive mechanism is configured to displace the base member in the direction of reaction when the game ball is ejected from the displacement member. Since the restricting means for restricting is provided, it is possible to suppress the base member from being displaced with respect to the base member due to reaction. As a result, rattling of the base member can be suppressed.

<Regarding the Concept of the Invention Using the Rotation Unit 700 as an Example>
In a game machine having a rotary member which is rotatably formed and whose outer peripheral surface is arranged so as to be visible to a player, a displacement member is provided which is displaceably arranged on the outer peripheral surface of the rotary member. Characteristic game machine E1.

Here, there is known a game machine provided with a spinning drum member which is rotatably formed and whose outer peripheral surface is arranged so as to be visible to the player (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2009-119140). In this game machine, the spinning drum member is formed in a cylindrical shape, and the display (pattern) on the outer peripheral surface is made visible to the player while rotating the spinning drum member or stopping the spinning drum member. However, in the above-described conventional game machine, it is only possible to create an effect mode in which the display on the outer peripheral surface is visually recognized by the player as the reel member rotates or stops. was insufficient.

On the other hand, according to the game machine E1, since the displacement member is provided displaceably on the outer peripheral surface of the spinning drum member, the display of the outer peripheral surface is displayed to the player as the spinning drum member rotates or stops. In addition to the visually recognizable presentation mode, the presentation mode in which the displacement member is displaced can be formed, so that the presentation mode can be changed accordingly, and the presentation effect can be enhanced.

It should be noted that the rotary drum member does not need to have a circular cross-sectional shape taken along a plane perpendicular to its axis of rotation, and may have a polygonal shape, an elliptical shape, or a combination thereof. Therefore, the outer peripheral surface of the drum member may not be a peripheral surface, but may be a flat surface, a curved surface, or a combination thereof.

In the gaming machine E1, the displacement member is formed to be displaceable between at least a first position and a second position, and at the first position, a part of the outer peripheral surface of the reel member is formed by the displacement member. A game machine E2, wherein at least a portion of the displacement member protrudes radially outward of the rotary member at the second position.

According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E1, when the displacement member is displaced to the first position, a part of the outer peripheral surface of the rotation drum member is formed by the displacement member. The outer shape can be made smaller, and the space required for rotating the drum member can be made smaller accordingly. On the other hand, when the displacement member is displaced to the second position, at least a part of the displacement member protrudes radially outward of the reel member, so that the displacement of the displacement member can be easily visually recognized by the player, resulting in a presentation effect. can increase Further, for example, by rotating the rotary member while the displacement member is arranged at the first position, and by arranging (displacing) the displacement member at the second position when the rotation of the rotary member is stopped, A portion (displacement member) visually recognized as the outer peripheral surface of the drum member can be formed to protrude outward in the radial direction of the drum member, thereby increasing interest.

In the gaming machine E2, light emitting means for emitting light is provided, the reel member is formed with an internal space, the light emitting means is disposed in the internal space, and the displacement member is the second light emitting means. A gaming machine E3 characterized in that when displaced to the position, the outer peripheral surface of the spinning drum member is opened, and the internal space communicates with the outside.

According to the game machine E3, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine E2, the light emitting means for emitting light is provided. When the displacement member is displaced to the second position, the outer peripheral surface of the rotating drum member is opened and the internal space is communicated with the outside. is displaced to the first position, it is possible to block the emission to the outside. As a result, the performance effect can be enhanced.

A gaming machine E4 comprising any one of the gaming machines E1 to E3, comprising driving means for generating a driving force, and transmission means for transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the reel member and the displacement member. .

Here, in order to form the rotary member rotatably and displaceably displace the displacement member on the rotary member, driving means is required for each of the rotary member and the displacement member, which increases the product cost. increase. Further, if the drive means for displacing the displacement member is mounted on the rotary member, the weight of the rotary member increases, making it difficult to smoothly start or stop the rotation of the rotary member.

On the other hand, according to the game machine E4, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines E1 to E3, a driving means for generating a driving force and the driving force of the driving means are applied to the reel member and the displacement member. Since the transmission means for transmitting is provided, it is possible to perform both the rotation of the rotary member and the displacement of the displacement member by using one driving means. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the product cost. Further, since it is not necessary to mount a driving means for displacing the displacement member on the rotating drum member, the weight of the rotating drum member can be reduced, and the rotation of the rotating drum member can be smoothly started or stopped.

In the gaming machine E4, the drive means is formed to be capable of generating a rotational driving force, and the transmission means includes rotation-side transmission means for transmitting the rotational driving force of the drive means to the rotating drum member; displacement-side transmission means for transmitting the rotational driving force to the displacement member; and transmission of the rotational driving force to either the rotation-side transmission means or the displacement-side transmission means in accordance with the direction of rotation of the rotational driving force of the driving means. A game machine E5 characterized by comprising a one-way clutch mechanism for interrupting transmission to the other side.

According to the game machine E5, in addition to the effects of the game machine E4, the driving means is formed to be capable of generating a rotational driving force, and the transmission means is a rotation side transmission for transmitting the rotational driving force of the driving means to the reel member. means, displacement-side transmission means for transmitting the rotational driving force of the driving means to the displacement member, and transmission of the rotational driving force to either the rotation-side transmission means or the displacement-side transmission means in accordance with the direction of rotation of the rotational driving force of the driving means. In addition, since a one-way clutch mechanism that cuts off transmission to the other side is provided, it is possible to switch the driven object (rotary member or displacement member) driven by the rotational driving force simply by switching the rotational direction of the driving means. That is, according to the rotation direction of the driving means, it is possible to switch between the rotation of the rotary member and the stop of the rotation, and the displacement of the displacement member and the stop of the displacement. It can be simplified.

In the gaming machine E5, the rotation-side transmission means includes a gear train forming part or all of a transmission path for transmitting the rotational driving force of the driving means to the rotary drum member, and one gear in the gear train. A gaming machine E6 characterized by comprising a meshing load gear.

Here, in a structure that uses a one-way clutch mechanism to switch the driven object (rotary member or displacement member) according to the rotation direction of the driving means, when the transmission of the driving force from the driving means is interrupted, It becomes free to rotate or displace in the direction it was driven by the driving force. Therefore, for example, when the driven object of the driving means is switched from the rotating drum member to the displacement member, and the transmission of the driving force is cut off, the rotating drum member becomes rotatable and continues to rotate (rotate) due to the inertial force. There is a risk that it will be

On the other hand, according to the game machine E6, in addition to the effects of the game machine E5, the rotation-side transmission means has a gear train forming part or all of the transmission path for transmitting the rotational driving force of the drive means to the rotary member. and a load gear that meshes with one of the gear trains. Therefore, even if the transmission of the rotational driving force from the driving means is interrupted, the load (resistance ) can be used to suppress the continuation of the rotation of the drum member.

The gaming machine E7, wherein the game machine E5 or E6 comprises a reverse rotation restricting means for restricting rotation of the rotary member in a direction opposite to a direction in which the rotary member is rotated by the rotational driving force of the driving means. .

According to the gaming machine E7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E5 or E6, reverse rotation restricting means for restricting rotation of the rotary member in the direction opposite to the direction in which it is rotated by the rotational driving force of the driving means is provided. Since it is provided, for example, it is possible to suppress reverse rotation of the reel member due to deviation of the center of gravity position of the reel member, collision of a game ball, or the like.

In the game machine E2 or E3, the rotating drum member is formed to have an internal space, and when the displacement member is displaced to the second position, the outer peripheral surface of the rotating drum member is opened to open the internal space. is connected to the game area.

According to the gaming machine E8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E2 or E3, the rotary member is formed to have an internal space, and when the displacement member is displaced to the second position, the outer peripheral surface of the rotary member is opened, and the internal space is communicated with the game area, so that the game balls flowing down the game area flow into the internal space of the spinning drum member, or the game balls in the internal space of the spinning drum member flow out to the game area. can be made Further, when the displacement member is displaced to the first position, the outer peripheral surface of the drum member is closed, thereby blocking the inflow and outflow of game balls between the internal space and the game area. As a result, the performance effect can be enhanced.

In the gaming machine E8, one side of the displacement member is rotatably supported by the rotary drum member, and when the displacement member is displaced to the second position, the other side opposite to the one side is the game machine. A game machine E9 characterized by being projected to an area.

According to the gaming machine E9, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E8, one side of the displacement member is rotatably pivotally supported by the drum member, and when the displacement member is displaced to the second position, the displacement member moves to the opposite side to the one side. Since the other side is projected to the game area, the game ball flowing down the game area can be received by the upper surface of the displacement member. Therefore, the game ball flowing down the game area can be easily made to flow into the internal space of the reel member by using the displacement member.

In the game machine E9, the game machine E10 is characterized in that when the displacement member is displaced to the second position, the upper surface thereof is inclined downward from the other side toward the one side.

According to the gaming machine E10, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E9, when the displacement member is displaced to the second position, the upper surface of the displacement member is inclined downward from the other side to the one side, so that the game area is expanded. After receiving the dropped game ball on the upper surface of the displacement member, the received game ball can be guided (rolled) along the downward slope of the upper surface of the displacement member to the internal space of the rotating drum member. Therefore, the game ball flowing down the game area can be easily made to flow into the internal space of the reel member by using the displacement member.

A game machine E11 in the game machine E9 or E10, further comprising displacement setting means for restricting or permitting the displacement of the displacement member in accordance with the rotational position of the reel member.

According to the gaming machine E11, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E9 or E10, the displacement setting means for restricting or permitting the displacement of the displacement member according to the rotational position of the reel member is provided. Interference with other members around the drum member can be suppressed.

In any one of the game machines E9 to E11, a rotation restricting means for restricting rotation of the reel member is provided, and the rotation restricting member is such that the displacement member is displaced to the second position, and the other side of the displacement member is displaced to the second position. A game machine E12 characterized in that the rotation of the reel member is regulated when the game machine extends into the game area.

According to the game machine E12, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines E9 to E11, it is provided with rotation restricting means for restricting the rotation of the reel member, and the rotation restricting member is displaced to the second position. When the other side of the displacement member protrudes into the game area, the rotation of the rotating drum member is regulated, so that the rotating drum member is rotated in a state in which the displacing member is projected, and is positioned on the rotation locus. Interference of the displacement member with other members can be suppressed. In addition, it is possible to suppress rotation of the rotating drum member due to the load acting when the displacement member receives the game ball flowing down the game area and the weight of the game ball rolling on the upper surface of the displacement member.

<Regarding the Concept of the Invention Using the Rotation Unit 700 as an Example>
In a game machine provided with a spinning drum member which is rotatably formed and whose outer peripheral surface is arranged so as to be visible to a player, the spinning drum member has an internal space formed therein and an internal space which is visible to the outside. and a communication port through which a game ball can pass.

Here, there is known a game machine provided with a spinning drum member which is rotatably formed and whose outer peripheral surface is arranged so as to be visible to the player (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2009-119140). According to this game machine, the spinning drum member is formed in a cylindrical shape, and the display (pattern) on the outer peripheral surface is made visible to the player while rotating the spinning drum member or stopping the spinning drum member. be able to. However, in the above-described conventional game machine, there is a problem that the spinning drum member is used only as a member for holding a display on the outer peripheral surface for the player to see, and the use of the spinning drum member is insufficient. rice field. That is, the reel member is formed relatively large because it is necessary to maintain a display that can be visually recognized by the player. Therefore, while the space occupied by the drum member increases, the portion other than the outer peripheral surface is not utilized.

On the other hand, according to the game machine F1, the spinning drum member has an internal space formed therein and a communication port that communicates the internal space with the outside and is formed so that a game ball can pass therethrough. , the game ball flowing down the game area can flow into or out of the internal space through the communication port. Therefore, the internal space of the spinning drum member, which is a dead space, can be made to function as a storage space for game balls or a ball-throwing passage, and the spinning drum member can be utilized accordingly.

In addition, the communication port may be formed only at one place of the rotating drum member, or may be formed at two or more places. When the communication port is formed only in one place, the communication port is formed in the outer peripheral surface of the rotary member. As a result, the position of the communication port can be moved up and down according to the rotational position of the drum member, and the game ball is caused to flow into or out of the internal space through the communication port (the communication port faces upward). At the same time, the game balls can flow into the internal space, and the game balls in the internal space can flow out when the communication port faces downward.

Also, the rotary drum member does not need to have a circular cross-sectional shape taken along a plane perpendicular to its axis of rotation, and may have a polygonal shape, an elliptical shape, or a combination thereof. Therefore, the outer peripheral surface of the drum member may not be a peripheral surface, but may be a flat surface, a curved surface, or a combination thereof.

A gaming machine F2 characterized in that, in the gaming machine F1, the communication port comprises a first communication port and a second communication port formed at a position different from the first communication port.

According to the game machine F2, in addition to the effects of the game machine F1, the communication port includes the first communication port and the second communication port formed at a position different from the first communication port. One of the communication port and the second communication port is used as an inflow port for inflowing game balls from the outside into the internal space, and the other of the first communication port and the second communication port is used as an outflow port for outflowing game balls from the internal space to the outside. can be In other words, the spinning drum member can be used as a ball-throwing path for game balls without rotating the spinning drum member (maintaining it in a stopped state). It should be noted that, while the drum member is being rotated, the drum member may be utilized as a ball feeding passage.

In the gaming machine F2, the first communication port is formed in the outer peripheral surface of the spinning drum member and is formed as an inflow port for allowing game balls flowing down the game area to flow into the internal space, and the second communication port is A game machine F3, characterized in that it is formed in an end face of the rotary drum member in the rotation axis direction, and is formed as an outflow port through which game balls flow out from the internal space to a game area.

According to the game machine F3, in addition to the effects of the game machine F2, the first communication port is formed on the outer peripheral surface of the reel member and is formed as an inlet for allowing the game balls flowing down the game area to flow into the internal space. , the second communication port is formed in the end face of the rotating drum member in the direction of the rotating shaft, and is formed as an outflow port through which game balls flow out from the internal space to the game area. The inflow can be easily visually recognized by the player, and the game ball can be discharged while the spinning drum member is maintained in a stopped state.

That is, since the outer peripheral surface of the spinning drum member is arranged so as to be visible to the player, the first communication port (inflow port) is formed in the outer peripheral surface, so that the player can visually recognize the inflow of the game ball. You can make it easier. On the other hand, when the second communication port is formed on the outer peripheral surface of the drum member, when the drum member is displaced to the rotational position where the communication port is upward, the game ball cannot flow out from the internal space. Since the second communication port (outflow port) is formed in the end face of the rotating drum member in the direction of the rotating shaft, it is possible to form a state in which the game ball can flow out from the internal space regardless of the rotating position of the rotating drum member.

In any one of the game machines F1 to F3, a displacement member is provided displaceably on the outer peripheral surface of the reel member, and when the displacement member is displaced to a first position, the communication port is displaced. A gaming machine F4 characterized in that the communication port is shielded by a member, and the communication port is opened when the displacement member is displaced to the second position.

According to the game machine F4, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines F1 to F3, a displacement member is provided displaceably on the outer peripheral surface of the reel member, and the displacement member is displaced to the first position. Then, the communication port is blocked by the displacement member, and when the displacement member is displaced to the second position, the communication port is opened. You can switch.

In the game machine F4, the communication port is formed in the outer peripheral surface of the drum member, one side of the displacement member is rotatably supported by the drum member, and the displacement member is at the second position. The game machine F5 is characterized in that, when displaced, the other side opposite to the one side projects into the game area.

According to the game machine F5, in addition to the effects of the game machine E4, one side of the displacement member is rotatably supported by the rotary drum member, and when the displacement member is displaced to the second position, the displacement member is shifted to the opposite side to the one side. Since the other side is projected to the game area, the game ball flowing down the game area can be received by the upper surface of the displacement member. Therefore, for example, when the communication port is formed as an inflow port, it is possible to make it easier for the game ball flowing down the game area to flow into the internal space of the reel member using the displacement member.

In the gaming machine F5, the gaming machine F6 is characterized in that one side of the displacement member is positioned forward of the other side in the rotational direction of the rotary member.

According to the gaming machine F6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F5, one side of the displacement member is positioned forward of the other side in the rotation direction of the rotary member, so that when the rotary member is rotated, Even if the displacement member interferes with the members arranged around the rotating drum member, the force generated by such interference can act in the direction of closing the displacement member (displacing it to the first position). That is, it is possible to prevent the displacement member from interfering with other members and projecting (displaced to the second position) when the rotary drum member rotates. In addition, it is possible to prevent the displacement member from engaging with another member and hindering the rotation of the rotary member.

In any one of the gaming machines F1 to F6, a base member on which the spinning drum member is rotatably disposed; A gaming machine F7 characterized by comprising a fixed member which is non-rotatable with respect to the game machine F7.

According to the gaming machine F7, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines F1 to F6, the base member on which the spinning drum member is rotatably disposed, and the inner space of the spinning drum member supported by the base member Since it is provided with a fixed member that is arranged in and is non-rotatable with respect to the rotating drum member, the game ball that has flowed into the internal space is held by the fixed member or rolled on the fixed member toward the outflow port. In addition, it is possible to suppress the game ball from running wild in the internal space or staying in the internal space due to the hindrance of rolling of the game ball with the rotation of the drum member.

A game machine F8 is characterized in that, in any one of the game machines F4 to F6, it comprises displacement setting means for restricting or permitting the displacement of the displacement member in accordance with the rotational position of the rotary member.

According to the game machine F8, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines F4 to F6, it is provided with a displacement setting means for restricting or permitting the displacement of the displacement member according to the rotational position of the rotary member. It is possible to suppress the displaced displacement member from interfering with other members around the drum member.

In the gaming machine F5 or F6, a rotation restricting means for restricting rotation of the reel member is provided, and the rotation restricting member is such that the displacement member is displaced to the second position and the other side of the displacement member is moved to the game area. A game machine F9 is characterized in that the rotation of the reel member is restricted when it is extended.

According to the gaming machine F9, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F5 or F6, it is provided with rotation restricting means for restricting the rotation of the reel member. When the other side protrudes into the game area, the rotation of the rotating drum member is regulated, so that the rotating drum member is rotated in a state in which the displacement member protrudes, and other members positioned on the rotation trajectory are rotated. interference of the displacement member with the In addition, it is possible to suppress rotation of the rotating drum member due to the load acting when the displacement member receives the game ball flowing down the game area and the weight of the game ball rolling on the upper surface of the displacement member.

In the gaming machine F3, a light emitting means that is capable of emitting light and is arranged in the internal space of the spinning drum member, and the second communication port that is an end face of the spinning drum member in the rotation axis direction are formed. A gaming machine F10 comprising an end face formed on the opposite side and an opening formed on the opposite end face, and an electrical connection line of the light emitting means is wired through the opening.

According to the game machine F10, in addition to the effects of the game machine F3, an opening is formed in the end surface of the rotary member in the direction of the rotation axis, which is opposite to the end surface where the second communication port is formed. Since the electrical connection line of the light emitting means is wired through the opening, it is possible to easily secure the space that can be used for each of the second communication port and the opening. As a result, it is possible to smoothly flow out the game ball through the second communication port, and to facilitate the wiring work to the opening of the electrical connection line. In addition, since the second communication port and the opening can be spaced as far as possible, it is possible to easily suppress interference between the game ball rolling in the internal space to the second communication port and the electrical connection line.

<Regarding the Concept of the Invention Using the Rotation Unit 700 as an Example>
A first member and a second member that are formed to be displaceable, wherein the first member covers at least a portion of the second member in an invisible manner; In a game machine formed to be displaceable between a retracted position that reduces an area that covers the second member invisibly, the first member is displaced to the retracted position, and the second member A game machine G1 characterized in that it is formed so as to be able to regulate the displacement of.

Here, a displaceable first member and a second member are provided, the first member covering at least a part of the second member invisibly, and a state arranged at the covering position. A game machine is known that is formed to be displaceable between a retracted position that reduces the area that covers the second member invisibly than the second member (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-029849). According to this gaming machine, the second member is exposed by displacing the first member to the retracted position from a state in which the first member is arranged at the covering position and the second member is invisible to the player. It is possible to perform an effect that is visually recognized by the player.

However, in the conventional game machine described above, since the second member is formed to be displaceable, when the first member is displaced to the retracted position and the second member is exposed, the second member is displaced. There is a risk that Therefore, there is a problem that the player cannot visually recognize the second member in a proper state, and the presentation effect is lowered.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine G1, the first member is formed so as to be able to regulate the displacement of the second member when it is displaced to the retracted position. can be visually recognized, and the production effect can be secured. That is, when performing the effect of displacing the first member to the retracted position and exposing the second member, the displacement of the first member to the retracted position, which is unavoidable for the effect, is performed by moving the second member. Used as a means of regulating displacement. Therefore, it is not necessary to separately provide a mechanism for restricting the displacement of the second member or perform control, and the structure can be simplified accordingly.

In the game machine G1, the game machine G2 is characterized in that the second member is formed to be rotatable and the center of gravity of the second member is eccentric from the center of rotation.

According to the game machine G2, in addition to the effects of the game machine G1, the second member is formed rotatably and the center of gravity is eccentric from the center of rotation, so the degree of freedom in designing the second member is increased. can increase That is, the second member does not need to have a shape in which the center of gravity is located at the center of rotation, and for example, a shape asymmetrical with respect to the rotation axis can be adopted, so that the presentation effect of the second member can be enhanced. . On the other hand, if the center of gravity of the second member is eccentric in this way, the second member may be rotated (rotated) around the center of rotation by its own weight. Therefore, the configuration in which the first member displaced to the retracted position is formed so as to be capable of regulating the displacement of the second member is particularly effective, thereby allowing the player to visually recognize the second member in an appropriate state. It is possible to ensure the performance effect.

In the game machine G1 or G2, a displacement member disposed displaceably on the second member is provided, and the displacement member is displaceable in a state in which at least the first member is displaced to the retracted position. A gaming machine G3 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine G1 or G2, a displacement member disposed displaceably on the second member is provided, and at least the first member of the displacement member is displaced to the retracted position. Therefore, when the first member is displaced to the retracted position and the second member is exposed, the presentation effect can be enhanced by further displacing the displacement member. can be done. On the other hand, if the displacement member is displaced when the second member is exposed, the position of the center of gravity may move along with the displacement, causing the second member to rotate (rotate). Therefore, the configuration in which the first member displaced to the retracted position is formed so as to be capable of regulating the displacement of the second member is particularly effective, thereby allowing the player to visually recognize the second member in an appropriate state. It is possible to ensure the performance effect.

In the gaming machine G3, the second member has an outer peripheral surface thereof arranged so as to be visible to the player, and the displacement member has one side rotatably supported by the outer peripheral surface of the second member, and the one side A gaming machine G4 characterized in that the other side opposite to is formed so as to be able to protrude into the game area.

According to the game machine G4, in addition to the effects of the game machine G3, the outer peripheral surface of the second member is arranged so that the player can see it, and one side of the displacement member is rotatable on the outer peripheral surface of the second member. , and the other side opposite to the one side is formed so as to be able to protrude into the game area. Therefore, for example, when the inflow port of the game ball is formed in the second member, it is possible to facilitate the flow of the game ball flowing down the game area into the inflow port by using the displacement member. . In this case, if the game ball flowing down the game area is received by the displacement member, the second member may be rotated by the load acting at that time or the weight of the game ball rolling on the upper surface of the displacement member. Therefore, the configuration in which the first member displaced to the retracted position is formed so as to be able to regulate the displacement of the second member is particularly effective, thereby causing the displacement member to protrude at a predetermined position in the game area. can be easily maintained.

In the gaming machine G4, the first member is arranged in the game area facing the outer peripheral surface of the second member at the covering position, and outside the game area at the retracted position. A gaming machine G5 characterized by being arranged.

According to the game machine G5, in addition to the effects of the game machine G4, the first member is arranged in the game area while facing the outer peripheral surface of the second member in the covering position, so that the game flows down the game area. It is possible to prevent the ball from colliding with the second member and rotating the second member. In particular, when the rotation position of the second member is a rotation position that directs the displacement member toward the game area, the game ball flowing down the game area collides with the displacement member, and the displacement member is released (tension issued) can be suppressed.

In addition, since the first member is arranged outside the area of the game area at the retracted position, the displacement of the first member to the retracted position can secure a space for the displacement member to protrude into the game area. . Therefore, the outer peripheral surface of the second member can be brought closer to the game area side (player side) by that amount, making it easier for the player to visually recognize the displacement member.

In the game machine G5, the first member is rotatable around a rotation axis substantially parallel to the rotation axis of the second member, and is shaped like a plate curved along the outer peripheral surface of the second member. A game machine G6 characterized by:

According to the game machine G6, in addition to the effects of the game machine G5, the first member is formed rotatably around a rotation axis substantially parallel to the rotation axis of the second member, and the outer peripheral surface of the second member Since it is formed in a plate-like shape that curves along the .theta. Therefore, the space for arranging other members can be secured accordingly. In addition, since the first member is formed in such a curved shape, the game balls flowing down the game area are prevented from being stopped on the first member arranged at the covering position, and the game balls are smoothly played. can flow down.

A game machine G7 in any one of the game machines G3 to G6, characterized by comprising driving means for generating a driving force, and transmission means for transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the second member and the displacement member. .

Here, in order to form the second member rotatably and displaceably displace the displacement member on the second member, driving means is required for each of the second member and the displacement member, which increases the product cost. increase. Moreover, if the driving means for displacing the displacement member is mounted on the second member, the weight of the second member increases, making it difficult to smoothly start or stop the rotation of the second member.

On the other hand, according to the game machine G7, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines G3 to G6, a driving means for generating a driving force and the driving force of the driving means are applied to the second member and the displacement member. Since the transmission means for transmitting is provided, it is possible to perform both the rotation of the second member and the displacement of the displacement member by using one driving means. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the product cost. Moreover, since it is not necessary to mount the driving means for displacing the displacement member on the second member, the weight of the second member can be reduced, and the rotation of the second member can be smoothly started or stopped.

A gaming machine G8 in the gaming machine G7, further comprising coupling means for coupling the first member and the displacement member to link the displacement of the displacement member with the displacement of the first member.

According to the game machine G8, in addition to the effects of the game machine G7, the connection means for connecting the first member and the displacement member and interlocking the displacement of the displacement member with the displacement of the first member is provided. The driving means for displacing the first displacement member can also be used as the driving means for displacing the first displacement member. In this case, when the displacement member and the first member are displaced by the driving force of separate driving means, the displacement member and the first member may interfere with each other if a control failure occurs. Since the first member can be mechanically connected to synchronize their displacements, interference between the displacement member and the first member can be reliably suppressed.

<Regarding the Concept of the Invention Using the Rotation Unit 700 as an Example>
A game machine comprising driving means for generating a driving force, a displacement member displaced by the driving force of the driving means, and transmission means for transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the displacement member, wherein the transmission means is , a first member, a second member located closer to the displacement member than the first member in the transmission path of the driving force, and an engaging member disposed between the first member and the second member; and when the first member is displaced in one direction with respect to the second member, the engaging member engages with the first member and the second member to transmit the driving force. and the second member is displaced in the one direction prior to the first member in a predetermined section of the displacement section of the displacement member.

A game machine is known that includes a driving means for generating a driving force, a displacement member displaced by the driving force of the driving means, and a transmission means for transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the displacement member. (for example, JP-A-2015-029849). However, in the above-described conventional game machine, the state of transmission of the driving force from the driving means to the displacement member by the transmission means is always constant. It is displaced at the displacement speed, and the displacement mode of such a displacement member cannot be changed. Therefore, there is a problem that the performance effect of the performance accompanying the displacement of the displacement member is insufficient.

The displacement speed of the displacement member can be changed by increasing or decreasing the driving speed of the driving means. In order to obtain the speed, it is necessary to arrange a sensor device for detecting the position of the displacement member, and to control the output of the driving means according to the detection result of the sensor device, which leads to an increase in product cost and control cost. . In addition, the structure and control become complicated, resulting in a decrease in reliability.

On the other hand, according to the game machine H1, the transmission means includes a first member, a second member positioned closer to the displacement member than the first member in the transmission path of the driving force, and the first member and the second member. and an engaging member disposed between the members, the engaging member engaging the first member and the second member when the first member is displaced in one direction with respect to the second member. As a result, the driving force is transmitted and the transmission of the driving force is cut off, and the second member is displaced in one direction ahead of the first member in a predetermined section of the displacement section of the displacement member. Therefore, regardless of the driving state of the driving means, the displacement speed of the displacement member in the predetermined section can be made faster than the displacement speed of the displacement member in other sections. Therefore, it is possible to change the displacement mode of the displacement member and enhance the effect of the presentation associated with the displacement of the displacement member.

Further, according to the game machine H1, regardless of the driving state of the driving means, the second member can be caused to precede the first member in one direction. The driving means can be driven at a constant driving speed, and there is no need to increase or decrease the driving speed of the driving means in the middle of the displacement section of the displacement member (ie depending on the predetermined section or another section). As a result, the control can be simplified, the control cost can be reduced, and the operational reliability can be improved. Alternatively, it is possible to stop the driving of the driving means in a predetermined section, and in this case, it is possible to reduce energy consumption.

Further, according to the game machine H1, in the driving state in which the first member is displaced in the other direction with respect to the two members, the engagement of the engaging member is released and the transmission of the driving force is interrupted. The displacement member can be placed in a stopped state (non-driving state), and the driving force of the driving means in such a driving state can be used as a driving force for driving other members. That is, by switching the driving direction of the driving means, the displacement member and the other member can be displaced.

The transmission means is formed so that when the first member is displaced in the other direction with respect to the two members, the engagement of the engaging member is released and the transmission of the driving force is interrupted. It may be something that is done.

In the gaming machine H1, the displacement member is rotatably formed, and its center of gravity position is eccentric from the center of rotation. A gaming machine H2 characterized in that it is formed to be operable in a displacing direction.

According to the game machine H2, in addition to the effects of the game machine H1, the displacement member is rotatably formed, the center of gravity of the displacement member is eccentric from the center of rotation, and the weight of the displacement member increases in a predetermined section. Since it is formed so as to be capable of displacing the two members in one direction, the weight of the displacement member can be used to displace the second member in one direction ahead of the first member. . That is, the displacement speed of the displacement member in a predetermined section can be made faster than the displacement speed of the displacement member in other sections. As a result, the displacement mode of the displacement member can be varied, and the effect of the presentation associated with the displacement of the displacement member can be enhanced.

For example, when the displacement member is formed so as to be capable of repeating 360-degree rotation about its rotation axis, the displacement speed (rotational speed) of the displacement member in a predetermined section is the same as that of the displacement member in other sections. A mode in which the displacement speed (rotational speed) is faster, that is, a rotation mode in which the rotational speed is increased or decreased during one rotation, can be repeatedly performed.

In the gaming machine H2, the transmission means includes a main body portion that is rotationally driven by the second member and a crank member that has a pin portion projecting from the main body portion and positioned eccentrically from the center of rotation of the main body portion; an arm member having a sliding groove formed at one end thereof through which the pin portion of the crank member is slidably inserted and an intermediate portion of which is rotatably supported; A gaming machine H3 characterized by being connected to a member.

According to the game machine H3, in addition to the effects of the game machine H2, the transmission means includes the main body portion that is rotationally driven by the second member, and the transmission means that protrudes from the main body portion and is positioned eccentrically from the rotation center of the main body portion. Since it comprises a crank member having a pin portion, and an arm member having a slide groove formed on one end side through which the pin portion of the crank member is slidably inserted and an intermediate portion rotatably supported, By rotating the crank member by the second member and sliding the pin member along the slide groove, the other end side of the arm member can be reciprocated. In this case, since the other end of the arm member is connected to the displacement member, the displacement member can reciprocate between the first position and the second position in accordance with the reciprocating motion of the other end of the arm member. . That is, the displacement direction of the displacement member can be switched without switching the driving direction of the driving means.

In the game machine H3, the displacement member is reciprocated between a first position and a second position in accordance with reciprocation of the other end of the arm member, and is displaced from the first position to the second position. and while being displaced from the second position to the first position, the direction in which the weight of the displacement member acts on the second member is different from that of the second member. A game machine H4 characterized in that the direction of displacing the second member is changed from the direction of displacement to the direction of displacing the second member in the one direction.

According to the gaming machine H4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine H3, the displacement member is reciprocated between the first position and the second position in accordance with the reciprocating motion of the other end of the arm member. to the second position and during the displacement from the second position to the first position, the direction in which the weight of the displacement member acts on the second member Since the direction of displacing the second member in the other direction is changed to the direction of displacing the second member in one direction, when the displacing member is reciprocated, it can be displaced in any direction from the middle of the displacement. The displacement speed of the displacement member can be increased. As a result, the displacement mode of the displacement member can be varied, and the effect of the presentation associated with the displacement of the displacement member can be enhanced.

For example, the displacement member is reciprocated between an overhanging position (first position) where the displacement member can be visually recognized by the player, and a retracted position (second position) where the overhanging position is retracted. In operation, when the displacement member is extended from the retracted position to the overhang position, the displacement member is moved at a constant displacement speed halfway, and the displacement speed of the displacement member is increased from the middle to vigorously move the displacement member. When retracting the displacement member from the overhanging position to the overhanging position, the displacement member is displaced at a constant displacement speed until the middle, and the displacement speed of the displacement member is increased from the middle. By doing so, the displacement member can be immediately retracted to the retracted position.

In the gaming machine H1, the displacement member is slidably displaceable, and is inclined downward in the direction of the slide displacement in the predetermined section, so that the weight of the displacement member moves the second member. A game machine H5 characterized by being formed to be operable in the direction of displacement in the one direction.

According to the game machine H5, in addition to the effects of the game machine H1, the displacement member is formed to be slidably displaceable, and is inclined downward in the direction of the slide displacement in a predetermined section, thereby increasing the weight of the displacement member. Since the second member is formed to act in the direction of displacing the second member in one direction, the weight of the displacement member is used to displace the second member in one direction ahead of the first member. be able to. That is, the displacement speed of the displacement member in a predetermined section can be made faster than the displacement speed of the displacement member in other sections. As a result, the displacement mode of the displacement member can be varied, and the effect of the presentation associated with the displacement of the displacement member can be enhanced.

A game machine H6 characterized in that, in any one of the game machines H2 to H5, the displacement member is formed so as to be capable of holding a game ball at least in the predetermined section.

According to the game machine H6, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines H2 to H5, the displacement member is formed to be able to hold the game ball at least in a predetermined section, so that the displacement member holds the game ball. In this state, the weight of the displacement member as a whole can be increased by the weight of the game ball, and the displacement speed of the displacement member in a predetermined section can be increased. In addition, the weight of the displacement member as a whole is made different depending on whether the displacement member holds a game ball or not, or according to the number of game balls held. be able to. Thereby, the displacement speed of the displacement member can be varied in each case. As a result, the displacement mode of the displacement member can be varied, and the effect of the presentation associated with the displacement of the displacement member can be enhanced.

In any one of the game machines H2 to H6, the displacement member includes a receiving portion for receiving a game ball flowing down the game area, and at least in the predetermined section, when the receiving portion receives the game ball, the game ball is received by the receiving portion. A game machine H7 characterized in that a force acting on the displacement member from the second member can act in a direction of displacing the second member in the one direction.

According to the game machine H7, in any one of the game machines H2 to H6, the displacement member includes a receiving portion that receives the game ball flowing down the game area, and at least in a predetermined section, when the receiving portion receives the game ball Since the force acting on the displacement member from the game ball is formed to act in the direction of displacing the second member in one direction, when the receiving part receives the game ball, the kinetic energy of the game ball can be used to increase the displacement speed of the displacement member in a predetermined section. In addition, the force acting on the displacement member is made different depending on whether the receiving part is receiving the game ball, when it is not receiving the game ball, or according to the falling speed (magnitude of kinetic energy) of the game ball when receiving it. be able to. Thereby, the displacement speed of the displacement member can be varied in each case. As a result, the displacement mode of the displacement member can be varied, and the effect of the presentation associated with the displacement of the displacement member can be enhanced.

The game ball that flows down the game area is not limited to the game ball that moves along the direction of gravity on the front surface of the game board, but also includes the game ball that moves in a direction different from the direction of gravity. Game balls that move in a direction different from the direction of gravity include, for example, game balls that collide with nails, tulips, accessories, etc. A game ball that moves in a direction different from the direction of gravity is exemplified.

In the game machine H6 or H7, the transmission means comprises a gear train forming part or all of the transmission path of the driving force, and a load gear meshed with one gear of the gear train. A game machine H8 characterized by.

According to the gaming machine H8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine H6 or H7, the transmission means includes a gear train forming part or all of the driving force transmission path and one gear in the gear train. Since the load gear is provided, when the game ball is held by the displacement member or received by the receiving part in a predetermined section, the weight or kinetic energy of the game ball is used. to displace the second member in one direction ahead of the first member (that is, the displacement speed of the displacement member in a predetermined section is made faster than the displacement speed of the displacement member in other sections), If the game ball is not held by the displacement member or the game ball is not received by the receiving portion, the load (resistance) when rotating the load gear is used to force the second member against the first member. Precise displacement in one direction (that is, increasing the displacement speed of the displacement member in a predetermined section) can be suppressed.

That is, when the game ball is not held by the displacement member or the receiving portion does not receive the game ball, the displacement speed of the displacement member in a predetermined section becomes faster than the displacement speed of the displacement member in other sections. Only when the game ball is held by the displacement member or the receiving part receives the game ball, the displacement speed of the displacement member in a predetermined section is set higher than the displacement speed of the displacement member in other sections It is possible to easily form a mode of speeding up.

In any one of the game machines A1 to A14, B1 to B8, C1 to C14, D1 to D8, E1 to E12, F1 to F10, G1 to G8 and H1 to H8, the game machine is a slot machine. Game machine K1 to play. Among them, the basic configuration of the slot machine is "provided with variable display means for displaying the identification information in a fixed manner after dynamically displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of identification information, As a result, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has passed, and the stop time and a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the definite identification information of is the specific identification information. In this case, typical examples of game media include coins and medals.

In any one of game machines A1 to A14, B1 to B8, C1 to C14, D1 to D8, E1 to E12, F1 to F10, G1 to G8 and H1 to H8, the game machine is a pachinko game machine. A game machine K2. Above all, the basic structure of a pachinko game machine is provided with an operating handle, and in response to the operation of the operating handle, balls are shot into a predetermined game area, and the balls are ejected into actuating openings arranged at predetermined positions in the game area. For example, the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is determined and stopped after a predetermined period of time, with the requirement of winning a prize (or passing through an activation opening). In addition, when a special game state occurs, a variable prize winning device (specific prize winning port) arranged at a predetermined position in the game area is opened in a predetermined manner to allow the balls to win prizes, and a value corresponding to the number of prizes won Values (including not only prize balls but also data written to magnetic cards, etc.) can be given.

In any one of gaming machines A1 to A14, B1 to B8, C1 to C14, D1 to D8, E1 to E12, F1 to F10, G1 to G8 and H1 to H8, the gaming machine comprises a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. A gaming machine K3 characterized by being a fusion. Among them, the basic configuration of the integrated game machine is "provided with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of identification information, and an operation means for starting (such as an operation lever) The identification information starts to change due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has passed. a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stop is the specific identification information; the ball is used as a game medium; A gaming machine configured to require a predetermined number of balls at the start of dynamic display, and to pay out a large number of balls at the occurrence of a special game state.

10 pachinko machine 410 base member 411f collection port (collection member)
422 cam member (part of support structure)
430 link member (part of support structure)
4441g engagement wall (insertion member)
460 Transmission mechanism 2464 Movable rack (reverse member)
465 transmission gear (pinion gear)
466 rack (rack member)
467 ball receiving part (displacement member)
3468 First link member (reverse member)
470 base member (base member)
471a Standing wall (wall part)
481b1 recessed portion 492 displacement member (restricting means)
520 base plate (second base member)
525 rolling part (passage member)
525b projection (resistance means)
540 Distributing member (restricting means, distributing means, integrated member)
540a leg (protrusion)
541 regulating plate (first retractable part, sorting means)
542 storage plate (second haunting part, flow state changing means)
7710 displacement member 7713 ball receiving member (receiving portion)
7720 transmission member (transmission means)
7721 rotating member (main body)
7722 drive pin (pin part)
7723 Arm member 7723a Driven groove (sliding groove)
730 left transmission member (rotation side transmission means, second member)
731 transmission mechanism (one-way clutch mechanism)
731a transmission gear (part of gear train)
731b transmission gear (part of gear train)
731c transmission gear (part of gear train)
731d transmission gear (part of gear train)
731e, 7730 load gear (load gear)
740 right transmission member (displacement side transmission means, first member)
741 rotating member (crank member)
741a Protrusion (pin portion)
742 Arm member 742b First sliding groove (sliding groove)
760 box member (lid member)
770 Lid member (displacement member, first member)
780 rotation restricting member (displacement restricting means)
800 rotating body (rotating member, second member)
810 base plate (fixing member)
811b Communication port (opening)
812b communication port (second communication port)
820 LED board (light emitting means)
831 opening (first communication port)
870 opening/closing member (displacement member)
871 Protrusion (part of displacement setting means, part of connecting means)
892 sliding groove (part of displacement setting means, part of connecting means)
KR1 1st throwing path (downstream path)
KR2 2nd throw path (2nd branch passage)
KR3 3rd throw path (1st branch passage)
SP4 biasing spring (biasing means)
KM4 drive motor (driving means)
OW1 one-way clutch (engagement means)

The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pachinko machines.

2. Description of the Related Art Among game machines such as pachinko machines, there is known a game machine including a reel member which is rotatably formed and whose outer peripheral surface is arranged so as to be visible to a player (Patent Document 1).

JP 2009-119140 A

However, the game machine described above has a problem that the presentation effect is insufficient.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of enhancing the performance effect.

In order to achieve this object, a gaming machine according to claim 1 is provided with a rotatable drum member having an outer peripheral surface arranged so as to be visible to a player, wherein the drum member is formed to be rotatable. A displacement member is provided so as to be displaceable on the outer peripheral surface.

According to the game machine according to claim 1, the performance effect can be enhanced.

1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to a first embodiment; FIG. 1 is a front view of a game board of a pachinko machine; FIG. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine. 1 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a pachinko machine; FIG. 1 is an exploded perspective front view of a pachinko machine; FIG. It is an exploded perspective front view of an operation unit and a game board. FIG. 4 is a front view of the operating unit; FIG. 4 is a front view of the operating unit; FIG. 4 is a front view of the operating unit; FIG. 4 is a front view of the operating unit; It is a front view of a lower displacement unit. It is a rear view of a lower displacement unit. It is an exploded perspective front view of a lower displacement unit. It is an exploded perspective rear view of a lower displacement unit. It is a front view of a lower displacement unit in a retracted state. FIG. 10 is a front view of the downward displacement unit in the first extended state; FIG. 10 is a front view of the downward displacement unit in the second extended state; It is a rear view of the downward displacement unit in a retracted state. FIG. 10 is a rear view of the downward displacement unit in the first extended state; FIG. 11 is a rear view of the downward displacement unit in the second extended state; FIG. 8A is a rear view of the first link member and the cam member in a retracted state, FIG. 4B in a first extended state, and FIG. FIG. 19 is a schematic cross-sectional view of the lower displacement unit taken along line XXIIa-XXIIa of FIG. 18, and FIG. 19B is a schematic cross-sectional view of the lower displacement unit taken along line XXIIb-XXIIb of FIG. (a) is a front view of a lower displacement member, and (b) is a rear view of the lower displacement member. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective front view of a lower displacement member; FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective rear view of a lower displacement member; (a) and (b) are front views of a lower displacement member. Fig. 10 is a front view of the lower displacement member in the first position; Fig. 10 is a front view of the lower displacement member in a second position; Fig. 10 is a front view of the lower displacement member in a third position; (a) to (c) are partially enlarged views of a lower displacement member. (a) to (c) are front views of a lower displacement member. (a) to (c) are front views of a lower displacement member. (a) to (c) are front views of a lower displacement member. (a) to (c) are front views of a lower displacement member. (a) is a partially enlarged view of the lower displacement member in range XXXVa of FIG. 34(b), and (b) is a partially enlarged view of the lower displacement member in range XXXVb of FIG. 34(a). (a) is a top view of the sorting unit, and (b) is a rear view of the sorting unit. 4 is an exploded front perspective view of the sorting unit; FIG. FIG. 4 is an exploded rear perspective view of the sorting unit; FIG. 37 is a cross-sectional view of the sorting unit taken along line XXXIX-XXXIX of FIG. 36(a); (a) and (b) are partially enlarged views of the sorting unit in range XL of FIG. (a) and (b) are partial enlarged views of a sorting unit. (a) and (b) are partial enlarged views of a sorting unit. (a) and (b) are partial enlarged views of a sorting unit. (a) and (b) are partial enlarged views of a sorting unit. It is a front view of a sorting unit and a lower displacement unit. FIG. 10 is a top view of a sorting unit and a lower displacement unit; It is a front view of a lower displacement unit. FIG. 4 is a cross-sectional view of a sorting unit; It is a front view of a lower displacement unit. FIG. 4 is a cross-sectional view of a sorting unit; It is a front view of a lower displacement unit. FIG. 4 is a cross-sectional view of a sorting unit; It is a front view of a rotation unit. It is a rear view of a rotation unit. It is an exploded perspective front view of a rotation unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the rotation unit. It is a front view of a decoration unit. (a) is a side view of the decoration unit as viewed in the direction of arrow LVIIIa in FIG. 57, and (b) is a side view of the decoration unit as viewed in the direction of arrow LVIIIb in FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective front view of the decoration unit; FIG. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective rear view of the decoration unit; 55, and (b) is the rotation unit in arrow LVb of FIG. 55, and (b) is the rotation unit in arrow LVb of FIG. FIG. 4A is a side view of the decoration unit and the right transmission member in a closed state, (b) in an intermediate state, and (c) in an open state; FIG. 4A is a side view of the decoration unit and the right transmission member in an open state, (b) in an intermediate state, and (c) in a closed state; (a) is a side view of the decoration unit in the closed state, and FIG. 65(b) is a side view of the decoration unit in the open state. (a) is a front view of the rotating body, (b) is a side view of the rotating body viewed in the direction of arrow LXVIb in FIG. 66(a), and (c) is an arrow LXVIc in FIG. It is a side view of a rotary body in direction view. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective front view of a rotating body; It is an exploded perspective rear view of a rotating body. (a) is a side view of the rotating body with the opening/closing member closed, and (b) is a side view of the rotating body with the opening/closing member open. (a) and (b) are side views of the decorative unit. It is a front view of a lower displacement unit and a rotation unit. FIG. 72 is a top view of the downward displacement unit viewed in the direction of arrow LXII in FIG. 71; It is a front view of a lower displacement unit and a rotation unit. (a) is a top view of the ball cradle, (b) is a front view of the ball cradle, and (c) is a sectional view of the ball cradle taken along line LXXIVc-LXXIVc in FIG. 74(a). is. It is an exploded perspective view of a ball cradle. (a) and (b) are sectional views of a ball cradle. 54(a) and (b) are schematic cross-sectional views of the rotation unit taken along line LXXVII-LXXVII in FIG. 53. FIG. It is a front view of an upper displacement unit. It is an exploded perspective front view of an upper displacement unit. It is an exploded perspective rear view of an upper displacement unit. FIG. 10 is a front view of the upper displacement unit in a state where the upper displacement member is arranged at the retracted position; FIG. 11 is a front view of the upper displacement unit in a state where the upper displacement member is arranged at an intermediate position; FIG. 10 is a front view of the upper displacement unit in a state where the upper displacement member is arranged at the extended position; (a) is a front view of a variable part, and (b) is a rear view of the variable part. FIG. 11 is an exploded perspective front view of a lower displacement member in the second embodiment; It is a front view of a lower displacement member. Fig. 10 is a front view of the lower displacement member in a third position; (a) is a front view of a lower displacement member in a third embodiment, and (b) is a rear view of the lower displacement member. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective front view of a lower displacement member; FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective rear view of a lower displacement member; (a) and (b) are front views of a lower displacement member. (a) is a front view of the lower displacement member at the first position, and (b) is a front view of the lower displacement member at the second position. (a) is a front view of the lower displacement member at the third position, and (b) is a front view of the lower displacement member at the second position. It is a front view of the downward displacement unit in 4th Embodiment. It is a front view of a lower displacement unit. It is a front view of a lower displacement unit. (a) is a top view of the sorting unit in the fifth embodiment, and FIG. 97(b) is a rear view of the sorting unit. 4 is an exploded perspective front view of the sorting unit; FIG. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective rear view of the sorting unit; FIG. 97 is a cross-sectional view of the sorting unit taken along line CC of FIG. 97(a); 101(a) and (b) are partial enlarged views of the sorting unit in the area CI in FIG. 100. FIG. It is a front view of the rotation unit in 6th Embodiment. It is an exploded perspective front view of a rotation unit. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective rear view of the sorting unit; 104(a) to (c) are side views of the decoration unit viewed in the direction of arrow CV in FIG. 104. FIG. 104(a) to (c) are side views of the decoration unit viewed in the direction of arrow CV in FIG. 104. FIG. It is a side schematic diagram of the displacement unit in 7th Embodiment. It is a side view schematic diagram of a displacement unit. It is a schematic side view of the displacement unit when a game ball is held by the displacement member. It is a schematic side view of the displacement unit when a game ball is held by the displacement member. It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 8th Embodiment. 4 is an exploded perspective front view of the rotary operation unit; FIG. FIG. 112 is a schematic cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine taken along line CXIII-CXIII in FIG. 111; It is a cross-sectional schematic diagram of a pachinko machine.

BEST MODE FOR CARRYING OUT THE INVENTION Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko game machine (hereinafter simply referred to as "pachinko machine") 10 will be described as a first embodiment with reference to FIGS. 1 to 77. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 2 whose outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 2 formed in substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 2. and an inner frame 4 supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 2 at two upper and lower positions on the left side in front view (see FIG. 1) to support the inner frame 4, and the side on which the hinges 18 are provided serves as an opening and closing axis. A frame 4 is supported toward the front side so that it can be opened and closed.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning slots 63 and 64, etc. is detachably attached to the inner frame 4 from the back side. A ball (game ball) flows down the front surface of the game board 13 to play a pinball game. The inner frame 4 includes a ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that shoots a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a shooting unit that guides the ball shot from the ball shooting unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 4, a front door 5 covering the front upper side and a lower tray unit 15 covering the lower side are provided. In order to support the front door 5 and the lower tray unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached at two upper and lower positions on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1). 5 and a lower tray unit 15 are supported on the front side so that they can be opened and closed. The locking of the inner frame 4 and the locking of the front door 5 are unlocked by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front door 5 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electrical parts, and the like, and has a window portion 5c having a substantially elliptical opening at its substantially central portion. A glass unit 16 having two sheet glasses 8 is arranged on the back side of the front door 5, and the front side of the pachinko machine 10 can be visually recognized through the glass unit 16.例文帳に追加

On the front door 5, an upper tray 17 for storing balls projects forward and is formed in a substantially box-like shape with an open upper surface. The bottom surface of the upper tray 17 is inclined downward to the right when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the inclination guides the ball thrown into the upper tray 17 to the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4). A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17 . The frame button 22 is operated by the player when, for example, the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) is changed, or the content of the super ready-to-win effect is changed. be.

Light-emitting means such as various lamps are provided around the front door 5 (for example, at corners). These light emitting means are controlled to change the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking in response to changes in the game state such as when a big win is made or when a predetermined ready-to-win state is reached, and play a role of enhancing the effect during the game. Illumination parts 29 to 33 containing light emitting means such as LEDs are provided on the periphery of the window part 5c. In the pachinko machine 10, these electric decoration parts 29 to 33 function as production lamps such as big win lamps, and each of the electric decoration parts 29 to 33 lights up by lighting or flashing of built-in LEDs at the time of a big win or a ready-to-win production. Alternatively, it flashes to notify that the jackpot is in progress or that the player is in the process of reaching the jackpot just before the jackpot. In addition, an indicator lamp 34 is provided at the upper left portion of the front door 5 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1). The indicator lamp 34 has a built-in light emitting means such as an LED and is capable of indicating whether prize balls are being dispensed and when an error has occurred.

In addition, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front door 5 can be visually recognized on the lower side of the right side electric decoration part 32, and a pasting space K1 (Fig. 2) can be viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plated member 36 made of ABS resin, which is plated with chrome, is attached to the area around the electric decorations 29 to 33 in order to create more splendor.

A ball rental operation unit 40 is arranged below the window portion 5c. The ball rental operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41 , a ball rental button 42 and a return button 43 . When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with banknotes, cards, etc. inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the balls are released according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display section 41 is an area in which the balance information of the card or the like is displayed, and the built-in LED is turned on to display the remaining amount in numbers as the balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain lending balls based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and lending balls are supplied to the top tray 17 as long as the card or the like has a balance. be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. A pachinko machine in which balls are directly lent to the upper tray 17 from a ball leasing device or the like without going through the card unit, ie, a so-called cash machine, does not require the ball leasing operation unit 40. A decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation portion to make the parts configuration common. It is possible to achieve commonality between a pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine.

In the lower tray unit 15 positioned below the upper tray 17, a lower tray 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper tray 17 is formed in a substantially box-like shape with an open upper surface. there is On the right side of the lower tray 50, an operating handle 51 is provided which is operated by the player to drive the ball into the front surface of the game board 13. As shown in FIG.

Inside the operating handle 51, there are a touch sensor 51a for permitting the driving of the ball shooting unit 112a, a shooting stop switch 51b for stopping the shooting of the ball while the pressing operation is being performed, and a rotation of the operating handle 51. A variable resistor (not shown) for detecting a dynamic operation amount (rotational position) based on a change in electric resistance is incorporated. When the operating handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes corresponding to the amount of rotation operation. A ball is shot with a strength (shooting intensity) corresponding to , and is thereby hit to the front surface of the game board 13 with a flying amount corresponding to the player's operation. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are turned off.

A ball extraction lever 52 is provided at the lower front portion of the lower tray 50 for operation when discharging the balls stored in the lower tray 50 downward. The ball extracting lever 52 is always biased to the right, and when it is slid to the left against the bias, the bottom opening formed in the bottom of the lower tray 50 is opened. The ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball extracting lever 52 is normally performed with a box (generally called a "senryo box") placed below the lower tray 50 to receive the balls ejected from the lower tray 50 . The operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower tray 50 as described above, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower tray 50 .

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 includes a base plate 60 which is cut into a substantially square shape in a front view. The opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, the variable winning device 65, the first through gate 66, the variable display device unit 80, etc. are assembled, and the peripheral portion thereof is the inner frame 4 (see FIG. 1). attached to the back side of the The base plate 60 is made of wood by pasting together thin plate materials, and is formed so that various structures arranged on the back side of the base plate 60 cannot be seen from the front side of the base plate 60 by the player. The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in through-holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing. It is fixed by a tapping screw or the like from the front side.

The central portion of the front surface of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 4 through the window portion 5c of the front door 5 (see FIG. 1). Mainly referring to FIG. 2, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described below.

An outer rail 77 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and a strip-shaped metal plate similar to the outer rail 77 is placed inside the outer rail 77. An arc-shaped inner rail 76 formed by is erected. The outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rail 76 and the outer rail 77, and the front and rear sides are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area is formed in which a game is played by the behavior of . The game area is the front surface of the game board 13 and is defined by two rails 76 and 77 and a resin-made outer edge member 73 connecting the rails (a prize-winning opening, etc. area where the ball flows down).

The two rails 76 and 77 are provided to guide the ball shot from the ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. As shown in FIG. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 76 (upper left part in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning into the ball guide passage again. be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 77 (upper right in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the ball. is attenuated and rebounded toward the center.

First pattern display devices 37A and 37B provided with a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means and a 7-segment display are arranged in the lower left side of the game area when viewed from the front (lower left side in FIG. 2). The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are for displaying according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly display the game state of the pachinko machine 10. FIG. In this embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are configured to be used properly according to whether the ball has won the first prize winning port 64 or the second prize winning port 640.例文帳に追加Specifically, when the ball enters the first winning hole 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, while when the ball enters the second winning hole 640, the first The pattern display device 37B is configured to operate.

In addition, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B use LEDs to indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the variable probability, the time saving mode, or the normal state by the lighting state, or indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the changing state by the lighting state. Whether the stop pattern is a pattern corresponding to the probability variable jackpot, a pattern corresponding to the normal jackpot, or a missing pattern is indicated by the lighting state, the number of pending balls is indicated by the lighting state, and a 7-segment display device indicates the round during the jackpot. Display numbers and errors. The plurality of LEDs are configured so that each LED has a different emission color (for example, red, green, and blue), and depending on the combination of the emission colors, it is possible to suggest various game states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. can.

Incidentally, in the pachinko machine 10, a lottery is conducted when a prize is won in either the first prize winning port 64 or the second prize winning port 640.例文帳に追加In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big win (big win lottery), and also determines the kind of big win when it is determined as a big win. As the jackpot type determined here, a 15R probability variable jackpot, a 4R probability variable jackpot, and a 15R normal jackpot are prepared. The first pattern display devices 37A and 37B not only indicate whether or not the result of the lottery is a jackpot as a stop pattern after the end of variation, but also indicate a pattern corresponding to the jackpot type when the jackpot is won. .

Here, the “15R probability variable jackpot” is a probability variable jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after the maximum number of rounds is 15 rounds, and the “4R probability variable jackpot” is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 4 rounds. It is a variable jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after . In addition, "15R normal jackpot" is a jackpot that shifts to a low probability state after a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 15 rounds, and a time-saving state during a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations). be.

In addition, the "high probability state" refers to a state in which the probability of a subsequent jackpot is increased as an added value after the end of the jackpot, a time during so-called probability fluctuation (probability change), in other words, a game that is easy to shift to a special game state It is the state of The high-probability state (during variable probability) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which the probability of winning a second symbol, which will be described later, is increased and the ball is likely to enter the second winning hole 640 . "Low probability state" refers to a state in which the odds are not variable, and the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than when the odds are variable. In addition, the time-saving state (during time-saving) of the "low-probability state" is a state in which the jackpot probability is normal, and the jackpot probability remains the same, but only the winning probability of the second symbol is increased, and the second winning port 640 It refers to the state of the game in which the ball is likely to win a prize. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state, it means that the game is in a state of neither variable probability nor time reduction (state in which neither the jackpot probability nor the second pattern winning probability is increased).

During the probability change or the time reduction, not only is the winning probability of the second symbol increased, but also the time during which the first electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is opened is changed, which is longer than during normal. Time is set. When the first electric accessory 640a is in the open state (open state), compared to the case where the first electric accessory 640a is in the closed state (closed state), the second winning port 640 The ball will be in a state where it is easy to win. Therefore, during the probability change or the time reduction, the ball can easily enter the second winning hole 640, and the number of times the big winning lottery is performed can be increased.

In addition, instead of changing the opening time of the first electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 during the probability change or during the time saving, or in addition to changing the opening time, one hit , the number of times the first electric accessory 640a is opened may be changed to increase more than during normal operation. In addition, during the probability change or the time reduction, the winning probability of the second symbol is not changed, and the first electric role product 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is opened and the first electric role product is opened once. At least one of the number of times 640a is opened may be changed. In addition, during the probability change or the time reduction, the time for opening the first electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 and the number of times the first electric accessory 640a is opened per time are not changed. Only the winning probability of the second symbol may be changed so as to be increased as compared with the normal state.

The game area is provided with a plurality of general winning holes 63 through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win. A variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. In the variable display device unit 80, with the winning of either the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 640 (start winning) as a trigger, the third A third pattern display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as a "display device") that displays a variable pattern, and an LED that variably displays the second pattern triggered by the passage of the ball through the first through gate 66. A second pattern display device (not shown) is provided.

A center frame 86 is arranged in the variable display device unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third pattern display device 81 . The third pattern display device 81 can be visually recognized through an opening formed in the center of the center frame 86 .

The third pattern display device 81 is composed of a large 9-inch liquid crystal display, and the display contents are controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4), so that, for example, upper, middle and lower three patterns are displayed. A column of symbols is displayed. Each pattern row is composed of a plurality of patterns (third patterns), and these third patterns are horizontally scrolled for each pattern row to variably display the third pattern on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81.例文帳に追加It's like In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the game state is displayed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B under the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4). Decorative display according to the display of the pattern display devices 37A and 37B is performed. Incidentally, instead of the display device, for example, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using a reel or the like.

The second symbol display device alternately displays a symbol "O" and a symbol "X" as a display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) for a predetermined time each time the ball passes through the first through gate 66. This is to perform a variable display that lights up. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the first through gate 66, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if the winning lottery is won, the second symbol display device stops and displays the symbol "○" after the second symbol is variably displayed. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is a loss, the symbol "x" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variable display of the third symbol.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device stops at a predetermined symbol ("○" symbol in this embodiment), the first electric role object 640a attached to the second winning hole 640 It is configured to be activated (opened) for a predetermined period of time.

The time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set so as to be shorter during the variable probability or during the time saving than during the normal gaming state. As a result, the variable display of the second symbol is performed in a short time during the probability change and the time reduction, so that more winning lotteries can be performed than during normal times. Therefore, since the chances of winning in the winning lottery increase, it is possible to give the player more chances to open the first electric accessory 640a of the second winning opening 640.例文帳に追加Therefore, it is possible to create a state in which the ball is likely to enter the second winning hole 640 during the probability variation and the time saving.

In addition, during the probability change or the time reduction, other methods such as increasing the probability of winning, increasing the opening time and the number of openings of the first electric accessory 640a for one hit, etc. The second winning opening during the probability change or time reduction When the ball is in a state where it is easy to win a prize to 640, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be fixed regardless of the game state. On the other hand, if the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set shorter than normal during the variable probability or during the time saving, the winning probability may be constant regardless of the game state, and one winning The opening time and the number of openings of the first electric accessory 640a may be constant regardless of the game state.

The first through gate 66 is attached to the game board in the area on the right side of the variable display unit 80 . The first through gate 66 is configured so that a part of the balls flowing down the game board among the balls shot to the game board can pass through. When the ball passes through the first through gate 66, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, the variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the result of the winning lottery is a win, the symbol "○" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display, and if the result of the winning lottery is a loss. For example, an "x" symbol is displayed as a variable display stop symbol.

The number of times the ball passes through the first through gate 66 is suspended up to four times in total, and the number of suspended balls is displayed by the above-described first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, and the second symbol suspension lamp (not shown) is displayed. ) is also illuminated. Four second pattern holding lamps are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third pattern display device 81 .

In addition, the variable display of the second pattern is performed by switching lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second pattern display device as in the present embodiment. A part of the pattern display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the lighting of the second symbol reservation lamp may be performed by a part of the third symbol display device 81 . Also, the maximum number of held balls for passage of the ball through the first through gate 66 is not limited to 4, and may be set to 3 or less or 5 or more times (e.g., 8 times). . Also, the number of through gates to be assembled is not limited to two, and may be three or more. Also, the mounting position of the through gate is not limited to the right and left sides of the variable display device unit 80, and may be below the variable display device unit 80, for example. In addition, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the lighting display may not be performed by the second symbol reservation lamp.

Below the variable display device unit 80, a first winning hole 64 through which balls can win is arranged. When a ball enters the first winning hole 64, a first winning hole switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main controller 110 is caused to turn on the first winning hole switch. (See FIG. 4), a lottery for a big hit is made, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37A.

On the other hand, on the right side of the first winning hole 64 when viewed from the front, a second winning hole 640 through which a ball can win is arranged. When the ball enters the second winning hole 640, the second winning hole switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main controller 110 ( 4), a lottery for a big hit is made, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is displayed on the first symbol display device 37B.

Also, the first prize winning port 64 and the second prize winning port 640 are also one of the prize winning ports from which five balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win. In this embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when the balls enter the first prize winning port 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when the balls enter the second prize winning port 640 are configured to be the same. , the number of prize balls paid out when the balls enter the first prize winning port 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when the balls enter the second prize winning port 640 are different numbers, for example, the number of balls to the first prize winning port 64 The number of prize balls to be paid out when is won may be set to three, and the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball enters the second prize winning port 640 may be set to be five.

Further, on the left side of the first prize winning port 64 in a front view, a third prize winning port 82 in which a ball can win a prize is arranged. When a ball wins, the third winning hole 82 can throw the winning ball to the first opening 511 of the sorting unit 500 to be described later via the ball throwing unit 600 . That is, the third winning opening 82 is arranged in communication with a first opening 511, which will be described later.

A third electric accessory 82a is attached to the third prize winning port 82. - 特許庁The third electric accessory 82a is configured to be openable and closable by being rotationally displaced with respect to the game board 13. Normally, the third electric accessory 82a is in a closed state (reduced state) and the ball wins the third prize. It is in a state where it is difficult to win a prize to the mouth 82 . On the other hand, when there is a jackpot determination triggered by the winning of the first prize winning port 64 or the second prize winning port 640, the third electric accessory 82a opens (expands) for a predetermined time after, or during the big win state), and the ball is likely to enter the third winning port 82. Further, on the downstream side of the third winning hole 82, a sensor device SE1 for detecting a passing ball is mounted.

The timing of opening the third electric accessory 82a does not have to be triggered by the winning of the first prize winning port 64 and the second prize winning port 5640. As a result of the variable display of the second symbols triggered by the above, when the symbol "O" is displayed on the second symbol display device, it may be released.

A first electric accessory 640a is attached to the second winning hole 640. - 特許庁The first electric accessory 640a is configured to be openable and closable, and normally the first electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (reduced state), making it difficult for the ball to enter the second winning opening 640. there is On the other hand, as a result of the variable display of the second symbol triggered by the passage of the ball through the first through gate 66, when the symbol "○" is displayed on the second symbol display device, the first electric accessory 640a is displayed. It will be in an open state (enlarged state), and the ball will easily enter the second winning port 640 .

As described above, during the variable probability and during the time saving, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher than during normal, and the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is short, so in the variable display of the second symbol "○ , and the number of times the first electric accessory 640a is in the open state (enlarged state) increases. Furthermore, the time during which the first electric accessory 640a is opened is also longer during the variable probability or during the time saving than during the normal time. Therefore, it is possible to create a state in which the ball is more likely to enter the second winning hole 640 during the variable probability or the shorter working hours compared to the normal time.

Here, when the ball enters the first prize winning port 64 and when the ball enters the second prize winning port 640, the probability of winning the jackpot is the same in both the low probability state and the high probability state. However, the probability of winning a 15R probability variable jackpot as the type of jackpot selected in the event of a jackpot is higher when the ball enters the second winning port 640 than when the ball enters the first winning port 64. is set. On the other hand, the first prize winning port 64 does not have the first electric accessory 640a like the second prize winning port 640, and the ball can always win a prize.

Therefore, during normal operation, the electric accessory attached to the second prize winning port 640 is often closed, and it is difficult to win the second prize winning port 640. Then, a ball is shot so that the ball passes through the left side of the variable display unit 80 (so-called "left-handed hitting"), and by winning the first prize-winning port 64, many chances of a big winning lottery are obtained, and a big win is achieved. It is advantageous for the player to aim at that.

On the other hand, during the probability change or the time reduction, by passing the ball through the first through gate 66, the first electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is likely to be in an open state, and the second winning opening 640 is won. Since it is in an easy state, the ball is shot toward the second winning hole 640 so that the ball passes through the right side of the variable display unit 80 (so-called “right hitting”), and is passed through the first through gate 66. It is more advantageous for the player to open the first electric accessory 640a and aim for a 15R probability variable jackpot by winning the second prize winning port 640.例文帳に追加

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment shoots balls to the player according to the game state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether the game is variable probability, short time, or normal). It is possible to change the way of hitting to "left hitting" and "right hitting". Therefore, it is possible to change the way the player hits the ball, so that the player can enjoy the game.

A variable prize winning device 65 is provided on the right side of the first prize winning port 64, and a horizontally long rectangular specific prize winning port (large open port) 65a is provided in the substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot lottery performed due to the winning of either the first prize winning port 64 or the second prize winning port 640 results in a jackpot, the jackpot is stopped after a predetermined time (fluctuation time) elapses. The first pattern display device 37A or the first pattern display device 37B is lit so as to form a pattern, and the stop pattern corresponding to the big win is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the big win. After that, the game state transitions to a special game state (jackpot) in which the ball is likely to win. As this special game state, the specific winning opening 65a which is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have passed or until 10 balls have been won).

The specific winning opening 65a is closed after a predetermined period of time has passed, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined period of time. The opening and closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated up to 15 times (15 rounds), for example. The state in which this opening and closing operation is performed is one form of a special game state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is given a game value (game value) by paying out a larger amount of prize balls than usual. is done.

Specifically, the variable prize winning device 65 includes a horizontally long rectangular opening/closing plate that covers the specific prize winning opening 65a, and a large opening solenoid (not shown) for opening and closing forward with the lower side of the opening/closing plate as an axis. and The specific prize winning opening 65a is normally in a closed state in which the ball cannot or hardly wins a prize. In the event of a big win, the large opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening/closing plate to the lower front side to temporarily form an open state in which the ball is likely to enter the specific prize winning port 65a, and the open state and the normal closed state are formed. It operates to alternate between states.

Incidentally, the special game state is not limited to the form described above. A large opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the game area, and when the LED corresponding to the big win is lit in the first pattern display devices 37A and 37B, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time, and the A special game is a game state in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times when a ball enters the specific winning opening 65a while the specific winning opening 65a is open. You may make it form as a state. In addition, the number of specific winning holes 65a is not limited to one, and one or more than two (for example, three) may be arranged. It may be on the left side of the variable display device unit 80 .

An affixing space K1 for affixing a certificate stamp, an identification label, etc. is provided at the right corner of the lower side of the game board 13. 35 (see FIG. 1).

The game board 13 is provided with a first outlet 71 . Balls that flow down the game area and do not win any of the winning holes 63, 64, 65a, 640, 82 are guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the first out hole 71. be. The first out port 71 is arranged below the first winning port 64 .

The game board 13 is provided with a large number of nails for properly dispersing and adjusting the falling direction of the balls, and various members (accessories) such as windmills.

As shown in FIG. 3, the back side of the pachinko machine 10 is mainly provided with control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 . The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main controller 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 forming a protective cover and a dispensing unit 93 as a unit. In addition, each control board has an MPU as a 1-chip microcomputer that manages each control, a port that communicates with various devices, a random number generator that is used for various lotteries, and is used for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit or the like is mounted as required.

Main controller 110, sound lamp controller 113, display controller 114, payout controller 111, launch controller 112, power supply 115, and card unit connection board 116 are housed in board boxes 100-104, respectively. . Each of the board boxes 100 to 104 has a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other to accommodate each controller and each board.

In addition, the board box 100 (main controller 110) and the board box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and firing control device 112) connect the box base and the box cover unopenably by a sealing unit (not shown) (caulking structure). consolidation). A sealing seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. The sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if the sealing seal is peeled off in order to open the circuit board boxes 100, 102, or if the circuit board boxes 100, 102 are forcibly opened, the box base and the box cover may be damaged. cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether the substrate boxes 100, 102 have been opened.

The dispensing unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and open upward, a tank rail 131 connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a tank rail 131 downstream of the tank rail 131. a case rail 132 vertically connected to the side of the case rail 132; ing. The tank 130 is successively replenished with balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall, and a payout device 133 pays out the required number of balls as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131 .

The payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor control knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erasure switch 122. The state recovery switch 120 is operated to eliminate ball clogging (return to normal state) when a dispensing error such as a ball clogging in the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 4) occurs. The operating knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when the pachinko machine 10 is to be returned to its initial state.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG.

The main control unit 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. A RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit are incorporated. In main controller 110, MPU 201 performs main processing of pachinko machine 10 such as jackpot lottery, setting of display in first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display result in second symbol display device. to run.

In addition, various commands are transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers by the data transmission/reception circuit in order to instruct the sub-controllers such as the payout controller 111 and the sound lamp controller 113 to operate. Such commands are sent in only one direction from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers.

The RAM 203 stores various areas, counters, flags, contents of internal registers of the MPU 201, return addresses of control programs executed by the MPU 201, etc., and a stack area for storing various flags, counters, I/O, and the like. and a work area (work area) in which values are stored. The RAM 203 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

When power is interrupted due to power failure or the like, the RAM 203 stores the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of power interruption (including power failure; the same applies hereinafter). On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including when the power is turned on due to the cancellation of the power failure; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203 . Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (not shown) when the power is turned off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed by the start-up process (not shown) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. , NMI interrupt processing (not shown) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

An input/output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 205 includes the payout control device 111, the sound lamp control device 113, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the second symbol display device, the second symbol reservation lamp, and the lower side of the opening/closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for driving opening and closing to the front side and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected. to send.

The input/output port 205 also includes various switches 208 including a group of switches (not shown) and a group of sensors including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotation position detection sensor R, and a RAM erasure switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply 115, which will be described later. , and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erasing signal SG2 output from the RAM erasing switch circuit 253 .

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 storing control programs executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory and the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211, the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, and various flags and counters. , and a work area (work area) in which values such as I/O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (not shown) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 215 is connected to the main controller 110, the dispensing motor 216, the launch controller 112, and the like. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected with a prize ball detection switch for detecting paid prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout controller 111 but not to the main controller 110 .

The shooting control device 112 controls the ball shooting unit 112a so that the shooting strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 when the main controller 110 issues an instruction to shoot the ball. . The ball shooting unit 112a has a shooting solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on the condition that the shooting stop switch 51b for stopping the shooting of the ball is turned off (not operated). A shooting solenoid is energized corresponding to the amount of rotation operation (rotation position) of the handle 51 , and the ball is shot with strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51 .

The audio lamp control device 113 outputs audio from an audio output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing from a lamp display device (electrical parts 29 to 33, an indicator lamp 34, etc.) 227, and changes production (variation It controls the setting of the display mode of the third pattern display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as display) and advance notice effects. The MPU 221, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 222 storing control programs executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory and the like.

An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 225 is connected to the main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the other device 228, the frame button 22, and the like. Other devices 228 include drive motors KM1, KM2, and KM3.

Sound lamp control device 113, based on various commands (fluctuation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from main control device 110, determines the display mode of third symbol display device 81, and sends the determined display mode to the command The display control device 114 is notified by (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). In addition, the sound lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, changes the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or super reach. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the effect contents of the hour. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the stage after the change is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the stage after the change on the third pattern display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third design, which is the main image to be displayed on the third design display device 81 . The display control device 114 displays various images on the third pattern display device 81 in accordance with commands transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 .

Also, the sound lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) representing the display content of the third pattern display device 81 from the display control device 114 . In the audio lamp control device 113, based on the display command received from the display control device 114, in accordance with the display content of the third pattern display device 81, output the audio corresponding to the display content from the audio output device 226, Lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled in accordance with the display contents.

The display control device 114 is connected to the sound lamp control device 113 and the third pattern display device 81, and based on the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, changes the third pattern in the third pattern display device 81, etc. It controls the display. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display contents of the third pattern display device 81 to the sound lamp control device 113 . The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound from the sound output device 226 in accordance with the display contents indicated by this display command, so that the display of the third pattern display device 81 and the sound output from the sound output device 226 are matched. be able to.

The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to power failure, etc., and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). and an erase switch circuit 253 . The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies necessary operating voltages to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an overview, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volts supplied from the outside, various switches such as the various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, a voltage of 12 volts for driving a motor, etc. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, etc. are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts and backup voltages are supplied to the controllers 110 to 114 and the like as necessary voltages.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 at the time of power failure due to power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of stable DC 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power shutdown, power shutdown) has occurred when this voltage is less than 22 volts. Then, a power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute NMI interrupt processing. Even after the stable DC voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the driving voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing. is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main controller 110 clears the backup data when the RAM erase signal SG2 is input, and controls the payout initialization command for clearing the backup data in the payout control device 111. Send to device 111 .

Next, a schematic configuration of the operating unit 200 will be described with reference to FIGS. 5 to 10. FIG. 5 is an exploded perspective front view of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 6 is an exploded perspective front view of the operation unit 200 and the game board 13. FIG. 7 to 10 are front views of the operation unit 200. FIG.

7, the upper displacement member 940 is retracted upward and the lower displacement member 440 is retracted downward. In FIG. 8, the upper displacement member 940 is rotated downward from the state shown in FIG. The displaced state in FIG. 9 is the state in which the lower displacement member 440 extends from the state shown in FIG. 7 to a first overhang position described later, and in FIG. The state displaced to the second overhang position, which is the position, is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 5 and 6, the motion unit 200 includes a box-shaped rear case 300, and an upper displacement unit 900, a lower displacement unit 400, a rotation unit 700 and a A sorting unit 500 and a ball throwing unit 600 attached to the back surface of the game board 13 are accommodated.

The rear case 300 includes a bottom wall portion 301 that is substantially rectangular in front view, and an outer wall portion 302 that is erected from the outer edges of four sides of the bottom wall portion 301 toward the front. It is formed in a box shape with one side (front side) open. A rectangular opening 301a is formed in the center of the bottom wall portion 301. Through the opening 301a, the third pattern display device 81 (see FIG. 2) arranged on the back surface of the bottom wall portion 301 is visible. It is possible.

The upper displacement unit 900 is slidably disposed on a base member 910 which is oblong in a rectangular shape when viewed from the front and which is disposed above the opening 301a of the bottom wall portion 301 of the rear case 300. It is provided with an upper displacement member 940, and is formed so as to be capable of performing an effect of sliding and rotating the upper displacement member 940 on the front side of the opening 301a of the back case 300 (that is, the third pattern display device 81). A detailed description of the upper displacement unit 900 will be given later.

The lower displacement unit 400 includes a horizontally elongated base member 410 arranged in a lower portion of the opening 301a of the bottom wall portion 301 of the rear case 300, and slidably arranged on the base member 410. The lower displacement member 440 is formed so as to be capable of performing an effect of sliding and rotating the lower displacement member 440 on the front side of the rear case opening 301a (that is, the third pattern display device 81). A detailed description of the lower displacement unit 400 will be given later.

The rotating unit 700 includes a substantially rectangular rear base 720 arranged on the right side of the lower portion of the opening 301a of the bottom wall portion 301 of the rear case 300 when viewed from the front, and a rear base 720 arranged in front of the rear base 720. A player can visually recognize an effect of rotationally displacing the rotating body 800 via a transparent plate portion formed on the lower right side of the game board 13 when viewed from the front. A detailed description of the rotation unit 700 will be given later.

The ball throwing unit 600 is attached to the back side of the game board 13, and distributes game balls thrown to the back side of the game board 13 from the third prize winning opening 82 of the game board 13 to the first opening 511 of the sorting unit 500, which will be described later. A throwing path is formed.

The sorting unit 500 includes a path forming member 510 attached to the back side of the game board 13, a base plate 520 disposed with a predetermined gap facing the path forming member 510, and the base plate 520. A distribution member 540 attached to 520 distributes the game balls flowing down between the path forming member 510 and the base plate 520 to respective ball throwing paths (second ball throwing path KR2 or third ball throwing path KR3). A game ball distributed to the distribution member 540 is thrown to the lower displacement unit 400 . A detailed description of the sorting unit 500 will be given later.

Next, a detailed configuration of the downward displacement unit 400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 11 to 35. FIG. First, a structure for displacing the lower displacement member 440 will be described with reference to FIGS. 11 to 14. FIG.

11 is a front view of the lower displacement unit 400, and FIG. 12 is a rear view of the lower displacement unit 400. FIG. 13 is an exploded perspective front view of the lower displacement unit 400, and FIG. 14 is an exploded perspective rear view of the lower displacement unit 400. FIG. 11 to B04 illustrate a state in which the lower displacement member 440 is arranged at the retracted position (the lowest position with respect to the base member 410).

As shown in FIGS. 11 to 14, the downward displacement unit 400 includes a base member 410 provided on the bottom wall portion 301 (see FIG. 6) of the rear case 300, and a transmission member provided on the base member 410. 420, a link member 430 connected to the base member 410 and displaced along with the displacement of the transmission member 420, one end slidably connected to the base member 410 and the other end connected to the link member 430. and a lower displacement member 440 that is displaced by receiving driving force from the link member 430 .

The base member 410 is formed by combining two oblong rectangular plate members in the front-back direction, and includes a front base 411 arranged on the front side and a rear base 412 arranged on the rear side. A transmission member 420 and a link member 430 are arranged between the front base 411 and the rear base 412 facing each other.

The front base 411 has two sliding grooves 411a and 411b penetrating in the front-rear direction (the depth direction of the paper surface of FIG. 11), and two cylindrical shaft support pins 411c and 411d projecting to the rear side, and a shaft support pin 411d. and a curved wall portion 411e protruding in an arc around the axis.

The sliding grooves 411a and 411b are holes through which two projections 472 and 473 protruding from the back side of the lower displacement member 440 are inserted. The sliding grooves 411a and 411b are formed to extend in the horizontal direction. Therefore, by displacing the projections 472 and 473 inserted through the sliding grooves 411a and 411b along the sliding grooves 411a and 411b, the lower displacement member 440 can be slid in the left-right direction.

The sliding grooves 411a and 411b are curved in an arc shape, and extend upward (upward in FIG. 11) from the left (left in FIG. 11) end to the right (right in FIG. 11) end of the front base 411. ). Further, the sliding grooves 411a and 411b are arranged at positions where the arc axes of the respective sliding grooves 411a and 411b are different from each other, and the gap between them in the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 11) is narrowed from the left end to the right end.

Since the distance between projections 472 and 473 of the base member 470 of the lower displacement member 440 to be described later does not change, when the lower displacement member 440 is slid along the sliding groove, the lower displacement member 440 is rotated. It can be displaced while moving. That is, by changing the distance between the two sliding grooves 411a and 411b, the lower displacement member 440 can be rotated as it slides without applying a rotational driving force to the lower displacement member 440. FIG. A detailed displacement mode of the lower displacement member 440 will be described later.

The shaft support pin 411c is a protrusion that is inserted into a shaft portion 422a of a cam member 422 of a transmission member 420, which will be described later, and is formed in a cylindrical shape with an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the shaft portion 422a. Further, the pivot pin 411 c is formed of a metal rod-like body and fitted onto the front base 411 . Therefore, when a force acts on the cam member 422 from its outer peripheral surface in the axial direction, it is possible to prevent the pivot pin 411c from breaking (damage).

The pivot pin 411d is a protrusion that is inserted into a through hole 431a formed at one end of a first link member 431, which will be described later, and is formed in a cylindrical shape with an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the through hole 431a. Further, the pivot pin 411d is formed of a metallic rod-like body and fitted onto the front base 411. As shown in FIG. Therefore, when a force acts on the first link member 431 in the direction of the through hole 431a, it is possible to prevent the pivot pin 411d from breaking (breaking).

The curved wall portion 411e protrudes from the back side of the front base 411 and is curved around the axis of the pivot pin 411d. The protruding distance of the curved wall portion 411e is set to a distance at which the protruding tip surface of the plate-like protrusion 431b of the first link member 431, which will be described later, abuts. Therefore, the first link member 431 is prevented from being displaced forward. In addition, since the curved wall portion 411e is curved around the axis of the pivot pin 411d, even when the first link member 431 is rotated around the axis of the pivot pin 411d, the first link member 431 does not move. The plate-like projection 431b can be brought into contact with the projecting tip surface of the curved wall portion 411e.

The recovery port 411f is an opening for recovering the ball emitted from the emission opening 471 by moving the ball receiving portion 467 of the lower displacement member 440, which will be described later, into the recovery port 411f. The downstream side of the recovery port 411f is connected to a ball recovery path. The recovery port 411f is a hole protruding from the right end of the front base 411, and the opening surface thereof faces the lower displacement member 440 in the retracted state and the lower displacement member 440 in the first extended state. The surface is positioned below the output opening 471 in the direction of gravity.

In addition, the exit opening 471 of the lower displacement member 440 in the retracted state is arranged above the recovery port 411f. Therefore, the ball emitted from the emission opening 471 can be received in the recovery port 411f and recovered quickly.

The rear base 412 has grooves 412a and 412b recessed from the front side (the front side of the paper surface of FIG. 12) toward the rear side, and a locking portion 412c formed near the groove 412b so as to protrude toward the front side. Formed by the Lord.

The groove portion 412a is a hole into which the tip side of the pivot pin 411c of the front base 411 is inserted. recessed in position. Therefore, the cam member 422 is held by the base member 410 so as not to fall off by combining the front base 411 and the rear base 412 after the pivot pin 411c is inserted into the shaft portion 422a. In addition, since the back base 412 can hold the tip of the pivot pin 411c, when force is applied to the cam member 422 in the axial direction from the outer peripheral surface, the pivot pin 411c will not come into contact with the front base 411. It is possible to suppress bending and breaking from the connecting portion.

The groove portion 412b is a hole into which the front end side of the pivot pin 411d of the front base 411 is inserted, and is formed in a circular shape with an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the pivot pin 411d and faces the pivot pin 411d. recessed in position. Therefore, the first link member 431 is held by the base member 410 so as not to fall off by combining the front base 411 and the rear base 412 after the pivot pin 411d is inserted into the through hole 431a. In addition, since the rear base 412 can hold the tip of the pivot pin 411d, when a force acts on the first link member 431 in the direction of the through hole 431a, the pivot pin 411d and the front base 411 are displaced. It is possible to suppress bending and breaking from the connection part of.

The locking portion 412c is a plate that locks one end of the biasing spring SP1, which will be described later, and is formed outside the biasing spring SP1. Thereby, the one end side of the biasing spring SP1 can be locked. A detailed description of the biasing spring SP1 will be given later.

The transmission member 420 includes a transmission gear 421 connected to the shaft of the drive motor KM1 attached to the front side of the front base 411, and a cam meshed with the transmission gear 421 and rotated as the transmission gear 421 is driven. The member 422 is mainly provided.

The transmission gear 421 is a gear having a meshing surface over the entire outer peripheral surface, and is fitted onto the shaft of the drive motor KM1. Therefore, when power is applied to the drive motor KM1 to rotate the shaft, the transmission gear 421 is also rotated.

The cam member 422 is formed of a plate-like body having a predetermined thickness in the front-rear direction and having a shape in which ends of two semicircles having different sizes are combined with each other when viewed from the front. A semicircular portion of the cam member 422 having a small outer shape is provided with a tooth surface 422b that meshes with the transmission gear 421 on the outer peripheral surface thereof, and a shaft portion 422a is formed through the center of the semicircular portion. A semicircular portion of the cam member 422 having a large outer shape is formed with a sliding groove 422c that is recessed on the rear side facing the link member 430, which will be described later.

The shaft portion 422a is a hole through which the shaft support pin 411c is inserted as described above, and the shaft portion 422a is rotatably supported by the shaft support pin 411c so that the cam member 422 moves the shaft of the shaft support pin 411c. It is rotatably held centrally.

The cam member 422 is arranged on the base member 410 with the tooth surface 422b meshing with the transmission gear 421. Therefore, when the transmission gear 421 is rotated, the cam member 422 rotates about the axis of the shaft portion 422a. can.

The sliding groove 422c is recessed along the outer periphery of the semicircular portion of the cam member 422 having a large radius. Therefore, the distance from the shaft portion 422a increases from one end side toward the other end side. The sliding groove 422c includes a stepped portion 422c1 extending from the sliding projection 431d of the first link member 431 in the direction of the through hole 431a when the lower displacement member 440 is in a retracted state, which will be described later, and a lower displacement groove 422c. A stepped portion 422c3 extending in the direction of the through hole 431a from the sliding projection 431d when the member 440 is positioned in a second extended state, which will be described later, and the lower displacement member 440 are positioned between the retracted state and the second extended state. and a stepped portion 422c2 that extends from the sliding projection 431d toward the through hole 431a when positioned in the intermediate first projecting state.

Link member 430 is formed from two link members, a first link member 431 and a second link member 432 . Further, the link member 430 is formed by rotatably connecting the ends of the first link member 431 and the second link member 432 .

The first link member 431 is bent in a substantially V-shape when viewed from the front, and is formed in a plate shape having a predetermined thickness in the front-rear direction. The first link member 431 is a link that is displaced in accordance with the displacement of the cam member 422. The first link member 431 has a through hole 431a penetrating in the front-rear direction at one end and a columnar connecting projection 431c projecting rearward at the other end. , which mainly includes a plate-like projection 431b projecting to a position facing the curved wall portion 411e, and a cylindrical sliding projection 431d projecting to the front side of the bent portion.

The through hole 431a is a through hole into which the pivot pin 411d is inserted as described above. The first link member 431 is rotatably held with respect to the base member 410 by combining the front base 411 and the rear base 412 with the pivot pin 411d inserted into the through hole 431a.

The plate-like protrusion 431b is a protrusion that suppresses the first link member 431 from being displaced in the front-rear direction and suppresses the first link member 431 from colliding with the cam member 422 arranged in front. The cam member 422 is formed into a plate-like body projecting in a curved shape with the hole 431a as an axis, and the projecting length is set larger than the thickness of the cam member 422 in the front-rear direction. Accordingly, it is possible to suppress collision between the rear surface of the cam member 422 and the front surface of the first link member 431 .

The connecting projection 431c is a shaft portion that is connected to a second link member 432, which will be described later. A large screw or the like is fastened. Thereby, the first link member 431 and the second link member 432 are rotatably connected.

A wall portion 431f that protrudes toward the rear side is formed at the edge of the through hole 431a. The wall portion 431f is a wall surface for fitting and holding an urging spring SP1, which will be described later, on its outer peripheral surface.

The link-side engaging portion 431e is a protrusion that engages the other end side of the biasing spring SP1 fitted in the wall portion 431f, and is formed to protrude in the shape of a hook on the back side of one end side of the first link member 431. . Therefore, one end of the biasing spring SP1 is engaged with the engaging portion 412c of the rear base 412, and the other end thereof is engaged with the link side engaging portion 431e of the first link member 431. be. Therefore, the biasing force of the biasing spring SP1 can act in a direction to rotate the other end side of the first link member 431 upward with respect to the base member 410 . As a result, when the lower displacement member 440 is rotationally displaced, the biasing force of the biasing spring SP1 acts, so that the energy consumption of the drive motor KM1 can be suppressed.

431 d of sliding protrusions are formed in the position spaced apart from the through-hole 431a by substantially the same distance as the separation distance with the axial part 422a of the cam member 422 from the through-hole 431a. Further, the sliding projection 431d has its tip portion inserted inside the sliding groove 422c. That is, the sliding protrusion 431d is formed so that its outer diameter is smaller than the width dimension between the opposing sliding grooves 422c.

431 d of sliding protrusions are arrange|positioned inside the sliding groove 422c, and with the rotational displacement of the cam member 422, they slide inside the sliding groove 422c, and are displaced. That is, by displacing the cam member 422, the first link member 431 is rotationally displaced around the axis of the through hole 431a. A detailed description of the displacement of the first link member 431 will be given later.

In addition, since the sliding protrusion 431d and the plate-like protrusion 431b are formed at positions close to each other, the forward displacement of the first link member 431 is suppressed by the plate-like protrusion 431b. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the sliding protrusion 431d from pushing the cam member 422 forward. As a result, it is not necessary to deepen the recess depth of the sliding groove 422c recessed in the cam member 422, and the rigidity can be ensured without increasing the thickness of the cam member 422 in the front-rear direction.

The second link member 432 is formed in a plate shape with a predetermined thickness in the front-rear direction while being formed in a rectangular shape when viewed from the front, one end of which is long. The second link member 432 is mainly formed with a through hole 432a penetrating in the front-rear direction at one end and a through hole 432b penetrating in the front-rear direction at the other end.

The through hole 432a is a hole for connecting with the first link member 431 as described above, and the connecting protrusion 431c is inserted therein. Thereby, the second link member 432 is rotatably connected to the first link member 431 .

The through hole 432b is connected to a lower displacement member 440, which will be described later, so that the displacement of the link member 430 can be transmitted to the lower displacement member 440. As shown in FIG. The through hole 432b is a hole into which a projection 482a of the rear case 482, which will be described later, is inserted, and the inner diameter thereof is formed to be larger than the outer diameter of the projection 482a. Therefore, by inserting the protrusion 482a into the through hole 432b and fastening a screw or the like having a head larger than the inner diameter of the through hole 432b to the tip of the protrusion 482a, the lower displacement member 440 can move the second link member 432 rotatably held with respect to the Therefore, the driving of the lower displacement member 440 is transmitted through the link member 430 when the cam member 422 is rotationally displaced.

Next, displacement operation of the lower displacement member 440 will be described with reference to FIGS. 15 to 20. FIG. 15 is a front view of the lower displacement unit 400 in the retracted state, FIG. 16 is a front view of the lower displacement unit 400 in the first extended state, and FIG. 17 is a lower displacement unit in the second extended state. FIG. 4 is a front view of 400; 18 is a rear view of the lower displacement unit 400 in the retracted state, FIG. 19 is a rear view of the lower displacement unit 400 in the first extended state, and FIG. 20 is the lower displacement unit in the second extended state. 400 is a rear view. 18 to 20 show a state in which the rear base 412 is transparent.

The retracted state is a state in which the sliding projection 431d arranged inside the sliding groove 422c is arranged between the facing steps 442c1, and the lower displacement member 440 is arranged on the lower side. The second overhanging state is a state in which the sliding protrusion 431d is arranged between the stepped portions 442c3 and the distal end side of the lower displacement member 440 is arranged at the highest position. The first overhanging state is a state in which the sliding projection 431d is arranged between the stepped portions 442c2 and the lower displacement member 440 is arranged in an intermediate state between the retracted state and the second overhanging state.

As shown in FIGS. 15 and 18, the cam member 422 of the lower displacement unit 400 in the retracted state is rotated by the transmission gear 421 so that the other end side of the slide groove 422c (the side of the stepped portion 422c3) moves toward the shaft portion 422a. It is positioned on the right side in rear view (right side in FIG. 18). In this case, the sliding projection 431d of the first link member 431 is guided along the inner wall of the sliding groove 422c and positioned at the stepped portion 422c1. Therefore, the first link member 431 is positioned such that the other end side (connecting protrusion 431c side) is located on the right side of the through hole 431a on the one end side (the right side in FIG. 18) when rotated about the through hole 431a. end side is positioned at the lower end of the rotatable range).

Since the second link member 432 is connected to the first link member 431, one end side (through hole 432a side) connected to the first link member 431 is positioned on the right side in rear view (the right side in FIG. 18). As a result, in the lower displacement member 440 connected to the second link member 432, the projections 472 and 473 connected to the front base 411 are positioned on the right side of the slide grooves 411a and 411b in rear view (the right side in FIG. 18). state. As described above, the distance between the sliding grooves 411a and 411b facing each other in the vertical direction is larger on the right side than on the left side in rear view. It is placed in a state where That is, it is arranged in front of the front base 411 .

The displacement from the retracted state shown in FIGS. 15 and 18 to the first extended state shown in FIGS. 14 and 19 is performed by displacing the cam member 422 .

In the first extended state, the transmission gear 421 is rotated by the driving force of the drive motor KM1, and the cam member 422 is rotated approximately 90 degrees from the retracted position. As a result, the other end of the cam member 422 (the side of the stepped portion 422c3) is positioned above the shaft portion 422a. Due to this rotational displacement, the sliding projection 431d of the first link member 431 guided by the inner wall of the sliding groove 422c is displaced along with the displacement of the sliding groove 422c. In addition, in the first projecting state, the sliding projection 431d is guided between the opposing inner walls of the stepped portion 422c2 of the sliding groove 422c.

Therefore, the first link member 431 is rotated approximately 30 degrees around the through hole 431a by the displacement of the sliding projection 431d, and the other end side (connecting projection 431c side) moves from the retracted position to the upper left position in rear view (FIG. 19). upper left).

Due to the rotational displacement of the first link member 431, the second link member 432 connected to the first link member 431 is displaced, and the lower displacement member 440 connected to the second link member 432 is displaced. In this case, the projections 472 and 473 of the lower displacement member 440 are slidably connected to the sliding grooves 411a and 411b of the front base 411, so that the lower displacement member 440 is displaced along the shape of the sliding grooves 411a and 411b. As described above, the distance between the sliding grooves 411a and 411b facing each other in the vertical direction is narrowed from the right side to the left side in the rear view, so that the lower displacement member 440 slides to the right side in the front view (the right side in FIG. 16). While being displaced, the tip side is rotationally displaced upward.

In addition, in the first overhanging state, the recovery port 411f is positioned on the lower side in the direction of gravity on the tip side. That is, when the lower displacement member 440 is shifted from the retracted state to the first protruding state, the distal end side of the lower displacement member 440 protrudes to the right side of the base member 410 in front view by rotating while slidingly displacing it. can be displaced without As a result, it is possible to easily form a displacement region that is different from the variable regions of other displacement roles. You can suppress collisions with other displaceable objects.

In addition, since the recovery port 411f is positioned below one end of the lower displacement member 440 (the side opposite to the protrusions 472 and 473 connected to the front base 411), the ball receiving portion 467 of the lower displacement member 440, which will be described later, When the shooting operation is performed and the ball falls downward as it is from the emission opening 471, the ball can be thrown to the recovery port 411f.

The displacement from the first extended state shown in FIGS. 16 and 19 to the second extended state shown in FIGS. 17 and 20 is performed by further displacing the cam member 422 from the first extended state.

In the second extended state, the transmission gear 421 is rotated by the driving force of the drive motor KM1 from the first extended state, and the cam member 422 is rotated approximately 90 degrees from the position in the first extended state. Therefore, the other end side of the cam member 422 (stepped portion 422c3 side) is positioned above the shaft portion 422a. The moving projection 431d is displaced along with the displacement of the sliding groove 422c, and is guided between the facing inner walls of the stepped portion 422c1 of the sliding groove 422c in the second overhanging state.

Therefore, the first link member 431 is rotated approximately 30 degrees around the through hole 431a by the displacement of the sliding projection 431d, and the other end side (connecting projection 431c side) of the first link member 431 is shifted from the position of the first projecting state to approximately It is displaced to the upper left (upper left in FIG. 20).

Due to the rotational displacement of the first link member 431, the second link member 432 connected to the first link member 431 is displaced, and the lower displacement member 440 connected to the second link member 432 is displaced. In this case, the projections 472 and 473 of the lower displacement member 440 are slidably connected to the sliding grooves 411a and 411b of the front base 411, so that the lower displacement member 440 is displaced along the shape of the sliding grooves 411a and 411b. As described above, the distance between the sliding grooves 411a and 411b facing each other in the vertical direction is narrowed from the right side to the left side in the rear view, so that the lower displacement member 440 slides to the right side in the front view (the right side in FIG. 17). While being displaced, the tip side is rotationally displaced upward.

In addition, in the same manner as in the first protruding state, in the second protruding state, the recovery port 411f is positioned on the lower side in the direction of gravity on the tip side. That is, when the lower displacement member 440 is shifted from the retracted state to the second protruding state, the distal end side of the lower displacement member 440 protrudes to the right side of the base member 410 in the front view by rotating while slidingly displacing it. can be displaced without As a result, it is possible to easily form a displacement region that is different from the variable regions of other displacement roles, and to suppress collisions with other displacement roles.

Next, referring to FIG. 21, the positional relationship between the first link member 431 and the cam member 422 in each state will be described. FIG. 21(a) is a rear view of the first link member 431 and the cam member 422 in the retracted state, FIG. 21(b) in the first extended state, and FIG. 21(c) in the second extended state. be. 21(a) to 21(c), the portion of the cam member 422 that overlaps the first link member 431 is indicated by a dashed line.

As shown in FIG. 21(a), in the retracted state, the sliding protrusion 431d of the first link member 431 is arranged between the opposing inner walls of the stepped portion 422c1 of the sliding groove 422c. Further, as described above, the sliding projection 431d is formed at a position spaced apart from the through hole 431a by approximately the same distance as the distance between the shaft portion 422a of the cam member 422 and the through hole 431a. Therefore, when a force rotating about the axis of the through hole 431a acts on the first link member 431 positioned in the retracted state, the force can be applied to the shaft portion 422a of the cam member 422 from the sliding projection 431d. can. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the rotation of the cam member 422 by the torque of the first link member 431 . As a result, in the retracted state, displacement of the lower displacement member 440 connected to the first link member 431 via the second link member 432 can be suppressed.

As shown in FIG. 21(b), in the first overhanging state, the sliding projection 431d of the first link member 431 and the inner wall of the stepped portion 422c2 of the sliding groove 422c are arranged between the opposing inner walls. Therefore, as in the retracted state, when a force rotating about the through hole 431a acts on the first link member 431 positioned in the first extended state, the force is transferred from the sliding projection 431d to the cam member 422. It can act on the shaft portion 422a. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the rotation of the cam member 422 by the torque of the first link member 431 . As a result, in the first overhanging state, the displacement of the lower displacement member 440 connected to the first link member 431 via the second link member 432 can be suppressed.

Here, since the first projecting position is the middle position of the displacement of the lower displacement member 440, in order to maintain the stopped state, it is necessary to keep the drive motor KM1 in the stopped state. Therefore, if the lower displacement member 440 is stopped at the first projecting position (intermediate position of displacement), there is a problem that energy consumption increases.

In contrast, in the present embodiment, in the first overhanging state, the sliding projection 431d of the first link member 431 is arranged between the opposing inner walls of the stepped portion 422c2 of the sliding groove 422c. In addition, displacement of the lower displacement member 440 can be suppressed. Therefore, even if the electric power of the drive motor KM1 is stopped when the lower displacement member 440 is stopped at a position in the middle of displacement, the displacement of the lower displacement member 440 can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to suppress an increase in energy consumption of the drive motor KM1 when the lower displacement member 440 is stopped in the middle of displacement.

As shown in FIG. 21(c), in the second protruding state, the sliding protrusion 431d of the first link member 431 and the inner wall of the stepped portion 422c2 of the sliding groove 422c are arranged between the opposing inner walls. Therefore, similarly to the retracted state and the first extended state, when a force rotating about the axis of the through hole 431a acts on the first link member 431 positioned in the second extended state, the force is applied to the sliding projection. 431d can act on the shaft portion 422a of the cam member 422 . Therefore, it is possible to suppress the rotation of the cam member 422 by the torque of the first link member 431 . Therefore, it is possible to suppress the rotation of the cam member 422 by the torque of the first link member 431 . As a result, in the second projecting state, it is possible to suppress displacement of the lower displacement member 440 that is connected to the first link member 431 via the second link member 432 .

Further, since the stepped portions 422c1, 422c2, and 422c3 extend in the direction connecting the sliding protrusion 431d and the through hole 431a, the sliding groove 422c extends in the direction in which the sliding protrusion 431d of the first link member 431 is displaced. width can be reduced. Therefore, the gap between the sliding groove 422c and the sliding protrusion 431d, which allows the first link member 431 to rotate about the axis of the through hole 431a, is reduced at the retracted position, the first projecting position, and the second projecting position. can. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the gap in which the first link member 431 in each state can be rotationally displaced about the axis of the through hole 431a. As a result, the swing width of the lower displacement member 440 in each state due to vibration or inertial force when the displacement is stopped can be reduced, making it easier for the player to visually recognize the stopped state.

Therefore, the transmission member 420 and the link member 430 (driving mechanism) for driving the lower displacement member 440 are arranged so that the lower displacement member 440 is displaced in the reflection direction when the game ball is emitted from the ball receiving portion 467. Since it can be regulated, it is possible to suppress the displacement of the lower displacement member 440 with respect to the base member 410 due to the reaction. As a result, rattling of the lower displacement member 440 can be suppressed.

Next, referring to FIG. 22, the relationship between the link member 430 and the cam member 422 in the front-rear direction will be described. 22(a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the lower displacement unit 400 taken along line XXIIa-XXIIa of FIG. 18, and FIG. 22(b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the lower displacement unit 400 taken along line XXIIb-XXIIb of FIG. be. 19 and 20, the rear base 412 is shown transparently, but FIGS. 22(a) and 22(b) show sectional views of the lower displacement unit 400 in a non-transparent state. .

As shown in FIG. 22( a ), the link member 430 of the lower displacement unit 400 in the retracted state is arranged between the rear base 412 and the cam member 422 . Therefore, it is possible to prevent the lower displacement member 440 from swinging in the front-rear direction. That is, the other end side of the first link member 431 is connected to the lower displacement member 440 configured by combining a plurality of fixtures via the second link member 432, so that the load of the lower displacement member 440 moves forward and backward. Since the cam member 422 is arranged forward where there is a risk of bending, the forward bending of the first link member 431 can be suppressed. As a result, the forward movement of the first link member 431 can be suppressed, so that the lower displacement member 440 can be suppressed from swinging in the front-rear direction.

As shown in FIG. 22(b), the link member 430 of the lower displacement unit 400 in the first extended state is arranged between the rear base 412 and the cam member 422 as in the retracted state. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the lower displacement member 440 from swinging in the front-rear direction.

In addition, in the retracted state and the first extended state, the cam member 422 is arranged on the front side of the connecting portion between the first link member 431 and the second link member 432 of the link member 430 . Therefore, if the link member 430 is formed of two members, it is necessary to make the connecting portion rotatable. Since the member 422 is arranged, it is possible to suppress bending of the connecting portion of the link member 430 . As a result, it is possible to prevent the lower displacement member 440 from swinging in the front-rear direction.

Next, the configuration of the lower displacement member 440 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 23 to 26. FIG. 23(a) is a front view of the lower displacement member 440, and FIG. 23(b) is a rear view of the lower displacement member 440. FIG. 24 is an exploded perspective front view of the lower displacement member 440, and FIG. 25 is an exploded perspective rear view of the lower displacement member 440. FIG. 26(a) and (b) are front views of the lower displacement member 440. FIG.

26(a) shows a state in which the decorative member 450 of the lower displacement member 440 is seen transparently, and in FIG. 26(b), the decorative member 450 of the lower displacement member 440 and the front case 481 are seen transparently. is shown.

As shown in FIGS. 23 to 26, the lower displacement member 440 includes a base member 470 connected to the front base 411, a case member 480 covering the front and rear of the base member 470, and the case member 480 and the base member 470. It mainly includes a transmission mechanism 460 displaceably disposed therebetween and a decorative member 450 formed to cover the front and rear of the case member 480 .

The base member 470 is a plate member that is rectangular and oblong when viewed from the front. , a protruding wall 477 projecting from the upper end of the central portion in the left-right direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 23) to the front side in an upside-down U-shape, and the upper end of the protruding wall 477 on the upper end of the base member 470 is engraved on one end side. A rack gear 476 provided, shafts 474 and 475 protruding to the front side, a rectangular wiring locking portion 478 attached to the rear surface of one end side of the base member 470, and a vertical central portion of the base member 470. It is mainly formed with an opening 479 extending from one end side to the other end side.

The protrusions 472 and 473 are connecting portions that are inserted into the sliding grooves 411a and 411b of the front base 411 and connect the lower displacement member 440 and the front base 411 as described above. Therefore, the sliding grooves 411a and 411b are formed in a cylindrical shape with an outer diameter smaller than the dimension between the facing inner walls of the sliding grooves 411a and 411b.

The erected wall 471a is a wall portion for forming a gap between the facing front case 481 and the base member 470 when the front case 481, which will be described later, is attached to the base member 470. It is set to a standing dimension larger than

The shaft portions 474 and 475 are protrusions that are inserted into the shafts of the transmission gears 462 and 463 of the transmission mechanism 460 to be described later and hold the transmission gears 462 and 463 rotatably. It is formed in a cylindrical shape with a small outer diameter.

The rack gear 476 is engraved with a tooth surface that meshes with a transmission gear 465, which will be described later. As a result, the movable rack 464 , which will be described later, is slidably displaced with respect to the base member 470 , thereby rotating the transmission gear 465 .

The protruding wall 477 allows the ball to fall to the outside of the lower displacement member 440 when the ball thrown from the ball throwing unit 600, which will be described later, is received in front of the base member 470 through the opening 451a of the decorative member 450. is a wall surface for suppressing , and the diameter between the opposing wall portions formed in a substantially U shape is formed larger than the diameter of the sphere.

The wiring locking portion 478 is a member for locking a flexible wiring (not shown) to the control board arranged on the back side of the base member 470 , and one end of the flexible wiring between the base member 470 and the base member 470 . It is attached to the back side of the base member 470 in a state in which the . As a result, even if the lower displacement member 440 is displaceably arranged with respect to the base member 410, it is possible to suppress entanglement of the flexible wiring.

In addition, the wire locking portion 478 has a projection 478a protruding in a columnar shape on the back side. The projecting distance of the projection 478 a is set to a distance that projects further to the rear side than the link member 430 connected to the rear side, and is set to a distance that allows contact with the front side surface of the rear base 412 . As a result, the lower displacement member 440 can be prevented from swinging rearward, and the link member 430 can be prevented from colliding with the rear base 412 .

The opening 469 is an opening that defines the sliding displacement direction of the movable rack 464 disposed on the front side, and a guide plate 464d of the movable rack 464, which will be described later, is inserted therein.

The transmission mechanism 460 is a member arranged in front of the base member 470, and meshes with the transmission gears 4621, 462, and 463, the drive motor KM2 whose shaft portion is connected to the transmission gear 461, and the transmission gear 463. A movable rack 464 having a tooth surface and slidably disposed in front of the base member 470, and a transmission gear rotatably disposed on the movable rack 464 and engaged with the rack gear 476. 465, a rack 466 having a tooth surface that meshes with the transmission gear 465 and slidably disposed in front of the movable rack 464, and a ball rotatably disposed on one end side of the rack 466. It is mainly formed with a receiving portion 467 .

The transmission gear 461 is a gear in which the shaft portion of the drive motor KM2 is fitted in the shaft hole. is placed in

As described above, the transmission gears 462 and 463 are rotatably held by the base member by inserting the shaft portions 474 and 475 of the base member 470 into the shaft holes. The transmission gears 461 to 463 are meshed gear trains, and when the transmission gear 461 is rotated by the drive motor KM2, the terminal transmission gear 463 is rotated.

The movable rack 464 is formed in the shape of a horizontally long rectangular plate when viewed from the front. A contact plate 464c, a guide plate 464d protruding from one end to the other end at a substantially central position in the vertical direction, a rack guide portion 464e protruding to the front side opposite to the guide plate 464d, and protruding to the other lower end. It is mainly formed with a collision portion 464f.

The rack gear 464 a is a tooth surface that meshes with the transmission gear 463 . Therefore, by disposing the rack gear 464a and the transmission gear 463 on the base member 470 in a meshed state, the movable rack 464 can be displaced by driving the drive motor KM2.

The shaft portion 464 b is a shaft portion on which the transmission gear 465 is rotatably held, and is formed in a cylindrical shape with an outer diameter smaller than the shaft hole of the transmission gear 465 .

The contact plate 464c is a contact portion that contacts a sorting member 540 of the sorting unit 500, which will be described later, to displace the sorting member 540. As shown in FIG. That is, the distributing member 540 can be displaced by the displacement of the movable rack 464 . The manner in which the contact plate 464c and the distribution member 540 contact each other will be described later.

As described above, the guide plate 464d is a plate-like body inserted inside the opening 479 of the base member 470, and can define the displacement direction of the movable rack 464 displaced by driving the drive motor KM2. That is, the movable rack 464 that is displaced by driving the drive motor KM2 can be displaced along the extending direction of the opening 479 . In this embodiment, since the opening 479 extends in the left-right direction, the movable rack 464 can be slid in the left-right direction with respect to the base member 470 .

The rack guide portion 464e is a protruding wall for restricting the displacement direction of the rack 466, which will be described later, and protrudes from one end to the other end in the left-right direction.

The collision part 464f is a wall part that abuts on a projection 492b of the displacement member 492 described later to displace the displacement member 492, and is formed so as to protrude from the lower end of the movable rack 464. As shown in FIG. Also, the collision portion 464f is formed in a state where the other end side is inclined. As a result, the projection 492b of the displacement member 492 can be slid and displaced along the inclined surface.

The rack 466 is formed of a horizontally long rod-shaped body that is rectangular when viewed from the front, and includes a rack gear 466a engraved on the upper end surface, a shaft portion 466b projecting from the other end side to the rear in a columnar shape, and a shaft 466b projecting to the front. and a recessed portion 466d recessed from one end to the other end on the back side.

The rack gear 466 a meshes with a transmission gear 465 attached to the movable rack 464 . As a result, when the rack 466 is arranged in front of the movable rack 464 , the movable rack 464 is slidably displaced, and the transmission gear 465 is rotated along with the slidable displacement, and the driving force is transmitted to the rack 466 . . Therefore, rack 466 can be displaced relative to movable rack 464 .

The shaft portion 466b is a protrusion that is inserted into a shaft hole 467b of a ball receiving portion 467, which will be described later, and is formed in a cylindrical shape with an outer diameter larger than the inner diameter of the shaft hole 467b. Thereby, the ball receiving portion 467 can be rotatably held.

The sliding plate 466c is a protrusion inserted into an opening 481a of a front case 481, which will be described later, and is formed of a plate-like body having a predetermined thickness. As a result, when the driving force is transmitted from the transmission gear 465 to the rack 466 and the rack 466 is displaced with respect to the movable rack 464, the displacement direction of the rack 466 can be defined in the direction in which the opening 481a extends. can.

When the rack 466 is arranged in front of the movable rack 464, the concave portion 466d is in a state in which the rack guide portion 464e is arranged inside. As a result, when the driving force is transmitted from the transmission gear 465 to the rack 466 and the rack 466 is displaced with respect to the movable rack 464, the displacement direction of the rack 466 can be defined in the extension direction of the rack guide portion 464e. can.

Here, in order to regulate the displacement direction of the rack 466, if the concave portion 466d and the rack guide portion 464e are formed, the displacement direction of the rack 466 can be defined in the extension direction of the rack guide portion 464e. However, since the lower displacement member 440 is slidably displaced in the left-right direction and rotationally displaced, depending on the displaced state of the lower displaceable member 440, the state of meshing between the transmission gear 465 and the rack 466 changes due to its own weight. There was a possibility that the driving force would not be transmitted well from the gear 465 to the rack 466 .

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, there are two portions that define the displacement direction of the rack 466, namely, the slide plate 466c and the opening 481a, and the concave portion 466d and the rack guide portion 464e. change in the displacement state of the transmission gear 465 and the rack 466 can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the transmission of drive from the transmission gear 465 to the rack 466 from being obstructed.

In addition, the sliding plate 466c is formed so as to protrude from two locations in the left-right direction of the rack 466 (the left-right direction in FIG. At the rack's displacement end position (the position where the rack 466 projects most with respect to the movable rack 464), it is arranged below the transmission gear 465 (lower side in FIG. 23).

Here, at the displacement end position, as will be described later, the ball receiving portion 467 disposed on the shaft portion 466b of the rack 466 performs a shooting operation (rotational displacement), so that the ball receiving portion 467 disposed on one end side of the rack 466 The other end side of the rack tends to be displaced by the inertial force due to the displacement of the portion 467 . Therefore, a load is likely to be applied to the meshing surfaces of the transmission gear 465 and the rack 466, and the transmission gear 465 and the rack 466 may be damaged.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the slide plate 466c on the other end side (opposite side of the shaft portion 466b) is positioned at the displacement end position of the rack (the position where the rack 466 protrudes most with respect to the movable rack 464). 23, the rack 466 is located below the transmission gear 465 (lower side in FIG. 23), so that when the ball receiving portion 467 performs a shooting operation (rotational operation), the transmission gear 465 and the rack 466 mesh with each other. displacement can be suppressed. As a result, damage to the transmission gear 465 and the rack 466 can be suppressed.

The ball receiving portion 467 is a portion that holds a game ball, is formed in a substantially U shape in a front view, and is formed so that the ball can be received in the inner portion of the U shape. That is, the inner side of the U-shape of the ball receiving portion 467 is formed slightly larger than the outer shape of the ball. As a result, one ball can be inserted into the inner portion of the ball receiving portion 467 . Further, the ball receiving portion 467 mainly includes a shaft hole 467b penetrating in the front-rear direction at the lower end of the U shape, and a leg portion 467a projecting downward from the lower outer peripheral surface.

The shaft hole 467b is a shaft hole for rotatably holding the ball receiving portion 467 in the rack 466, as described above, and is formed with an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the shaft portion 466b of the rack 466. Therefore, the ball receiving portion 467 can be rotatably held by inserting the shaft portion 466b of the rack 466 into the shaft hole 467b. After the shaft portion 466b is inserted into the shaft hole 467b, the biasing spring SP2 is arranged around the shaft portion 466b, and a screw or the like having a head larger than the inner diameter of the shaft hole 467b is fastened to the shaft portion 466b. be. As a result, the ball receiving portion 467 is arranged on the rack 466 while being biased clockwise in a front view. A detailed description of the form of the ball receiving portion 467 will be given later.

The leg portion 467a is a protrusion that biases the ball receiving portion 467 to be rotated by the biasing spring SP2. It is set at a position where it contacts the bottom wall portion 481 b of the case 481 . As a result, rotation of the ball receiving portion 467 can be restricted.

The case member 480 is a member that covers the front and rear of the base member 470, and mainly includes a front case 481 arranged on the front side of the base member 470 and a rear case 482 arranged on the rear side.

The front case 481 is formed in the shape of a horizontally long rectangular plate when viewed from the front. It is mainly formed with a shaft hole 481c penetrating in the front-rear direction.

The opening 481a is formed to penetrate in the front-rear direction, and as described above, when the front case 481 is arranged on the base member 470, the slide plate 466c of the rack is inserted therein.

The bottom wall portion 481b protrudes from the lower end portion of the front case 481 toward the back side and extends in the left-right direction. Further, when the front case 481 is arranged on the base member 470, the bottom wall portion 481b is in a state in which the leg portion 467a of the ball receiving portion 467 is in contact with the upper surface thereof.

The rear case 482 is a plate member for arranging the control board 491 on the rear side of the base member 470 , and has a horizontally elongated rectangular shape that is smaller than the base member 470 when viewed from the front. In addition, the rear case 482 has a projection 482a projecting to the rear side.

As described above, the protrusion 482a is a connecting portion that is connected to the through hole 432b of the second link member 432, and is formed in a cylindrical shape with an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the through hole 432b. Therefore, after inserting the projection 482a into the through hole 432b, by fastening a screw or the like with a larger head than the inner diameter of the through hole 432b to the tip of the projection 482a, the rear case 482 and the second link member 432 can be rotated. can be connected in good condition.

The decorative member 450 is formed in an external shape that imitates a pattern or character, and the pattern or character is drawn on the surface. The decorative member 450 mainly includes a front-side decorative portion 451 arranged on the front side of the front case 481 and a rear-side decorative portion 452 arranged on the rear side of the rear case 482 . In this embodiment, a shark pattern (character) is drawn on the decorative member 450 .

The front-side decorative portion 451 is formed to have an outer diameter larger than the outer shape of the front case 481 when viewed from the front, and is attached to the front case 481 . As a result, the members (case member 480, base member 470, etc.) arranged on the back side of the front-side decorative portion can be made invisible to the player.

The back-side decorative portion 452 is arranged behind the upper end of the front-side decorative portion 451 . As a result, the members arranged on the back side of the front-side decorative portion 451 from above the back-side decorative portion 452 can be made invisible to the player.

A displacement member 492 is arranged on the same plane as the front-side decorative portion 451 in the front-rear direction. The displacement member 492 mainly includes a shaft portion 492a projecting to the rear side and a projection 492b.

The shaft portion 492 a is formed in a cylindrical shape with an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the shaft hole 481 c of the front case 481 . Therefore, by inserting the shaft portion 492a into the shaft hole 481c, the displacement member 492 can be rotatably connected to the front case. A biasing spring SP3 is arranged on the tip side of the shaft portion 492a inserted into the shaft hole 481c. As a result, the displacement member 492 can be arranged in a biased state. A detailed description of the displacement of the displacement member 492 will be given later.

The shaft portion 492a collides with the collision portion 464f of the movable rack 464 described above, thereby transmitting a driving force to the displacement member 492 to rotate about the axis of the shaft portion 492a. That is, the movable rack 464 can rotationally displace the displacement member 492 as it is displaced.

Therefore, the lower displacement member 440 includes a displacement member 492 (displacement member) displaceably arranged on the lower displacement member 440 (base member), and the ball receiving portion 467 (displacement member) can hold a game ball. In addition, since the displacement member 492 is formed to be capable of being ejected and is displaceable when the game ball is ejected from the ball receiving portion 467, it is possible to suppress the lower displacement member 440 from rattling.

That is, when a game ball is shot from the ball receiving portion 467, the position of the center of gravity of the lower displacement member 440 is changed by the weight of the game ball. In the case of adopting a configuration in which the displacement member 492 is displaced in the direction to move downward, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of rattling of the lower displacement member 440 due to the change in the position of the center of gravity. Also, when a game ball is shot from the ball receiving portion 467, the lower displacement member 440 receives a reaction due to the shooting of the game ball. When a displacing configuration is adopted, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of rattling of the lower displacement member 440 due to the reaction.

Further, the displacing member 492 is displaced by displacing the ball receiving portion 467 and causing the collision portion 464f to collide with the shaft portion 492a. . In other words, the drive motor KM2 for displacing the ball receiving portion 467 can be used also as a drive means for displacing the displacement member 492 . Therefore, the weight of the lower displacement member 440 can be reduced by that amount, making it easier to suppress rattling.

Further, since the displacement member 492 can be displaced in mechanical synchronization with the displacement of the ball receiving portion 467, for example, the position of the ball receiving portion 467 is detected by a sensor device, and the displacement member 492 is moved according to the detection result. can be made unnecessary, and the product cost can be reduced accordingly, and the reliability of the displacement operation of the displacement member 492 with respect to the ball receiving portion 467 can be ensured.

Next, the transition of transmission mechanism 460 will be described with reference to FIGS. 27 to 30. FIG. 27 is a front view of the lower displacement member 440 in the first position, FIG. 28 is a front view of the lower displacement member 440 in the second position, and FIG. 29 is a front view of the lower displacement member 440 in the third position. It is a diagram. 30(a) to (c) are partially enlarged views of the lower displacement member 440. FIG.

Note that the first position is a position where the ball receiving portion 467 is arranged at a substantially central position in the left-right direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 27) with respect to the base member 470 . The second position is a position where the ball receiving portion 467 is arranged on the lower side of the projecting wall 477 in the direction of gravity (lower side in FIG. 28). The third position is a position where the ball receiving portion 467 is arranged at the right end of the base member 470 in the left-right direction.

27 to 30, the decorative member 450 of the lower displacement member 440 and the front case 481 are seen transparently, and the outer shape of the bottom wall portion 481b of the front case 481 is illustrated by chain lines. Further, FIGS. 30(a) and 30(b) sequentially illustrate transition states immediately before being displaced to the third position, and FIG. 30(c) illustrates the lower displacement member 440 at the third position.

As shown in FIG. 27 , the lower displacement member 440 at the first position is in a state where the movable rack 464 is positioned at the left end in the left-right direction with respect to the base member 470 . At the first position, the rack 466 is arranged in front of the movable rack 464, and the rack 466 and the movable rack 464 overlap in the front-rear direction. That is, like the movable rack 464 , the rack 466 is positioned at the left end in the left-right direction with respect to the base member 470 . Therefore, the ball receiving portion 467 connected to the rack 466 is arranged at the substantially central position in the left-right direction with respect to the base member 470 .

At the first position, as described above, the movable rack 464 and the rack 466 are gathered at the left end of the base member 470 in the left-right direction. Here, since the lower displacement member 440 is slidably displaced and rotationally displaced (displaced from the retracted state to the first and second overhanging states), the position of the center of gravity of the lower displaceable member 440 is arranged near the axis of rotation. It is desirable to be in a state where

According to this embodiment, the transmission mechanism 460 for displacing the ball receiving portion 467 is in a state in which the movable rack 464 and the rack 466 are superimposed on each other (two-stage rack). It can be brought close to the grooves 411a and 411b (rotating shaft side of the lower displacement member 440).

Therefore, when the lower displacement member 440 is displaced from the retracted position to the first and second extended positions as described above, the lower displacement member 440 is set to the first position. It is possible to reduce the driving force when rotationally displacing the . Therefore, the energy consumption of the drive motor KM1 that displaces the lower displacement member 440 can be suppressed.

The displacement from the first position shown in FIG. 27 to the second position shown in FIG. 28 is performed by driving the drive motor KM2.

When the drive motor KM2 is driven from the first position, the transmission gear 461 connected to the shaft of the drive motor KM2 is rotated. Thereby, the transmission gear 462 and the transmission gear 463 are rotated. When the transmission gear 463 is rotated, a driving force is transmitted to the movable rack 464 from the rack gear 464 a meshing with the transmission gear 463 , and the movable rack 464 is slid rightward with respect to the base member 470 .

When the movable rack 464 is slid and displaced, the transmission gear 465 arranged on the movable rack 464 is rotated by the rack gear 476 of the base member 470 along with the sliding displacement. As a result, the driving force is transmitted to the rack 466 by the rack gear 466 a meshing with the transmission gear 465 . As a result, the rack 466 is slid rightward in the horizontal direction with respect to the movable rack 464, and the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced to the second position.

The displacement from the second position shown in FIG. 28 to the third position shown in FIG. 29 is performed by driving the drive motor KM2 in the same manner as the displacement from the first position to the second position. Since the transmission of drive from the drive motor KM2 to the rack 466 is the same as the displacement from the first position to the second position, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 29 and 30, when the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced to the third position, the leg portion 467a of the ball receiving portion 467 is released from contact with the bottom wall portion 481b of the front case 481. , and is rotationally displaced about the axis of the shaft hole 467b by the biasing force of the biasing spring SP2 disposed on the shaft portion 466b.

More specifically, in the first and second positions (the state in which the ball receiving portion 467 is arranged on the left side of the ball receiving portion 467 in the third position in a front view), the tip of the leg portion 467a of the ball receiving portion 467 It is in contact with the upper surface of the bottom wall portion 481b of the case 481, and is restricted from rotating clockwise in the front view about the shaft hole 467b by the biasing force of the biasing spring SP2.

On the other hand, when the tip portion of the leg portion 467a of the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced to the third position, it is arranged on the right side of the end portion of the bottom wall portion 481b in a front view, and the bottom wall portion 481b and the base member 470 stand upright. It is arranged inside the concave portion 481b1 formed between the facing walls 471a. Therefore, the ball receiving portion 467 is rotated about the axis of the shaft hole 467b by the biasing force of the biasing spring SP2. When the ball receiving portion 467 is rotated at the third position, the tip of the leg portion 467a comes into contact with the end surface of the bottom wall portion 481b, thereby restricting the rotation of the ball receiving portion 467 around the shaft hole 467b. As a result, the ball receiving portion 467 is stopped at a position rotated approximately 40 degrees around the shaft hole 467b. In addition, below, the rotational displacement of the ball receiving portion 467 at the third position will be referred to as a shooting operation.

Further, a concave portion 481b1 is provided in a track area when the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced from the first position to the third position direction (first direction). In addition, the leg portion 467a is engaged with the recess 481b1, and the leg portion 467a is engaged with the recess 481b1 so that the attitude can be changed. Structure can be simplified.

Further, when the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced from the second position to the third position, the collision portion 464f is slid rightward in front view due to the displacement of the movable rack 464 and collides with the protrusion 492b of the displacement member 492. As a result, the displacement member 492 is rotationally displaced about the axis of the shaft portion 492a.

That is, when the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced to the third position, the ball receiving portion 467 is rotationally displaced and the displacement member 492 is rotationally displaced. Therefore, the ball receiving portion 467 performs a shooting operation, and the ball is discharged from the inside of the ball receiving portion 467, and the weight of the lower displacement member 440 is reduced. Inertial forces acting in the opposite directions can be applied. As a result, swinging of the lower displacement member 440 when a ball is ejected from the inside of the lower displacement member 440 can be suppressed.

Next, referring to FIG. 31, the operation of receiving the ball into the ball receiving portion 467 will be described. 31(a) to (c) are front views of the lower displacement member 440. FIG. 31(a) to (c), the transition states of receiving operation for receiving a ball into the ball receiving portion 467 are illustrated in order.

31A to 31C, the decorative member 450 of the lower displacement member 440 and the front case 481 are seen transparently, and the outer shape of the bottom wall portion 481b of the front case 481 is illustrated by chain lines.

Further, in FIGS. 31A to 31C, the horizontal direction in which the lower displacement member 440 is in the retracted state is indicated by a two-dot chain line with a symbol of a virtual line H1, and the lower displacement member 440 is in the first tension position. The horizontal direction in the out state is indicated by a phantom line H2. Also, the angle by which the lower displacement member 440 is rotated from the position in the retracted state to the position in the first protruding state is illustrated with the symbol θ. Note that the virtual line H1, the virtual line H2, and the angle θ are also illustrated in the drawings after FIG. 31 .

As shown in FIG. 31(a), in the lower displacement unit 400 in the retracted state (the longitudinal direction of the lower displacement member 440 is parallel to the imaginary line H1), the ball receiving portion 467 of the lower displacement member 440 is moved to the first position. , a game ball T1 is thrown from a sorting unit 500 (to be described later) to an opening 451a formed in the front-side decorative portion 451 of the lower displacement member 440. As shown in FIG. The game ball T1 thrown to the opening 451a is thrown to the inside of the projecting wall 477 and is thrown to the inside of the lower displacement member 440. - 特許庁

As shown in FIG. 31(b), when the game ball T1 is thrown to the opening 451a, the lower displacement member 440 is displaced to the second position. Therefore, as described above, in the second position, the ball receiving portion 467 is arranged below the projecting wall 477, so that the game ball T1 thrown to the inside of the projecting wall 477 is moved to the inside of the ball receiving portion 467. I can throw. By receiving the game ball T1 in the ball receiving portion 467, the game ball T1 can be displaced with the operation of the ball receiving portion 467.

As shown in FIG. 31(c), when the game ball T1 is thrown to the ball receiving portion, the lower displacement member 440 is displaced to the first position. As a result, the game ball T1 is arranged in the ball receiving portion 467, and the ball receiving portion 467 is arranged at the first position.

Here, a game machine is known that includes a base member, a base member displaceably arranged on one side of the base member, and a displacement member displaceably arranged on the base member. According to this gaming machine, in addition to an effect in which the base member is displaced between a projecting position in which the base member is projected into the game area and is visible to the player, and a retracted position in which the base member is retreated from the game area, It is possible to perform an effect of displacing the displacement member in the state of being arranged at the overhanging position.

However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, one side of the base member is displaceably disposed on the base member, so that when the displacement member is displaced, the base member rattles with respect to the base member with the one side as the dead point. There was a problem that sticking was likely to occur. In particular, when the displacement member is displaced from a stopped state, the change in acceleration is maximized, so the base member is likely to rattle due to the influence of inertial force.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the ball receiving portion 467 starts to be displaced from the second position and from the first position closer to one side of the lower displacement member 440 (base member) than the first position. At least the lower displacement member 440 is arranged at a predetermined position with respect to the base member 410 (for example, the lower displacement member 440 protrudes into the game area and is visible to the player). In the first overhanging state, the displacement starts from the first position, so rattling of the lower displacement member 440 of the base member can be suppressed. That is, the first position is closer to one side of the lower displacement member than the second position. The weight can be kept close to the dead center when the lower displacement member 440 rattles with respect to the base member 410, and the effect of the inertial force when the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced from the stopped state can be reduced accordingly. It can be made difficult to act on the displacement member 440 . As a result, rattling of the lower displacement member 440 can be easily suppressed.

Further, as described above, the lower displacement member 440 is slidably displaced and rotationally displaced (displaced from the retracted state to the first and second extended states). Therefore, when the lower displacement member 440 is rotationally displaced while the game ball T1 is disposed far from the rotation axis, centrifugal force is likely to occur in the game ball T1, and the game ball T1 moves to move the inner wall of the ball receiving portion 467. There was a problem that a collision sound was generated due to collision with the game ball T1, or the ball receiving part 467 was damaged.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the lower displacement member 440 can be displaced to the first position after receiving the game ball T1 in the ball receiving portion 467. It can be placed in the vicinity (brought closer). Therefore, when the lower displacement member 440 is rotationally displaced (displaced from the retracted state to the first and second overhanging states) while the game ball T1 is received by the lower displacement member 440, centrifugal force is applied to the game ball T1. You can prevent it from happening. As a result, when the game ball T1 collides with the ball receiving portion 467, it is possible to suppress the generation of a collision sound or the breakage of the ball receiving portion 467.

Further, in the present embodiment, the lower displacement member 440 has a transmission mechanism 460 for operating the ball receiving portion 467, which is formed by a movable rack 464, a transmission gear 465 (pinion gear) and a rack 466 (rack member). Since the portion 467 is provided, when the movement of the ball receiving portion 467 is started from the first position, not only the weight of the rack 466 but also the weights of the movable rack 464 and the rack 466 are applied to one side of the lower displacement member 440 . (the fulcrum when the lower displacement member 440 rattles with respect to the base member 410). As a result, rattling of the lower displacement member 440 when the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced from the stopped state can be easily suppressed.

Further, in the state where the game ball T1 is received in the ball receiving portion 467, the load of the lower displacement member 440 is increased by the load of the game ball T1. Therefore, as described above, by setting the lower displacement member 440 to the first position, the position of the center of gravity of the lower displacement member 440 is moved toward the slide grooves 411a and 411b of the front base 411 (the rotational axis of the lower displacement member 440). side). Therefore, when displacing the lower displacement member 440 from the position of the retracted state to the positions of the first and second extended states, the lower displacement member 440 is rotationally displaced by setting it to the first position. driving force can be reduced. Therefore, the energy consumption of the drive motor KM1 that displaces the lower displacement member 440 can be suppressed.

Next, referring to FIG. 32, the ball payout operation will be described. 32(a) to (c) are front views of the lower displacement member 440. FIG. 32(a) to 32(c) sequentially show transition states of the lower displacement member 440 during the ball dispensing operation. 32(a) to 32(c), the decorative member 450 of the lower displacement member 440 and the front case 481 are seen transparently, and the outline of the bottom wall portion 481b of the front case 481 is illustrated by chain lines. Furthermore, the ball payout operation is an operation to pay out the game ball T1 received in the ball receiving portion 467 of the lower displacement member 440 from the emission opening 471 to the outside of the lower displacement member 440. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 32( a ) to 32 ( c ), the dispensing operation of dispensing the ball received in the ball receiving portion 467 of the lower displacement member 440 displaces the lower displacement member 440 sequentially from the first position to the third position. It is done by

That is, by receiving the game ball T1 inside the ball receiving portion 467 in the receiving operation and displacing the lower displacement member 440 arranged at the first position to the third position, the game ball T1 is moved to the ball receiving portion 467. As it is displaced, it is transported to the exit opening 471 side. The game ball T1 moved to the side of the exit opening 471 is given an inertial force toward the exit opening 471 by the sliding displacement of the ball receiving portion 467 and the shooting operation of the ball receiving portion 467 at the third position. It pops out from the inside of the portion 467 . As a result, the ball can be ejected from inside the lower displacement member 440 .

Here, since the direction of displacement when the ball receiving portion 467 (displacement member) starts to be displaced from the first position is the direction away from the position side of the lower displacement member 440, the ball receiving portion 467 is moved to the first position. In the arranged state, the rack 466 (rack member) can be brought closer to the base member 410 from one side of the lower displacement member 440 . That is, in order for the ball receiving portion 467 (rack 466) to be displaced away from one side of the lower displacement member 440, the rack 466 must move the transmission gear 465 ( The portion on the side of the rack gear 466 a with which the pinion gear is meshed is directed toward one side of the lower displacement member 440 . Therefore, the weight of the rack 466 can be brought closer to one side of the lower displacement member 440 (the fulcrum when the lower displacement member 440 rattles with respect to the base member 410). It is possible to easily suppress rattling of the lower displacement member 440 when it is displaced from the stopped state.

The ball receiving portion 467 is displaced in the direction of the third position (first direction), and when it reaches the third position, it is formed so that the posture can be changed. While making it easy to maintain the state held by the part 467, it is possible to suppress the falling of the game ball T1 from the ball receiving part 467, while when reaching the second position, the change in the attitude of the ball receiving part 467 is used. Thus, the game ball T1 can be easily paid out from the inside of the ball receiving portion 467.例文帳に追加

In addition, when the lower displacement member 440 is in the retracted state (the longitudinal direction of the lower displacement member 440 is arranged horizontally with the imaginary line H1), the ball receiving portion 467 shown in FIGS. When performing the action, the game ball put out to the outside of the lower displacement member 440 is thrown into the recovery port 411f.

On the other hand, when the lower displacement member 440 is in the first extended state (a state in which the longitudinal direction of the lower displacement member 440 is rotated by an angle θ from the imaginary line H1), the ball receiving portion 467 is dispensed. A game ball put out to the outside of 440 is thrown to the upper part of the ball cradle 710 of the rotating unit 700 .

Next, referring to FIGS. 33 and 34, the ejection operation when two or more balls are thrown into the lower displacement member 440 will be described. 33(a) to (c) and FIGS. 34(a) to (c) are front views of the lower displacement member 440. FIG.

11(a) to (c) and FIGS. 12(a) to (c) illustrate transition states of the discharging operation in order. 11(a) to (c) and FIGS. 12(a) to (c), the decorative member 450 of the lower displacement member 440 and the front case 481 are transparent, and the bottom wall portion 481b of the front case 481 is shown transparently. is indicated by a two-dot chain line.

As shown in FIGS. 33(a) to 33(c), when two or more balls are consecutively thrown from a sorting unit 500, which will be described later, the lower displacement member 440 is operated to receive the second ball. The game ball T2 can be dropped onto the displacement path of the ball receiving portion 467.

That is, the ball receiving portion 467 can be displaced from the first position to the second position to throw the first game ball T1 inside the ball receiving portion 467, and the second game ball T2 can be moved to the first ball. 33(b)). By displacing the ball receiving portion 467 to the first position after receiving the first game ball T1 at the second position, the ball receiving portion 467 receives the first game ball T1. 467 is displaced to the first position, and the second game ball T2 can be dropped onto the displacement path of the ball receiving portion 467.

Here, in a game machine that displaces a ball received in the ball receiving portion 467 at the second position to the third position by displacing the ball receiving portion 467, if a distributing member 540 of the distributing unit 500, which will be described later, malfunctions. There is a possibility that more than a specified number of game balls are thrown into the orbital area of the ball receiving portion 467, and in this case, there is a problem that the game balls exceeding the specified number may cause a problem. For example, game balls exceeding the specified number enter the transmission mechanism 460 that drives the ball receiving portion 467, and are caught in the movable portion, which may cause damage. Alternatively, there is a risk that game balls exceeding the specified number may flow out of the game area (for example, the back side of the game board 13 or the inside of the back case 300).

In contrast, according to the present embodiment, the ball receiving portion 467 is formed to be displaceable from the second position to the first position opposite to the throwing direction of the ball. The track area can be expanded. Therefore, for example, even if the distributing member 540 malfunctions and more than the specified number of game balls are thrown, the ball receiving portion 467 expands the orbital area, so that the game balls exceeding the specified number are thrown. Can be accepted in the orbital area. As a result, the game balls exceeding the prescribed number can be moved as the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced to the third position. Therefore, the game balls exceeding the specified number can be prevented from entering the transmission mechanism 460 for driving the ball receiving portion 467 and flowing out of the game area. It is possible to make it difficult to cause problems caused by the ball.

In addition, the ball receiving portion 467 is capable of receiving and holding one game ball T1 thrown from a sorting unit 500 (described later) at the second position, and moving from the second position to the first position (second direction). ), so that after receiving one game ball at the second position, the ball receiving portion 467 is moved from the second position to the third direction (first direction ), it is possible to throw game balls exceeding the prescribed number to the trajectory region of the ball receiving portion 467 (the region in the first direction from 467 of the ball receiving portion). Therefore, the second and subsequent game balls T2 can be moved as the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced in the third position direction (first direction).

In this case, the ball receiving portion 467 holds the first game ball T1, and the second and subsequent game balls T2 can be thrown to the trajectory area of the ball receiving portion 467. The game ball T2 after the ball can be separated. Therefore, for example, by displacing the ball receiving portion 467 in the third position direction (first direction), while maintaining the state in which the ball receiving member holds the game ball T1 of the first ball, it is possible to play the second and subsequent balls. An operation of ejecting only the ball T2 from the trajectory area becomes possible.

Further, after the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced to the second position to receive the first ball, it is displaced to the third position to discharge the game ball T1 from the inside of the ball receiving portion 467. , the second game ball T2 falls to the upper part of the rack 466, the second game ball T2 is thrown between the ball receiving portion 467 and the transmission gear 465, and the second game ball T2 is moved to the lower displacement member 440. There is a risk that it will not be possible to discharge to the outside of the

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, after receiving the game ball T1 inside the ball receiving portion 467 at the second position, the receiving operation for receiving the ball in the ball receiving portion 467 is performed at the first position opposite to the exit opening 471. Since the second game ball T2 can be displaced to the outside of the lower displacement member 440, it can be suppressed that it cannot be discharged.

In other words, in a gaming machine equipped with a role object that performs a discharge operation for discharging a game ball thrown into the role object, the motion of the member for discharging the ball (the ball receiving portion 467 in this embodiment) is adjusted to the position where the ball is received. (second position) and the ball discharging position (third position), when two or more game balls are thrown into the accessory, the ball is discharged from the member for discharging the ball. There is a possibility that the second game ball T2 is discharged to the side opposite to the exit (exit opening 471). By displacing it to the first position on the opposite side, the second game ball T2 can be thrown between the ball receiving portion 467 and the exit opening 471.

As shown in FIGS. 34(a) to (c), after throwing the second game ball T2 onto the displacement path of the ball receiving portion 467, the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced to the third position before the shooting operation. By doing so, the second game ball T2 can be rolled toward the exit opening 471 while being in contact with the ball receiving portion 467 . As a result, the second game ball T2 can be ejected from the ejection opening 471. FIG.

In this case, the lower end surface of the U-shaped portion of the ball receiving portion 467 is above the center position of the second game ball T2 that is thrown on the displacement path of the ball receiving portion 467 (upward in FIG. 34(a)). placed in In addition, when the leg portion 467a is in contact with the upper surface of the bottom wall portion 481b, it is arranged in a state of being inclined approximately 45 degrees with respect to the contact surface with the bottom wall portion 481b. Furthermore, since the side surface of the U-shaped right side of the ball receiving portion 467 (the right side in FIG. 34(a)) is arranged at the same position in the vertical direction as the right end portion of the leg portion 467a, the second game ball The outer surface of T2 can abut leg 467a.

In addition, since the leg portion 467a is inclined approximately 45 degrees with respect to the upper surface of the bottom wall portion 481b, the outer surface of the lower hemisphere of the second game ball T2 (lower hemisphere on the side of the bottom wall portion 481b) abutted. As a result, when the second game ball T2 rolls toward the exit opening 471, the inclined surface of the leg portion 467a can generate a force that lifts the second game ball T2 upward. Therefore, the frictional force between the second game ball T2 and the bottom wall portion 481b can be reduced when the second game ball T2 rolls on the upper surface of the bottom wall portion 481b. As a result, when the second game ball T2 rolls toward the exit opening 471, it is possible to prevent the ball receiving portion 467 from being stopped.

In other words, the leg portion 467 a protrudes from the ball receiving portion 467 in the direction from the first position to the third position (first direction), and the tip of the projecting portion extends along the track of the ball receiving portion 467 . Since the ball receiving portion 467 is formed so as to be able to contact the lower half surface of the game ball (that is, the game ball T2 after the second ball) thrown to the area, the ball receiving portion 467 moves from the first position to the third position direction (first direction). When the game ball is displaced, the lower half of the game ball can be moved while being pushed by the leg portion 467a. As a result, the second and subsequent game balls T2 can be easily discharged from the orbit area of the ball receiving portion 467. FIG.

In addition, the leg portion 467a is provided between the first game ball T1 held by the ball receiving portion 467 and the game ball (the second and subsequent game balls T2) thrown to the trajectory area of the ball receiving portion 467. By interposing, the distance between the first game ball T1 and the second and subsequent game balls T2 can be ensured by the projecting length of the leg portion 467a. Therefore, while maintaining the state in which the ball receiving portion 467 holds the first game ball T1, only the second and subsequent game balls T2 can be easily discharged from the track area.

Furthermore, since the leg portion 467a serves both to change the posture of the ball receiving portion 467 and to move the game ball while pushing its lower half surface, the number of parts can be reduced accordingly. It is possible to reduce the product cost by reducing it.

Also, since the size of the concave portion 481b1 in the direction from the first position to the third position (first direction) is smaller than the diameter of the game ball, the game ball thrown to the trajectory area of the ball receiving portion 467 (that is, When the second and subsequent game balls T2) are moved along with the displacement of the ball receiving portion 467 in the first direction, they can easily pass through the recessed portion 481b1. As a result, the second and subsequent game balls T2 can be easily ejected from the trajectory area.

As described above, when the lower displacement unit 400 is arranged in the retracted state, the recovery port 411 f is arranged below the emission opening 471 of the lower displacement member 440 . Therefore, the game ball T2 ejected in the retracted state is thrown to the recovery port 411f.

On the other hand, when the lower displacement unit 400 is arranged in the first overhanging state, the recovery port 411f is positioned below the emission opening 471 . Further, the opening of the recovery port 411f is opened on the upper side. Therefore, the ejected game ball T2 is thrown to the recovery port 411f.

That is, the recovery port 411f is disposed vertically below the end portion of the base member 470 on the first direction side (upright wall 471a side) and has an opening in the vertical direction. The game balls (that is, the second and subsequent game balls T2) that are moved along with the movement in the three-position direction (first direction) and discharged from the track area of the ball receiving portion 467 are received from the opening of the recovery port 411f. can be recovered.

In addition, the opening of the recovery port 411f is perpendicular to the end of the base member 470 on the first direction side (upright wall 471a side) at least in each of the retracted state, the first extended state, and the second extended state. direction downward. As a result, even when the lower displacement unit 400 is displaced to any of the retracted position, the first extended state, and the second extended state, the game balls (that is, two balls) are discharged from the track area of the ball receiving portion 467. The game balls T2) after the second can be received and collected from the opening of the collecting member.

33(a) to 34(c) and FIGS. 2, the game ball put out to the outside of the lower displacement member 440 is thrown into the recovery port 411f. Further, when the ball receiving portion 467 is ejected while the lower displacement member 440 is in the first extended state (the longitudinal direction of the lower displacement member 440 is rotated by an angle θ from the virtual line H1), the lower displacement member The game balls put out to the outside of 440 are thrown to the recovery port 411f as described above.

Next, referring to FIG. 35, the configuration when the second game ball T2 is ejected from the ejection opening 471 will be described. 35(a) is a partially enlarged view of the lower displacement member 440 in the range XXXVa of FIG. 34(b), and FIG. 35(b) is a partially enlarged view of the lower displacement member 440 in the range XXXVb of FIG. 34(a). It is a diagram.

As shown in FIG. 35, when the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced to the third position immediately before the shooting operation, the game ball T2 is brought into contact with the side surface of the ball receiving portion 467 on the side of the standing wall 471a, and the exit opening is opened. 471 can be extruded to the outside of the lower displacement member 440 .

In this case, when the leg portion 467a of the ball receiving portion 467 is inserted between the bottom wall portion 481b and the standing wall 471a and the ball receiving portion 467 rotates, the game ball T2 and the ball receiving portion 467 come into contact with each other. By doing so, the rotational force of the ball receiving portion 467 can be transmitted to the game ball T2. As a result, the game ball T2 can be easily discharged from the exit opening 471. - 特許庁In addition, it is possible to return the ball receiving portion 467 to the state before the rotating operation by utilizing the repulsive force when the ball receiving portion 467 is brought into contact with the game ball T2. Therefore, when the game ball T2 thrown to the track area of the ball receiving portion 467 is discharged, the first game ball T1 held in the ball receiving portion 467 can be prevented from falling off.

Further, the lower displacement member 440 is erected at a height lower than the radius of the game ball in the track region when the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced from the second position to the third position direction (first direction), and is recessed. Equipped with a standing wall 471a located on the first direction side of 481b1, the second and subsequent game balls thrown to the orbital area of the ball receiving portion 467 move along with the displacement of the ball receiving portion 467 in the first direction. When the game ball T2 is moved, it is brought into contact with the standing wall 471a and the ball receiving portion 467, and the posture change of the ball receiving portion 467 is formed to be regulated. While maintaining the state held by the ball receiving part 467, only the game balls after the second ball can be easily discharged from the track area.

That is, the erected wall 471a is erected so that the height from the upper surface of the bottom wall portion 481b to the erected tip is lower than the radius of the game ball, so that the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced in the first direction. When the game ball T2 is moved by being pushed by the leg along with this, the lower half surface of the game ball T2 is brought into contact with the standing wall 471a so that the game ball can easily climb over the standing wall 471a. In this case, the game ball T2 is brought into contact with the ball receiving portion 467 (that is, the game ball T2 is interposed between the ball receiving portion 467 and the standing wall 471a), and the reaction force from the game ball T2 to the ball receiving portion 467 can be applied, the change in posture of the ball receiving portion can be regulated, and the first game ball held by the ball receiving portion 467 can be prevented from falling off. As a result, it is possible to easily discharge only the second and subsequent game balls T2 from the game area while maintaining the state in which the ball receiving portion 467 holds the first game ball.

On the other hand, when the second and subsequent game balls T2 are not thrown into the trajectory area of the ball receiving portion 467, no game ball is interposed between the erected wall 471a and the ball receiving portion 467. The posture of the ball receiving portion 467 can be changed by engaging the portion 467a with the concave portion 481b1. As a result, the first game ball T1 (that is, the game ball held in the ball receiving portion 467) can be easily discharged from the ball receiving portion 467 by utilizing the change in the posture of the ball receiving portion 467.

Next, the sorting unit 500 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 36 to 38. FIG. 36(a) is a top view of the sorting unit 500, and FIG. 36(b) is a rear view of the sorting unit 500. FIG. 37 is an exploded front perspective view of the sorting unit 500, and FIG. 38 is an exploded rear perspective view of the sorting unit 500. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 36 to 38, the sorting unit 500 includes a base plate 520 formed in a substantially rectangular plate-like body when viewed from the front, and a base plate 520 attached to the front side of the base plate 520 and facing the base plate 520. A path forming member 510 that forms a plurality of flow-down paths in which balls can flow down, a distribution member 540 that is rotatably attached to the back side of the base plate 520, and an end surface of the base plate 520 that is attached to the base plate 520 , and an extension path member 530 that extends the flow-down path of the spheres formed between the opposing path formation members 510 .

The base plate 520 includes a columnar shaft portion 523 protruding toward the rear side, a first opening 521 penetrating in an arc shape centering on the axis of the shaft portion 523 , and a radius larger than that of the first opening 521 . A second opening 522 penetrating in a large circular arc shape, a rolling part 525 having a U-shaped cross section with an open upper end side and extending in the left-right direction, and a hook-like protrusion on the back side. It is mainly formed with a locking portion 524 that engages.

The shaft portion 523 is a shaft that is inserted into a shaft hole 545 of the distribution member 540 to be described later and attaches the distribution member 540 to the base member in a rotatable state. be done.

The first opening 521 and the second opening 522 are openings through which the regulation plate 541 and the storage plate 542 of the distribution member 540, which will be described later, are inserted. It is formed. In addition, since the distribution member 540 is attached to the base plate 520 in a rotatable state, the first opening 521 and the second opening 522 are larger than the circumferential dimensions of the regulation plate 541 and the storage plate 542 when viewed from the front. A large arc is formed.

The locking portion 524 is an engaging portion that locks the urging spring SP4 with a locking portion 544 formed in the distribution member 540, and one end of the urging spring SP4 is locked.

The rolling part 525 is a bottom surface on which the ball rolls, and is inclined downward toward one end on the left side in a rear view (left side in FIG. 36(b)) and has a U-shaped curved shape. It is formed larger than the outer shape of the sphere. Therefore, the ball rolling on the rolling portion 525 can be prevented from stopping at the rolling portion, and the ball can roll toward the one end side.

The rolling part 525 has a plurality of protrusions 525b projecting from the front and rear side surfaces toward the inner side of the U shape, and an opening 525a opening toward the rear side at one end.

The projections 525b are formed on the front and rear side surfaces at regular intervals, and are formed at positions such that the projections 525b formed on the front side and the projections 525b formed on the back side are alternated when viewed from the front. Therefore, the ball rolling on the rolling portion 525 can collide with the projection 525b, so that the rolling speed of the ball rolling on the rolling portion 525 can be reduced.

Here, as described above, the ball is thrown to the ball receiving portion 467 of the lower displacement unit 400 with the ball receiving portion 467 placed at the first position (FIGS. 31(a) and 31(b)). )reference). Therefore, when the game ball rolling on the rolling portion 525 of the third ball path KR3 is thrown faster, the game ball is thrown into the lower displacement member 440 before the ball receiving portion 467 moves to the second position. there is a risk of being

On the other hand, in this embodiment, a plurality of projections 525b projecting from the inner surface of the rolling portion 525 of the third ball-throwing route KR3 are formed so that a game ball passing through the rolling portion 525 of the third ball-throwing route KR3 Since resistance can be applied, the speed of the game ball passing through the third throwing path KR3 can be slowed down. Therefore, the time required for the ball receiving portion 467 to be displaced from the switching position (first position) to the receiving position (second position) can be lengthened accordingly, so that the game ball can be reliably delivered to the ball receiving portion 467. can be received by In addition, the output of the displacement speed of the drive motor KM2 can be reduced by the amount that the displacement speed required for the ball receiving portion 467 can be reduced, and the product cost can be reduced.

The opening 525a is formed open on the back side of one end of the rolling portion 525, and its outer shape when viewed from the back is formed to be larger than the size of a sphere. Therefore, the ball rolling on the rolling portion 525 toward one end is discharged from the opening 525a.

The path forming member 510 is formed in the shape of a rectangular plate having a width in the left-right direction smaller than that of the base plate 520, and a plurality of walls larger than the outer diameter of the game ball are formed on the back side. By forming the space between the opposing spheres to be larger than the outer diameter of the sphere, a plurality of flow-down paths of the sphere are formed inside.

The path forming member 510 has a first opening 511 that opens in the upper end surface, a first ball throwing path KR1 formed between opposing side walls of the first opening 511, and a second ball throwing path connected to the first ball throwing path KR1. A second opening 512 and a third opening 513 that open in the side surface of the path forming member 510 at the ends of KR2 and the third ball throwing path KR3, and the second opening 512 and the third opening 513 that are formed to penetrate in the front-rear direction. a plurality of openings 514, 515, 516, a fourth ball throwing path KR4 formed by walls on the back side of the openings 514, 515, 516; It is mainly formed with a fourth opening 517 that opens.

The first opening 511 is an opening for allowing a ball thrown from a ball-throwing unit 600, which will be described later, to flow into the sorting unit. formed large. Also, the first opening 511 is connected to the ball-throwing unit 600 so that the ball thrown from the ball-throwing unit 600 can enter.

The first ball feeding path KR1 is a path through which the ball that has flowed in from the first opening 511 flows down between the base plate 520 and the path forming member 510, and is formed extending downward. In addition, the fourth ball throwing path KR4 is formed by extending approximately one third of the path forming member 510 in the vertical direction, and the downstream end is connected to the second ball throwing path KR2 and the third ball throwing path KR3. be done. That is, the ball flowing down the first ball-throwing path KR1 is formed so as to be able to flow down the second ball-throwing path KR2 or the third ball-throwing path KR3.

The second ball-throwing route KR2 is a route formed by being connected to the first ball-throwing route KR1, and the downstream end thereof is connected to the second opening 512, as described above. That is, when the ball flowing down the first ball path KR1 through the first opening 511 flows down the second ball path KR2, it is ejected outside the sorting unit 500 through the second opening 512 .

The second opening 512 is connected to a recovery path (not shown) for recovering balls. Therefore, the balls discharged from the second opening are recovered by the recovery path. Further, inside the second opening 512 (downstream end of the second ball throwing path KR2), a sensor device SE2 for detecting passage of a game ball is arranged. Therefore, the sensor device SE1 detects the number of game balls passing through the third winning hole 82, and the sensor device SE2 detects the number of game balls passing through the second ball throwing path KR2. The number of game balls passing through the route KR3 can be detected.

In other words, it is possible to detect whether or not a predetermined number (one ball) of game balls are stored upstream of the regulating plate 541, which will be described later, based on the difference between the sensor devices SE1 and SE1. For example, when the third electric accessory 82a is opened once, the number of balls passing through the third prize winning opening 82 (sensor device SE1) is eight, and the ball passing through the second ball throwing route KR2 (sensor device SE2). When the number is seven, it can be detected that one game ball has flowed down (stored) in the third throwing path KR3.

As described above, the third ball throwing route KR3 is a route formed by being connected to the first ball throwing route KR1, and the downstream end thereof is connected to the third opening 513 . That is, when the ball flowing down through the first opening 511 and down the first ball-throwing path KR1 flows down the third ball-throwing path KR3, it is ejected through the third opening 513 .

The third opening 513 is formed above the other end of the rolling portion 525 of the base plate 520 (the end opposite to the opening 525a). Therefore, the ball discharged from the third opening 513 is thrown inside the rolling part 525 . That is, the ball thrown to the third ball path KR3 is thrown to the rolling portion 525 through the third opening 513. As shown in FIG.

The openings 514 to 516 are respectively formed on the back side of the third prize winning opening 82 formed in the game board 13, and the winning ball in the third prize winning opening 82 is thrown. That is, when the ball flowing down the game area on the front side of the game board 13 wins the third prize winning opening 82, the ball is sent to the inside of the sorting unit 500 from the openings 514 to 516.

The fourth ball throwing path KR4 is formed by connecting to the openings 514 to 516, is connected to one path on the downstream side, and is connected to the fourth opening formed in the lower end surface of the path forming member 510. The fourth opening is connected to a recovery path (not shown) for recovering balls. Therefore, the ball that has won the third prize winning port 82 of the game board 13 is ejected from the fourth opening 517 and collected after being thrown to the fourth ball throwing path KR4 of the sorting unit 500 .

The extension path member 530 is formed to have a U-shaped cross section with an open bottom and extends in the left-right direction. Further, the extension path member 530 is formed such that the inner diameter of the U-shape is larger than the outer diameter of the sphere. Therefore, by being arranged above the rolling portion 525 of the base plate 520, a ball thrown to the upper portion of the rolling portion 525 can be thrown inside the rolling portion 525 and the extension path member 530. , the ball rolling on the rolling portion can be prevented from falling from the rolling portion 525 .

Further, the extension path member 530 has projections 531 formed at the same positions in the left-right direction as the projections 525b formed on the rolling portion 525 at regular intervals. As a result, the rolling speed of the ball rolling on the rolling portion 525 can be slowed down, similar to the projection 525b.

The distribution member 540 is formed in a rectangular shape in front view with one side being longer, and is formed with a predetermined thickness in the front-rear direction. The distribution member 540 includes a regulating plate 541 and a storage plate 542 that protrude as plate-shaped bodies on the front side, a shaft hole 545 that is formed through one end of the upper side, and a hook-shaped locking portion 544 that is formed on the back side. and are formed mainly.

The shaft hole 545 is a through hole into which the shaft portion 523 of the base plate 520 is inserted, as described above, and is formed to penetrate in the front-rear direction. The distribution member 540 is rotatable on the base plate 520 by inserting the shaft portion 523 of the base plate 520 through the shaft hole 545 and fastening a screw or the like having a larger head than the shaft hole to the shaft portion 523 from the rear side. attached in good condition.

The restricting plate 541 is arranged at the connecting portion between the first ball-throwing path KR1 and the second ball-throwing path KR2 through the first opening 521, and prevents the ball flowing down the first ball-throwing path KR1 from flowing into the second ball-throwing path KR2. It is formed so as to protrude forward from the front end face of the shaft hole 545, and the distance from the base plate 520 to the front side is set larger than the radius of the sphere.

Further, the regulation plate 541 is curved in an arc shape centering on the axis of the shaft hole 545 . As a result, when the distribution member 540 is rotationally displaced about the axis of the shaft hole 545, the displacement area of the regulation plate 541 can be minimized.

The storage plate 542 is a plate member that is arranged on the second ball-throwing path KR2 through the second opening 522 and stores the ball flowing down the second ball-throwing path KR2 on the upstream side of the storage plate 542. It is formed to protrude toward the front side from the end face on the front side, and the distance from the base plate 520 to the front side is set larger than the radius of the sphere.

Further, the storage plate 542 is curved in an arc shape centering on the axis of the shaft hole 545 , and the radius of the arc is formed larger than the radius of the curved portion of the regulation plate 541 . Therefore, the reservoir plate 542 is formed at a position spaced apart from the shaft hole 545 more than the regulation plate 541 . As a result, the restricting plate 541 can be protruded from the connecting portion between the first ball-throwing route KR1 and the second ball-throwing route KR2, and the storage plate 542 can be arranged on the second ball-throwing route KR2. Furthermore, the displacement area when the distribution member 540 is rotationally displaced about the axis of the shaft hole 545 can be minimized.

The projecting portion 543 is a drive transmission member that applies a rotational driving force to the distributing member 540 by colliding with the contact plate 464c of the lower displacement member 440 described above. It is formed. That is, a projection 543 to which driving force is transmitted is formed on the side opposite to the one end side where the shaft hole 545 serving as the rotating shaft of the distribution member 540 is formed. Thereby, the force with which the contact plate 464c of the lower displacement member 440 collides can be reduced.

Therefore, the driving force of the drive motor KM3 that displaces the contact plate 464c can be reduced, so that the energy consumption of the drive motor KM3 can be reduced. In addition, since the energy generated when the contact plate 464c collides with the protrusion 543 during driving can be reduced, the collision noise can be reduced when the contact plate 464c and the protrusion 543 collide. A detailed aspect of the collision between the contact plate 464c and the projecting portion 543 will be described later.

Further, a bulging portion 543a that bulges in a circular shape is formed at a portion of the projecting tip of the projection 543 that contacts the contact plate 464c. By bringing the contact plate 464c into contact with the bulging portion 543a, the contact area between the contact plate and the distribution member 540 can be reduced. Therefore, when the distribution member 540 is rotationally displaced, the frictional resistance between the protrusion 543 (the bulging portion 543a) and the contact plate 464c can be reduced. As a result, it is possible to suppress an increase in the energy consumption of the drive motor KM3.

The locking portion 544 is a portion that locks the biasing spring SP4 with the locking portion 524 of the base plate 520 as described above. Therefore, since the other end side of the distribution member 540 can always apply a rotating force toward the locking portion 524 side, the vibration of the distribution member 540 due to the vibration of the pachinko machine 10 or the like can be suppressed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 39, the flow-down route of the ball of the sorting unit 500 will be described in detail. FIG. 39 is a cross-sectional view of the sorting unit 500 taken along line XXXIX-XXXIX in FIG. 36(a). In addition, in FIG. 39, the distribution member 540 is illustrated with a dashed line. Also, FIG. 39 illustrates a state in which the sorting member 540 is arranged at the storage position.

Here, the state in which the sorting member 540 is arranged at the storage position means the state in which the sorting member 540 is rotated by the biasing force of the biasing spring SP4 and the storage plate 542 is arranged on the second ball throwing path KR2. .

As shown in FIG. 39, the lower end of the flow-down path of the first ball throwing path KR1 is tilted toward the central portion of the base plate 520 in the left-right direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 39), and the tilted portion is gentle. It is curved in an S shape. In addition, the S-shaped curved tip portion is connected to the third throwing path KR3, and the second throwing path KR2 is tilted at the end of the first throwing path KR1 in the direction opposite to the tilting direction of the first throwing path KR1. are linked together.

As a result, the ball flowing down the first ball path KR1 collides with the lower surface of the tilting portion, so that the flowing direction of the ball can be directed from the gravity direction to the tilting direction of the first ball path KR1. Therefore, the ball can flow down toward the entrance of the third ball-throwing route KR3 (the connecting portion between the first ball-throwing route KR1 and the third ball-throwing route KR3). Therefore, in a state where the distribution member 540 is not arranged, the ball flowing down the first ball throwing route KR1 can be thrown to the third ball throwing route KR3.

Here, a flow-down path along which a game ball flows down, a first branch passage and a second branch passage branched from the flow-down passage, and a game ball flowing down the flow-down passage to either the first branch passage or the second branch passage A game machine that distributes is known.

However, the conventional game machine has a structure in which the game balls flowing down the flow-down passage are alternately distributed one by one to the first branch passage and the second branch passage. It is distributed evenly (that is, by half) to the passage and the second branch passage. That is, there is a problem that the number of game balls distributed to the first branch passage cannot be changed.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, a ball receiving portion 467 formed displaceably and receiving a game ball from the third ball-throwing path KR3 is provided, and an abutment plate 464c interlocking with the ball receiving portion 467 contacts the distribution member 540. Since the distributing member 540 is displaced by contacting and displacing, the number of game balls distributed to the third ball throwing path KR3 or the second ball throwing path can be changed according to the displacement of the ball receiving portion 467 . That is, the number of game balls distributed to the third throwing route KR3 can be changed.

Displacement member 540 can be displaced by utilizing the displacement of ball receiving portion 467. Therefore, it is not necessary to separately provide a driving means or a transmission mechanism for displacing distribution member 540. can be unnecessary. Therefore, the number of parts can be reduced accordingly, and the product cost can be reduced.

Further, for example, in a structure that controls the displacement of the sorting member 540 using position detection by a sensor device and driving by a driving means, malfunction due to detection failure or control failure may reduce the reliability of the sorting operation of the sorting member. Inevitably, according to this embodiment, the distribution destination by the distribution member 540 can be switched in mechanical synchronization with the displacement of the ball receiving portion 467, so that the reliability of the distribution operation can be improved.

In particular, since the ball receiving portion 467 is a member that receives a game ball from the rolling portion 525 of the third ball throwing route KR3, it is synchronized with the displacement of the ball receiving portion 467 to shift the distribution destination of the distribution member 540 to the third ball throwing route. By switching to , the game ball distributed to the third throwing path KR3 can be reliably received by the displacement member.

Furthermore, in conventional gaming machines, game balls flowing down the flow-down path are only distributed to either the first branch passage or the second branch passage.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, when the destination of distribution by the regulation plate 541 (distribution means) is set to the third ball throwing route KR3 (first branch passage), the downflow of the game ball in the third is regulated. In the state where the distribution destination by the distribution member 540 is set to the second ball throwing route KR2 (second branch passage), a storage plate 542 (flowing state changing means) is provided to allow the game ball to flow down the third ball throwing route KR3. , can provide interest to the player.

That is, when the distribution destination by the regulation plate 541 is set to the third ball-throwing route, the game balls distributed to the third ball-throwing route KR3 are restricted from flowing down, and the game balls are stored in the third ball-throwing route KR3. When the allocation destination by 541 is set to the second ball-throwing route KR2, it is possible to allow the game balls to flow down the third ball-throwing route KR3 and allow the game balls accumulated in the third ball-throwing route KR3 to flow (release). can. As a result, in addition to the action of allocating game balls flowing down the first ball-throwing path KR1 (flowing-down path) to either the third ball-throwing path KR3 or the second ball-throwing path KR2, the game balls allocated to the third ball-throwing path KR3 are A flowing (opening) action can be formed. Furthermore, these storage and release operations can be alternately formed in conjunction with the sorting operation. As a result, it is possible to give interest to the player.

In addition, since the distribution member 540 (integral member) in which the regulation plate 541 (distribution means) and the storage plate 542 (flow state changing means) are integrally formed, the regulation plate 541 and the storage plate 542 are operated. It is possible to simplify the structure and improve the reliability of operation. This complicates the structure of the motor and lowers the operational reliability.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, since the regulation plate 541 and the storage plate 542 can be formed as a single part, the structure can be simplified accordingly, and the product cost can be reduced and the reliability of operation can be improved. be able to.

Furthermore, the distribution member 540 is formed to be displaceable between a storage position (first state position) and a regulation position (second state position). The 3 ball throwing route KR3 (first branch passage) is arranged at a position where the distribution destination is, and the storage plate 542 is arranged at a position that restricts the flow of game balls in the 3rd ball throwing route KR3, and the distribution member 540 is displaced to the regulating position. In this state, the regulation plate 541 is arranged at the position where the second ball throwing route KR2 is the distribution destination, and the storage plate 542 is arranged at the position allowing the game balls to flow down the third ball throwing route. is displaced between two positions (storage position and regulating position), in addition to the operation of distributing the game ball flowing down the first ball throwing route KR1 (flowing down passage) to either the third ball throwing route KR3 or the second ball throwing route, 3 It is possible to form an operation to temporarily stop (store) the flow of the game balls distributed to the throwing route KR3 and an operation to make the stopped (stored) game balls flow down (release), and these storage and opening operations can be alternately formed in conjunction with the sorting operation. That is, it is possible to simplify the structure, reduce the product cost, and improve the operational reliability.

The distribution member 540 (integral member) is rotatably formed, and the storage plate 542 (flowing state changing means) is formed so as to be able to protrude and retract from the third ball throwing route KR3 (first branch passage). By protruding to KR3, the game ball is restricted from flowing down, and since it is formed in an arcuately curved shape centering on the rotation axis of the distribution member 540, the control plate 541 appears and disappears on the third ball throw path KR3. The area of the hole (recess 519) opened in the inner wall of the can be reduced.

Since the storage plate 542 (flowing-down state changing means) is arranged in such a manner that the upstream side of the third ball throwing route KR3 (first branch passage) is concave, the storage plate 542 protrudes toward the third ball throwing route KR3. In the initial state (that is, the state in which only the tip side of the flow state changing means protrudes into the passage), the shape of the tip side of the storage plate 542 can be arranged in a direction that facilitates regulating the flow of the game ball, It is possible to easily regulate the flow of game balls distributed to the third throwing route KR3.

In addition, in a state where the storage plate 542 protrudes to the third ball-throwing path to the maximum and restricts the downflow of the game ball, the concave portion of the storage plate 542 can stably hold the game ball, so that the game ball can be prevented from running wild.

The sorting unit 500 applies a biasing force to the sorting member 540 (integral member), and a biasing spring SP4 (biasing means ), and the distance from the regulating plate 541 to the rotating shaft of the distributing member 540 is made larger than the distance from the regulating plate 541 to the rotating shaft of the distributing member 540, so that the biasing force of the biasing spring SP4 is used. , the distribution member 540 can be easily maintained in a posture (that is, a storage position) in which the storage plate 542 protrudes toward the third emergency route.

In this case, since the distance from the storage plate 542 to the rotation axis of the distribution member 540 is made larger than the distance from the regulation plate 541 to the rotation axis of the distribution member 540, when the falling game balls collide, the rotation axis Even if the same impact force is applied, the urging direction of the urging spring SP4 is the direction in which the accumulating plate 542 protrudes toward the third throwing path KR3. By doing so, it is possible to suppress the storage plate 542 from sinking into the recess 519 by the amount of the urging force.

In addition, since the distribution member 540 (integrated member) is rotated in the direction in which the storage plate 542 (flowing-down state changing means) protrudes into the third ball throwing path (first branch path) due to its own weight, the weight of the distribution member 540 is utilized. The distribution member 540 can be easily maintained in the posture (that is, the storage position) in which the storage plate 542 protrudes toward the third ball throwing path KR3. Therefore, when the game ball collides, it is possible to suppress the storage plate 542 from sinking into the concave portion 519 by its own weight.

Further, even if the biasing spring SP4 (biasing means) falls off, the distribution member 540 is maintained in a posture in which the regulation plate 541 protrudes toward the third ball throwing route KR3 due to its own weight, and the game moves toward the third ball throwing route KR3. You can suppress the ball from flowing down.

Further, a biasing spring SP4 is provided to apply a biasing force to the distribution member 540 to maintain the distribution destination of the distribution member 540 to either the third ball throwing route KR3 or the second ball throwing route KR2. By displacing the ball 540 in the direction against the direction of the biasing spring SP4, the distribution destination by the distribution member 540 is switched to the other of the third ball throwing route KR3 and the second ball throwing route KR2, and the biasing force of the biasing spring , the distribution destination by the distribution member 540 is returned to either the third ball throwing route KR3 or the second ball throwing route KR2.

Therefore, it is possible to prevent the distribution destination of the distribution member 540 from being carelessly switched. In this case, the distributing member 540 is displaced with the displacement of the ball receiving portion 467, and after the distributing destination is switched, the return to the distributing destination before switching can be performed by the biasing force of the biasing spring SP4. Therefore, the contact plate 464c interlocked with the ball receiving portion 467 does not need to be in contact with the distribution member 540. FIG. That is, the abutment plate 464 c interlocked with the ball receiving portion 467 can be separated from the distribution member 540 . Therefore, the degree of freedom in designing the movable range of the ball receiving portion 467 can be increased.

Next, displacement of the distribution member 540 will be described with reference to FIG. 40(a) and (b) are partial enlarged views of the sorting unit 500 in the range XL of FIG. 39. FIG. 40(a) shows a state where the distribution member 540 is located at the storage position, and FIG. 40(b) shows a state where the distribution member 540 is located at the regulation position. Further, the state in which the distribution member 540 is arranged at the regulated position means that the contact plate 464c of the lower displacement member 440 collides with the protrusion 543 of the distribution member 540, and the distribution member 540 moves about the axis of the shaft hole 545. It is a state in which the regulating plate 541 is arranged at the connecting portion between the first ball-throwing path KR1 and the third ball-throwing path KR3 after being rotated.

As shown in FIG. 40(a), when the sorting member 540 is arranged at the storage position, the storage plate 542 is arranged on the third ball throwing path KR3, and the regulation plate 541 is positioned on the back side of the path forming member 510. is located inside a recess 518 formed in the wall of the

In this case, the distance L1 between the end of the tip of the storage plate 542 protruding inside the third ball throwing path KR3 and the inner wall of the third ball throwing path KR3 facing the tip is made smaller than the diameter of the ball. Therefore, the ball thrown from the upstream of the third ball-throwing path KR3 (the first ball-throwing path KR1) is stopped on the upstream side of the storage plate 542.

Further, the distance dimension L2 from the inside of the curved portion of the storage plate 542 to the connecting portion between the first ball-throwing path KR1 and the first ball-throwing path KR1 is set to be larger than the radius of the ball, and is also larger than the diameter of the ball. set small. As a result, the number of balls stopped on the upstream side of the storage plate 542 can be reduced to one. Hereinafter, the state of the sorting unit 500 in which one ball is stopped on the upstream side of the storage plate 542 is referred to as a storage state.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 40(b), when the sorting member 540 is arranged at the regulating position, the regulating plate 541 is arranged at the connecting portion between the first ball-throwing route KR1 and the third ball-throwing route KR3. , the storage plate 542 is arranged inside the recess 519 formed in the wall portion on the back side of the path forming member 510 .

In this case, the distance dimension L3 between the end of the tip of the regulating plate 541 protruding inside the first ball-throwing path KR1 and the inner wall of the entrance of the third ball-throwing path KR3 is made smaller than the diameter of the ball. Therefore, the ball flowing down the first ball-throwing route KR1 collides with the regulation plate 541 and is thrown to the second ball-throwing route KR2.

That is, by switching the distribution member 540 between the regulating position and the storage position, the ball that is thrown along the first ball-throwing path KR1 is thrown to the third ball-throwing path KR3 and stopped on the third ball-throwing path KR3; A state can be formed in which the ball flowing down the first ball path KR1 cannot flow into the third ball path KR3 and is thrown to the second ball path KR2.

Therefore, by displacing one distributing member 540, when one flow path is divided into two flow paths, the flow path of the sphere can be reliably switched to one of them.

Further, the biasing spring SP4 applies a biasing force to the distribution member 540 to maintain the distribution destination of the distribution member 540 on the second ball throwing path KR2. It is possible to suppress switching of the distribution destination by the distribution member 540 to the third throw path.

Furthermore, the regulation plate 541 (distribution means) is formed so as to be able to appear and retract with respect to the first ball throwing route KR1 (downflow passage) or the third ball throwing route KR3 (first branch passage), and its appearance position is Since it is the inner wall on the downstream extension line of the downstream end of the first ball-throwing route KR1, the regulation plate 541 can be protruded at a position close to the game ball flowing down from the lower end side of the first ball-throwing route KR1. Therefore, it is possible to shorten the time required from when the regulating plate 541 starts to protrude into the downstream passage or the third ball throwing route KR3 (first branch passage) to when the game balls can be sorted. As a result, it is possible to reliably switch the distribution destination by the regulation plate 541 .

In addition, the regulation plate 541 (distribution means) protrudes into the third ball-throwing route KR3 (first branch passage), thereby diverting the game ball flowing down the first ball-throwing route KR1 (flow-down passage) into the second ball-throwing route ( second branch path), and the projecting direction of the regulating plate 541 is set in a direction pointing to the upstream end of the second ball-throwing path KR2, so the game ball flowing down the first ball-throwing path KR1 projects When the game ball comes into contact with the regulating plate in the middle, the game ball can be pushed into the second ball-throwing path KR as the regulating plate protrudes. As a result, the distribution to the second throwing route KR2 can be performed more reliably.

In this embodiment, the regulation plate 541 of the distribution member 540 is arranged at a position closer to the shaft hole 545 than the storage plate 542, but the regulation plate 541 is located farther from the shaft hole 545 than the regulation plate 541. may be placed in 40(a) and 40(b), the axis of the distribution member 540 may be arranged at the position of the point P on the rear surface on the downstream side of the third ball throwing path KR3. . In this case, the arrangement positions of the regulating plate 541 and the storage plate 542 formed on the distribution member 540 are formed at the same positions as in the present embodiment.

When the shaft hole 545 is arranged at the point P, the displacement speed of the regulation plate 541 can be faster than that of the storage plate 542 when the distribution member 540 is rotationally displaced. Therefore, as will be described later, when the distribution member 540 is displaced from the storage position to the regulation position, the regulation plate 541 can be quickly protruded onto the flow-down path. As a result, at the timing when the distribution member 540 is switched from the regulating position to the storage position, it is possible to suppress the game balls flowing down the first ball-throwing path KR1 from flowing into the third ball-throwing path KR3.

Also, in this case, the shapes of the regulation plate 541 and the storage plate 542 in a front view are arcuate with the point P as the center. As a result, the displacement regions of the regulation plate 541 and the storage plate 542 can be minimized when the distribution member 540 is displaced from the regulation position to the storage position (or vice versa). Furthermore, recessed portions 518 and 519 for receiving the restricting plate 541 and the storage plate 542 outside the third throwing path KR3 are recessed along the displacement trajectory of the restricting plate 541 and the restricting plate 541 .

Next, with reference to FIGS. 41 and 42, a case where two or more balls are thrown from the ball-throwing path when the sorting member 540 is arranged at the storage position will be described. 41(a) and (b) are partial enlarged views of the sorting unit 500. FIG. 42(a) and (b) are partial enlarged views of the sorting unit 500. FIG.

44(a) and (b) correspond to a partially enlarged view of the sorting unit 500 in FIG. 40(a). Also, FIGS. 41(a) to 42(b) sequentially illustrate the transition states of the sphere when the sphere is introduced. Further, FIGS. 41(a) to 42(b) show a state in which the sorting member 540 is arranged at the storage position.

As shown in FIGS. 41(a) and 41(b), when the first game ball T1 is thrown to the first ball path KR1 with the sorting member 540 arranged at the storage position, as described above, , the game ball T1 is thrown to the third ball-throwing path KR3 and stopped above the storage plate 542. As shown in FIG.

In this case, the storage plate 542 is located downstream of the upper end of the third throwing path KR3 by a distance between the radius and the diameter of the ball. protrudes toward the first throwing path KR1 (see FIG. 41).

Therefore, as described above, the third ball throwing path KR3 (first branch path) is formed so as to be inclined downward toward the downstream, and the game ball is formed to roll on the inner wall in the direction of gravity, Since the storage plate 542 (flowing state changing means) is formed so as to be able to protrude into the third ball throwing route KR3 from the inner wall on the lower side in the direction of gravity, the game ball is started to protrude into the third ball throwing route KR3. It is possible to shorten the time required to reach a state in which the flow of water can be regulated. As a result, the distribution destination of the regulating plate 541 is switched from the second ball throwing route KR2 (second branch passage) to the third ball throwing route KR3, and when the game ball is distributed to the third ball throwing route KR3, the game ball The projection of the storage plate 542 can be easily made in time to regulate the flow.

In addition, the regulation plate 541 is formed so as to be retractable with respect to the third ball-throwing route KR3, and when it protrudes to the third ball-throwing route KR3 to the maximum, a force component in the projecting direction acts on the storage plate 542 from the game ball. Therefore, when restricting the flow of the game ball distributed to the third ball throwing route KR3, it is possible to suppress the storage plate 542 from sinking into the concave portion 519 due to the impact when the game ball collides. Therefore, it is possible to easily regulate the flow of the game ball.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 42(a) and (b), when the sorting unit 500 is in the storage state and the second game ball T2 is thrown to the first ball-throwing path KR1, the game ball T2 The ball is thrown from the first throwing path KR1 to the upper end of the third throwing path KR3. Since the game ball T1 is stopped at the upper end of the third ball-throwing path KR3, the game ball T2 collides with the game ball T1 and is thrown to the second ball-throwing path KR2.

In this case, as described above, the game ball T1 protrudes toward the first ball-throwing path KR1. Since it can be guided, the game ball T2 can be thrown to the second ball path KR2 without remaining inside the third ball path KR3. Therefore, it is possible to stabilize the ball throwing on the first ball-throwing path KR1 and the second ball-throwing path KR2.

That is, the inner wall of the first ball-throwing route KR1 (flowing-down passage) on the side facing the second ball-throwing route KR2 (second branching passage) is configured to pass the game ball flowing down the first ball-throwing route KR1 to the third ball-throwing route KR3 (first branch passage). Of the specified number (one ball) of game balls stored in the branch passage), the last game ball can be guided to the side of the third ball-throwing route KR3, so that the game ball flows down the first ball-throwing route KR1. can be easily made to flow down to the second ball throwing route KR2 after colliding with the last game ball among the prescribed number of game balls.

Among the prescribed number of game balls, the last game ball means a game ball located on the upstream side (the side opposite to the regulation plate 541). Also, in the present embodiment, the prescribed number is set to one ball. In this case, the last game ball means the game ball itself stored in the third throwing route KR3.

Further, as described above, the first ball throwing path KR1 (downstream passage) is tilted toward the central portion of the base plate 520 in the left-right direction (left-right direction in FIG. 39) at the lower end side of the downflow path. A portion is formed in a gentle S-shaped curve. That is, since the downstream end of the first ball-throwing route KR1 (flowing-down passage) flows in the downstream direction of the upstream end of the third ball-throwing route KR3, the game ball flowing down the first ball-throwing route KR1 flows in the third ball-throwing route KR1. When the last game ball among the specified number of game balls stored in the ball-throwing path collides, the direction of the repulsive force acting on the last game ball must be different from the flowing direction of the upstream end of the third ball-throwing path KR3. can let As a result, it is possible to prevent the trailing game ball from jumping out of the upstream end of the third ball-throwing path KR3 and flowing into the second ball-throwing path KR2 due to the repulsive force at the time of collision.

Furthermore, the upper end of the third ball path KR3 is inclined in the direction of inclination of the lower end of the first ball path KR1. In addition, it can be on the side of the second throwing path KR2. Therefore, the rebound direction of the game ball T2 that has collided with the game ball T1 can be the entrance (upper end) side of the second ball throwing route KR2. Therefore, the game ball T2 that collides with the game ball T1 can be easily thrown to the second ball-throwing path KR2. As a result, it is possible to suppress the stagnation of the ball on the first ball-throwing path KR1 and the second ball-throwing path KR2.

Further, the distribution destination by the regulation plate 541 is set to the third ball-throwing route KR3 (first branch passage), and the downflow of the game ball in the third ball-throwing route KR3 is regulated by the storage plate 542 (flowing-down state changing means). 3 In a state where a specified number (one ball) of game balls is stored in the ball-throwing route KR3, game balls flowing down the first ball-throwing route KR1 (flowing-down passage) can flow down to the second ball-throwing route KR2 (second branch passage). Therefore, when more than the specified number of game balls flow down the flow-down passage, the game balls exceeding the specified number (game balls T2 after the second ball) are prevented from staying in the first ball throwing route KR1. can. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the displacement of the regulating plate 541 (the operation of setting the distribution destination to the second ball-throwing route KR2) from being hindered by the game balls stuck on the first ball-throwing route KR1.

Next, with reference to FIG. 43, a case where a ball is thrown to the ball-throwing path when the sorting member 540 is arranged at the regulating position will be described. 43(a) and (b) are partial enlarged views of the sorting unit 500. FIG.

43(a) and (b) correspond to the partially enlarged view of the sorting unit 500 in FIG. 40(a). Also, FIGS. 43(a) and (b) illustrate transition states of the sphere when the sphere is introduced. Further, FIGS. 43(a) and 43(b) show a state in which the distribution member 540 is arranged at the restricted position.

As shown in FIGS. 43(a) and 43(b), when a ball is thrown along the first throwing path KR1 with the sorting member 540 arranged at the regulating position, the thrown game ball T1 is placed on the first throwing path KR1. It collides with the regulation plate 541 at the lower end of the route KR1. As a result, the game ball T1 is guided to the second ball-throwing route KR2 and flows down the second ball-throwing route KR2.

Next, with reference to FIG. 44, the operation for causing the ball to flow downstream on the third throwing path KR3 will be described. 44(a) and (b) are partial enlarged views of the sorting unit 500. FIG.

44(a) and (b) correspond to a partially enlarged view of the sorting unit 500 in FIG. 40(a). Also, FIGS. 44(a) and (b) respectively illustrate the transition states of the sphere when the sphere is introduced. Further, FIG. 44(a) shows a state where the distribution member 540 is arranged at the storage position, and FIG. 44(b) shows a state where the distribution member 540 is arranged at the regulation position.

As shown in FIGS. 44(a) and 44(b), when the sorting unit 500 is in the storage state (the state shown in FIG. 44(a)), the sorting member 540 is displaced and placed at the restricted position. , the game ball T1 stagnated above the storage plate 542 flows down to the downstream side of the third ball throwing path KR3.

That is, only the ball stagnated above the storage plate 542 flows down the third throwing path KR3. In addition, as described above, the number of balls stagnating above the storage plate 542 is set to 1, so that the balls can flow down to the third throwing path KR3 one by one. Therefore, it is possible to stabilize the number of balls flowing down the third ball-throwing route KR3, thereby suppressing an unintended number of balls from flowing down the third ball-throwing route KR3.

Therefore, the distributing member 540 (distributing means) includes a regulating plate 541 (first retractable portion) formed so as to be retractable with respect to the third ball throwing path (first branch path) as the distributing member 540 is displaced. Equipped with a storage plate (second retractable portion), the regulating plate 541 protrudes into the third ball-throwing path so that the game ball flowing down the first ball-throwing path KR1 (flowing-down passage) is directed to the second ball-throwing path KR2 (second branching path). passage), and the storage plate 542 is located downstream of the restriction plate 541 in the third throwing path KR3 and protrudes into the third throwing path KR3 to distribute the ball to the third throwing path KR3. When one of the regulation plate 541 and the storage plate 542 protrudes into the passage of the third ball-throwing route KR3, the other is outside the passage of the third ball-throwing route KR3 (recessed portion). 518, 519), displacing the distributing member 540 in accordance with the displacement of the ball receiving portion 467 (displacement member), so that only the prescribed number (one ball) of game balls are transferred to the third throwing route KR3. , and can be received by the ball receiving portion 467 .

That is, the regulation plate 541 protrudes into a first state in which game balls flowing down the first ball-throwing path KR1 are distributed to the second ball-throwing path. A second state in which the game balls distributed to the third ball-throwing path are distributed to the third ball-throwing path, and a third state in which the game balls distributed to the third ball-throwing path KR3 are restricted from flowing down (game balls are stored) by projecting the second protruding part. and a fourth state in which the game balls stored in the third ball throwing path are made to flow down and received by the ball receiving portion by retracting the second haunting portion. By combining , only a prescribed number (one ball) of game balls can be distributed to the third ball throwing route KR3 and received by the ball receiving portion 467.

In addition, since the distribution member 540 is provided with the regulation plates 541 and 542, that is, formed as one component, the structure of the distribution member 540 (for operating the regulation plate 541 and the storage plate 542 and exerting their functions) structure) can be simplified. Furthermore, when one of the restricting plate 541 and the storage plate 542 protrudes into the passage of the third ball-throwing route KR3, the other is retracted out of the passage of the third ball-throwing route KR3. It is sufficient that the distribution member 540 is also formed so as to be displaceable between two positions according to the positions (first position and second position). That is, by displacing the distribution member 540 at two positions, the first to fourth states described above can be formed. Therefore, the structure of the distributing member 540 and the structure for displacing the distributing member 540 in accordance with the displacement of the ball receiving portion 467 can be simplified, and the reliability of the game ball distributing operation can be improved accordingly.

Next, the sorting unit 500 and the lower displacement unit 400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 45 to 46. FIG. 45 is a front view of the sorting unit 500 and the downward displacement unit 400. FIG. 46 is a top view of the sorting unit 500 and the downward displacement unit 400. FIG. It should be noted that the lower displacement unit 400 is illustrated in a state of being arranged at the retracted position.

As shown in FIGS. 45 and 46, the sorting unit 500 is arranged on the front side of the lower displacement unit 400 (lower side in FIG. 46). In this case, the opening 525a formed in the rolling portion 525 of the distribution unit 500 and the opening 451a formed in the decorative member 450 of the lower displacement member 440 are arranged at positions overlapping each other in the front-rear direction. Therefore, the ball rolling on the rolling portion 525 is thrown into the lower displacement member 440 through the opening 525a and the opening 451a.

In other words, the ball is thrown to the lower displacement member 440 by passing the ball flowing down the game area in front of the game board 13 through the third winning hole 82 formed in the game board 13 through the ball throwing unit 600 and the distribution unit 500. is done.

Therefore, the distribution unit 500 includes the rolling portion 525 that communicates with the track area of the ball receiving portion 467, and the distribution member 540 regulates passage of game balls in the rolling portion 525. To surely throw the second and subsequent game balls T2 to the track area of a distribution member 540 via a rolling part 525 even when the second and subsequent game balls T2 are thrown due to malfunction. can be done. As a result, it is possible to prevent troubles caused by the game ball T2 after the second ball.

Next, the relationship between the distribution member 540 and the lower displacement member 440 will be described with reference to FIGS. 47 to 52. FIG. 47, 49 and 51 are front views of the lower displacement unit 400, and FIGS. 48, 50 and 52 are sectional views of the sorting unit 500. FIG. 47, 49 and 51, the decorative member 450 and the front case 481 of the displacement member 440 are shown transparently, and only the sorting member 540 of the sorting unit 500 arranged on the front side is illustrated. 48, 50 and 52, the distributing member 540 is illustrated with a chain line, and the contact plate 464c of the lower displacement member 440 arranged on the back side is illustrated with a chain line.

47 and 48 show a state in which the ball receiving portion 467 of the lower displacement member 440 is at the first position and the distribution member 540 is at the regulating position, and the lower displacement member 440 is in the retracted state. The position is illustrated. 49 and 50 show a state in which the ball receiving portion 467 of the lower displacement member 440 is arranged at the second position and the distributing member 540 is arranged at the storage position, and the lower displacement member 440 is positioned in the retracted state. The states are illustrated. 51 and 52 show a state in which the ball receiving portion 467 of the lower displacement member 440 is arranged at the first position, and the distributing member 540 is arranged at the storage position. is shown.

As shown in FIGS. 47 and 48, in the state where the lower displacement member 440 is arranged in the retracted state and in the state where the ball bearing portion 467 of the lower displacement member 440 is arranged in the first position, the ball bearing portion A rack 466 for driving 467 is arranged on the other end side of the lower displacement member 440 (on the left side of the lower displacement member 440 when viewed from the front), and a movable rack 464 is arranged on the back side so as to overlap in the front-rear direction.

That is, the movable rack 464 is arranged on the other end side of the lower displacement member 440 (on the left side of the lower displacement member 440 when viewed from the front), similarly to the rack 466 . Therefore, the contact plate 464 c formed on the movable rack 464 is positioned on the other end side of the lower displacement member 440 . In this case, the side surface of the contact plate 464c on the other end side (the left side surface in the front view) is brought into contact with the projecting portion 543 of the distribution member 540 . As a result, the distribution member 540 is subjected to a driving force to rotate about the axis of the shaft hole 545, and is displaced to a position (restriction position) where the regulation plate 541 protrudes into the first ball throwing path KR1.

Therefore, when the lower displacement member 440 is retracted and the ball receiving portion 467 is placed at the first position, the ball thrown on the first ball-throwing path KR1 of the sorting unit 500 is not on the third ball-throwing path KR3. The ball is thrown to the second throw route KR2 without flowing down. Further, as described above, by displacing the sorting member 540 from the storage state in which the balls are stored above the storage plate 542 to the regulating position, the game player moves to the downstream side of the third ball-throwing path KR3 (downstream side of the storage plate 542). You can throw the ball. At this time, the game ball can be thrown to the inside of the ball receiving portion 467 by causing the ball receiving portion 467 to receive the ball.

In addition, the opening operation of the third electric accessory 82a for putting the game balls in the sorting unit 500 is performed before the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced to the first position. When displaced to the position, the third electric accessory 82a is closed. As a result, when the distribution member 540 is displaced from the storage position to the regulation position, the game balls passing through the first ball-throwing path KR1 are not restricted from flowing down by the regulation plate 541 and the storage plate 542, and unintended game balls It is possible to suppress the ball from being thrown to the downstream side of the 3-throwing route KR3.

In addition, since the distribution member 540 is formed to be operable in conjunction with the displacement of the ball receiving portion 467, the throwing of the game ball to the track area of the ball receiving portion 467 is restricted according to the displacement of the ball receiving portion 467. Or acceptable. That is, the control or permission of throwing a game ball can be switched mechanically in synchronization with the displacement of the ball receiving portion 467. Driving means for driving the distribution member 540 according to the detection result of 540, or control of each of these means, can be eliminated. can be planned.

Further, the distribution member 540 throws the game ball T2 to the track area of the ball receiving portion 467 in conjunction with the displacement of the ball receiving portion 467 from the second position in the first position direction (second direction). , the game ball can be reliably thrown to the area on the first direction side of the ball receiving portion 467 in the track area of the ball receiving portion 467 .

The ball receiving portion 467 is formed to be displaceable between a switching position for switching the distribution member 540 and a receiving position (second position) set at a position different from the switching position (first position). When the portion 467 is displaced to the switching position, the distribution destination by the distribution member 540 is switched to the third throwing path KR3. 467 can receive the game ball, and the distribution destination by the distribution member 540 is switched to the second ball throwing route KR2, so that the prescribed number (one ball in this embodiment) that the ball receiving portion 467 can receive the ball is set. It is possible to suppress the game ball exceeding the number from being distributed to the third throwing route KR3.

That is, when the switching position and the receiving position are set to the same position, the ball receiving portion 467 receives the game ball while the destination of distribution by the distribution member 540 is switched to the third ball throwing path. There is a risk that game balls exceeding the prescribed number that can be received by the ball receiving portion 467 will be distributed to the third ball throwing route KR3. If a separate means for restricting the inflow of game balls into the third ball throwing path KR3 is provided, the structure becomes complicated, the reliability is lowered, and the product cost is increased.

On the other hand, in the embodiment, after the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced to the switching position and a specified number (one ball in this embodiment) of game balls are distributed to the third ball throwing route KR3, the distribution member 540 is moved to the receiving position. , the distribution destination is switched to the second ball throwing route KR2, so that more than one game ball can be prevented from flowing down to the third ball throwing route. Therefore, the ball receiving portion 467 can suppress the game balls exceeding the specified number (one ball) that can be received from being distributed to the third ball throwing route KR3. Further, since there is no need to separately provide the aforementioned means (means for regulating the inflow of game balls into the third ball throwing path KR3), reliability can be improved and product costs can be reduced.

Moreover, when the power is turned on (turned on), the pachinko machine 10 starts from the position where each operation unit is turned off (turned off). Furthermore, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, only the control may be reset. In this case, if the sorting member 540 is provided with a driving means, when the power is turned on, the sorting unit 500 in the storage state operates during the initial operation to flow the game balls down the third ball throwing path KR3, A game ball may be thrown to the withdrawal side (first position side) of the ball receiving portion 467 arranged at the third position.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the displacement of the distribution member 540 and the displacement of the ball receiving portion 467 are synchronized. When the machine 10 is powered on, it is possible to prevent unintended game balls from being thrown to the trajectory area of the ball receiving part 467.例文帳に追加As a result, clogging of game balls inside the lower displacement member 440 can be suppressed.

Furthermore, when the power is turned off with the game ball left in the track area of the lower displacement member 440, the ball receiving part 467 is caused to perform the above-described discharging operation, so that the game ball is left in the track area of the ball receiving part 467. The game ball can be discharged to the outside of the lower displacement member 440 and recovered from the recovery port 411f.

Next, description will be made with reference to FIGS. 49 and 50. FIG. As shown in FIGS. 49 and 50, the lower displacement member 440 is arranged in the retracted state and the ball receiving portion 467 of the lower displacement member 440 is arranged at the second position or the third position (a position other than the first position). In this state, as described above, the rack 466 for driving the ball receiving portion 467 is arranged at the substantially central position of the lower displacement member 440 in the left-right direction (the left-right direction in FIG. 49), and the movable rack 464 is moved from the other end (the left side in the left-right direction in FIG. 49) to one end.

Therefore, the contact plate 464c formed on the movable rack 464 is arranged at a position spaced from the other end of the lower displacement member 4440 toward one end. In this case, the surface of the contact plate 464 c on the other end side (the surface on the left side in front view) is separated from the projecting portion 543 of the distribution member 540 . As a result, the distributing member 540 is rotated about the axis of the shaft hole 545 by the biasing force of the biasing spring SP4 interposed between the distributing member 540 and the base plate 520, and the storage plate 542 is moved to the third throw. It is displaced to a position (storage position) projected onto the route KR3.

Therefore, when the lower displacement member 440 is in the retracted state and the ball receiving portion 467 is arranged at the second position or the third position (position other than the first position), the first ball throwing path of the sorting unit 500 is A ball thrown to KR1 is in a state of being stopped above the storage plate 542 . Further, as described above, when the sorting unit 500 is in the storage state, the ball thrown to the first ball path KR1 collides with the ball stopped above the storage plate 542 and is thrown to the second ball path KR2. .

Next, description will be made with reference to FIGS. 51 and 52. FIG. As shown in FIGS. 51 and 52, when the lower displacement member 440 is arranged in the first extended state or the second extended state, the lower displacement member 440 slides relative to the front base 411 as described above. It is displaced and rotationally displaced. Therefore, the contact plate 464 c formed on the movable rack 464 is displaced with the displacement of the lower displacement member 440 and separated from the projecting portion 543 of the distribution member 540 . As a result, the distributing member 540 is rotated about the axis of the shaft hole 545 by the biasing force of the biasing spring SP4 interposed between the distributing member 540 and the base plate 520, and the storage plate 542 is moved to the third throw. It is displaced to a position (storage position) projected onto the route KR3.

Therefore, when the lower displacement member 440 is in the first protruding state or the second protruding state, the ball thrown to the first ball throwing path KR1 of the sorting unit 500 is stopped above the storage plate 542. be done. Further, as described above, when the sorting unit 500 is in the storage state, the ball thrown to the first ball path KR1 collides with the ball stopped above the storage plate 542 and is thrown to the second ball path KR2. .

That is, when the lower displacement member 440 is in the first protruding state and the second protruding state (states other than the retracted state), the opening 451a of the decorative member 450 is opened as the lower displacement member 440 is displaced. Since the position is displaced, the state of ball communication between the opening 451a and the opening 525a of the sorting unit 500 is released. Therefore, when a ball flows down the third ball throwing path KR3, there is a risk that the ball will be discharged into the interior of the rear case 300 through the opening 451a. It is possible to suppress the ball from flowing down the downstream side of the route KR3. As a result, it is possible to suppress the balls of the rear case 300 from being discharged inside.

In other words, the lower displacement member 440 of the lower displacement unit 400 is formed to be displaceable between the retracted state, the first extended state, and the second extended state. Since the ball receiving portion 467 is disposed on the lower displacement member 440, there is a state in which the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced while the lower displacement member 440 is disposed in the retracted state, and a state in which the ball receiving portion 467 is disposed in the first or second extended state. , the ball receiving portion 467 can be displaced. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect accordingly.

In this case, when the lower displacement member 440 is arranged in the first or second overhanging state, the ball receiving portion 467 cannot receive the game ball from the rolling portion 525 of the third ball throwing route KR3. The rolling portion 525 and the opening 451a of the lower displacement member 440 are in a state of non-communication). Therefore, in a state in which the ball receiving portion 467 cannot receive a game ball (a state in which the lower displacement member 440 is arranged in the first protruding state or the second protruding state), the distribution destination by the distribution member 540 is the third ball path. It is possible to suppress switching to KR3.

Further, since the distributing member 540 is disposed on the base plate 520 of the distributing unit 500 which is formed as a separate member from the base member 470 of the lower displacement member 440, the size of the base member 470 of the lower displacement member 440 is correspondingly increased. can be suppressed.

Here, the displacement of the lower displacement member 440 from the first protruded state to the retracted state is not only laterally rotationally displaced but also rotationally displaced. In addition, there is a possibility that the protrusion 543 of the distributing member 540 contacts the upper surface of the contact plate 464c and the distributing member 540 cannot be rotationally displaced.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, when the lower displacement unit 400 is displaced from the first overhang position shown in FIG. (second position or third position). As a result, the contact plate 464 c of the displacement member 440 displaced to the retracted state can be prevented from colliding with the projecting portion 543 . As a result, it is possible to prevent the distribution member 540 from being rotationally displaced due to the protrusion 543 of the distribution member 540 coming into contact with the upper surface of the contact plate 464c.

Further, since the distributing member 540 is formed with the bulging portion 543a as described above, when the lower displacement unit 400 is displaced from the first extended state to the retracted state due to control failure or the like, the abutment plate 464c may be displaced. Even when the projecting portion 543 of the distribution member 540 comes into contact with the upper surface, the distribution member 540 can be rotationally displaced.

That is, since the contact area with the contact plate 464c can be reduced by the bulging portion 543a, the bulging portion 543a can be easily slid along the surface when the contact plate 464c contacts. Therefore, the distribution member 540 can be easily rotationally displaced. As a result, it is possible to prevent the distribution member 540 from being rotationally displaced due to the protrusion 543 of the distribution member 540 coming into contact with the upper surface of the contact plate 464c.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 53 to 56, the configuration of the drive transmission portion of rotation unit 700 will be described. 53 is a front view of the rotation unit 700, FIG. 54 is a rear view of the rotation unit 700, FIG. 55 is an exploded perspective front view of the rotation unit 700, and FIG. It is a rear perspective view.

As shown in FIGS. 53 to 56, the rotation unit 700 includes a decoration unit 750 composed of a plurality of displacement members, a ball bearing base 710 arranged above the decoration unit 750 in the gravitational direction, and a ball bearing base 710 arranged above the decoration unit 750 in the direction of gravity. 710 and a rear base 720 arranged on the rear side of the decoration unit 750, a left transmission member 730 arranged on the left side of the decoration unit 750 when viewed from the front, and a right transmission member arranged on the right side of the decoration unit 750 when viewed from the front. 740 and .

The ball receiving base 710 is a member for dropping the game ball emitted from the emission opening 471 on one side of the lower displacement member 440 of the lower displacement unit 400 described above. As a result, the ball thrown to the inner side of the lower displacement member 440 can be thrown to the rotation unit 700 . A detailed configuration of the ball cradle 710 will be described later.

The decoration unit 750 is a substantially D-shaped block with a curved portion arranged upward in a side view, and the front side is decorated with characters and patterns. Also, the decoration unit 750 is composed of a plurality of members, and is configured to be displaceable by transmission of a driving force, which will be described later. Note that the configuration of the decoration unit 750 will be described later.

The rear base 720 is a plate member that connects the rear side of the ball holder 710 and the rear side of the decoration unit 750, and is formed in a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the front. As described above, since the decoration unit 750 is composed of a plurality of movable members, the fastening portion thereof is limited. By connecting , the decorative unit 750 and the ball receiving base 710 can be assembled as one unit while securing the movable range of the decorative unit 750 .

The left transmission member 730 is mounted with a drive motor KM4 disposed on the left side (left side of FIG. 53) of the decoration unit 750, a transmission member 730 for transmitting the driving force of the drive motor KM4, and the drive motor KM4. It mainly includes a motor base 732, a gear cover 733 that covers the transmission member 730, and a ball throw path cover 734 that is attached to the gear cover 733 and forms a predetermined gap between the gear cover 733 and the gear cover 733. be.

The drive motor KM4 is a drive source for moving each member of the decoration unit 750, which will be described later. Drive of the drive motor KM4 is transmitted by a transmission member 730, which will be described later.

The transmission member 730 includes a transmission gear 731a attached to the shaft of the drive motor KM4, a transmission gear 731b meshing with the transmission gear 731a, a transmission gear 731c meshing with the transmission gear 731b, and a transmission gear 731c. and a transmission gear 731d arranged coaxially with a shaft 735, and a load gear 731e meshing with the transmission gear 731d.

The transmission gear 731a is attached to the drive motor KM4 as described above, and rotates when the drive motor KM4 is rotationally driven.

A one-way clutch OW1 is disposed inside the transmission gear 731b, and the inner ring of the one-way clutch OW1 is connected to a shaft portion JB1 that transmits the rotational driving force of the decoration unit 750 to the right transmission member 740 on the right side.

The one-way clutch OW1 includes an inner ring having a cam surface formed on its outer peripheral surface, an outer ring arranged outside the inner ring, and a plurality of springs and rollers between the inner ring and the outer ring. When the outer ring tries to rotate in one direction with respect to the inner ring, the contact surface pressure between the cam surface and the roller increases, acting as resistance and transmitting power to the inner ring, causing the outer ring to rotate in the other direction with respect to the inner ring. This is a cam-type clutch that slides and disconnects the power transmission when the roller rotates to the right, the contact surface pressure between the cam surface and the roller decreases.

Therefore, when the driving force in one direction is transmitted from the drive motor KM4, the transmission gear 731b can transmit the rotational driving force to the shaft portion JB1, and when the driving force in the other direction is transmitted from the driving motor KM4, The outer ring slips with respect to the inner ring and the transmission of the driving force to the shaft portion JB1 is interrupted.

The transmission gear 731c is internally provided with a one-way clutch OW1 like the transmission gear 731b. A shaft 735 is arranged inside the one-way clutch OW1 of the transmission gear 731c.

Therefore, the transmission gear 731c can transmit the rotational driving force to the shaft 735 when the driving force in one direction is transmitted from the driving motor KM4, and can transmit the driving force in the other direction from the driving motor KM4. The outer ring slides against the shaft 735 and the transmission of the driving force to the shaft 735 is interrupted. The transmission gear 731c is meshed with the transmission gear 731b, and the directions of rotation thereof are opposite to each other. Therefore, when the transmission gear 731b rotates in one direction, the transmission gear 731c rotates in the other direction. On the other hand, when the transmission gear 731b is rotated in the other direction, the transmission gear 731b is rotated in one direction. That is, by switching the rotation direction of the drive motor KM4, the mode is switched to the mode in which the shaft portion JB1 rotates or the mode in which the shaft 735 rotates.

Transmission gear 731 d is attached to shaft 735 . As described above, shaft 735 is rotated only when transmission gear 731c is rotated in one direction. Therefore, the transmission gear 731c rotates in one direction only when the transmission gear 731c is rotated in one direction, and does not rotate in the other direction.

The load gear 731 e is connected to a shaft portion 791 a of a resistance member 791 having a shaft hole attached to the box member 760 . The resistance member 791 is formed with a shaft portion 791 a rotatable with respect to a base portion fastened to the box member 760 . The resistance member 791 is formed to provide a predetermined amount of resistance when the shaft portion 791a rotates with respect to the base portion. That is, since a predetermined amount of force is required to rotate the shaft portion 791a, a force equal to or greater than the predetermined amount is also required to rotate the load gear 731e connected to the shaft portion 791a.

As a result, when the rotating body 800 meshing with the transmission gear 731d is rotated by the rotation of the transmission gear 731d and stopped, it is possible to suppress the rotation due to the inertial force. That is, the resistance when the shaft portion 791a rotates with respect to the base portion is set larger than the inertial force acting around the axis of the rotating body 800 when the rotation of the rotating body 800 stops.

In addition, the load gear 731e is connected to a transmission gear 731d coaxially arranged with the transmission gear 731c. Therefore, the resistance of the load gear 731e applied to the drive motor KM4 can be limited to one-way rotation of the transmission gear 731d. That is, when the transmission gear 731c rotates in the other direction, the transmission of drive between the transmission gear 731c and the transmission gear 731d is interrupted, so that the resistance of the load gear 731e can be suppressed. As a result, when the transmission gear 731b is rotated in one direction, it is possible to suppress the resistance of the load gear 731e.

The motor base 732 is formed in a box-like body that is open on the decoration unit 750 side, and the drive motor KM4 is arranged outside the bottom of the box (left side in FIG. 53) with its shaft inserted through the inside of the box. Thereby, the transmission gear 731 a connected to the shaft of the drive motor KM4 can be arranged inside the motor base 732 . That is, the depth dimension of the box of the motor base 732 is set larger than the width dimension of the transmission gear 731a. As a result, the drive motor KM4 and the transmission gear 731a can be installed in the decoration unit 750 with the drive motor KM4 and the transmission gear 731a attached to the motor base 732, and the transmission gear 731a can be prevented from colliding with the decoration unit 750. FIG.

The gear cover 733 is formed in a vertically long rectangular shape when viewed from the rear, and is fastened to the decoration unit 750 with the left transmission member 730 disposed therebetween. A through hole 733a is formed through the decoration unit 750 at a position facing the shaft hole of the rotating body 800, which will be described later. As a result, the ball rolling inside the rotating body 800 can be ejected to the outside through the through hole 733a. The ball thrown to the rotating body 800 will be described later.

The ball feed path cover 734 is a member arranged outside the gear cover 733 (on the left side in FIG. 53). As a result, a gap can be formed between the gear cover 733 and the ball feed path cover 734, and the ball inserted through the through hole 733a of the gear cover 733 can be passed through the gap and discharged to the outside of the rotation unit 700. can be done. The ball ejected from the gap between the gear cover 733 and the ball throwing path cover is thrown to a recovery path (not shown) and recovered.

The right transmission member 740 includes a rotating member 741 connected to the other end of the shaft portion JB1, an arm member 742 having one end connected to the rotating member 741, and the rotating member 741 and the arm member 742. A crank cover 743 arranged in the decoration unit 750 in a closed state is formed.

The rotating member 741 includes a main body portion 741b formed in a disk-like plate shape, a one-way clutch OW1 fitted to the shaft of the main body portion 741b, and a cylindrical member projecting to the opposite side of the decoration unit 750 (the right side in FIG. 53). The projection 741a is mainly provided.

One-way clutch OW1 attached to rotating member 741 has an inner ring shaft hole inserted into the other end side of shaft portion JB. In addition, the one-way clutch OW1 is arranged so that the inner ring and the outer ring are not transmitted when rotation opposite to the rotation direction of the shaft portion JB1 is input to the inner ring.

As a result, when a driving force having a rotational speed higher than the rotational speed transmitted from the shaft portion JB1 to the rotating member 741 is input to the outer ring of the one-way clutch OW1, only the outer ring is rotated and the rotating member 741 is driven by the drive motor KM4. It can be rotated by driving force other than drive. As a result, the rotating member 741 can be rotated at two or more different speeds.

The arm member 742 has a shape combining a C shape and an I shape when viewed from the side, and is formed by connecting one end of the C shape to the other end of the I shape. In addition, the arm member 742 includes a shaft hole 742a penetrating through the connecting portion between the C-shaped portion and the I-shaped portion, an elliptical first sliding groove 742b penetrating through one end of the I-shaped portion, A second elliptical sliding groove 742c penetrating through the other end of the letter portion is formed.

The shaft hole 742a is a hole into which a shaft portion 764a formed on a right side plate 764 of the box member 760, which will be described later, is inserted, and is formed to have an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the shaft portion 764a. Therefore, the arm member 742 is arranged in the decoration unit 750 with the shaft portion 764a inserted into the shaft hole 742a, so that the arm member 742 is rotatable with respect to the decoration unit 750. As shown in FIG.

The first sliding groove 742b is a hole into which the protrusion 741a of the rotating member 741 is inserted, and the width dimension in the lateral direction of the oval is set larger than the outer diameter of the protrusion 741a. Therefore, the protrusion 741a can be inserted inside the first sliding groove 742b, and the rotation of the rotating member 741 can cause the arm member 742 to be rotationally displaced.

The rotary member 741 has an outer diameter that is smaller than the longitudinal dimension of the I-shaped portion of the arm member 742, and a shaft that extends from the shaft hole 742a of the arm member 742 to half the longitudinal dimension of the I-shaped portion. placed farther apart than Accordingly, by rotating the rotating member 741, the arm member 742 can be caused to reciprocate in rotation about the axis of the shaft hole 742a.

The second sliding groove 742c is a hole into which a projection 773a of the right lid portion 773, which will be described later, is inserted. Therefore, the projection 773a can be inserted inside the second sliding groove 742c. Also, the right lid portion 773 is formed to be rotatably displaceable with respect to the box member 760 . Therefore, the rotating member 741 is rotated as described above, and the arm member 742 reciprocates in rotation, thereby rotating the right lid portion 773 connected to the other end of the arm member 742 with respect to the box member 760. be able to.

The crank cover 743 mainly includes an elliptical portion 743a formed in an elliptical shape when viewed from the rear, and a ball-throwing portion 743b formed continuously on the rear side of the elliptical portion 743a.

The elliptical portion 743a is a cover that covers the arm member 742, and has an outer shape larger than the arm member 742 and the displacement area of the arm member 742 when viewed from the side. A wall is formed which protrudes more than the thickness of the . Accordingly, when the crank cover 743 is arranged on the decoration unit 750, the arm member 742 can be arranged between the crank cover 743 and the decoration unit 750 facing each other.

The ball throwing part 743b is a path member for throwing the ball to the recovery path when the ball flowing down the flow-down area in front of the game board 13 is recovered from a predetermined recovery port. It is shaped like a bar with a space of height. The ball feeding portion 743b is connected at its upper end to an opening of the game board 13 and connected to an opening formed in the decoration unit 750 at its lower end. As a result, the balls collected on the game board 13 can be passed through the interior of the decoration unit 750 via the ball feeding portion 743b and guided to a collection path (not shown).

Next, the decoration unit 750 will be described with reference to FIGS. 57 to 61. FIG. 57 is a front view of the decoration unit 750. FIG. 58(a) is a side view of the decoration unit 750 as viewed in the direction of arrow LVIIIa in FIG. 57, and FIG. 58(b) is a side view of the decoration unit 750 as viewed in the direction of arrow LVIIIb in FIG. 59 is an exploded perspective front view of the decoration unit 750, and FIG. 60 is an exploded perspective rear view of the decoration unit 750. FIG. 57(b) and 57(c), the right side plate 764 and the left side plate 765 of the box member 760 are illustrated in a transparent state.

As shown in FIGS. 57 to 60, the decoration unit 750 includes a box member 760 serving as a decoration portion on the outside of the decoration unit 750 and a lid disposed above the box member 760 in the gravitational direction (upper side in FIG. 57(a)). It mainly includes a member 770 and a rotating body 800 arranged inside the box member 760 and the lid member 770 .

The box member 760 includes a base member 762 arranged below the rotating body 800, a front plate 761 arranged in front of the base member 762, a lower plate 763 arranged on the bottom surface of the base member 762, It mainly includes a right side plate 764 arranged on the right side of the base member 762 in front view, and a left side plate 765 arranged on the left side of the base member 762 in front view.

The base member 762 is formed in a horizontally elongated rectangular shape that is larger than the rotating body 800 when viewed from above, and is formed with a thickness in the direction of gravity greater than the outer diameter of the sphere. The base member 762 has a curved upper surface coaxial with the axis of the rotating body 800 . As a result, collision between the base member 762 and the rotating body 800 can be suppressed when the base member 762 is arranged in the vicinity of the rotating body 800 .

The base member 762 mainly includes a recess 762a recessed downward in the left-right direction on the top surface and a ball-throwing part 762b recessed in a substantially L shape on the bottom surface.

The concave portion 762a is a groove in which the shaft portion JB1 described above is arranged, and is recessed on the shaft of the transmission gear 731b arranged on the side surface of the decoration unit 750. As shown in FIG. Thereby, the driving force of the driving motor KM4 can be transmitted via the shaft portion JB1.

The ball-throwing part 762b is bent in an L-shape and recessed on the bottom surface. connected to Also, the recessed width of the ball feeding portion 762b is formed to be larger than the diameter of the ball. Accordingly, the ball can be thrown inside the box member 760 by arranging the lower surface plate 763 on the lower side.

The front plate 761 is formed to have a horizontally long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and is formed to have a predetermined thickness on the back side. In addition, the front plate 761 is formed with a winning opening 761a having a size that allows a ball to be inserted on the front side. The prize winning opening 761a is connected to the ball throwing portion 762b of the base member 762 arranged on the back side as described above. Therefore, the ball thrown into the winning opening 761 a is thrown to the ball-throwing portion 762 b of the base member 762 .

The right side plate 764 is formed in a D shape with an upwardly curved outer shape when viewed from the side. The right side plate 764 includes a shaft portion 764a protruding outside the decoration unit 750, a bearing portion 764c penetrating below the shaft portion 764a, and a curved shape having the same axis as the rotation axis of the rotating body 800. an opening 764b that opens at a position facing the lower end of the ball feeding portion 762b of the crank cover 743; It is formed mainly including an engaging portion 764e.

The opening 764b is a hole for allowing the ball thrown from the ball-throwing portion of the crank cover 743 to be thrown to the base member 762, and is formed larger than the outer diameter of the ball. As a result, the ball thrown to the crank cover 743 can be thrown to the base member 762 .

The bearing portion 764c is a hole into which the above-described shaft portion JB1 is inserted, and is formed with an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the shaft portion JB1. Thereby, the driving force can be transmitted to the right transmission member 740 described above.

The curved opening 764d is an opening through which a protrusion 773a protruding from the right lid portion 773 is inserted. Further, the curved opening 764d is formed in an arc shape coaxial with the rotation axis of the lid member 770 because the lid member 770 is rotationally displaced. Thereby, when the cover member 770 is rotationally displaced, it is possible to suppress collision between the projection 773a and the curved opening 764d.

The engaging portion 764e is a member that engages with the right end portion of the base plate 810 disposed inside the rotating body 800 in a front view to hold the base plate 810 so as not to rotate. That is, the tip portion 811a of the right end portion 811 of the base plate 810 is inserted into the engaging portion 764e. This makes the base plate 810 non-rotatable.

The left side plate 765 is formed to have substantially the same outer shape as the right side plate 764 when viewed from the side. The left side plate 765 includes a through hole 765a formed through the shaft of the rotating body 800, a shaft portion 765b projecting toward the rotating body 800, and a through hole into which the shaft portion 791a of the resistance member 791 is inserted. It is formed mainly with holes 765c.

The through-hole 765a is an opening for inserting the ball ejected from the opening on the left side of the rotating body 800 in front view into the through-hole 733a of the motor base 732 described above. That is, the through hole 765a is formed on the axis of the rotating body 800, and its inner diameter is set to be the same size as the inner diameter of the opening of the rotating body 800 on the left side in the front view.

The shaft portion 765b is inserted into a shaft hole 781 formed in a rotation restricting member 780, which will be described later, and can hold the rotation restricting member 780 in a rotatable state. Displacement of the rotation restricting member 780 will be described later.

The through hole 765c is a hole through which the shaft portion 791a of the resistance member 791 is inserted as described above, and is formed at a position facing the side surface of the load gear 731e described above.

The lower surface plate 763 is a plate member that is disposed on the lower surface of the base member 762 so that the ball throwing portion 762b of the base member 762 and the lower surface plate 763 form a ball-throwing path through which the ball can pass. In addition, the bottom plate 763 is formed with an opening 763a penetrating in the vertical direction. The opening 763a is an opening for throwing a ball thrown inside the ball-throwing portion 762b to a recovery path (not shown). Therefore, the winning ball and the ball sent from the winning hole 761 a of the front plate 761 and the game area to the ball feeding portion 743 b of the right transmission member 740 can be ejected from the interior of the decoration unit 750 .

The lid member 770 includes a curved lid portion 771 formed in a curved shape coaxial with the axis of the rotating body 800 , a right lid portion 773 fastened to the right side surface of the curved lid portion 771 when viewed from the front, and the curved lid portion 771 . It mainly includes a left lid portion 772 that is fastened to the left side surface of the front view.

As described above, the curved lid portion 771 has a curved shape coaxial with the axis of the rotating body 800 and has a radius larger than that of the rotating body 800 when viewed from the side. The curved lid portion 771 has a transparent portion 771a formed of a transparent plate on a part of the front side.

The transparent portion 771a is a plate that allows the player to visually recognize patterns, characters, and the like drawn on the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 800 from the player. That is, the player can visually recognize the display of the rotating body 800 through the transparent portion 771a even when the upper end side of the rotating body 800 is covered with the lid member 770. FIG.

The right lid portion 773 is formed in an annular shape when viewed from the side, and the radius of the outer side of the annular ring is set substantially equal to the radius of the curved lid portion 771 . In addition, the inner diameter of the right lid portion 773 is formed to be larger than the size of the outer shape of the right end portion 811 of the rotating body 800 when viewed from the side. As a result, the right lid portion 773 is disposed in a state in which the right end portion 811 of the rotating body 800 is inserted through the annular inner portion.

Further, the right lid portion 773 is mainly formed with a projection 773a projecting to the outside (right side in front view) of the decoration unit 750 and a recess 773b recessed radially inward in the outer peripheral edge portion. . The projection 773a is a projection inserted into the second sliding groove 742c of the decoration unit 750 of the arm member 742, as described above.

The concave portion 773b can rotate the opening/closing member 870 by inserting a projection 871 of the opening/closing member 870, which will be described later. Therefore, the width of the recessed portion 773 b is set to be larger than the outer shape of the projection 871 . Further, the recess 773b is formed at a position substantially opposite to the edge of the right lid portion 773 where the curved lid portion 771 is arranged.

The left lid portion 772 is formed in an annular shape when viewed from the side, and the radius of the outer side of the annular ring is set substantially equal to the radius of the curved lid portion 771 . In addition, the inner diameter of the left lid portion 772 is formed to be larger than the outer diameter of the tooth surface 881a of the left rotating portion 880, which will be described later. As a result, the left lid portion 772 is arranged in a state in which the left rotating portion 880 of the rotating body 800 is inserted through the annular inner portion.

Further, the left lid portion 772 is formed with a plate-shaped sensor plate 772a projecting to the outside of the decoration unit 750 (left side in front view). The sensor plate 772a can detect the position of the left side lid portion 772 by being arranged between opposing bifurcated sensors (not shown).

Here, the lid member 770 for the rotating body 800 will be described. The arrangement of the lid member 770 in the assembled state of the rotating body 800 is the state in which the right and left ends of the rotating body 800 are respectively inserted inside the right lid portion 773 and the left lid portion 772 (separate members) before assembly. do. Then, the rotating body 800 and the lid member 770 are connected by assembling the right lid portion 773 , the left lid portion 772 , and the curved lid portion 771 . Therefore, the lid member 770 is rotatable about the axis of the rotating body 800 with respect to the rotating body.

The rotation restricting member 780 is bent in a substantially L-shape when viewed from the side. The rotation restricting member 780 mainly includes a shaft hole 781 passing through the bent portion, a protrusion 782 projecting in the bending direction on one end side, and a flat contact surface 783 formed on the tip of the other end side. be done.

The shaft portion 765b of the left side plate 765 is inserted into the shaft hole 781 as described above. Thereby, the rotation restricting member 780 is rotatably held with respect to the left side plate 765 . Also, a biasing spring SP5 is inserted into the shaft portion. As a result, a unidirectional rotational force acts on the rotation restricting member 780 .

The protrusion 782 can regulate the rotational displacement of the rotating body 800 by engaging with an engaging protrusion 882 of the left rotating portion 880 described later. The abutment surface 783 is a surface with which the rear end of the lid member 770 abuts, and the rotation restricting member 780 can be rotated by the abutment of the lid member 770 . It should be noted that the manner in which the rotation restricting member 780 and the rotating body 800 are restricted will be described later.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 61 and 62, the drive force transmission path when the drive motor KM4 is rotated will be described. 61(a) and 62(a) show the rotation unit 700 as viewed in the direction of arrow LVa in FIG. 55, and FIGS. be.

In FIG. 61, the direction of displacement of each member when the shaft of the drive motor KM4 is rotated in the positive direction (clockwise) is indicated by a chain double-dashed line. In FIG. 62, the direction of displacement of each member when the shaft of the drive motor KM4 is rotated in the negative direction (counterclockwise) is indicated by a chain double-dashed line.

As shown in FIGS. 61(a) and 61(b), when the drive motor KM4 is driven in the forward direction, the transmission gear 731a rotates in the forward direction. When the transmission gear 731a rotates in the positive direction, the transmission gear 731b rotates in the negative direction, and the transmission gear 731c rotates in the positive direction.

In this case, the one-way clutch OW1 provided in the transmission gear 731b does not transmit the rotation of the outer ring to the inner ring, and the shaft portion JB1 does not rotate. Therefore, the driving force is not transmitted to the rotating member 741 connected to the shaft portion JB1, and the arm member 742 is brought into a stopped state.

On the other hand, the one-way clutch OW1 provided in the transmission gear 731 is in a state of transmitting the rotation of the outer ring to the inner ring, and the shaft 735 is rotated. Therefore, the transmission gear 731d connected to the shaft 735 is rotated. As a result, the load gear 731e meshing with the transmission gear 731d and the tooth surface 881a of the rotor 800 are rotated. That is, when the driving motor KM4 rotates forward, the driving force to the lid member 770 is not transmitted, and the driving force to the rotating body 800 is transmitted.

As shown in FIGS. 62(a) and 62(b), when the drive motor KM4 is driven in the negative direction, the transmission gear 731a is rotated in the negative direction. When the transmission gear 731a is rotated in the negative direction, the transmission gear 731b is rotated in the positive direction, and the transmission gear 731c is rotated in the negative direction.

In this case, the one-way clutch OW1 provided in the transmission gear 731b is in a state of transmitting the rotation of the outer ring to the inner ring, and the shaft portion JB1 is rotated. Therefore, the driving force is transmitted to the rotating member 741 connected to the shaft portion JB1, and the rotating member 741 is rotated. As a result, the arm member 742 rotates and reciprocates about the axis of the shaft hole 742a, and the lid member 770 is displaced.

On the other hand, the one-way clutch OW1 arranged on the transmission gear 731 does not transmit the rotation of the outer ring to the inner ring, and the shaft 735 does not rotate. Therefore, the driving force is not transmitted to the transmission gear 731d connected to the shaft 735, and the rotating body 800 and the load gear 731e are brought into a non-rotating state. That is, when the driving motor KM4 rotates in the negative direction, the driving force to the lid member 770 is transmitted, and the driving force to the rotating body 800 is not transmitted.

Therefore, a transmission gear 731c (rotating side driving means) for transmitting the driving force from the drive motor KM4 to the rotating body 800 and a transmission gear 731b (displacement side transmitting means) for transmitting to an opening/closing member 870 to be described later via the cover member 770. In addition, by disposing the one-way clutch OW1, it is possible to transmit the torque to one of the transmission gear 731c or the transmission gear 731b and block the transmission to the other depending on the direction of rotation of the drive motor KM4. . As a result, only by switching the rotational direction of the drive motor KM4, it is possible to switch the driven object to be driven by the rotational driving force. It is possible to switch between stopping and displacing and stopping the opening/closing member 870, thereby simplifying the structure while making it possible to form a plurality of modes.

Here, in a structure in which the one-way clutch OW1 is used to switch the object to be driven (the rotating body 800 or the opening/closing member 870 (cover member 770) according to the rotation direction of the driving means, transmission of the driving force from the driving motor KM4 is When cut off, it becomes free to rotate or displace in the direction in which it was driven by the driving force.Therefore, for example, the driven object of the driving means is switched from the rotating body 800 to the opening/closing member 870 (cover member 770). When the transmission of the driving force is interrupted, the rotating body 800 becomes rotatable and may continue to rotate (rotate) due to inertial force.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, since the load gear 731e (loading gear) meshing with the transmission gear 731d driven by the transmission gear 731c is provided, transmission of the rotational driving force from the drive motor KM4 is interrupted. However, the load (resistance) generated when the load gear 731e is rotated can be used to prevent the rotating body 800 from continuing to rotate.

Next, displacement of the lid member 770 will be described with reference to FIGS. 63 and 64. FIG. Figures 63(a) and 64(c) are in the closed state, Figures 63(b) and 64(b) are in the intermediate state, and Figures 63(c) and 64(a) are in the open state. FIG. 7 is a side view of the decoration unit 750 and the right transmission member 740;

63(a) to 63(c) and FIGS. 64(a) to 64(c) illustrate a state in which the crank cover 743 of the right transmission member 740 is removed. The closed state of the decoration unit 750 is a state in which the lid member 770 is arranged to cover the upper half of the rotating body 800 (upper side in FIG. 63(a)). It is displaced and arranged on the back side of the rotating body 800 (the right side in FIG. 63(c)). The intermediate state is a state in which lid member 770 is positioned between the closed state and the open state.

Further, in FIGS. 63(a) to 63(c), the state of being displaced from the closed state to the open state is illustrated in order, and in FIGS. 64(a) to 64(c), the displacement from the open state to the closed state is illustrated. The states to be executed are illustrated in order.

First, referring to FIG. 63, the displacement of the lid member 770 when it is displaced from the closed state to the open state will be described. The drive force is transmitted to the arm member 742 by rotating the drive motor KM4 in the negative direction as described above.

In the closed state, the protrusion 741a of the rotating member 741 is arranged on the rear side (right side in FIG. 63(a)) of the shaft hole 742a of the arm member 742. As shown in FIG. Therefore, in the arm member 742, the first sliding groove 742b into which the protrusion 741a is inserted is arranged on the rear side of the shaft hole 742a.

The shaft hole 742a of the arm member 742, the first sliding groove 742b and the second sliding groove 742c are formed substantially on the same straight line. Therefore, the second sliding groove 742c formed at the opposite end of the first sliding groove 742b is positioned closer to the front side (left side in FIG. 63(a)) than the shaft hole 742a. As a result, the protrusion 773 a protruding from the right side surface of the lid member 770 is guided by the second slide groove 742 c so that the curved lid portion 771 of the lid member 770 is arranged above the rotating body 800 .

Next, as shown in FIG. 63(b), when the rotating member 741 is rotated approximately 90 degrees to position the projection 741a below the shaft of the rotating member 741, the first sliding groove 742b of the arm member 742 is moved. , along with the displacement of the projection 741a, the shaft hole 742a is displaced downward in the gravitational direction (downward in FIG. 63(b)).

Therefore, the second sliding groove 742c formed at the opposite end of the first sliding groove 742b is positioned above the shaft hole 742a in the gravitational direction (upper side in FIG. 63(b)). As a result, the protrusion 773a of the lid member 770 is guided by the second slide groove 742c, and the curved lid portion 771 of the lid member 770 is placed in a position where it is rotationally displaced toward the back side of the rotating body 800. .

In this case, the center of gravity of lid member 770 is arranged on the back side of the rotation axis of lid member 770 (the center position of rotating body 800 formed in a cylindrical shape). Therefore, due to the load of the lid member 770, a rotational force acts in the direction of displacing the lid member 770 from the closed state to the open state. As described above, the rotating member 741 is provided with the one-way clutch OW1 so that the outer ring can rotate ahead of the inner ring. , the cover member 770 can be continuously rotated.

As shown in FIG. 63(c), when the lid member 770 is displaced to the rear side of the rotating body, the projection 741a of the rotating member 741 is stopped at a position rotated approximately 90 degrees from the position of the intermediate state. That is, it is the leftmost (left side in FIG. 63) end of the displacement area of the projection 741a. Therefore, the rotation of the arm member 742 is restricted and the rotation of the lid member 770 is stopped.

That is, the displacement of the lid member 770 from the closed state to the open state is performed by driving the drive motor KM4 to displace it to the intermediate state and by dropping the lid member 770 under load.

As a result, when the lid member 770 is displaced from the closed state to the open state, the section in which the drive motor KM4 is driven can be reduced to half of the entire section, so the energy consumption of the drive motor KM4 can be reduced.

Furthermore, the speed of displacement from the closed state to the intermediate state can be made to follow the rotation speed of the drive motor KM4, and the speed of displacement from the intermediate state to the open state can be made to follow the load of the lid member 770. The displacement speed from the closed state to the open state can be changed in two stages. Therefore, since the displacement speed of the lid member 770 can be changed without changing the displacement speed of the drive motor KM4, it is not necessary to complicate the control. As a result, the control can be simplified, and the occurrence of control failure can be suppressed.

A section in which the cover member 770 is displaced according to the rotation speed of the drive motor KM4 is called a first section, and a section in which the cover member 770 is displaced according to the load of the cover member 770 is called a second section. will be described with reference numeral DK2 attached to the second interval.

Next, referring to FIG. 64, the displacement of the lid member 770 when it is displaced from the open state to the closed state will be described.

As described above, in the open state, the projection 741a of the rotating member 741 is arranged on the front side (left side in FIG. The portion 771 is arranged on the back side of the rotating body 800 .

Next, as shown in FIG. 64(b), when the rotating member 741 is rotated approximately 90 degrees to position the protrusion 741a above the shaft of the rotating member 741, the first sliding groove 742b of the arm member 742 is moved. As the projection 741a is displaced, the shaft hole 742a is displaced downward in the gravity direction (downward in FIG. 64(b)).

Therefore, the second sliding groove 742c formed at the opposite end of the first sliding groove 742b is positioned above the shaft hole 742a in the gravitational direction (upper side in FIG. 64(b)). As a result, the protrusion 773a of the lid member 770 is guided by the second sliding groove 742c, and the curved lid portion 771 of the lid member 770 is rotated upward by about 45 degrees from the state where it is located on the back side of the rotating body 800. It is placed in the position where the

In addition, the lid member 770 displaced to the closed position (the position of FIG. 63(a)) is arranged in the game area (the front side of the game board 13), and is placed in the open position (the position of FIG. 63(c)). position) is placed outside the game area (on the back side of the game board 13). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game ball flowing down the game area from colliding with the rotating body 800 and rotating the rotating body 800 . In particular, in the present embodiment, as will be described later, the rotating body 800 is provided with an opening/closing member 870 that displaces toward the game area side. It is possible to suppress the opening (extending) of the opening/closing member 870 .

Also, since the lid member 770 is placed outside the game area in the open position, the displacement of the lid member 770 to the open position creates a space for the opening/closing member 870 to protrude into the game area. can be secured. Accordingly, the outer surface of the rotating body 800 can be brought closer to the game area side, and the opening/closing member 870 can be easily recognized by the player.

Further, the cover member 770 is rotatable about an axis substantially parallel to the rotation axis of the rotating body 800 and is formed in a curved plate shape along the outer surface of the rotating body 800. The space required for shifting between the position (covered position) and the open position (retracted position) can be reduced, so that space for arranging other members can be secured accordingly. In addition, by forming the lid member 770 in such a curved manner, the game ball flowing down the game area is suppressed from being stopped on the lid member 770 arranged in the position of the closed state, and is smoothly opened. can flow down to

Next, as shown in FIG. 64(c), when the rotating member 741 is further rotated approximately 90 degrees to displace the projection 71a to the right side of the axis of the rotating member 741, the first sliding groove 742b of the arm member 742 is displaced. is displaced to the rear side (right side in FIG. 64(c)) from the shaft hole 742a as the projection 741a is displaced.

Therefore, the second sliding groove 742c formed at the opposite end of the first sliding groove 742b is arranged on the front side (left side in FIG. 64(c)) of the shaft hole 742a. As a result, the protrusion 773 a of the lid member 770 is guided by the second sliding groove 742 c to place the curved lid portion 771 of the lid member 770 above the rotating body 800 .

In this case, as the lid member 770 is displaced, the center of gravity of the lid member 770 is displaced from the rotation axis of the lid member 770 to the front side. Therefore, during the transition from the intermediate state to the closed state, the load of the lid member 770 acts on the rotational force in the direction of displacing the lid member 770 from the open state to the closed state. Therefore, even when the driving of the drive motor KM4 is stopped, the lid member 770 can be continuously rotated by the load of the lid member 770 .

Therefore, the lid member 770 can be brought into the closed state by the load of the lid member 770, so that the lid member 770 can be reliably brought into the closed state.

Here, if the rotational displacement of the lid member 770 is caused only by the drive motor KM4, there is a possibility that the lid member 770 cannot be stopped at the normal position if the driving stop operation of the drive motor KM4 is deviated. Further, in the case where the rotating member 741 rotates in one direction as in the present embodiment, if the stopping operation of the drive motor KM4 is delayed, one rotation is required to return it to the normal position.

In contrast, in the present embodiment, the position where the lid member 770 is to be stopped can be mechanically stopped by using the load of the lid member 770, so that the deviation of the stop position of the lid member 770 can be suppressed. can.

Here, a game machine is known that includes driving means for generating a driving force, a displacement member displaced by the driving force of the driving means, and transmission means for transmitting the driving force to the displacement member. However, in the above-described conventional game machine, the state of transmission of the driving force from the driving means to the displacement member by the transmission means is always constant. It is displaced at a speed, and the displacement mode of such a displacement member cannot be changed. Therefore, there is a problem that the performance effect of the performance accompanying the displacement of the displacement member is insufficient.

The displacement speed of the displacement member can be changed by increasing or decreasing the driving speed of the driving means. In order to achieve the speed, it is necessary to arrange a sensor device that detects the position of the displacement member, and to control the output of the drive means to increase or decrease according to the detection result of the sensor device. Invite. In addition, the structure and control become complicated, resulting in a decrease in reliability.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the transmission means (the rotating member 741 and the arm member 742) includes the one-way clutch OW1, and the inner ring (first member) of the one-way clutch OW1 is connected to the outer ring (second member) of the one-way clutch OW1. On the other hand, when displaced in one direction, the rollers are engaged with the inner ring and the outer ring to transmit the driving force, and when the inner ring is displaced in the other direction with respect to the outer ring, the inner ring and the outer ring are displaced in the other direction. The engagement of the roller with the outer ring is released, the transmission of the driving force is cut off, and in the second section DK2 (predetermined section) of the displacement section of the lid member 770 (displacement member), the outer ring moves relative to the inner ring. Since it is displaced in one direction, the displacement speed of the lid member 770 in the second section DK2 can be made faster than the displacement speed of the lid member 770 in the other sections regardless of the driving state of the rotating member 741. . Therefore, the cover member 770 can be varied to enhance the presentation effect associated with the displacement of the cover member 770 .

In addition, regardless of the drive state of the drive motor KM4, the outer ring can be driven ahead of the inner ring in one direction. It can be driven, and there is no need to increase or decrease the drive speed of the drive motor KM4 in the middle of the displacement section of the lid member 770 (that is, depending on whether it is the first section DK1 or the second section DK2). As a result, the control can be simplified, the control cost can be reduced, and the operational reliability can be improved. Alternatively, in the second section DK2, the operation of the driving means can be stopped, and in this case, it is possible to reduce energy consumption.

In addition, in the driving state in which the inner ring is displaced in the other direction with respect to the outer ring, the engagement of the roller is released and the transmission of the driving force is interrupted, so that the displacing member is brought into a stopped state (driven state). The driving force of the driving means (driving motor KM4) in such a driving state can be used as the driving force for driving the rotating body 800. FIG. That is, by switching the driving direction of the driving means (driving motor KM4), the lid member 770 and the rotating body 800 can be displaced.

Further, the lid member 770 is formed rotatably, and its center of gravity is arranged at a position eccentric from the center of rotation. In the second section DK2, the weight of the lid member 770 displaces the outer ring in one direction. Since it is formed to be operable in one direction, the weight of the lid member 770 can be used to displace the outer ring in one direction ahead of the inner ring. That is, the displacement speed of the lid member 770 in the second section DK2 can be made faster than the displacement speed of the lid member 770 in the first section DK1. As a result, it is possible to change the displacement mode of the lid member 770 and enhance the presentation effect associated with the displacement of the displacement member.

Further, the driving force is transmitted by a main body portion 741b to which the outer ring of the one-way clutch OW1 is attached, and a projection 741a (pin portion) that protrudes from the main body portion 741b and is displaced from the rotation center of the main body portion 741c. and the arm member 742, the rotating member 741 is rotated by the outer ring, and the protrusion 741a is slid along the first sliding groove 742b. can be reciprocated on the other end side (second sliding groove 742c side). In this case, the other end side of the arm member 742 can reciprocate the lid member 770 between the open state position and the closed state position as the lid member 770 reciprocates. That is, the displacement direction of the lid member 770 can be switched without switching the driving direction of the drive motor KM4.

Further, in this case, the section of the second section DK can be formed in both of the reciprocating motions. The displacement speed of the lid member 770 can be increased. As a result, the displacement mode of the lid member 770 can be changed, and the presentation effect associated with the displacement of the lid member can be enhanced.

Next, displacement of the rotation restricting member 780 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 65(a) is a side view of the decoration unit 750 in the closed state, and FIG. 65(b) is a side view of the decoration unit 750 in the open state. 65(a) and 65(b) show a state in which the left side plate 765 of the box member 760 is seen transparently.

As shown in FIG. 65(a), when the lid member 770 is closed, the rotation restricting member 780 is pushed downward on the projection 782 side by the biasing force of the biasing spring SP5 (see FIG. 65). (a) is rotated clockwise about the axis of the shaft hole 781).

Therefore, the distance dimension L4 from the rotation axis of the rotating body 800 to the outside of the engaging projection 882 is made smaller than the distance dimension L5 from the rotation axis of the rotating body 800 to the tip of the projection 782 of the rotation restricting member 780 (L4 <L5).

Therefore, the rotating body 800 and the rotation restricting member 780 are not engaged with each other, and the rotating body 800 is allowed to rotate.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 65(b), when the lid member 770 is in the open state, the rotation restricting member 780 has a contact surface 783 displaced toward the rear side of the rotating body 800. The contact surface 783 is pressed downward (the state in which the shaft hole 781 is rotated counterclockwise about the axis of the shaft hole 781 in FIG. 65(b)).

Therefore, the distance dimension L4 from the rotation axis of the rotating body 800 to the outer side of the engaging projection 882 is made larger than the distance dimension L6 from the rotation axis of the rotating body 800 to the tip of the projection 782 of the rotation restricting member 780 (L6 <L4).

As a result, the protrusion 782 of the rotation restricting member 780 can be inserted inside the engaging protrusion 882 of the rotating body 800 in which the engaging protrusion 882 of the left rotating portion 880 is arranged at the lowest position in the gravity direction. That is, since the rotating body 800 and the rotation restricting member 780 are engaged with each other, the rotating body 800 cannot rotate. In the present embodiment, the position where the rotation of the rotating body 800 is disabled (the position where the protrusion 782 is inserted inside the engaging protrusion 882) is the position where the opening/closing member 870 of the rotating body 800, which will be described later, is in the open state. is set to

That is, the rotation restricting member 780 (rotation restricting means) that restricts the rotation of the rotating body 800 is such that the opening/closing member 870 (displacement member) is displaced to the open position (second position), and the other side of the displacement member is extended to the game area. Since the rotation of the rotator 800 is restricted when it is pulled out, the rotator 800 is rotated with the opening/closing member 870 extended, and the opening/closing member 870 interferes with other members positioned on the rotation trajectory. can be suppressed. In addition, it is possible to suppress the rotating body 800 from rotating due to the weight of the game ball rolling on the upper surface of the displacement member and the load acting when the displacement member receives the game ball flowing down the game area.

Here, a displaceable first member and a second member are provided, the first member covering at least a part of the second member invisibly, and a state arranged at the covering position. A gaming machine is known that is formed to be displaceable between a retracted position that reduces the area that covers the second member invisibly. According to this gaming machine, the second member is exposed by displacing the first member to the retracted position from a state in which the first member is arranged at the covering position and the second member is invisible to the player. It is possible to perform an effect that is visually recognized by the player.

However, in the above-described conventional game machine, the second member is formed to be displaceable, so there is a possibility that the second member will be displaced when the second member is exposed. Therefore, there is a problem that the player cannot visually recognize the second member in a proper state, and the presentation effect is lowered.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the lid member 770 (first member) can restrict the displacement of the rotating body 800 (second member) in the state of being displaced to the open position (retracted position). Since it is formed, the rotating body 800 can be visually recognized by the player in an appropriate state, and the production effect can be ensured. That is, when performing the effect of displacing the lid member 770 to the open position and exposing the rotating body 800 , the displacement of the lid member 770 to the open position, which is unavoidable for the effect, is performed by rotating the lid member 770 . It is used as means for restricting the displacement of body 800 . Therefore, there is no need to separately provide a mechanism for restricting the displacement of the rotating body 800 or perform control, and the structure can be simplified accordingly.

Further, the rotating body 800 has an outer peripheral surface formed asymmetrically with respect to the center of rotation, as will be described later (see FIG. 67). Therefore, the rotating body 800 is formed to be rotatable and its center of gravity position is eccentric from the center of rotation, so that the degree of freedom in designing the rotating body 800 can be enhanced. That is, the rotating body 800 does not need to have a shape in which the center of gravity is positioned at the center of rotation, and a shape asymmetrical with respect to the rotation axis can be adopted, so that the rendering effect of the rotating body 800 can be enhanced. On the other hand, if the center of gravity of the rotating body 800 is eccentric in this way, the rotating body 800 will be displaced to the closed state position due to its gravity rotating around the center of rotation (there is a risk of being rotated). A configuration in which the lid member 770 is formed so as to be capable of regulating the displacement of the rotating body 800 is particularly effective, whereby the rotating body 800 can be visually recognized by the player in an appropriate state, and the production effect can be ensured.

Note that the rotating body 800 may be formed symmetrically about the axis. In this case, by forming the rotor 800 from two or more members having different specific gravities, the center of gravity can be arranged at a different position from the rotation axis. For example, by forming one half of the surface from a metal material and forming the other half from a flexible material, the center of gravity can be positioned on the side of the metal material, which generally has a higher specific gravity than the flexible material.

Next, the configuration of rotating body 800 will be described with reference to FIGS. 66 to 68. FIG. 66(a) is a front view of the rotating body 800, FIG. 66(b) is a side view of the rotating body 800 as viewed in the direction of arrow LXVIb in FIG. 66(a), and FIG. Fig. 66(a) is a side view of the rotating body 800 as viewed in the direction of arrow LXVIc in Fig. 66(a); 67 is an exploded perspective front view of the rotating body 800, and FIG. 68 is an exploded perspective rear view of the rotating body 800. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 66 to 68, the rotating body 800 is formed in a cylindrical shape by combining a plurality of members. Rotating body 800 includes a base plate 810 arranged on a shaft portion, and a first display portion 830, a second display portion 840, a third display portion 850 and a fourth display portion 830, which are arranged to surround the base plate 810 and are combined in an annular shape. A display portion 860, a right rotating portion 89 arranged at one end in the axial direction, a left rotating portion 880 arranged at the other end in the axial direction, and an opening/closing member arranged inside the first display portion 830. 870.

The base plate 810 has a substantially L-shaped cross section when viewed in the axial direction, and is formed in a shape extending in the axial direction. The base plate 810 is formed with a right end portion 811 and a left end portion 812 protruding outward from both left and right ends.

The right end portion 811 is formed to protrude from the right side of the base plate 810 in a front view (the right side in FIG. 66(a)) in an annular shape. The right end portion 811 is mainly formed with a tip portion 811a that partially protrudes from the projecting tip of the right end portion 811 and a communication hole 811b in the annular inner portion.

The tip portion 811a further protrudes in the axial direction from the tip portion of the right end portion 811, and the protruding region in the right side view (viewed in the direction of FIG. 66(c)) extends inside the engaging portion 764e of the right side plate 764. is set smaller than the area of The tip portion 811a is inserted inside the engaging portion 764e of the right side plate 764 as described above. As a result, the base plate 810 and the right side plate 764 (cover member 770) are engaged with each other. As a result, the base plate 810 can be stopped against rotational displacement of each display surface (first display section 830, second display section 840, third display section 850, and fourth display section 860) to be described later.

The communication hole 811b is an opening through which a wiring (not shown) connected to the LED board 820 described later is inserted, and is formed through the right side surface of the base plate 810 in front view. Thereby, wiring can be inserted.

The left end portion 812 is formed to protrude from the left side of the base plate 810 in a front view (the left side in FIG. 66(a)) in an annular shape. The left end portion 812 is mainly formed with a tip portion 812a projecting from the lower semicircle of the left end portion 812 and a communication hole 812b in the annular inner portion.

The tip portion 812a further protrudes in the axial direction from the tip portion of the left end portion 812, and has a lower semicircular shape in a left side view (viewed in the direction of FIG. 66(b)).

The communication hole 812b is a path through which a ball thrown into the rotating body 800 by an opening/closing member 870, which will be described later, is discharged to the outside of the rotating body 800. FIG. The communication hole 812 b has an inner diameter larger than that of the ball and substantially the same as the through hole 733 a formed in the gear cover 733 .

The communication hole 812b is an opening connected to the through hole 733a of the gear cover 733, and the projection distance of the left end portion 812 is set to a distance that contacts the through hole 733a. Furthermore, a projection 733b is formed on the upper hemisphere of the end face of the through hole 733a. The protrusion distance of the protrusion 733b is set substantially equal to the protrusion distance of the tip portion 812a. As a result, base plate 810 and gear cover 733 (left transmission member 730) are engaged with each other. As a result, the base plate 810 can be stopped against rotational displacement of each display surface (first display section 830, second display section 840, third display section 850, and fourth display section 860) to be described later.

A reverse rotation prevention member 813 is rotatably disposed on the bottom surface of the base plate 810 . The reverse rotation prevention member 813 is formed in a substantially circular shape when viewed from the top, and has an inclined projection 813a formed on one end side. A biasing spring SP6 is arranged between the reverse rotation prevention member 813 and the base plate 810, thereby always biasing the protrusion 813a to the left side (left side in FIG. 66(a)) when viewed from the front. It is said that

The right rotating portion 890 is formed in a plate shape with a predetermined thickness and has an annular shape when viewed from the side. The right rotation part 890 is formed such that the inside diameter of the ring is larger than the size of the right end part 811 of the base plate 810 . Thereby, the right end portion 811 of the base plate 810 can be inserted inside the right rotating portion 890 . Further, the right rotating portion 890 is mainly formed with a shaft hole 891 penetrating in the left-right direction and a sliding groove 892 curved around the shaft hole 891 and opened.

The shaft hole 891 is a hole into which the shaft portion 872 of the opening/closing member 870 described later is inserted, and is formed with an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the shaft portion 872 . Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the shaft portion 872 of the opening/closing member 870 from being displaced with respect to the first display portion 830 .

The sliding groove 892 is formed in a curved shape centering on the shaft hole 891 , and its radius is set to be the same as the separation distance between the projection 871 and the shaft portion 872 of the opening/closing member 870 . Accordingly, by inserting the projection 871 of the opening/closing member 870 into the sliding groove 892 , the projection 871 can slide inside the sliding groove 892 when the opening/closing member 870 is displaced.

The counterclockwise rotating portion 880 is formed in a plate shape with a predetermined thickness and has an annular shape when viewed from the side. The left rotating portion 880 is formed such that the inside diameter of the ring is larger than the size of the left end portion 812 of the base plate 810 . Thereby, the left end portion 812 of the base plate 810 can be inserted inside the left rotating portion 880 . The counterclockwise rotation portion 880 mainly includes a wall portion 881 projecting from the inner edge portion in an annular shape, an engaging projection 882 projecting from the side wall, and a locking portion 883 in which inclined surfaces are continuously arranged on the inner edge portion. formed with.

The wall portion 881 is formed so as to protrude to the left side of the rotating body 800 when viewed from the front. The wall portion 881 has a gear tooth surface 881a engraved on the outer peripheral surface of the projecting tip, and has a communicating hole 881b that opens inward. The tooth surface 881a meshes with the transmission gear 881d as described above. Thereby, the driving force of the driving motor KM4 can be transmitted to the rotating body 800. FIG.

The communication hole 881b is an opening that communicates the internal space and the external space of the rotating body 800, and can discharge the ball thrown into the rotating body 800 by opening the opening/closing member 870, which will be described later.

The engagement protrusion 882 is a protrusion with which the rotation restricting member 780 is engaged, as described above. The engaging protrusion 882 is formed to protrude from the left side surface of the left rotating portion 880 in a front view. Two engaging projections 882 are formed at positions spaced apart by a predetermined distance, and the projection 782 of the rotation restricting member 780 can be inserted between them.

The locking portion 883 has a serrated cross section. When the counterclockwise rotation portion 880 is arranged on the base plate 810 , the tip of the protrusion 813 a of the reverse rotation prevention member 813 is in contact with the locking portion 883 . As a result, when a rotational force that rotates the left rotating portion 880 in one direction acts, the protrusion 813a can be slid along the inclined surface of the locking portion 883 to rotate the left rotating portion 880. , when a rotational force that rotates the counterclockwise rotating portion 880 in the other direction acts, the surface of the engaging portion 883 is caught by the projection 813a and rotation is suppressed.

As a result, it is possible to restrict the rotating body 800 from rotating in the direction opposite to the direction in which it is rotated by the rotational driving force of the drive motor KM4. It is possible to suppress reverse rotation of the rotating body due to a collision or the like.

The first display portion 830 to the fourth display portion 860 are each formed in the same curved shape, and can be formed into a single circular ring shape by connecting the end surfaces thereof. In addition, the inner diameters of the first display portion 830 to the fourth display portion 860 formed into one ring are set to be substantially the same as the outer diameters of the left and right rotating portions 880 and 890 . Accordingly, by arranging the respective display portions 830 to 860 on the left and right rotating portions 880 and 890, the first display portion 830 to the fourth display portion 860 can be formed in one columnar shape.

Characters and patterns are drawn on each of the first display portion 830 to the fourth display portion 860, and as described above, the driving force is transmitted from the counterclockwise rotation portion 880 to rotate and display each character. The pattern can be visually recognized by the player.

The first display portion 830 mainly includes an opening 831 opened in its curved surface and a bearing portion 832 that opens toward the shaft and protrudes in a U-shape.

The opening 831 is an opening in which an opening/closing member 870 to be described later is arranged, and is formed to have an inner diameter substantially the same as the outer shape of the opening/closing member 870 . The bearing portion 832 is formed in a size that allows the shaft portion 872 of the opening/closing member 870 to be inserted into the opened U-shaped portion. Therefore, by inserting the opening/closing member 870 into the opening 831 and inserting the shaft portion 872 of the opening/closing member 870 into the bearing portion 832 , the opening/closing member 870 can be rotationally displaced with respect to the first display portion 830 . A description of the displacement mode of the opening/closing member 870 will be given later.

When power is supplied to the LED board 820, the LED lights mounted on the LED board 820 can emit light. Also, the LED board 820 is attached to the back side of the base plate 810 .

Next, with reference to FIG. 69, opening and closing of the opening/closing member 870 will be described. FIG. 69(a) is a side view of the rotating body 800 with the opening/closing member 870 closed. FIG. 69(b) is a side view of the rotating body 800 with the opening/closing member 870 in the open state. In FIG. 69, when the opening/closing member 870 overlaps another member, the outer diameter thereof is indicated by a dashed line.

The closed state of the opening/closing member 870 is a state in which the outer peripheral surface of the opening/closing member 870 is arranged substantially parallel to the outer peripheral surface of the first display section 830 . On the other hand, the open state of the opening/closing member 870 is a state in which the outer peripheral surface of the opening/closing member 870 intersects the outer peripheral surface of the first display portion 830 .

As shown in FIG. 69(a), the rotating body 800 in which the opening/closing member 870 is in the closed state is such that the projection 871 of the opening/closing member 870 is aligned with one end side of the sliding groove 892 of the right rotating portion 890 (in FIG. 69(a), the shaft portion 872).

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 69(b), when the opening/closing member 870 is in the open state, the projection 871 of the opening/closing member 870 is located on the other end side of the sliding groove 892 of the right rotating portion 890. As shown in FIG. That is, the opening/closing member 870 is displaced by the protrusion 871 sliding inside the sliding groove 892 of the right rotating portion 890 .

Next, displacement of the projection 871 will be described with reference to FIG. 70(a) and (b) are side views of the decoration unit 750. FIG. 70(a) and 70(b), the right side plate 764 of the box member 760 is shown transparently.

FIG. 70(a) shows a state in which the decoration unit 750 is closed and the opening/closing member 870 is closed. FIG. 70(b) shows a state in which the decoration unit 750 is in the open state and the opening/closing member 870 is in the open state.

As shown in FIG. 70( a ), when the decorative unit 750 is closed, the outer edge of the right lid portion 773 is brought into contact with the projection 871 . When the decoration unit 750 is in the closed state, the outer diameter L7 from the rotation axis of the lower half surface of the right lid portion 773 is made smaller than the distance L8 from the axis of the right rotation portion 890 to one end side of the slide groove 892 (L7 <L8).

Also, the difference in dimension between L7 and L8 is set to be substantially the same as the outer diameter of the projection 871 . Therefore, when the outer edge of the right lid portion 773 is in contact with the protrusion 871 , the protrusion 871 is displaced toward one end of the slide groove 892 . As a result, the opening/closing member 870 is closed. That is, when the decoration unit 750 is closed, it is possible to prevent the opening/closing member 870 from being displaced to the open state.

As shown in FIG. 70(b), when the decoration unit 750 is opened, the concave portion 773b formed in the outer edge portion is displaced as the right lid portion 773 is displaced. In this case, the projection 871 is inserted inside the recess 773b. Thereby, the projection 871 can be displaced to the other side of the sliding groove 892 . As a result, the opening/closing member 870 is opened by the biasing force of the biasing spring SP7 arranged between the shaft portion 872 and the first display portion 830 .

As described above, the opening/closing member 870 can be displaced to the open state according to the displacement of the lid member 770 . Therefore, since it is not necessary to dispose a drive source for driving the opening/closing member 870 in the rotating body 800, the rotating body 800 can be made small.

Further, the drive motor KM4 for displacing the opening/closing member 870 can also be used as driving means for displacing the cover member 770. FIG. In this case, when the opening/closing member 870 and the lid member 770 are displaced by driving forces of separate driving means, the opening/closing member 870 and the lid member 770 may interfere with each other if control failure occurs. and lid member 770 can be mechanically connected to synchronize their displacements, so that interference between opening/closing member 870 and lid member 770 can be suppressed.

As shown in FIG. 70( b ), when the opening/closing member 870 is opened, the leading end side of rotation is arranged above the winning opening 761 a of the box member 760 . As a result, a ball thrown from a ball throwing portion 711c of the ball receiving base 710, which will be described later, can be dropped onto the upper surface of the opening/closing member 870. As shown in FIG.

In this case, the open/close member 870 is arranged above the shaft portion 872 on the rotating distal end side. Therefore, the ball falling on the upper surface can be rolled toward the inside of the rotating body 800 . A game ball rolled into the rotating body 800 rolls on the upper surface of a base plate 810 arranged inside the rotating body 800 . Further, since the base plate 810 is inclined downward toward the left end portion 812 side, the ball rolling on the upper surface of the base plate 810 rolls toward the left end portion 812 side and rotates from the inside thereof. It can be discharged outside the body 800 . That is, the inside of the rotating body 800 can be used as a ball-throwing path.

Further, as described above, the rotating body 800 is provided with the rotation restricting member 780 that restricts the rotation of the rotating body 800. Therefore, the cover member 770 is displaced to the open position to expose the rotating body 800. Further, by displacing the opening/closing member 870, the effect of the presentation can be enhanced. On the other hand, the rotating body 800 may be rotated (rotated). Therefore, the configuration in which the cover member 770 displaced to the open position is formed so as to be able to regulate the displacement of the rotating body 800 is particularly effective, thereby allowing the player to visually recognize the rotating body 800 in an appropriate state. It is possible to ensure the performance effect.

Here, a game machine is known which is provided with a rotating member which is rotatably formed and whose outer surface around the rotation axis is arranged so as to be visible to the player. According to this gaming machine, the rotating member is formed in a cylindrical shape, and the display (pattern) on the outer peripheral surface can be visually recognized by the player while rotating the rotating member or stopping the rotating member. However, in the above-described conventional game machine, there is a problem that the rotating member is used only as a member for holding a display on its outer surface for the player to see, and the utilization of the rotating member is insufficient. . That is, the rotating member is formed relatively large because it is necessary to maintain a display that is visible to the player. Therefore, while the occupied space increases, the portion other than the outer surface is not utilized.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the rotating body 800 (rotating member) communicates the internal space formed therein with the outside, and has an opening 831 and a communicating hole 881b through which a game ball can pass. Since the (communication port) is provided, the game ball flowing down the game area can flow into or out of the internal space through the opening 831 and the communication hole 881b. Therefore, the internal space of the rotating body 800, which is a dead space, can be made to function as a game ball storage space or a ball-throwing passage, and the rotating body 800 can be utilized accordingly.

In addition, in the above-described conventional game machine, since it is only possible to form an effect mode in which the display on the outer peripheral surface is visually recognized by the player when the rotating member is stopped, the change in the effect mode is poor and the effect is insufficient. There was a problem that

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, since the opening/closing member 870 (displacement member) is displaceably disposed on the outer surface of the rotating body 800 (rotating member), the outer surface of the rotating body 800 rotates or stops. In addition to the presentation mode in which the player visually recognizes the display of , it is possible to form the presentation mode in which the opening/closing member 870 is displaced.

When the cover member 770 (displacement member) is displaced to the closed position (first position), a part of the outer surface of the rotating body 800 (rotating member) is formed by the open/close member 870, so that the outer shape of the rotating body 800 is changed. It can be made smaller, and the space required for the rotating body 800 to rotate can be made smaller accordingly. On the other hand, when the opening/closing member 870 is displaced to the open position (second position), the opening/closing member 870 protrudes outward in the radial direction of the rotating body 800, so that the displacement of the opening/closing member 870 can easily be visually recognized by the player. It is possible to enhance the performance effect. Further, by rotating the rotating body 800 with the opening/closing member 870 placed at the closed position, and disposing (displacing) the opening/closing member 870 at the open position when the rotation is stopped, the outer surface of the rotating body 800 can be The visually recognizable portion (opening/closing member 870) can be projected outward in the radial direction of the rotating body 800, which can enhance interest.

Also, an LED board 820 that emits light is arranged on the base plate 810 in the internal space of the rotating body 800 . Therefore, by setting the opening/closing member 870 to the open position, the outer surface of the rotating body 800 is opened, the internal space is communicated with the outside, and the light emitted from the LED board 820 can be emitted to the outside. On the other hand, when the opening/closing member 870 is in the closed position, the outer surface of the rotating body 800 is closed, and the light emission from the LED board 820 can be blocked from being emitted to the outside. As a result, the performance effect can be enhanced.

Here, in order to make the rotating body 800 rotatable and displaceably displace the opening/closing member 870 on the rotating body 800, a driving means is required for each of the rotating body 800 and the opening/closing member 870, which increases the product cost. increases. Moreover, if the driving means for displacing the opening/closing member 870 is mounted on the rotating body 800, the weight of the rotating body 800 increases, making it difficult to start or stop the rotation of the rotating body 800 smoothly.

In contrast, according to the present embodiment, the opening/closing member 870 is displaced along with the displacement of the lid member 770, and the lid member 770 and the rotating body 800 are displaced by the same driving motor KM4. KM4 can also be used to rotate the rotating body 800 and displace the opening/closing member 870 . Therefore, it is possible to reduce the product cost. Further, since it is not necessary to mount a driving means for displacing the opening/closing member on the rotating body 800, the weight of the rotating body 800 can be reduced, and the rotation of the rotating body 800 can be smoothly started or stopped.

In addition, since the opening 831 (first communication port) and the communication hole 881b (second communication port) are formed at different positions, the opening 831 is used as an inflow port for inflowing game balls from the outside into the internal space, and the communication hole 881b can be used as an outlet for discharging game balls from the internal space to the outside. That is, even if the rotating body 800 (rotating member) is not rotated (maintained in a stopped state), the rotating body 800 can be utilized as a ball-throwing passage for game balls.

Furthermore, since the opening 831 is formed in the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 800 and the communication hole 881b is formed in the axial end surface of the rotating body 800, the game ball can flow into the internal space of the rotating body 800 (rotating member). The inflow can be easily visually recognized by the player, and the game ball can be discharged while the rotating body 800 is maintained in a stopped state.

That is, the rotating body 800 has an outer surface that is visible to the player, and an opening 831 (inflow port) is formed on the outer surface, so that the player can easily see the inflow of the game ball. On the other hand, if the communication hole 881b is formed on the outer surface of the rotating body 800, and the rotating body 800 is arranged at the rotational position where the communicating hole 881b is upward, the game ball cannot flow out from the internal space. Since the communication hole 881b (outflow port) is formed in the end surface of the rotating body 800 in the rotation axis direction, regardless of the rotational position of the rotating body 800, a state in which the game ball can flow out from the internal space can be formed.

A displaceable opening/closing member 870 (displacement member) is disposed inside the opening 831 (first communication port), and when the opening/closing member 870 is displaced to the closed position (first position), the opening 831 When the opening/closing member 870 is blocked and the opening/closing member 870 is displaced to the open position (second position), the opening 831 is opened, so that the inflow of game balls through the opening 831 is switched between the blocking state and the allowing state. be able to.

Furthermore, one side of the opening/closing member 870 (displacement member) is rotatably supported by the rotating body 800 (rotating member), and when the opening/closing member 870 is displaced to the open position (second position), the one side and the opposite side are rotatably supported. Since the other side is projected to the game area, the upper surface of the opening/closing member 870 can receive the game ball flowing down the game area. Therefore, when the opening 831 is formed as an inflow port, the opening/closing member 870 can be used to make it easier for the game ball flowing down the game area to flow into the internal space of the rotating body 800 .

In addition, it is possible to make it easier to stop the game ball flowing down the game area on the upper surface of the opening/closing member 870 . Therefore, for example, when an inlet for game balls is formed in the rotating body 800, the opening/closing member 870 can be used to make it easier for the game balls flowing down the game area to flow into the inlet. In this case, if the opening/closing member 870 catches the game ball flowing down the game area, the rotating body 800 may be rotated by the load acting at that time and the weight of the game ball rolling on the upper surface of the displacement member. . Therefore, the configuration in which the cover member 770 displaced to the open state position displaces the rotation restricting member 780 to restrict the displacement of the rotating body 800 is particularly effective. It is possible to easily maintain a state in which the area protrudes at a predetermined position.

A shaft portion 872 of the opening/closing member 870 is arranged on the rotating direction side of the rotating body 800 . In other words, one side of the opening/closing member 870 (displacement member) is positioned forward of the other side in the rotational direction of the rotating body 800 (rotating member). Therefore, even if the opening/closing member 870 interferes with a member disposed around the rotating member when the rotating body 800 is rotated, the force generated by such interference closes the opening/closing member 870 (displaces it to the closed position). It can be made to act in the direction of That is, it is possible to prevent the opening/closing member 870 from interfering with other members and being displaced to the overhang (second position) when the rotating body 800 rotates. In addition, it is possible to prevent the opening/closing member 870 from engaging with another member and hindering the rotation of the rotating body 800 .

In addition, since the base plate 810 (fixed member) arranged in the internal space of the rotating body 800 is non-rotatable with respect to the box member 760 (base member) in which the rotating body 800 is rotatably arranged, By rolling the game ball flowing into the internal space of the rotating body 800 from the opening 831 toward the communication hole 881b on the upper surface of the base plate 810, the game ball rampages in the internal space as the rotating body 800 rotates. Alternatively, it is possible to prevent the game ball from staying in the internal space due to hindrance to rolling.

As described above, the opening/closing operation of the opening/closing member 870 is restricted by the displacement of the lid member 770, so that the opening/closing member 870 displaced to the open state (second position) does not interfere with members around the rotating body 800. can be suppressed.

As described above, the rotator 800 has the communication hole 811b through which the wiring to the LED board 820 attached to the back side of the base plate 810 is inserted, opposite to the end face of the rotator 800 in which the communication hole 881b is formed. formed on the end face of the Therefore, it is possible to easily secure a space that can be used for each of the communication hole 881b and the communication hole 811b.

That is, when electrical wiring is to be performed on an LED substrate disposed inside the rotating body 800, if the wiring is inserted from the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 800, the wiring will get entangled due to the rotation of the rotating body 800. Although it is preferable to wire from the rotator 800, if an opening into which the game balls flow in and an opening from which the game balls flow out are formed on both axial end surfaces of the rotating body 800, it becomes difficult to secure a space for the wiring to pass through.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, since the inlet of the game ball of the rotating body 800 can be the outer peripheral surface, one of the axial end faces of the rotating body 800 is used as the outlet of the game ball, and the other is used for inserting the wiring. Since it can be used as an opening, it is possible to easily secure a space for inserting the wiring.

As a result, the game ball can be discharged smoothly through the communication hole 881b, and the wiring work to the opening of the electrical connection line (the wiring to the LED board 820) can be easily performed. In addition, since the communicating holes 881b and 811b can be separated from each other as much as possible, interference between the game ball rolling in the internal space of the rotating body 800 to the communicating hole 881b and the electrical connection line can be easily suppressed.

Next, the lower displacement unit 400 and the rotation unit 700 will be described with reference to FIGS. 71 and 72. FIG. 71 is a front view of the lower displacement unit 400 and the rotation unit 700, and FIG. 72 is a top view of the lower displacement unit 400 as viewed in the direction of arrow LXXII in FIG. 71 and 72 show the lower displacement unit 400 in the retracted state.

As shown in FIGS. 71 and 72, the lower displacement unit 400 and the rotation unit 700 are arranged adjacent to each other in the left-right direction. In addition, the lower displacement unit 400 and the rotation unit 700 in the front-rear direction (vertical direction in FIG. 72) have the emission opening 471 of the lower displacement member 440 arranged at the approximately central position of the ball bearing table 710 in the front-rear direction.

Next, with reference to FIG. 73, a manner of throwing a ball from the lower displacement unit 400 to the rotation unit 700 will be described. 73 is a front view of the lower displacement unit 400 and the rotation unit 700. FIG. Note that FIG. 73 illustrates a state in which the lower displacement unit 400 is arranged in the first extended state.

As shown in FIG. 73, the lower displacement unit 400 is in the first overhanging state, and the ball receiving portion 467 disposed inside the lower displacement member 440 receives a ball inside (a ball receiving operation is performed). ), the ball arranged inside the ball receiving portion 467 is ejected to the outside of the lower displacement member 440 from the emission opening 471 of the lower displacement member 440 as described above.

The ball ejected from the exit opening 471 of the lower displacement member 440 freely falls onto the ball receiving base 710 of the rotating unit 700 arranged on the right side in the front view. As a result, the ball can be thrown from the lower displacement unit 400 to the rotor 800 .

Next, with reference to FIGS. 74 and 75, the configuration of ball cradle 710 will be described. 74(a) is a top view of the ball cradle 710, FIG. 74(b) is a front view of the ball cradle 710, and FIG. 74(c) is LXXIVc-LXXIVc of FIG. 74(a). 7 is a cross-sectional view of ball cradle 710 at line; FIG. FIG. 75 is an exploded perspective view of the ball cradle 710. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 74 and 75, the ball cradle 710 includes a box-shaped plate receiving portion 711, a solenoid 712 disposed inside the plate receiving portion 711, and a solenoid 712 connected to the plate receiving portion 711. and a cover member 714 covering the solenoid 712 .

The plate receiving portion 711 includes a bottom plate 711a forming a bottom surface, a standing portion 711b erected on the edge of the bottom plate 711a, a ball throwing portion 711c protruding from a portion of the outer edge of the bottom plate 711a, and a ball throwing portion 711c. and a shaft hole 711d penetrating a standing portion 711b erected on the edge of the shaft.

The bottom plate 711a is bent downward toward the ball feeding portion 711c, which will be described later. As a result, the ball thrown to the upper portion of the bottom plate 711a can roll toward the ball-throwing portion 711c due to its deflection (inclination).

The bottom plate 711a is made of a flexible material, and the bottom surface of the bottom plate 711a (bottom surface in FIG. 74(c)) is textured to form fine irregularities on the surface. As a result, when the bottom plate 711a is molded, the heat shrinkage ratio is made different between the top surface and the bottom surface, so that the bottom plate 711a can be easily bent toward the bottom surface. That is, when the bottom surface to which texturing is applied is thermally shrunk due to the unevenness, it is difficult for a force to act in the direction of convexly curving the bottom plate side. On the other hand, since the upper surface side is formed flat, a pulling force acts in the horizontal direction when thermally shrunk, and the end portion tends to change upward (the upper surface side tends to form a concave curve). Therefore, it is possible to easily bend in the direction in which the balls roll easily when thermally shrunk. As a result, it is possible to suppress defective products when the bottom plate 711a is molded.

The erected portion 711b is a wall portion erected upward in the gravitational direction (upper side in FIG. 74(c)) from the outer edge of the ball feeding portion 711c. The erected distance of the erected portion 711b is set larger than the outer diameter of the sphere. As a result, it is possible to prevent the ball thrown to the upper part of the bottom plate 711a from falling downward from the edge thereof. In this embodiment, the standing dimension of the standing portion 711b is set to approximately 1.5 times the diameter of the sphere.

Also, the standing portion 711b is formed by connecting a central standing portion 711b1 that divides the area of the bottom plate 711a into two to the standing portion 711b. The upper area of the bottom plate 711a is divided into an area in which a ball is thrown on one side and an area in which a solenoid 712 (to be described later) is arranged on the other side by the central standing portion 711b1.

The ball feeding portion 711c is formed on the front side of the bottom plate 711a. In addition, the position in the left-right direction (left-right direction in FIG. 74(a)) is arranged on the right side (right side in FIG. 74) of the substantially central position of the bottom plate 711a. Further, the ball feeding portion 711c protrudes from the bottom plate and thus is curved downward. As a result, the ball thrown from the bottom plate 711a can drop downward through the ball-throwing portion 711c. A prize winning opening 761a of the cover member 770 is provided on the lower side of the ball throwing section 711c (see FIG. 72), and the ball falling from the ball throwing section 711c can be thrown into the prize winning opening 761a.

A shaft portion 713a of a displacement member 713, which will be described later, is inserted into the shaft hole 711d. As a result, the displacement member 713 can be rotationally displaced about the axis of the shaft hole 711d.

The solenoid 712 can piston-displace the shaft inserted inside the solenoid 712 by applying electric power. A transmission member 712 a is attached to the shaft of the solenoid 712 . The transmission member 712a is a member that transmits the driving force of the solenoid 712 to a displacement member 713, which will be described later.

The displacement member 713 is formed to have a C-shaped cross section, and mainly includes a protrusion 713b protruding outward from the C-shape at one end and a shaft portion 713a protruding inward from the C-shape at both ends.

The protrusion 713b is a protrusion inserted into the communication hole 712a1 of the solenoid 712, and is formed in a cylindrical shape with an outer diameter larger than the inner diameter of the communication hole 712a1. Thereby, the displacement of the solenoid 712 is transmitted to the displacement member 713 via the transmission member 712a.

The shaft portion 713a is a shaft inserted into the shaft hole 711d. By inserting the shaft portion 713a into the shaft hole 711d, the displacement member 713 can rotate about the axis of the shaft portion 713a. That is, the displacement member 713 is driven by the displacement of the solenoid 712 .

The cover member 714 is formed to have an external shape larger than the external shape of the solenoid 712 , is arranged above the solenoid 712 arranged on the upper part of the bottom plate 711 a, and is fastened and fixed to the plate receiver 711 . Thereby, the solenoid 712 can be fixed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 76, a description will be given of the ball falling onto the ball receiving base 710. FIG. 76(a) and 76(b) are cross-sectional views of the ball cradle 710. FIG. 76(a) and 76(b) correspond to the cross section of the ball cradle 710 of FIG. 74(c).

As shown in FIG. 76, the ball thrown from the lower displacement member 440 of the lower displacement unit 400 freely falls in the direction of gravity, and the shooting action of the ball receiving portion 467 causes the ball to fall toward the rotation unit 700 (right side in FIG. 76(a)). ). That is, the ball is dropped onto the bottom plate 711a of the ball receiving table 710 in the lower right direction in a front view.

In this case, as described above, the bottom plate 711a is bent downward toward the ball-feeding portion 711c, and the ball-feeding portion 711c is formed on the right side of the bottom plate 711a. can be made into an inclined surface that slopes downward toward the right side. Therefore, the displacement direction of the ball and the tilting direction of the bottom plate 711a on which the ball falls can be made parallel to each other.

As a result, as shown in FIG. 76(b), it is possible to prevent the ball falling on the bottom plate 711a from bouncing upward (upward in FIG. 76(b)). Therefore, the ball thrown from the lower displacement member 440 of the lower displacement unit 400 to the ball cradle 710 of the rotary unit 700 can be prevented from falling from the ball cradle 710 .

Furthermore, the ball that has fallen to the bottom plate 711a can be rolled toward the ball feeding portion 711c by the momentum of the drop. Therefore, the rolling time of the ball up to the ball feeding portion 711c can be shortened. As a result, the ball thrown from the lower displacement member 440 to the ball receiving base 710 can be thrown smoothly.

Next, with reference to FIG. 77, light emission of ball cradle 710 will be described. 77(a) and (b) are schematic cross-sectional views of the rotation unit 700 along line LXXVII-LXXVII in FIG. FIG. 77(a) shows the decoration unit 750 in the closed state, and FIG. 77(b) shows the decoration unit 750 in the open state.

As shown in FIG. 77(a), when the decorative unit 750 is arranged in the closed state, light is emitted to the ball receiving base 710 by an LED base 721 arranged on the rear side of the rear base 720. .

More specifically, the light emitted from the LEDs 721 a of the LED base 721 is reflected toward the back side of the lid member 770 to enter the bottom plate 711 a of the ball receiving base 710 . Further, as described above, since the bottom surface of the bottom plate 711a is textured, incident light can be diffusely reflected due to unevenness of the texture. Thereby, the entire bottom surface of the ball receiving base 710 can be illuminated.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 77(b), when the decoration unit 750 is arranged in the open state, the transparent portion 771a is formed on the lid member 770 as described above, so that the LEDs 721a of the LED base 721 are The light is transmitted without being reflected by the lid member 770 . Since the rotating body 800 is formed inside the cover member 770 , the light can be reflected by the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 800 and made incident on the ball support 710 .

Further, in this case, by rotating the third display portion 850 of the rotating body 800 toward the ball receiving base 710 (the upper side in FIG. 77(b)), the LEDs 821 of the LED board 820 arranged on the back side of the base plate 810 emit light. The light can be reflected by the inner wall of the rotating body 800 and emitted from the third display unit 850 .

As described above, the inner wall of the third display portion 850 is textured to form a plurality of unevenness on the surface. Therefore, the third display unit 850 makes it easier to emit light to the outside of the rotating body 800 than other display units. Therefore, it is preferable to dispose the third display unit 850 on the ball cradle 710 side.

Next, the detailed configuration of the upper displacement unit 900 will be described with reference to FIGS. 78 to 84. FIG. First, the structure for displacing the upper displacement member 940 will be described with reference to FIGS. 78 to 80. FIG.

78 is a front view of the upper displacement unit 900. FIG. 79 is an exploded perspective front view of the upper displacement unit 900. FIG. 80 is an exploded rear perspective view of the upper displacement unit 900. FIG. 78 to 80 illustrate a state in which the upper displacement member 940 is arranged at the retracted position (the position that is arranged highest with respect to the base member 910).

As shown in FIGS. 78 to 80, the upper displacement unit 900 includes a base member 910 arranged on the bottom wall portion 301 (see FIG. 6) of the rear case 300, and a base member 910 arranged inside the base member 910. a transmission member 920, a rotation member 930 rotatably connected to the base member 910 and displaced along with the displacement of the transmission member 920, and a rotation member 930 having one end slidably displaceably connected to the base member 410. and an upper displacement member 940 that is displaced by being connected to the rotary member 930 and driven by the rotation member 930 .

The base member 910 is formed by combining two oblong rectangular plate members in the front-back direction, and includes a front base 911 arranged on the front side and a rear base 912 arranged on the rear side. A transmission member 920 and a rotation member 930 are arranged between the front base 911 and the rear base 912 facing each other.

The front base 911 includes three sliding grooves 911c, 911d, and 911e penetrating in the front-rear direction (the depth direction of the paper surface of FIG. 78), a pivot pin 911b projecting toward the rear side at the center position in the circumferential direction, and one end side of the front base. (left side in front view) and an opening 911a penetrating in the front-rear direction on one end side.

The opening 911a is an opening through which the shaft of the drive motor KM5 arranged on the front base 911 is inserted on the rear side. As a result, the shaft of the drive motor KM5 arranged on the front side of the front base 911 can be inserted through the rear side of the front base 911 .

The shaft support pins 911g and 911b are inserted through shaft holes of a transmission gear 922 and a transmission gear 923, which will be described later, and can hold the transmission gear 922 and the transmission gear 923 rotatably. That is, the pivot pins 911g and 911b are formed in a cylindrical shape with an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameters of the shaft holes of the transmission gears 922 and 923 .

The sliding groove 911c is penetratingly formed in an arc shape around the axis of the pivot pin 911b. The slide groove 911c is an opening through which a shaft support pin 923a of a transmission gear 923, which will be described later, is inserted. set. Accordingly, when the transmission gear 923 is rotated with the shaft support pin 923a inserted into the slide groove 911c, collision between the shaft support pin and the inner wall of the slide groove 911c can be suppressed.

The sliding grooves 911d and 911e are grooves into which the pivot pins 951 and 952 of the upper displacement member 940, which will be described later, are inserted. be done.

The sliding groove 911e is formed linearly in the longitudinal direction of the front base 911 (horizontal direction in front view). On the other hand, the sliding groove 911d is formed in an arc shape centering on the lower side of the front base 911. As shown in FIG. That is, the sliding grooves 911e and 911d are formed non-parallel. Therefore, at different positions in the left-right direction, the two sliding grooves 911e and 911d are formed so that the distance dimension between the vertically facing ones is different. As a result, when the pivot pins 951 and 952 are slid inside the sliding grooves 911e and 911d, the upper displacement member 940 is rotated and slid due to the difference in the distance between the vertically opposed portions. be.

The shaft portion 911f is formed to protrude in a columnar shape toward the front side. The shaft portion 911f can be inserted into a through hole 931 formed at one end of the rotating member 930, which will be described later, and hold the rotating member 930 in a rotatable state. That is, the shaft portion 911f is formed to have an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the through hole 931 of the rotating member 930 .

The rear base 912 is a plate member attached to the rear side of the front base 911 with a predetermined space therebetween. Rear base 912 is formed from a metallic material. Thereby, the rigidity of the entire base member 910 can be improved. As a result, twisting of the base member 910 can be suppressed when the relatively heavy upper displacement member 940 is disposed on the base member 910 formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape.

The transmission member 920 is disposed between the front base 911 and the rear base 912 facing each other. The transmission member 920 mainly includes a transmission gear 921 connected to the shaft of the drive motor KM5, a transmission gear 922 meshing with the transmission gear 921, and a transmission gear 923 meshing with the transmission gear 922. formed by

The transmission gear 921 is connected to the drive motor KM5 by inserting the shaft of the drive motor KM5 arranged on the front side of the front base 911 into the shaft hole as described above. As a result, the transmission gear 921 can be rotationally displaced by the driving force of the drive motor KM5.

The transmission gear 922 meshes with the transmission gears 921 and 923 as described above. Thereby, the driving force for rotation of the transmission gear 921 can be transmitted to the transmission gear 923 .

The transmission gear 923 is formed with a pivot pin 923a protruding frontward from its outer peripheral edge. Therefore, when the transmission gear 923 is rotated, the pivot pin 923a is rotationally displaced around the axis of the transmission gear 923. As shown in FIG.

The rotary member 930 is formed in the shape of a long bar on one side, and mainly has a through hole 931 penetrating in the front-rear direction at one end side and an opening 932 extending in the longitudinal direction substantially at the center in the longitudinal direction. formed with.

As described above, the through-hole 931 is an opening into which the shaft portion 911f of the front base 911 is inserted. can hold. A biasing spring SP8 is arranged at the tip of the shaft portion 911f. As a result, the rotating member 930 is biased in a direction to lift the other end side upward with respect to the front base 911 .

The opening 932 is a groove into which the shaft support pin 923a of the transmission gear 923 is inserted, and the shaft support pin 923a is slidably formed therein. As described above, when the transmission gear 923 is rotationally displaced and the arrangement of the pivot pin 923 a is displaced, the pivot pin 923 a is displaced inside the opening 932 . Therefore, since the rotating member 930 is arranged with one end rotatably supported, the rotating member 930 is rotated around the one end by the displacement of the shaft supporting pin 923a.

Further, on the other end side of the rotary member 930, an annular member 933 is arranged which is formed in an annular shape in a front view and is formed in a plate shape having a predetermined thickness on the back side.

The front side of the annular member 933 is formed with two sliding grooves 933a recessed at symmetrical positions along the outer peripheral edge thereof. The annular member 933 is a portion connected to an upper displacement member 940, which will be described later, and the shaft portion 953 of the upper displacement member 940 is inserted inside. The annular member 933 and the upper displacement member 940 are rotatably connected, and the upper displacement member 940 can be displaced as the rotation member 930 is rotationally displaced.

A projection 961 of the upper displacement member 940 is inserted inside the sliding groove 933a, and the projection 961 slides inside the sliding groove 933a by rotationally displacing the upper displacement member 940 with respect to the rotating member. can.

Also, the arc axis of the slide groove 933 a is arranged at a position different from the rotation axis of the upper displacement member 940 with respect to the rotation member 930 . This allows the first opening portion 960 to be displaced when the upper displacement member 940 is rotationally displaced with respect to the rotating member 930 . A detailed description of the first opening portion 960 will be given later.

On one end side (rotating shaft side) of the rotating member 930, a shaft portion cover 913 and a deformation restricting cover 914 formed of a plate-like body are arranged in front. The shaft cover 913 is arranged in front of the rotating shaft portion of the rotating member 930 and suppresses the rotating member 930 from rattling in the front-rear direction. The deformation restricting cover 914 is arranged at a position spaced apart from the rotating shaft by a predetermined distance, and can prevent the rotating member 930 from being deformed in the front-rear direction by the weight of the upper displacement member 940 arranged on the other end side.

The upper displacement member 940 includes a base body 950 connected to the front base 911 and the rotating member 930, two first openings 960 rotatably disposed on the back side of the base body 950, and the base body 950. It mainly includes two second open portions 970 rotatably arranged on the front side and a variable portion 980 arranged on one end side.

The base body 950 mainly includes two pivot pins 951 and 952 projecting from the rear surface of one end and a shaft portion 953 projecting from the rear surface of the other end.

The pivot pins 951 and 952 are projections inserted into the sliding grooves 911e and 911d of the front base 911 as described above. Therefore, when the upper displacement member 940 is driven by the rotating member 930, the pivot pins 951 and 952 slide along the sliding grooves 911e and 911d, thereby sliding the upper displacement member 940 in the left-right direction. and the other end side can be rotationally displaced downward.

The shaft portion 953 is a projection that is inserted into the annular member 933 and coupled to the rotating member 930 as described above, and is formed in a cylindrical shape with an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the annular member 933 . Thereby, the upper displacement member 940 can be rotatably connected to the rotating member 930 . Therefore, when the rotating member 930 is rotated around one end by the driving force of the driving motor KM5, the driving force is transmitted to the upper displacement member 940 due to the displacement of the annular member 933 . As a result, the upper displacement member 940 can be displaced along the sliding grooves 911e and 911d.

The first opening portion 960 is a plate member having a predetermined thickness in the front-rear direction, and two of the first opening portions 960 are arranged on the back side of the base body 950 . The first open portion 960 is rotatably pivotally supported on the other end side of the base body 950 . The first opening 960 also has a protrusion 961 that protrudes rearward and is disposed inside the sliding groove 933 a of the annular member 933 . Accordingly, when the upper displacement member 940 is rotationally displaced with respect to the rotation member 930 due to the displacement of the rotation member 930, the projection 961 can slide inside the slide groove 933a.

In this case, as described above, the curved axis of the slide groove 933a is arranged at a position different from the rotation axis of the upper displacement member 940 with respect to the rotary member 930, so that the projection 961 slides inside the slide groove 933a. Along with this, the first open portion 960 pivotally supported by the base body 950 can be rotationally displaced.

The second opening portion 970 is a plate member having a predetermined thickness in the front-rear direction, and two of the second opening portions 970 are arranged on the front side of the base body 950 . The second open portion 970 is rotatably supported on the other end side of the base body 950 . Also. The second opening 970 is formed with an engaging protrusion (not shown) that engages when the first opening 960 is displaced to a predetermined extent. As a result, as described above, when the upper displacement member 940 is rotated by a predetermined amount, the first opening portion 960 engages with the second opening portion 970 when it is rotated about the pivotal portion. The second open portion 970 can be rotationally displaced.

Next, displacement of the upper displacement member 940 will be described with reference to FIGS. 81 to 83. FIG. FIG. 81 is a front view of the upper displacement unit 900 with the upper displacement member 940 arranged at the retracted position. FIG. 82 is a front view of the upper displacement unit 900 with the upper displacement member 940 arranged at the intermediate position. FIG. 83 is a front view of the upper displacement unit 900 with the upper displacement member 940 arranged at the extended position.

The retracted position of the upper displacement member 940 is the position where the pivot pins 951 and 952 are arranged on the other end side of the sliding grooves 911d and 911e of the front base 911 (the right side of the front base 911 when viewed from the front). is. The overhang position is a position where the pivot pins 951 and 952 are arranged on one end side of the sliding grooves 911d and 911e of the front base 911 (on the left side of the front base 911 when viewed from the front). Furthermore, the intermediate position is a position in which the upper displacement member 940 is displaced to a position intermediate between the retracted position and the extended position.

As shown in FIGS. 81 to 83, when the upper displacement member 940 is displaced with respect to the front base 911, the longitudinal direction of the upper displacement member 940 changes from substantially horizontal direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 81) to substantially vertical direction ( (vertical direction in FIG. 83).

In addition, along with the rotational displacement, the position of one end of the upper displacement member 940 is displaced from the position of the right end of the front base 911 in front view to substantially the center position in front view. That is, the upper displacement member 940 is slidably displaced and rotationally displaced when the rotating member 930 is rotated by the driving force of the drive motor KM5 as described above.

82 to the extended position shown in FIG. 83, the first opening portion 960 provided in the upper displacement member 940 is rotationally displaced with respect to the base body 950. The second opening portion 970 that is displaced by engaging with the rotational displacement of the first opening portion 960 is also rotationally displaced with respect to the base body 950 . Therefore, at the extended position, the longitudinal direction of the upper displacement member 940 is directed vertically, and the first opening portion 960 and the second opening portion 970 are displaced.

In this embodiment, the upper displacement member 940 is formed in a shape imitating a human arm (including a hand). Therefore, by displacing the first opening portion 960 and the second opening portion 970 from the first position to the third position, it is possible for the player to visually recognize the displacement that makes the human arm thicker. .

Next, with reference to FIG. 84, a detailed description of variable section 980 will be provided. 84(a) is a front view of the variable portion 980, and FIG. 84(b) is a rear view of the variable portion 980. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 84(a) and 84(b), the variable portion 980 is formed in a shape that imitates a human hand. Fingers 982-986 that are connected to form finger portions of a hand.

A drive motor (not shown) is arranged inside the body portion 981, and a variable plate (not shown) arranged inside can be piston-displaced in the front-rear direction (vertical direction in FIG. 84(a)). be done.

The finger portion 982 is a portion corresponding to the thumb, and the base side thereof is connected to the variable plate of the main body portion 981 . As a result, the finger portion 982 can be displaced by the piston movement of the variable plate.

The finger portions 983 to 986 are mainly formed with a first link RB1 arranged on the base side and a second link RB2 arranged on the tip side inside thereof.

The first link RB<b>1 is rotatably connected to the second link RB<b>2 at its distal end and connected to the variable plate of the main body 981 at its base. Therefore, the piston movement of the variable plate of the body portion 981 can displace the first link RB1 and the second link RB2 via the first link RB1. This allows the fingers 983-986 to be displaced. In this embodiment, by displacing the finger portions 982 to 986, the player can visually recognize the action of opening and closing the fingers of the hand.

The front base 411 has two sliding grooves 411a and 411b penetrating in the front-rear direction (the depth direction of the paper surface of FIG. 11), and two cylindrical shaft support pins 411c and 411d projecting to the rear side, and a shaft support pin 411d. and a curved wall portion 411e protruding in an arc around the axis.

The sliding grooves 411a and 411b are holes through which two projections 472 and 473 protruding from the back side of the lower displacement member 440 are inserted. The sliding grooves 411a and 411b are formed to extend in the horizontal direction. Therefore, by displacing the projections 472 and 473 inserted through the sliding grooves 411a and 411b along the sliding grooves 411a and 411b, the lower displacement member 440 can be slid in the left-right direction.

The sliding grooves 411a and 411b are curved in an arc shape, and extend upward (upward in FIG. 11) from the left (left in FIG. 11) end to the right (right in FIG. 11) end of the front base 411. ). Further, the sliding grooves 411a and 411b are arranged at positions where the arc axes of the respective sliding grooves 411a and 411b are different from each other, and the gap between them in the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 11) is narrowed from the left end to the right end.

Since the distance between the projections 472 and 473 of the base member 470 of the lower displacement member 440 does not change, when the lower displacement member 440 is slid along the sliding groove, the lower displacement member 440 is rotated. can be displaced. That is, by changing the distance between the two sliding grooves 411a and 411b, the lower displacement member 440 can be rotated as it slides without applying a rotational driving force to the lower displacement member 440. FIG.

The shaft support pin 411c is a protrusion that is inserted into a shaft portion 422a of a cam member 422 of a transmission member 420, which will be described later, and is formed in a cylindrical shape with an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the shaft portion 422a. Further, the pivot pin 411 c is formed of a metal rod-like body and fitted onto the front base 411 . Therefore, when a force acts on the cam member 422 from its outer peripheral surface in the axial direction, it is possible to prevent the pivot pin 411c from breaking (damage).

Next, the lower displacement member 2440 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 85 to 87. FIG. In the first embodiment, the movable rack 464 and the rack 466 are displaced in the same direction by the driving force of the drive motor KM2. It is displaced in the opposite direction by the driving force of the driving motor KM2. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the part same as the said 1st Embodiment, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

First, the overall configuration of the lower displacement member 2440 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 85 and 86. FIG. FIG. 85 is an exploded perspective front view of the lower displacement member 2440 in the second embodiment. 86 is a front view of the lower displacement member 2440. FIG. 86 shows a state in which the decorative member 450 of the lower displacement member 2440 and the front case 481 are seen transparently.

As shown in FIGS. 85 and 86, the lower displacement member 2440 in the second embodiment includes a base member 2470 connected to the front base 411, a case member 480 covering the front and rear of the base member 2470, and a case member 480. It mainly includes a transmission mechanism 2460 displaceably disposed between the base member 2470 and a decorative member 450 formed to cover the front and rear of the case member 480 .

The base member 2470 is a plate member that is rectangular and horizontally long when viewed from the front. A protruding wall 477 projecting from the upper end of the central portion in the left-right direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 86) in a U-shape opposite to the vertical direction toward the front side; 475 is formed mainly by shaft portions 2470a and 2470b protruding upward.

The shaft portion 2470a is a shaft member on which a transmission gear 2468a, which will be described later, is rotatably supported, and is formed smaller than the shaft hole of the transmission gear 2468a.

The shaft portion 2470b is a shaft member on which a transmission gear 2468b, which will be described later, is rotatably supported, and is formed smaller than the shaft hole of the transmission gear 2468b. As will be described later, the transmission gear 2468a and the shaft portion 2470a are arranged in a state in which the gear tooth flanks engraved on the outer peripheral surfaces thereof are in mesh with each other. That is, the distance between the shaft portions 2470a and 2470b in a front view is set to the distance corresponding to the radius of the transmission gears 2468a and 2468b.

The transmission mechanism 2460 is arranged in front of the base member 470, and includes transmission gears 461, 462, and 463, a drive motor KM2 whose shaft portion is connected to the transmission gear 461, and a tooth surface that meshes with the transmission gear 463. A movable rack 2464 slidably disposed in front of the base member 470, a transmission gear 2468a meshing with the movable rack 2464, a transmission gear 2468b meshing with the transmission gear 2468a, and It mainly includes a rack 46 meshing with the transmission gear 2468b and a ball receiving portion 467 rotatably disposed on one end side of the rack 466. As shown in FIG.

The movable rack 2464 is formed as a horizontally long rectangular plate when viewed from the front. is formed mainly with

The rack gear 2464g meshes with a transmission gear 2468a, which will be described later. As a result, when the drive is transmitted from the drive motor KM4 and the rack 466 is displaced, the transmission gear 2468a can be rotated along with the displacement.

The transmission gears 2468a and 2468b are supported by the shaft portions 2470a and 2470b of the base member 2470, respectively, while meshing with each other as described above. Accordingly, when the transmission gear 2468a is rotated, the transmission gear 2468b is rotated. The transmission gear 2468b is meshed with the rack gear 466a of the rack 466, and when the transmission gear 2468b is rotated, the driving force is transmitted to the rack 466 and the rack 466 is displaced.

That is, the rack 466 can be driven by the driving force of the drive motor KM4. The transmission gears 2468a and 2468b are partially arranged at positions shifted in the front-rear direction, so that the transmission gears 2468a and 2468b are prevented from colliding with the rack 466 and the movable rack 2464, respectively.

Next, displacement of the lower displacement member 2440 will be described with reference to FIG. 87 is a front view of the lower displacement member 2440. FIG. 87, similarly to FIG. 86, the decorative member 450 of the lower displacement member 2440 and the front case 481 are shown transparently.

As shown in FIG. 87, when power is applied to the drive motor KM2 and the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced to the shooting position by the transmission mechanism 2460, the movable rack 464 and the rack 466 are displaced in different directions. be.

More specifically, when the drive motor KM4 is rotated, the movable rack 464 is displaced toward the other end of the lower displacement member 440 (left side in FIG. 87). Accompanying this displacement, the transmission gears 2468a and 2468b are rotated, and the rack 466 is displaced to one end side (right side in FIG. 3). Thereby, the ball receiving portion 467 can be displaced to the third position.

Therefore, when the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced from the first position, a displacement component can be formed in the direction opposite to the displacement direction of the ball receiving portion 467. The displacement of the movable rack 464 can reduce the change in the position of the center of gravity of the displacement member 2440 . As a result, rattling of the lower displacement member 2440 due to changes in the position of the center of gravity can be suppressed.

Next, the lower displacement member 3440 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 88 to 93. FIG. In the first embodiment, the ball receiving portion 467 is slidably displaced by the rack and pinion mechanism, but in the lower displacement member 3440 in the third embodiment, the ball receiving portion 467 is slidably displaced by the link mechanism. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

First, the overall configuration of the lower displacement member 3440 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 88 to 91. FIG. 88(a) is a front view of the lower displacement member 3440 in the third embodiment, and FIG. 88(b) is a rear view of the lower displacement member 3440. FIG. 89 is an exploded perspective front view of the lower displacement member 3440, and FIG. 90 is an exploded perspective rear view of the lower displacement member 3440. FIG. 91(a) and 91(b) are front views of the lower displacement member 3440. FIG.

91(a) shows a state in which the decorative member 450 of the lower displacement member 3440 is seen transparently, and in FIG. 91(b), the decorative member 450 of the lower displacement member 3440 and the front case 3481 are seen transparently. is shown.

As shown in FIGS. 88 to 91, the lower displacement member 3440 in the third embodiment includes a base member 3470 connected to the front base 411, a case member 480 covering the front and rear of the base member 3470, the case member 480 and the base. It mainly includes a transmission mechanism 3460 displaceably arranged between the member 3470 and a decorative member 450 formed to cover the front and rear of the case member 480 .

The base member 3470 is a plate member that is rectangular and horizontally long when viewed from the front. A sliding wall 3470c formed continuously from the base end side of the standing wall 471a and erected at the lower edge of the base member 3470, and the upper end of the central portion in the left-right direction (left-right direction in FIG. 88(a)). and an opening 479 extending from one end side to the other end side and recessed in the center portion of the base member 470 in the vertical direction. It is formed.

The sliding wall 3470c is a wall portion for contacting the leg portion 467a of the ball receiving portion 467 to regulate the position (mode) of the ball receiving portion 467c. That is, the projection is formed to a position below the ball receiving portion 467 . As a result, the ball receiving portion 467 can be held with the opening of the U-shaped portion facing upward.

In addition, the sliding wall 3470c is formed with a concave portion 3470c1 recessed below the end portion on the side of the standing wall 471a. The recessed portion 3470c1 is a groove that receives the tip of the leg portion 467a of the ball receiving portion 467 therein. As a result, when the ball receiving portion 467 is slid toward the standing portion by a transmission mechanism 3460, which will be described later, the ball receiving portion 467 can be received in the concave portion and rotated. As a result, the ball receiving portion 467 can be caused to perform a shooting operation (an operation of ejecting the ball held inside the U shape to the outside of the lower displacement member 3440).

The transmission mechanism 3460 includes a drive motor KM2 attached to a front case 3480, which will be described later, a first link member 3468 connected to the shaft of the drive motor KM2 and rotatably disposed, and the first link member 3468. It mainly includes a second link member 3469 that is rotatably connected and a ball receiving portion 467 that is connected to one end of the second link member 3469 .

The first link member 3468 is formed of a rectangular horizontally long plate-like body, and has a shaft hole 3468b formed through one end, a connecting hole 3468a connected to the shaft of the drive motor KM2, and a A load portion 3468c is formed.

The shaft hole 3468b is a through hole through which a rotating shaft 3469a of a second link member 3469, which will be described later, is inserted.

The connecting hole 3468a is a hole that is fastened to the shaft of the drive motor KM2 as described above, and is formed with an inner diameter that is approximately the same as the outer diameter of the shaft of the drive motor KM2. The first link member 3468 can be rotated by the driving force of the drive motor KM2 by fitting the shaft of the drive motor KM2 into the connecting hole 3468a and fastening it.

The load portion 3468c is formed to protrude toward the other end side from the connecting hole 3468a. The load portion 346c is a member for applying a load for positioning the center of gravity of the first link member 3468 on the other end side of the connecting hole 3468a, and is formed to bulge outward from the one end side.

The second link member 3469 is formed in a horizontally elongated rectangular shape and arranged on the back side of the first link member 3468 . The second link member 3469 mainly includes a rotating shaft 3469a projecting from the other end toward the front in a cylindrical shape, and a through hole 3469b penetrating in the front-rear direction at one end.

The rotating shaft 3469a is inserted into the shaft hole 3468b of the first link member 3468 as described above. This allows the first link member 3468 and the second link member 3469 to be rotatably connected.

The through hole 3469 b is an opening for connecting the ball receiving portion 467 to the second link member 3469 . Further, the through hole 3469b is formed smaller than the inner diameter of the shaft hole 467b of the ball receiving portion 467. As shown in FIG. Therefore, the shaft hole 467b of the ball receiving portion 467 and the through hole 3469b are arranged coaxially, and a screw having a head larger than the width of the opening 469 in the lateral direction is inserted from the rear side of the base member 3470 to the opening 479 and the shaft hole 467b. is inserted and fastened to the through hole 3469b, the ball receiving portion 467 is rotatably connected to the second link member.

The case member 480 is a member that covers the front and rear of the base member 470, and mainly includes a front case 3481 arranged on the front side of the base member 470 and a rear case 482 arranged on the rear side.

The front case 3481 is formed in the shape of a horizontally long rectangular plate when viewed from the front. It is mainly formed with a shaft hole 481c penetrating in the front-rear direction.

The opening 3481d is a hole through which the shaft of the drive motor KM2 disposed on the front side of the front case 3481 is inserted through the back side, and is formed with an outer diameter larger than the shaft of the drive motor KM2. As a result, the driving force of the drive motor KM2 arranged on the front side of the front case 3481 can be transmitted to the first link member 3468 arranged on the rear side.

Next, displacement of the lower displacement member 3440 will be described with reference to FIGS. 92 and 93. FIG. 92(a) is a front view of the lower displacement member 440 at the first position, and FIG. 92(b) is a front view of the lower displacement member 440 at the second position. 93(a) is a front view of the lower displacement member 440 at the third position, and FIG. 93(b) is a front view of the lower displacement member 440 at the second position.

92(a) to 93(b), transition states of the lower displacement member 440 are illustrated in order. Also, FIGS. 92(a) and 92(b) or FIGS. 93(a) and 93(b) illustrate a state in which the decorative member 450 of the lower displacement member 3440 and the front case 481 are seen transparently.

As shown in FIGS. 92 and 93, the lower displacement member 440 at the first position is such that the first link member 3468 and the second link member 3469 extend in the longitudinal direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 92(a)) of the base member 3470. As shown in FIG. The first link member 3468 and the second link member 3469 are arranged so as to overlap each other in the front-rear direction while being substantially parallel to the direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 92(a)).

That is, the connecting portion between the first link member 3468 and the second link member 3469 is placed on one end side of the base member 3470 (left side in FIG. 92(a)). Thereby, the second link member 3469 is arranged on the one end side. As a result, the ball receiving portion 467 is arranged at the first position.

Next, as shown in FIG. 92(b), when the drive motor KM2 is rotated from the state of the first position and the first link member 3468 is rotationally displaced, one end side of the first link member 3468 is moved to the base member 3470. is displaced with respect to Thereby, the second link member 3469 connected to one end side of the first link member 3468 is displaced. In this case, one end side of the second link member 3469 is connected to the ball receiving portion 467 and is slidable along the opening 479 of the base member 3470 . is extruded to the other end side of the As a result, the ball receiving portion 467 connected to the other end side of the second link member 3469 can be displaced to the second position.

Next, as shown in FIG. 93(a), when the drive motor KM2 is further rotationally displaced from the state of the second position and the first link member 3468 is rotated approximately 180 degrees from the state of the first position. , the connecting portion between the first link member 3468 and the second link member 3469 is arranged on the other end side of the base member 3470 with respect to the rotation axis. Accordingly, one end side of the second link member 3469 is further pushed out to the other end side of the base member 3470, and the ball receiving portion 467 is arranged at the third position.

In this case, the tip of the leg portion 467a of the ball receiving portion 467 is arranged inside the recess 3470c1, so that the ball receiving portion 467 is rotated by the biasing spring SP2 to perform the shooting operation.

Further, the load portion 3468c of the first link member 3468 is displaced toward one end of the base member 3470. As shown in FIG. As a result, it is possible to suppress a change in the position of the center of gravity of the lower displacement member 3440 when the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced with respect to the base member. As a result, rattling of the lower displacement member 3440 can be suppressed.

That is, when the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced from the first position, a displacement component can be formed in the direction opposite to the displacement direction of the ball receiving portion 467. The change in the position of the center of gravity of the displacement member 3440 can be reduced by the displacement of the load portion 3468c. As a result, rattling of the lower displacement member 440 due to changes in the position of the center of gravity can be suppressed.

Further, in the third embodiment, as shown in FIG. 93(b), by continuing the rotation of the first link member 3468, the ball receiving portion 467 can be retracted to the second position and the first position. Therefore, there is no need to switch the control of the drive motor KM2, and the displacement to the second position or the first position can be performed quickly.

Therefore, when a game ball is ejected from the inside of the ball receiving portion 467, the position of the center of gravity of the lower displacement member 440 changes. By quickly bringing the position of the center of gravity closer to the rotation axis of the lower displacement member 440, rattling of the lower displacement member 3440 can be suppressed.

Further, by immediately displacing the ball receiving portion 467, it is possible to suppress the wobbling of the lower displacement member 3440 due to the reaction of the discharge operation when the game ball is discharged from the inside of the ball receiving portion 467.

That is, when the game ball is ejected from the inside of the ball receiving portion 467, the load of the lower displacement member 440 is reduced by the amount of the ejected game ball, and the lower displacement member 3440 tends to be displaced upward due to the reaction. By immediately displacing the ball receiving portion 467, the reaction due to the rotational displacement of the ball receiving portion 467 acts to displace the base member 470 downward, thereby canceling the reaction when the ball is ejected from the lower displacement member 3440. be able to.

Next, a lower displacement unit 4400 in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 94 to 96. FIG. In the first embodiment, the case where the lower displacement member 440 arranged in the retracted state is configured to be capable of shooting has been described. The firing motion of 440 is restricted. The same reference numerals are given to the same parts as those of the above-described embodiments, and the description thereof will be omitted.

First, the overall configuration of the lower displacement unit 4400 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 94 . FIG. 94 is a front view of the lower displacement unit 4400 in the fourth embodiment. In FIG. 94, the decoration member 450 of the lower displacement member 440 and the front case 481 are shown transparently, and the bottom wall portion 481b of the front case 481 is shown with a chain line. Also, FIG. 94 illustrates a state in which the lower displacement member 440 is in the retracted state and the ball receiving portion 467 is arranged at the first position.

As shown in FIG. 94, a lower displacement unit 4400 according to the fourth embodiment has an opening formed in a base member 470 of a lower displacement member 440 between an upstanding wall 471a and a bottom wall portion 481b of a front case 481. 4471b is formed.

A tip portion 4411g1 of an engagement wall 4411g, which will be described later, is inserted into the opening 4471b. That is, the opening 4471b is opened larger than the tip portion 4411g1.

The front base 411 is formed with an engagement wall 4411g formed in a substantially L shape that is continuous with the bottom surface of the recovery port 411f.

The engaging wall 4411g can restrict the rotation of the ball receiving portion 467 at the third position (shooting operation) by inserting the substantially L-shaped tip portion 4411g1 into the opening 4471b. . That is, the tip position of the tip portion 4411g1 is set substantially at the same height as the top surface of the bottom wall portion 481b of the lower displacement member 440 positioned in the retracted state.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 95 and 96, a state in which each member of the lower displacement unit 4400 is displaced will be described. 95 and 96 are front views of the lower displacement unit 4400. FIG. 95 and 96 show a state in which the decorative member 450 of the lower displacement member 440 and the front case 481 are seen transparently as in FIG. 94, and the bottom wall portion 481b of the front case 481 is shown illustrated.

Also, FIG. 95 illustrates a state in which the lower displacement member 440 is in the retracted state and the ball receiving portion 467 is arranged at the third position. FIG. 96 illustrates a state in which the lower displacement member 440 is in the first overhanging state and the ball receiving portion 467 is arranged at the first position.

As shown in FIG. 95, when the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced to the third position, the tip of the leg portion 467a of the ball receiving portion 467 comes into contact with the upper surface of the tip portion 4411g1 of the engaging wall 4411g, thereby forming the recess 481b1 or the opening. 4471b is restricted. This restricts the rotation of the ball receiving portion 467 .

Therefore, when ball receiving portion 467 is caused to perform a payout operation in order to discharge the ball thrown onto the track area of ball receiving portion 467 to the outside of lower displacement member 440, ball receiving portion 467 is positioned at the third position. rotates and discharges the game ball held inside the ball receiving portion 467 can be suppressed.

That is, when the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced to the third position, the posture of the ball receiving portion 467 is changed when game balls exceeding the specified number (one ball) are ejected from the orbit area of the ball receiving portion 467. can be regulated. Therefore, it is possible to easily discharge only the game balls exceeding the specified number from the trajectory area.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 96 , when the lower displacement member 440 is displaced to the position of the first extended state (not the position of the retracted state), the lower displacement member 440 is displaced with respect to the base member 470 . Therefore, the opening 4471b of the lower displacement member 440 and the engaging wall 4411g are separated. Therefore, in the first protruding state, the ball receiving portion 467 can be displaced to the third position for shooting.

That is, as the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced to the third position, when game balls exceeding the specified number (one ball) are ejected from the track area of the ball receiving portion 467, the attitude of the ball receiving portion 467 is By suppressing the change, it is possible to easily maintain the state in which the ball receiving portion 467 holds the prescribed number of game balls, while the lower displacement member 440 is engaged when displaced to the first and second projecting positions. Since the wall 4411g is separated from the inner space of the opening 4471b, the leg 467a is engaged with the opening 4471b as the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced to the third position, thereby changing the posture of the ball receiving portion 467. This makes it possible to easily discharge the prescribed number of game balls from the ball receiving portion 467.例文帳に追加

Next, a sorting unit 5500 according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 97 to 101. FIG. In the first embodiment, the distribution member 540 rotates to form the storage state and the regulation state, but in the fifth embodiment, the distribution member 540 slides to form the storage state and the regulation state. do. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

First, the overall configuration of the sorting unit 5500 according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 97 to 100. FIG. 97(a) is a top view of the sorting unit 5500 in the fifth embodiment, and FIG. 97(b) is a rear view of the sorting unit 5500. FIG. 98 is an exploded perspective front view of the sorting unit 5500, and FIG. 99 is an exploded perspective rear view of the sorting unit 5500. FIG. FIG. 100 is a cross-sectional view of the sorting unit 5500 taken along line CC of FIG. 97(a). Note that in FIG. 100, the outer shape of the distribution member 550 is illustrated with a dashed line.

As shown in FIGS. 97 to 99, a sorting unit 5500 according to the fifth embodiment includes a base plate 5520 formed in a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and a base plate 5520 attached to the front side of the base plate 5520 and facing the base plate 5520. A path forming member 510 that forms a plurality of flow-down paths between which balls can flow down; 5520 and an extension path member 530 that extends the flow-down path of the spheres formed between the opposing path formation members 510 .

The base plate 5520 includes two cylindrical shafts 5526 protruding to the back side, a first opening 5521 and a second opening 5522 formed in a rectangular shape, and a U-shaped cross section whose upper end side is open to the side surface of the upper end. It is mainly formed with a rolling portion 525 that is formed in a shape and extends in the left-right direction, and a locking portion 524 that protrudes like a hook on the back side.

Two shaft portions 5526 are formed so as to protrude on the back side, and are inserted into two sliding grooves 5546, which will be described later.

The first opening 5521 and the second opening 5522 are openings through which the regulating plate 541 and the storage plate 5542 of the distribution member 5540, which will be described later, are inserted. It is formed. In addition, since the distribution member 5540 is attached to the base plate 5520 in a slidable state, the first opening 5521 and the second opening 5522 are larger than the regulation plate 5541 and the storage plate 5542 in the sliding direction of the distribution member 5540. formed in the opening.

The distribution member 5540 is formed in a rectangular shape in front view with one side being longer, and is formed with a predetermined thickness in the front-rear direction. The sorting member 5540 includes a regulation plate 5541 and a storage plate 5542 projecting in a plate shape toward the front side, and a sliding groove 5546 formed as an elongated hole in substantially the same direction as the extension direction of the regulation plate 5541 and the storage plate 5542. and a locking portion 544 formed in a hook shape on the back side.

The regulating plate 5541 is disposed at the connecting portion between the first ball-throwing route KR1 and the second ball-throwing route KR2 via the first opening 5521, so that the game ball flowing down the first ball-throwing route KR1 passes through the second ball-throwing route KR2. It is a plate member that regulates the flow into, and the distance projected from the first opening 5521 is set to a distance larger than the radius of the game ball.

In addition, the regulation plate 5541 is formed in a straight line shape when viewed from the front, and its extending direction is set to be substantially the same as the sliding direction of the distribution member 540 . Thereby, when the distribution member 5540 is slid and displaced, the displacement area of the regulation plate 5541 can be minimized. As a result, the opening area of the first opening 5521 can be minimized, and the rigidity of the base plate 5520 can be secured.

The reservoir plate 5542 is a plate member that is arranged on the second ball-throwing route KR2 via the second opening 5522, and allows game balls that flow down the second ball-throwing route KR2 to flow upstream of the reservoir plate 5542. The distance projected from the opening 5522 is set to a distance larger than the radius of the game ball.

In addition, the storage plate 5542 is formed in a straight line shape when viewed from the front, and the direction in which it extends is set to be substantially the same as the sliding direction of the distribution member 540 . Thereby, when the distribution member 5540 is slid and displaced, the displacement area of the storage plate 5542 can be minimized. As a result, the opening area of the second opening 5522 can be minimized, and the rigidity of the base plate 5520 can be secured.

The sliding groove 5546 is an elongated hole penetrating in the front-rear direction. The shaft portion 5526 of the base plate 5520 is inserted into the slide groove 5546 . Therefore, by inserting the shaft portion 5526 into the sliding groove 5546 and fastening a screw or the like to the tip of the shaft portion 5526 from the back side, the distribution member 5540 is held in a state in which it can be slidably displaced with respect to the base plate 5520. be able to.

The sliding grooves 5546 are formed at two locations with their longitudinal directions parallel to each other. As a result, the distribution member 5540 can be slidably displaced while suppressing the rotational displacement of the distribution member 5540 .

Next, referring to FIG. 101, displacement of the distribution member 5540 will be described. 101(a) and 101(b) are partial enlarged views of the sorting unit 5500 in the range CI of FIG. 100. FIG. FIG. 101(a) shows a state in which the sorting member 5540 is arranged at the storage position, and FIG. 101(b) shows a state in which the sorting member 5540 is arranged at the restricting position.

As shown in FIG. 101(a), when the sorting member 5540 is placed at the regulating position, the storage plate 5542 is arranged along the third ball throwing path KR3, and the regulating plate 5541 is located on the back side of the path forming member 510. It is located inside a recess 518 formed in the wall.

In this case, the distance dimension L9 between the tip of the storage plate 5542 protruding inside the third ball throwing path KR3 and the inner wall of the third ball throwing path facing the tip is made smaller than the diameter of the game ball. Therefore, the ball thrown from the upstream of the third ball-throwing path KR3 (first ball-throwing path KR1) is stopped on the upstream side of the storage plate 5542 .

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 101(b), when the sorting member 5540 is arranged at the regulating position, the regulating plate 5541 is arranged at the connecting portion between the first ball-throwing route KR1 and the third ball-throwing route KR3. , the regulating plate 5541 is arranged at the connecting portion between the first ball-throwing path KR1 and the third ball-throwing path KR3, and the storage plate 5542 is arranged inside the recess 519 formed in the wall on the back side of the path forming member 510. be.

In this case, the distance dimension L10 between the end of the tip of the regulating plate 5541 protruding inside the first ball-throwing path KR1 and the inner wall of the entrance of the third ball-throwing path KR3 is made smaller than the diameter of the game ball. Therefore, the ball flowing down the first ball-throwing route KR1 collides with the regulation plate 5541 and is thrown to the second ball-throwing route KR2.

That is, by switching the distribution member 5540 between the regulating position and the storage position, the ball thrown on the first ball path KR1 is thrown to the third ball path KR3 and stopped on the third ball path KR3; A state can be formed in which the ball flowing down the first ball path KR1 cannot flow into the third ball path KR3 and is thrown to the second ball path KR2.

Therefore, by slidingly displacing one distribution member 5540, when one flow path is divided into two flow paths, the flow path of the ball can be reliably switched to either one.

In addition, the regulation plate 5541 (distribution means) is formed so as to be able to appear and retract with respect to the first ball throwing route KR1 (downstream passage) or the third ball throwing route KR3 (first branch passage). It is the inner wall on the downstream extension line of the downstream end of the 1 ball throwing path KR1. Therefore, the regulation plate 5541 can be projected at a position close to the game ball flowing down from the lower end side of the first throwing path KR1. Therefore, it is possible to shorten the time required from when the regulating plate 5541 starts to protrude into the downstream passage or the third ball throwing route KR3 (first branch passage) to when the game balls can be sorted. As a result, it is possible to reliably switch the allocation destination by the regulation plate 5541 .

In addition, the regulation plate 5541 (distribution means) protrudes into the third ball-throwing route KR3 (first branch passage), so that the game ball flowing down the first ball-throwing route KR1 (flow-down passage) is diverted to the second ball-throwing route ( second branch path), and the projecting direction of the regulating plate 5541 is set in the direction pointing to the upstream end of the second ball-throwing path KR2. When the game ball comes into contact with the regulating plate in the middle, the game ball can be pushed into the second ball-throwing path KR as the regulating plate protrudes. As a result, the distribution to the second throwing route KR2 can be performed more reliably.

Next, a rotation unit 6700 in the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 102 to 106. FIG. In the first embodiment, the case where the load gear 731e is connected to drive the rotating body 800 and the rotating body 800 is restricted from operating by inertial force has been described. Gear 731e is removed. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

First, the overall configuration of the rotating unit 6700 in the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 102 to 104. FIG. 102 is a front view of a rotation unit 6700 in the sixth embodiment, and FIG. 103 is an exploded perspective front view of the rotation unit 6700. FIG. 104 is an exploded perspective rear view of the sorting unit 6500. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 102 to 104, the rotation unit 6700 includes a decoration unit 6750 having a rotating body 800 that is rotationally displaced, a ball bearing table 710 arranged above the decoration unit 6750 in the direction of gravity, and 710 and a rear base 720 arranged on the rear side of the decoration unit 6750, a left transmission member 730 arranged on the left side of the decoration unit 6750 when viewed from the front, and a crank cover 743 arranged on the right side of the decoration unit 6750 when viewed from the front. and .

The decoration unit 6750 mainly includes a box-shaped box member 760 whose upper side is open in the gravitational direction, and a rotor 800 rotatably disposed inside the box member. That is, in the first embodiment, the decoration unit 750 has the rotor 800 disposed inside the box member 760 and the lid member 770, but in the sixth embodiment, the decoration unit 750 is formed with the lid member 770 removed. be.

The left transmission member 730 is mounted with a drive motor KM4 disposed on the left side (left side of FIG. 102) of the decoration unit 750, a transmission member 6731 for transmitting the driving force of the drive motor KM4, and the drive motor KM4. A motor base 732, a gear cover 733 that covers the transmission member 6731, and a ball throw path cover 734 that is attached to the gear cover 733 and formed with a predetermined gap between facing the gear cover 733. formed with.

The transmission member 6731 includes a transmission gear 731a attached to the shaft of the drive motor KM4, a transmission gear 6731b meshing with the transmission gear 731a, a transmission gear 731c meshing with the transmission gear 6731b, and a transmission gear 731c. and a transmission gear 731 d arranged adjacent to and coaxially arranged by a shaft 735 .

The transmission gear 6731b is a gear that transmits driving force to the transmission gear 731c. Although the one-way clutch OW1 is attached inside the transmission gear 731b in the first embodiment, the one-way clutch OW1 is removed from the transmission gear 6731b in the sixth embodiment. Further, since the transmission gear 731c and the transmission gear 731d are the same as in the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Therefore, when the driving force is transmitted in one direction from the drive motor KM4, the rotational driving force can be transmitted to the shaft 735, and when the driving force is transmitted in the other direction from the drive motor KM4, the inner ring of the one-way clutch OW1 is rotated. As a result, the outer ring slips (idles) and the transmission of the driving force to the shaft 735 is interrupted.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 105 and 106, the rotation of rotating body 800 will be described. 105(a) to 105(c) are side views of the decoration unit 6750 viewed in the direction of arrow CV in FIG. 104, and FIGS. 106(a) to 106(c) are views in the direction of arrow CV in FIG. is a side view of the decoration unit 6750 in FIG.

105 and 106, the left side plate 765 of the box member 760 is shown transparently. FIGS. 105(a) to 105(c) sequentially show modes in which the center of gravity G of the rotating body 800 is displaced in the second section DK2, and FIGS. Modes in which the center of gravity G of 800 is displaced in the first section DK1 are sequentially illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 105, the rotating body 800 is rotationally displaced to the left (as viewed in the direction of FIG. 105) to the right (clockwise) when a driving force in one direction is transmitted from the drive motor KM4.

The rotating body 800 is formed asymmetrically about the rotation axis as described above, and the center of gravity G is arranged at a position different from the rotation axis. Therefore, the rotating body 800 is rotated from the state in which the center of gravity G shown in FIG. 106(a) is arranged above the rotation axis, and the center of gravity G shown in FIG. 106(b) is displaced to a position substantially horizontal to the rotation axis. When started, the load exerts a rotating force in the direction of rotation.

Therefore, the engagement of the roller interposed between the outer ring and the inner ring of the one-way clutch OW1 arranged in the transmission gear 731c is released, and the outer ring (rotating body 800 side) precedes the inner ring (drive motor side). and drive. That is, in the second interval, the rotating body 800 can be rotated at a higher rotational speed than the driving motor KM4.

Note that the rotating body 800 that rotates the second section DK2 with the load is rotated to a position where the center of gravity G shown in FIG. 105(c) is positioned below the rotation axis.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 106, when the center of gravity G of the rotating body 800 is displaced in the first section DK1, the load of the rotating body 800 acts in the direction opposite to its rotating direction. Therefore, the rotating body 800 is rotated according to the rotational speed of the drive motor KM4.

Therefore, in the sixth embodiment, the displacement speed of the rotor 800 in the second section DK2 can be made faster than the displacement speed of the rotor 800 in the first section DK1. As a result, it is possible to change the displacement mode of the rotating body 800 and enhance the presentation effect according to the displacement of the rotating body 800 .

Next, a seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 107 to 110. FIG. In the above-described first embodiment, the cover member 770 causes the outer ring of the one-way clutch OW1 to lead the inner ring by its own weight (that is, the displacement speed of the cover member 770 is increased). The displacement member 7710 in the form makes the outer ring of the one-way clutch OW1 ahead of the inner ring by using the weight of the game ball (that is, speeds up the displacement speed of the displacement member 7710). In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

107 and 108 are schematic side views of the displacement unit 7700 in the seventh embodiment. 107 schematically illustrates a state in which the displacement member 7710 is arranged at the raised position, and FIG. 108 schematically illustrates a state in which the displacement member 7710 is arranged at the lowered position.

As shown in FIGS. 107 and 108, the displacement unit 7700 includes a displacement member 7710 formed to be slidably displaceable, and a rotational driving force of a driving means (not shown, such as an electric motor) transmitted to the displacement member 7710. and a load gear 7730 that rotates as the displacement member 7710 slides.

The displacement member 7710 is supported by a support mechanism (not shown) so as to be linearly displaceable along the virtual line L1. It mainly includes a rack gear 7712 engraved along the imaginary line L1 and a ball receiving member 7713 rotatably supported at the tip of the displacement member 7710 .

The imaginary line L1 is set as a straight line that slopes downward from the raised position shown in FIG. 107 toward the lowered position shown in FIG. That is, at the raised position, the displacement member 7710 is positioned higher in the gravitational direction than at the lowered position.

The driven pin 7711 is a member that is slidably inserted into the drive groove 7723b in the arm member 7723 of the transmission member 7720, and is formed as a cylindrical body with an outer shape slightly smaller than the groove width of the drive groove 7723b. A load gear 7730 is meshed with the rack gear 7712 , and the load gear 7730 is rotated as the displacement member 7710 slides.

The ball receiving member 7713 is a member for holding a game ball on the upper surface of the displacement member 7710, and by rotating around a rotating shaft 7713a, the upright state shown in FIG. 107 and the tilted state shown in FIG. Formable. In the upright state, one end protrudes from the upper surface of the displacement member 7710 so that the game ball can be held (see FIG. 109). On the other hand, in the tilted state, the game ball can be discharged from the upper surface of the displacement member 7710 by positioning one end side below the upper surface of the displacement member 7710 (see FIG. 110).

The ball receiving member 7713 is maintained in an upright state by a biasing force acting from a biasing spring (for example, a torsion spring) (not shown). An engagement pin 7740 is fixed on the track of the displacement member 7710 (ball receiving member 7713). By engaging 7740, the ball receiving member 7713 is rotated into a tilted state. On the other hand, when the displacement member 7710 is slid to the raised position, the ball receiving member 7713 is rotated by the elastic recovery force of the urging spring and returned to the tilted state.

The transmission member 7720 is a disk-shaped rotating member 7721 that is rotationally driven by the above-described driving means (not shown), and the transmitting member 7720 protrudes from the axial end surface of the rotating member 7721 and is positioned eccentrically from the rotation center of the rotating member 7721. It mainly includes a cylindrical drive pin 7722 and an arm member 7723 having a driven groove 7723a formed at one end thereof so that the drive pin 7722 is slidably inserted.

A one-way clutch OW1 is interposed between the rotating member 7721 and the driving means. Specifically, the one-way clutch OW1 has an inner ring connected to the driving means and an outer ring connected to the rotating member 7721. When the inner ring is driven to rotate in the direction of arrow A (clockwise in FIG. 107) by the driving means, When the rotational driving force is transmitted to the outer ring (that is, the rotating member 7721 is rotated in the direction of arrow A) while the inner ring is rotationally driven in the direction opposite to the direction of arrow A (counterclockwise in FIG. 107) by the drive means, , disconnects the power transmission to the outer ring (rotating member 7721).

The arm member 7723 has a driving groove 7723b formed on the other end opposite to the driven groove 7723a, through which the driven pin 7711 of the displacement member 7710 is slidably inserted. A rotating shaft 7723c rotatably supports the portion between the driven groove 7723a and the driving groove 7723b (intermediate portion).

The drive pin 7722 is formed as a cylindrical body having an outer shape slightly smaller than the groove width of the driven groove 7723a. Further, the driven groove 7723a and the driving groove 7723b are formed as linear grooves along the longitudinal direction of the arm member 7723. As shown in FIG.

According to the displacement unit 7700 formed as described above, when the rotating member 7721 is rotated in the direction of arrow A (clockwise in FIG. 107) from the state in which the displacement member 7710 is arranged at the raised position shown in FIG. , the driving pin 7722 acts on the inner wall surface of the driven groove 7723a, and the arm member 7723 is rotated clockwise in FIG. 107 around the rotating shaft 7723c. As the arm member 7723 rotates clockwise, the inner wall surface of the drive groove 7723b acts in a direction to push down the driven pin 7711, thereby causing the displacement member 7710 to slide along the virtual line L1, as shown in FIG. is placed in the lowered position shown in FIG.

On the other hand, when the rotating member 7721 is further rotated in the direction of arrow A (clockwise in FIG. 107) from the state in which the displacement member 7710 is arranged at the lowered position shown in FIG. Acting on the wall surface, the arm member 7723 is rotated counterclockwise in FIG. 107 around the rotating shaft 7723c. As the arm member 7723 rotates counterclockwise, the inner wall surface of the drive groove 7723b acts in a direction to push up the driven pin 7711, thereby sliding the displacement member 7710 along the virtual line L1. It is placed in the raised position shown at 107 .

Here, like the load gear 731e in the first embodiment, the load gear 7730 is formed so as to generate a predetermined amount of resistance when rotating. As a result, the weight (self weight) of the displacement member 7710 acts on the arm member 7723 to rotate the rotating member 7721 in the direction of arrow A (clockwise in FIG. 107), thereby moving the outer ring of the one-way clutch OW1 relative to the inner ring. leading in one direction (direction of arrow A). That is, in a state in which no game ball is held, it is possible to suppress the increase in the displacement speed of the displacement member 7710 when moving from the raised position to the lowered position.

That is, while the rotating member 7721 is rotated in the direction of arrow A (clockwise in FIGS. 107 and 108) by the rotational driving force of the driving means, it is displaced at the sliding speed corresponding to the rotational driving speed of the rotational driving means. The member 7710 is reciprocatingly displaced (slide displaced) between the raised position and the lowered position.

109 and 110 are schematic side views of the displacement unit 7700 when a game ball is held by the displacement member 7710. FIG. 109 schematically illustrates a state in which the displacement member 7710 is arranged at the raised position, and FIG. 110 schematically illustrates a state in which the displacement member 7710 is arranged at the lowered position.

As shown in FIGS. 109 and 110, the displacement member 7710 is formed to hold a game ball on its upper surface. That is, in this embodiment, the displacement unit 7700 is arranged in the area where the game ball flows down in the game area, and the displacement member 7710 is formed so that the upper surface of the displacement member 7710 can receive the falling game ball. In addition, in FIG. 109, a state in which four game balls indicated by symbol T are held on the upper surface of the displacement member 7710 is illustrated.

In this case, when the displacement member 7710 holds the game ball, the weight of the displacement member 7710 as a whole is increased (heavy) by the weight of the game ball, and the resistance accompanying the rotation of the load gear 7730 is exceeded. can be made That is, the weight of the displacement member 7710 as a whole (the weight including the game ball) is applied to the arm member 7723, and the rotation member 7721 is rotated in the direction of arrow A (clockwise in FIG. 109) to rotate the outer ring of the one-way clutch OW1. can be advanced in one direction (arrow A direction) with respect to the inner ring. As a result, the displacement speed of the displacement member 7710 when moving from the raised position to the lowered position can be made faster than the displacement speed when the game ball is not held (see FIG. 107).

Also, the weight of the displacement member 7710 as a whole can be varied according to the number of game balls being held. Thereby, the displacement speed of the displacement member 7710 can be varied (changed) not only depending on whether or not the displacement member 7710 holds game balls, but also according to the number of game balls held. As a result, the variation of the displacement speed of the displacement member 7710 can be increased, and the presentation effect associated with the displacement of the displacement member 7710 can be enhanced accordingly.

As described above, the displacement member 7710 is provided with the ball receiving member 7713 at its tip (the end on the downwardly inclined side). Therefore, when the displacement member 7710 (the upper surface thereof or the ball receiving member 7713) receives the game ball flowing down the game area, the force acting on the displacement member 7710 from the game ball slides toward the lowered position. It can act as a displacing force. That is, the force can be applied via the arm member 7723 and the rotating member 7721 in a direction to move the outer ring of the one-way clutch OW1 ahead of the inner ring in one direction (arrow A direction).

Thereby, when the displacement member 7710 (its upper surface or the ball receiving member 7713) catches the flowing game ball, the kinetic energy of the game ball is used to slide the displacement member 7710 in the direction toward the lowered position. The displacement speed of the displacement can be made faster.

In this case, the flowing game balls have different flowing directions and flowing velocities. Therefore, the force (magnitude of kinetic energy) acting on the displacement member 7710 can be varied according to the difference in the flow state (flow direction and flow speed) of the game ball to be received. As a result, the displacement speed of the displacement member 7710 is varied (variation can be made). As a result, the variation of the displacement speed of the displacement member 7710 can be increased, and the presentation effect associated with the displacement of the displacement member 7710 can be enhanced accordingly.

In addition, in the seventh embodiment, the rotating member 7721 rotates in one direction, so there is no need to switch the driving direction of the driving means. In other words, the displacement member 7710 can be reciprocated by continuously rotating the rotating means in one direction. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the time required to switch the driving direction of the driving means. As a result, the displacement member 7710 can be displaced immediately, since switching of the driving means is not required.

In this case, by immediately displacing the displacement member 7710, the ball receiving member 7713 is rotationally displaced and the game ball received by the displacement member 7710 (its upper surface or the ball receiving member 7713) is dropped. Rattling of the displacement member 7710 can be suppressed.

That is, when the game ball is dropped from the displacement member 7710 (ball receiving member 7713), the load of the displacement member 7710 is reduced by the amount of the dropped game ball, and the displacement member 7710 tends to be displaced upward due to the reaction. However, by immediately displacing the displacement member 7710, the reaction due to the displacement of the ball receiving member 7713 acts to displace the displacement member 7710 downward, canceling the reaction when the ball is dropped from the displacement member 7710. be able to.

The game ball flowing down the game area is not limited to the game ball moving in the direction of gravity on the front surface of the game board 13, but also includes the game ball moving in a direction different from the direction of gravity. Game balls that move in a direction different from the direction of gravity include, for example, game balls that collide with nails, tulips, accessories, etc. A game ball that moves in a direction different from the direction of gravity is exemplified.

Here, in this embodiment, by providing the load gear 7730, in a state where the displacement member 7710 does not hold the game ball (see FIG. 107), when the displacement member 7710 is slid toward the lowered position , the outer ring of the one-way clutch OW1 does not lead the inner ring in one direction (the direction of arrow A) (that is, the displacement speed of the displacement member 7710 does not increase).

On the other hand, when the load gear 7730 is omitted or the resistance of the load gear 7730 is set to a small value, when the displacement member 7710 is slid toward the lowered position, the outer ring of the one-way clutch OW1 is moved with respect to the inner ring. may be configured to lead in one direction (direction of arrow A) (that is, the displacement speed of the displacement member 7710 increases). That is, even when only the weight (self weight) of the displacement member 7710 is applied to the arm member 7723 and the rotating member 7721 is rotated in the direction of arrow A (clockwise in FIG. 107), the outer ring of the one-way clutch OW1 does not move to the inner ring. You may make it precede to it.

Next, the upper plate 8017 in the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 111 to 114. FIG. A rotation operation unit 8650 is arranged at the upper plate 8017 in the eighth embodiment at a substantially central position in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

First, the overall configuration of the rotation operation unit 8650 according to the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 111 to 113. FIG. FIG. 111 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 in the eighth embodiment. 112 is an exploded perspective front view of the rotary operation unit 8650. FIG. FIG. 113 is a schematic cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine 10 along line CXIII-CXIII in FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 111 to 113, the rotary operation unit 8650 is arranged in the inner space of the upper plate 8017 of the pachinko machine 10, and the outer peripheral surface of the rotary operation portion 8654, which will be described later, protrudes outward from the upper plate 8017. It is arranged in a state where

The rotation operation unit 8650 includes a drive motor KM6, a transmission gear 8651 connected to the shaft of the drive motor KM6, a transmission gear 8652 meshed with the outer peripheral surface of the transmission gear 8651, and the shaft of the transmission gear 8652. It mainly includes a shaft portion 8653 fitted inside a hole, a one-way clutch OW1 having an inner ring fitted onto the shaft portion 8653, and a rotation operation portion 8654 having an outer ring of the one-way clutch OW1 fitted inside. .

Transmission gear 8651 is coupled to the shaft of drive motor KM6. Therefore, the transmission gear 8651 can be rotated by applying a rotational driving force to the drive motor KM6. As described above, the transmission gear 8651 is arranged in mesh with the transmission gear 8652 . Therefore, when a rotational driving force is applied to the drive motor KM6, the transmission gear 8652 can be rotated via the transmission gear 8651. FIG.

The shaft portion 8653 is a rod member formed in a cylindrical shape, and its axial length is formed longer than the lateral width dimension of the rotation operation portion 8654 . One end of the shaft portion 8653 is fitted into the shaft hole of the transmission gear 8652, and the other end is inserted into the inner ring of the one-way clutch OW1, as described above. As a result, the driving force generated when the transmission gear 8652 is rotated can be transmitted to the one-way clutch OW1.

As described above, the one-way clutch OW1 is composed of an inner ring, an outer ring, and rollers engaged therebetween. When the inner ring rotates in one direction, the rotation of the inner ring can be transmitted to the outer ring, and the inner ring rotates in the other direction. When rotated, the rotation of the inner ring can be non-transmitted to the outer ring.

The rotation operation part 8654 is formed in an annular shape, and is disposed with a part of its outer peripheral surface protruding from the upper plate 8017 . In addition, the outer ring of the one-way clutch OW1 is fitted in the inner circular portion of the rotation operating portion 8654. As shown in FIG. That is, the inward inclination of the rotation operating portion 8654 is formed to be substantially the same as the outer diameter of the one-way clutch OW1. Therefore, rotation is transmitted to the rotation operation portion 8654 by rotating the outer ring of the one-way clutch OW1.

As a result, when the drive motor KM6 is driven and rotated in one direction, the rotation is transmitted to the outer ring of the one-way clutch OW1 via the transmission gears 8651, 8652 and the inner ring of the one-way clutch OW1, and the rotation operation portion 8654 is rotated. is rotated. On the other hand, when the drive motor KM6 is driven to rotate in the other direction, transmission between the inner and outer rings of the one-way clutch OW1 is disabled, and transmission of rotational drive to the rotation operation portion 8654 is interrupted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 114, the case where the player operates the rotation operation section 8654 will be described. 114 is a schematic cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine 10. FIG. Note that the cross section of FIG. 114 corresponds to that of FIG.

As described above, the rotation operation unit 8654 rotates when the drive motor KM6 is rotated, and rotates the rotation operation unit 8654 by making the rotation of the drive motor KM6 non-rotating. A mode in which the displacement is stopped can be formed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 114, when the drive motor KM6 is rotated in one direction and the rotation operation portion 8654 is rotated in the A direction, the player operates the outer peripheral surface of the rotation operation portion 8654 to rotate the rotation operation portion. When a rotational force is generated in 8654 in the same direction as the direction of rotation A, the outer peripheral surface of one-way clutch OW1 and rotation operating portion 8654 are rotated first. That is, the rotation operation section 8654 can be operated by the player's operation to rotate at a speed faster than the rotation speed of the drive motor KM6.

Further, when the rotation operation part 8654 is not rotated (the drive motor KM6 is not rotated), the player applies a driving force to the rotation operation part 8654 in the direction of rotation A, thereby rotationally displacing the rotation operation part 8654. be able to.

Therefore, in the eighth embodiment, the rotation operation unit 8654 not only forms a non-rotating or rotating state by driving the drive motor KM6, but also rotates from a stopped state by a player's operation. And the rotation operation part 8654 can be configured to be rotated at a faster speed from the rotating state by the player's operation.

As a result, it is possible to form a plurality of modes in which the player can visually recognize the displacement mode of the rotation operation portion 8654, so that the player can be entertained. Also, by forming a plurality of rotation modes of the rotary operation part 8654, a plurality of performance modes of the pachinko machine 10 can be formed, so that the player can be entertained by the increased performance.

A sensor device or the like that measures the number of rotations is arranged on the side surface of the rotation operation unit 8654, and effects that change based on the number of rotations or the rotation speed of the rotation operation unit 8654 can be performed.

The present invention has been described above based on the above embodiments, but the present invention is not limited to the above embodiments, and various modifications and improvements are possible without departing from the scope of the present invention. can be easily guessed.

In each of the above embodiments, a gaming machine may be configured by replacing or combining part or all of one embodiment with part or all of another one or more embodiments.

In the first embodiment, the drive motor KM2 is driven to retract the ball receiving portion 467 from the third position to the second position or the first position. The drive for retracting to the 1 position may be driven by a biasing spring. For example, an urging spring is provided between the rack 466 or the movable rack 464 and the base member 470 so that elastic force is applied as the rack 466 or the movable rack 464 is displaced.

In this case, when the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced to the third position and performs the dispensing operation, the drive motor KM3 is turned off, so that the ball receiving portion 467 is moved to the second position or the second position by the biasing force of the biasing spring. It can be displaced to the 1 position side.

Therefore, the ball receiving portion 467 can be displaced by utilizing the time until the driving force of the driving motor KM2 is switched to the third position. It is possible to suppress wobbling of the lower displacement member 440 due to the reaction to the movement.

That is, when a game ball is ejected from the inside of the ball receiving portion 467, the load of the lower displacement member 440 is reduced by the amount of the ejected game ball, and the reaction causes the lower displacement member 440 to be easily displaced upward. By immediately displacing the ball receiving portion 467, the reaction due to the rotational displacement of the ball receiving portion 467 acts to displace the base member 470 downward, canceling the reaction when the ball is ejected from the lower displacement member 440. be able to.

In the first embodiment described above, two engaging protrusions 882 for restricting the rotation of the rotating body 800 are formed on the side surface of the rotating body 800 with a predetermined interval, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. do not have. For example, a plurality of them may be continuously provided on the side wall of the rotating body 800 at predetermined intervals. In this case, the rotation of the rotating body 800 can be restricted at any position, and the rotation of the rotating body 800 by an external force can be restricted when the lid member 770 is opened.

In the first embodiment, the opening 831 is formed on the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 800, and the game ball is thrown from the opening 831. may be formed on the side of the That is, openings may be formed on both axial side surfaces of the rotating body 800, one of which may serve as a ball inlet and the other may serve as a ball outlet. In this case, since the ball-throwing path can be formed inside the rotating body 800, the accessory (rotating body 800) can be used as the ball-throwing path especially when there is no space for arrangement on the back side of the game board 13. , the ball throwing path can be secured without increasing the size of the game board 13. - 特許庁

In the above-described first embodiment, the rotating body 800 has been described as having a cylindrical outer shape, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be polygonal, elliptical, or a combination thereof. In this case, since the shape of the rotating body 800 can be made complicated, it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize that the effect has been switched due to the rotational displacement of the rotating body 800 .

In the eighth embodiment, the case where the outer peripheral surface of the rotary operation portion 8654 is formed so as to be operable by the player has been described. In this case, the player can not only apply a rotational force to the rotation operation unit 8654, but also press a push button or perform an operation combining the rotation operation and the pressing operation of the rotation operation unit 8654. . As a result, since it is possible to form a plurality of operation modes of the rotation operation part 8654, it is possible to give interest to the player.

In the eighth embodiment, the case where the transmission gear 8651 and the transmission gear 8652 are meshed has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a torque limiter or the like may be interposed between the transmission gear 8651 and the transmission gear 8652 to interrupt the transmission of driving force when an overload is applied.

In this case, when the player stops the rotation of the rotating operation part 8654, it is possible to prevent the rotation of the rotation operation part 8654 from continuing by interrupting the transmission of the rotational driving force from the driving motor KM6. . As a result, it is possible to prevent the rotation operation unit 8650 from being broken when the player inputs rotation in the direction opposite to the rotation in the A direction to the rotation operation unit 8654 .

Furthermore, when the player operates the rotation operation part 8654, when the player's finger or clothes are caught between the rotation operation part 8654 and the upper plate 8017 on the side of the rotation direction, the rotation is stopped. Further pinching of the player's fingers or clothes can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being injured by being caught between the rotation operating portion 8654 and the upper tray 8017 .

In the eighth embodiment, the rotation direction of the rotation operation portion 8654 is the A direction, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the rotation direction of the rotation operation unit 8654 may be the horizontal direction with respect to the pachinko machine 10 . In this case, the player can be made to perform an action associated with the performance of the game machine, and the performance effect can be improved. For example, by hitting the rotary operation unit 8654 with the left hand so as to rotate it in the right direction and operating it, it is possible to produce an effect such as hitting (slapping) the character or the like displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

The present invention may be applied to a different type of pachinko machine or the like from the above embodiments. For example, once the jackpot hits, the expected value of the jackpot is increased until the jackpot state occurs multiple times (for example, 2 times, 3 times) including the pachinko machine (commonly known as 2 times rights product, 3 times rights product) may be implemented as Further, after the big winning pattern is displayed, the pachinko machine may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game in which a predetermined game value is given to the player under the condition that the ball enters a predetermined area. Also, a pachinko machine having a prize winning device having a special area such as a V-zone and entering a special game state as a necessary condition for winning a ball in the special area may be implemented. Furthermore, in addition to pachinko machines, various game machines such as arepachi, mammoth, slot machines, and so-called game machines combining a pachinko machine and a slot machine may be implemented.

It should be noted that the slot machine is a well-known system in which, for example, a coin is inserted to determine a valid symbol line, and the symbol is changed by operating an operation lever, and the symbol is stopped and fixed by operating a stop button. It is a thing. Therefore, the basic concept of a slot machine is "provided with a display device that confirms and displays identification information after variably displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of pieces of identification information, The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stopping (for example, a stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has passed, and the stop is displayed. It is a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value under the condition that the combination of time identification information is a specific one. In this case, the game medium is represented by coins, medals, etc. Examples include:

Further, as a specific example of a game machine that combines a pachinko machine and a slot machine, it is equipped with a display device for displaying a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols in a variable manner and then confirming and displaying the symbols, and is equipped with a ball launching handle. There are things that are not. In this case, after throwing a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the pattern starts to change due to the operation of the control lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or a predetermined As time elapses, the fluctuation of the symbols is stopped, and a special game is generated in which a predetermined game value is given to the player under the condition that the determined symbols at the time of the stop are so-called jackpot symbols, and the player is given a special game. A lot of balls are paid out to the tray at the bottom. If such a game machine is used instead of a slot machine, only the balls can be treated as game value in the game hall. It is possible to solve the problems such as the burden on the equipment due to the separate handling of the medals and the balls and the restrictions on the installation location of the game machine.

In the following, concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention are shown.

<Regarding the Concept of the Invention Taking the Lower Displacement Unit 400 as an Example>
a displacement member formed to be displaceable in a first direction from a reference position and capable of moving a game ball along with the displacement in the first direction; A gaming machine comprising a restricting means for restricting the ball from being thrown, wherein the displacement member is formed so as to be displaceable from the reference position in a second direction opposite to the first direction. Gaming machine A1.

Here, a displacement member formed to be displaceable in the first direction from the reference position and capable of moving the game ball along with the displacement in the first direction, and a trajectory area of the displacement member from outside the trajectory area of the displacement member A gaming machine is known that includes a regulation means that regulates the throwing of a game ball to a game ball (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-166997). According to this gaming machine, it is possible to prevent game balls exceeding the specified number from being thrown to the track area of the displacement member by the regulation of the regulation means. However, in the above-described conventional game machine, if the restricting means malfunctions due to sticking or wear, for example, there is a risk that more than a specified number of game balls will be thrown toward the track area of the displacement member. However, in this case, there is a problem that the number of game balls exceeding the prescribed number may cause a problem. That is, for example, there is a risk that game balls in excess of the specified number may enter the drive mechanism of the displacement member and be caught in the movable portion, resulting in damage. Alternatively, there is a risk that game balls exceeding the specified number may flow out of the game area (for example, the back side of the game board).

On the other hand, according to the game machine A1, the displacement member is formed so as to be displaceable from the reference position in the second direction opposite to the first direction, so that the track area of the displacement member can be expanded accordingly. Therefore, for example, even if the regulating means malfunctions and more than the specified number of game balls are thrown, the track area of the displacement member is expanded, and game balls exceeding the specified number are moved to the track area. can accept. As a result, the number of game balls exceeding the prescribed number can be moved along with the displacement of the displacement member in the first direction. Therefore, game balls in excess of the specified number can be prevented from entering the driving mechanism of the displacement member or flowing out of the game area. It can be difficult.

In the gaming machine A1, a passage member is formed as a passage through which a game ball can pass, and a downstream portion of the passage member communicates with a track area of the displacement member. Characterized game machine A2.

According to the game machine A2, in addition to the effects of the game machine A1, the passage member is formed as a passage through which the game ball can pass, and the downstream portion communicates with the track area of the displacement member. Since the passage of the balls is restricted, for example, even if the restricting means malfunctions and more game balls than the specified number are thrown, the game balls exceeding the specified number are transferred to the displacement member via the passage member. It is possible to reliably throw the ball to the trajectory area. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to cause problems due to game balls exceeding the specified number.

In the gaming machine A2, the displacement member is formed so as to be capable of receiving and holding a specified number of game balls thrown from the passage member at the reference position, and at least the diameter of the game ball from the reference position in the second direction. A gaming machine A3 characterized in that it is formed to be displaceable by a distance exceeding .

According to the game machine A3, in addition to the effects of the game machine A2, the displacement member is formed so as to be able to receive and hold the specified number of game balls thrown from the passage member at the reference position, and to move the second position from the reference position. Since it is formed to be displaceable in the direction at least by a distance exceeding the diameter of the game ball, after receiving the specified number of game balls at the reference position, by displacing the displacement member in the second direction from the reference position, the specified number can be obtained. It is possible to throw the game balls exceeding the trajectory area of the displacement member (the area on the first direction side of the displacement member). Therefore, the number of game balls exceeding the prescribed number can be moved along with the displacement of the displacement member in the first direction.

In this case, the displacement member holds the specified number of game balls, and the game balls exceeding the specified number can be thrown to the track area, so that the specified number of game balls are separated from the game balls exceeding the specified number. can do. Therefore, for example, by displacing the displacement member in the first direction, it is possible to discharge only game balls exceeding the prescribed number from the track area while maintaining the state in which the displacement member holds the prescribed number of game balls. It becomes possible.

The game machine A4 is characterized in that in the game machine A3, the displacement member is formed so as to change its posture when it is displaced in the first direction and reaches a predetermined position.

According to the game machine A4, in addition to the effects of the game machine A3, the displacement member is formed so that its posture can be changed when it is displaced in the first direction and reaches the predetermined position. While making it easy to maintain the state in which the ball is held by the displacement member, it is possible to prevent the game ball from falling out of the displacement member, and when reaching a predetermined position, the game ball can be controlled by utilizing the change in the attitude of the displacement member. can be easily discharged from the displacement member.

In the gaming machine A4, a concave portion is provided in a track region when the displacement member is displaced in the first direction from the reference position, and the displacement member is positioned in the concave portion when the displacement member is displaced in the first direction. A game machine A5, characterized in that it has a protrusion to be engaged and is formed such that its attitude can be changed by engaging said protrusion with said recess.

According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A4, the displacement member is provided with a concave portion recessed in the track area when the displacement member is displaced in the first direction from the reference position, and the displacement member is displaced in the first direction. Since the protrusion is engaged with the recess when the displacement member is engaged with the recess, and the protrusion is engaged with the recess, the attitude of the displacement member can be changed. Therefore, the structure for changing the attitude of the displacement member can be simplified.

In the gaming machine A5, the projection projects from the displacement member in the first direction, and the tip of the projection hits the lower half of the game ball sent to the trajectory region of the displacement member. A gaming machine A6 characterized by being touched.

According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A5, the protrusion is provided to project from the displacement member in the first direction, and the tip of the projection is a game ball thrown to the track area of the displacement member. (That is, the game balls exceeding the specified number) are formed so as to be able to abut on the lower half of the surface. You can push and move. As a result, game balls exceeding the specified number can be easily discharged from the track area.

In addition, the protrusion is interposed between the specified number of game balls held by the displacement member and the game balls sent to the track area of the displacement member (the game balls exceeding the specified number). The distance between the specified number of game balls and the game balls exceeding the specified number can be secured by the projecting length of the part. Therefore, it is possible to easily discharge only the game balls exceeding the prescribed number from the track area while maintaining the state in which the prescribed number of game balls are held by the displacement member.

Furthermore, since the projecting part has the role of changing the posture of the displacement member by engaging with the recessed part and the role of moving the game ball while pushing the lower half of the game ball, the number of parts can be reduced accordingly. Cost can be reduced.

A gaming machine A7 in the gaming machine A5 or A6, wherein the size of the recess in the first direction is smaller than the diameter of the game ball.

According to the game machine A7, in addition to the effects of the game machine A5 or A6, the size of the concave portion in the first direction is smaller than the diameter of the game ball, so that the game ball thrown to the track area of the displacement member (That is, game balls exceeding the prescribed number) can easily pass through the concave portion when moved in accordance with the displacement of the displacement member in the first direction. As a result, game balls exceeding the specified number can be easily discharged from the track area.

In any one of the game machines A5 to A7, the displacement member is erected at a height lower than the radius of the game ball in the trajectory area when the displacement member is displaced from the reference position in the first direction, and is higher than the recess. A wall portion located on the first direction side is provided, and when a game ball sent to the track area of the displacement member is moved along with the displacement of the displacement member in the first direction, the game ball is moved to the wall portion. A game machine A8 characterized in that a position change of the displacement member is regulated by being brought into contact with the portion and the displacement member.

According to the game machine A8, in any one of the game machines A5 to A7, the displacement member is erected at a height lower than the radius of the game ball in the trajectory region when displacing in the first direction from the reference position, and the concave portion When a game ball sent to the track area of the displacement member is moved in accordance with the displacement of the displacement member in the first direction, the game ball is positioned on the first direction side of the wall portion. Since the position change of the displacement member can be regulated by contacting the displacement member, only the game balls exceeding the prescribed number are retained while the displacement member holds the prescribed number of game balls. It can be easily ejected from the orbital area.

That is, since the wall portion is erected at a height lower than the radius of the game ball, when the game ball is moved by being pushed by the projecting portion as the displacement member is displaced in the first direction, the game ball is moved. A game ball can easily run over the wall part by bringing the lower half surface of the ball into contact with the wall part. In this case, the game ball is brought into contact with the displacement member (that is, the game ball is interposed between the displacement member and the wall portion), and a reaction force can be applied from the game ball to the displacement member. Posture change can be regulated, and the specified number of game balls held by the displacement member can be suppressed from dropping out. As a result, it is possible to easily discharge only the game balls exceeding the prescribed number from the track area while maintaining the state in which the prescribed number of game balls are held by the displacement member.

On the other hand, when game balls (that is, game balls exceeding the specified number) are not thrown into the track area of the displacement member, no game balls are interposed between the wall and the displacement member, so that the protrusion becomes the recess. By being engaged, the posture of the displacement member can be changed. As a result, it is possible to easily discharge a prescribed number of game balls (that is, game balls held by the displacement member) from the displacement member by using the change in posture of the displacement member.

A gaming machine A9 is characterized in that, in any one of the gaming machines A1 to A8, the restricting means is operable in conjunction with the displacement of the displacement member.

According to the game machine A9, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines A1 to A8, the restricting means is formed to be operable in conjunction with the displacement of the displacement member. It is possible to restrict or allow the throwing of a game ball into the track area of the member. That is, since the regulation or permission of throwing a game ball can be switched mechanically in synchronization with the displacement of the displacement member, for example, a sensor device for detecting the position of the regulation means and the detection result of the sensor device can be used. It is possible to eliminate the need for driving means for driving the regulating means or control of each of these means, thereby reducing the product cost and improving the reliability of the operation.

In the gaming machine A9, the restricting means allows the game ball to be thrown to the track area of the displacement member in conjunction with the displacement of the displacement member in the second direction from the reference position. Characterized game machine A10.

According to the gaming machine A10, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A9, the restricting means moves the game ball to the track area of the displacement member in conjunction with the displacement of the displacement member from the reference position in the second direction. Since the ball is allowed to be thrown, the game ball can be reliably thrown to the area on the first direction side of the displacement member, which is the track area of the displacement member.

In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A10, a base member on which the displacement member is displaceably disposed, and a base member disposed vertically downward and vertically upward from an end portion of the base member on the first direction side A gaming machine A11 characterized by comprising a collection member having an opening in the bottom.

According to the game machine A11, in addition to the effects of the game machine A10, the displacement member is disposed vertically below the base member displaceably disposed and the end portion of the base member on the first direction side. and a recovery member having an opening vertically upward, so that the game balls are moved as the displacement member moves in the first direction and discharged from the track area of the displacement member (i.e., the number exceeding the prescribed number). A game ball) can be received and recovered from the opening of the recovery member.

In the gaming machine A11, the base member is formed so as to be displaceable between a retracted position and a displaced position, and the opening of the recovery member is located at least at the first position in the base member displaced to the retracted position or the displaced position. A gaming machine A12 characterized in that it is formed in a size positioned vertically below the end on the direction side.

According to the game machine A12, in addition to the effects of the game machine A11, the base member is displaceable between the retracted position and the displaced position, and the opening of the recovery member is displaced to at least the retracted position or the displaced position. Since the base member has a size positioned vertically below the first direction end of the base member, the displacement member is ejected from the track area of the displacement member regardless of whether the base member is displaced to the retracted position or the displaced position. It is possible to receive and collect the game balls (that is, the game balls exceeding the specified number) from the opening of the collecting member.

A gaming machine A13 characterized in that in any of the gaming machines A5 to A8, the gaming machine A13 comprises an insertion member that is inserted into the recessed space of the recess to restrict the protrusion from engaging with the recess. .

According to the gaming machine A13, any one of the gaming machines A5 to A8 includes an insertion member that restricts engagement of the protrusion with the recess by being inserted into the recessed space of the recess. With the displacement in the first direction, it is possible to suppress the change in the posture of the displacement member when ejecting game balls exceeding the specified number from the track area of the displacement member. Therefore, it is possible to easily discharge only the game balls exceeding the prescribed number from the track area while maintaining the state in which the prescribed number of game balls are held by the displacement member.

In the gaming machine A13, a base member is formed to be displaceable between a retracted position and a displaced position, and the displacement member is arranged to be displaceable, and the insertion member is adapted to displace the base member to the retracted position The game machine A14 is characterized in that when the base member is displaced to the displaced position, it is separated from the recessed space of the recess while being inserted into the recessed space of the recess.

According to the game machine A14, in addition to the effects of the game machine A13, when the base member is displaced to the retracted position, the insertion member is inserted into the recessed space of the recess, so that the displacement member is displaced in the first direction. Accordingly, when game balls in excess of the specified number are discharged from the track area of the displacement member, the state in which the displacement member holds the specified number of game balls by suppressing the change in the posture of the displacement member. On the other hand, when the base member is displaced to the displaced position, the insertion member is separated from the recessed space of the recess. By combining them, the attitude of the displacement member can be changed, and the prescribed number of game balls can be easily discharged from the displacement member.

<Regarding the Concept of the Invention Taking the Distribution Unit 500 as an Example>
A downflow passage for a game ball to flow down, a first branch passage and a second branch passage branched from the downflow passage, and a game ball flowing down the downflow passage to either the first branch passage or the second branch passage. A game machine having a sorting means for sorting comprises a displaceable member formed to be displaceable and receiving game balls from the first branch passage, wherein the displacement member contacts the sorting means and is displaced. , the game machine B1 is characterized in that the distribution means is displaced and the distribution destination is switched.

Here, a downflow passage through which game balls flow down, a first branch passage and a second branch passage branched from the downflow passage, and a game ball flowing down the downflow passage to either the first branch passage or the second branch passage A gaming machine equipped with sorting means for sorting is known (for example, JP-A-2014-223176). However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, since the game balls flowing down the flow passage are alternately distributed one by one to the first branch passage and the second branch passage, the game balls flowing down the flow passage are It is evenly distributed to the first branch passage and the second branch passage (that is, divided by half). That is, there is a problem that the number of game balls distributed to the first branch passage cannot be changed.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B1, the displacement member is formed to be displaceable and receives the game ball from the first branch passage. Since the means is displaced and the distribution destination is switched, the number of game balls distributed to the first branch passage or the second branch passage can be changed according to the displacement of the displacement member. That is, the number of game balls distributed to the first branch path can be changed.

In addition, according to the game machine B1, the distributing means can be displaced using the displacement of the displacing member, so there is no need to separately provide a driving means or a transmission mechanism for displacing the distributing means. can. Therefore, the number of parts can be reduced accordingly, and the product cost can be reduced.

In addition, for example, in a structure that controls the displacement of the sorting means using position detection by a sensor device and driving by a drive means, malfunction due to detection failure or control failure lowers the reliability of the sorting operation of the sorting means. However, according to the game machine B1, the allocation destination by the allocation means can be switched in mechanical synchronization with the displacement of the displacement member, so that the reliability of the allocation operation can be improved.

In particular, since the displacement member is a member that receives game balls from the first branch passage, it is possible to switch the distribution destination of the distribution means to the first branch passage in synchronization with the displacement of the displacement member. The game balls distributed to the passage can be surely received by the displacement member.

In the game machine B1, a biasing means is provided for applying a biasing force to the distribution means to maintain a distribution destination of the distribution means at one of the first branch passage and the second branch passage, and the displacement member displaces the distributing means in a direction against the direction of the urging force, thereby switching the destination of distribution by the distributing means to the other of the first branch passage and the second branch passage, and the urging force A gaming machine B2 characterized in that the destination of distribution by the distribution means is returned to one of the first branch passage and the second branch passage by the biasing force of the means.

According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B1, a biasing force is applied to the sorting means to maintain the sorting destination of the sorting means at either the first branch passage or the second branch passage. Since the force means is provided, it is possible to prevent the distribution destination from being carelessly switched by the distribution means. In this case, the distribution means is displaced with the displacement of the displacement member, and after the distribution destination is switched, the return to the distribution destination before switching can be performed by the biasing force of the biasing means. It is possible to eliminate the need for the member to be in contact with the distribution means. That is, the displacement member can be separated from the sorting means. Therefore, it is possible to increase the degree of freedom in designing the movable range of the displacement member.

In the game machine B2, the urging means imparts an urging force to the allocating means to keep the second branch path as the destination of allocation by the allocating means.

According to the game machine B3, in addition to the effects of the game machine B2, the biasing means applies a biasing force to the distribution means to maintain the distribution destination of the distribution means in the second branch passage. is incapable of receiving game balls, it is possible to suppress the switching of the sorting destination by the sorting means to the first branch passage.

The game machine B3 includes a base member that is displaceable between a first position and a second position and on which the displacement member is disposed. , the displacement member is capable of receiving a game ball from the first branch passage and is capable of abutting against the distribution means, and in a state in which the base member is arranged at the second position, the displacement A gaming machine B4 characterized in that the member is not capable of receiving game balls from the first branch passage and is not capable of coming into contact with the sorting means.

According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B3, the base member is formed to be displaceable between the first position and the second position, and the displacement member is disposed on the base member. , a mode in which the displacement member is displaced with the base member arranged at the first position, and a mode in which the displacement member is displaced with the base member arranged at the second position can be formed. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect accordingly.

In this case, when the base member is arranged at the second position, the displacement member cannot receive the game ball from the first branch passage, but in such a state, the displacement member cannot contact the distribution means. Therefore, in a state in which the displacement member cannot receive the game ball (a state in which the base member is arranged at the second position), it is possible to prevent the distribution destination from being switched to the first branch passage by the distribution means.

A gaming machine B5 characterized in that the gaming machine B4 comprises a second base member formed as a separate member from the base member, and the distribution means is disposed on the second base member.

According to the game machine B5, in addition to the effects of the game machine B4, the second base member is formed as a separate member from the base member, and the distribution means is disposed on the second base member. Accordingly, it is possible to suppress an increase in the size of the base member.

In any one of game machines B1 to B5, the displacement member is formed to be displaceable at least between a switching position and a receiving position set to a position different from the switching position, and the displacement member is displaced to the switching position. In this state, the distribution destination by the distribution means is switched to the first branch passage, and in the state in which the displacement member is displaced to the receiving position, the displacement member can receive the game ball from the first branch passage. and a game machine B6 characterized in that the distribution destination by the distribution means is switched to the second branch passage.

According to the game machine B6, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines B1 to B5, the displacement member is formed to be displaceable at least between the switching position and the receiving position set at a position different from the switching position, In a state in which the displacement member is displaced to the switching position, the distribution destination by the distribution means is switched to the first branch passage, and in a state in which the displacement member is displaced to the receiving position, the displacement member receives the game ball from the first branch passage. Since the ball can be received and the distribution destination by the distribution means is switched to the second branch passage, it is possible to suppress the game balls exceeding the specified number that the displacement member can receive from being distributed to the first branch passage.

That is, when the switching position and the receiving position are set to the same position, the displacement member receives the game ball while the distribution destination by the distribution means is switched to the first branch passage. There is a possibility that game balls exceeding the prescribed number that can be received are distributed to the first branch passage. If a separate means for restricting the inflow of game balls into the first branch passage is provided, the structure becomes complicated, the reliability is lowered, and the product cost is increased.

On the other hand, according to the game machine B6, the displacement member is displaced to the switching position, and after the specified number (or less than the specified number) of game balls are distributed to the first branch passage, the displacement member is displaced to the receiving position. Then, since the distribution destination is switched to the second branch passage, it is possible to prevent game balls in excess of the specified number from flowing down to the first branch passage. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the game balls exceeding the specified number that the displacement member can receive from being distributed to the first branch passage. Moreover, since there is no need to separately provide the means described above, it is possible to improve the reliability and reduce the product cost.

In the game machine B6, the first branch passage is formed as one or more protrusions or recesses protruding or recessed on the inner wall surface thereof, and has a resistance that imparts resistance to game balls passing through the first branch passage. A gaming machine B7 characterized by comprising means.

According to the game machine B7, in addition to the effects of the game machine B6, the first branch passage is formed as one or a plurality of projections or recesses protruded or recessed on the inner wall surface, and the first branch passage is passed through. Since the game ball is equipped with resistance means for applying resistance to the game ball passing through the first branch passage, the speed of the game ball passing through the first branch passage can be slowed down. Therefore, the time required for the displacement member to be displaced from the switching position to the receiving position can be lengthened accordingly, so that the displacement member can reliably receive the game ball. In addition, the output of the driving means can be reduced to the extent that the displacement speed required for the displacement member can be reduced, and the product cost can be reduced.

In game machine B6 or B7, the sorting means includes a first retractable portion and a second retractable portion which are formed to be retractable with respect to the first branch passage as the sorting means is displaced; The 1 haunting part is formed so as to be able to distribute the game balls flowing down the flow path to the second branch path by protruding into the first branch path, and the second haunting part is formed from the first haunting part is also positioned downstream of the first branch passage and protrudes into the first branch passage so that the game balls distributed to the first branch passage can be restricted from flowing down, and the first haunting portion and a second retractable portion, one of which protrudes into the passage of the first branch passage, the other retracts out of the passage of the first branch passage.

According to the game machine B8, in addition to the effects of the game machine B6 or B7, the sorting means includes the first retractable portion formed so as to be retractable with respect to the first branch passage as the sorting means is displaced; A second haunting part is provided, and the first haunting part protrudes into the first branch passage so that the game balls flowing down the flow-down passage can be distributed to the second branch passage, and the second haunting part is the first branch passage. Positioned on the downstream side of the first branch passage from the haunting portion and projecting into the first branch passage, the game balls distributed to the first branch passage are formed to be capable of regulating the flow down, and the first haunting portion is formed. and the second projecting/retracting part, when one protrudes into the passage of the first branch passage, the other retracts out of the first branch passage. , only the prescribed number of game balls can be distributed to the first branch passage and received by the displacement member.

That is, a first state in which the game balls flowing down the flow path are distributed to the second branch path by the protrusion of the first haunting part, and a game ball flowing down the flow path by retreating the first haunting part. A second state in which the game balls are distributed to the first branch passage; By retracting the 2 haunting part, it is possible to form a fourth state in which the game balls stored in the first branch passage are flowed down and received by the displacement member. Only a certain number of game balls can be distributed to the first branch passage and received by the displacement member.

In addition, according to the game machine B8, the distribution means is provided with the first retractable part and the second retractable part, that is, formed as a single part, so the structure of the sorting means (the first retractable part and the second retractable part and the structure for exhibiting their functions) can be simplified. Furthermore, since one of the first projecting and retracting portion and the second projecting and retracting portion projects into the passage of the first branch passage, the other retracts out of the passage of the first branch passage. and receiving position), it is sufficient that the distributing means is formed so as to be displaceable to two positions. That is, by displacing the distributing means at two positions, the first to fourth states described above can be formed. Therefore, the structure of the distributing means and the structure of displacing the distributing means according to the displacement of the displacement member can be simplified, and the reliability of the game ball distributing operation can be improved accordingly.

<Regarding the Concept of the Invention Taking the Distribution Unit 500 as an Example>
A downflow passage for a game ball to flow down, a first branch passage and a second branch passage branched from the downflow passage, and a game ball flowing down the downflow passage to either the first branch passage or the second branch passage. A gaming machine comprising a sorting means for sorting, characterized by comprising a flow state changing means positioned downstream of the sorting means for restricting or allowing the game balls to flow down in the first branch passage. Game machine C1.

Here, a downflow passage through which game balls flow down, a first branch passage and a second branch passage branched from the downflow passage, and a game ball flowing down the downflow passage to either the first branch passage or the second branch passage. A gaming machine equipped with sorting means for sorting is known (for example, JP-A-2014-223176). However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, the game balls flowing down the flow-down passage are only distributed to either the first branch passage or the second branch passage, which is insufficient to provide interest to the player. There was a problem.

On the other hand, according to the game machine C1, since it is provided with the flow state changing means which is located downstream of the distribution means and regulates or permits the flow of the game balls in the first branch passage, it is interesting to the players. can give

That is, by the operation of the flow state changing means, the game balls distributed to the first branch passage are restricted from flowing down, the game balls are stored in the first branch passage, and the game balls are allowed to flow down in the first branch passage. , the game balls stored in the first branch passage can flow down (released). As a result, in addition to the operation of distributing the game balls flowing down the flow-down passage to either the first branch passage or the second branch passage, the operation of temporarily stopping (accumulating) the flow of the game balls distributed to the first branch passage. , and the action of causing the stopped (stored) game ball to flow down (release). As a result, it is possible to give interest to the player.

In the game machine C1, an integral member is provided in which the distribution means and the flow state change means are integrally formed, and in a state where the destination of distribution by the distribution means is the first branch passage, the first branch passage is restricted by the flow state changing means, and the distribution destination of the distribution means is the second branch passage, the flow of the game balls in the first branch passage is controlled by the flow state change means. Gaming machine C2 characterized by being allowed.

According to the game machine C2, in addition to the effects of the game machine C1, since an integrated member in which the distribution means and the flow state change means are integrally formed is provided, the distribution means and the flow state change means are operated. It is possible to simplify the structure and improve the reliability of operation. That is, when the distribution means and the flowing-down state changing means are formed separately, they are two parts, so the structure for operating these two parts is complicated and the reliability of the operation is lowered. On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C2, since the distribution means and the flow state changing means can be formed as a single part, the structure can be simplified accordingly, and the product cost can be reduced and the reliability of the operation can be improved. can be planned.

Further, in this case, when the distribution destination by the distribution means is set to the first branch passage by the operation of the integrated member, the flow down of the game balls distributed to the first branch passage is regulated by the flow-down state changing means and the first branch passage is controlled. When the game balls are stored in the branch passage and the distribution destination of the distribution means is set to the second branch passage, the flow down of the game balls in the first branch passage is allowed by the flow state changing means, and the game balls are accumulated in the first branch passage. It is possible to let down (release) the game ball that has been held. That is, in addition to the action of allocating the game balls flowing down the flow-down passage to one of the first branch passage and the second branch passage, the action of temporarily stopping (accumulating) the flow of the game balls distributed to the first branch passage; Not only can the stopped (stored) game ball flow down (release) operation, but also these storage and release operations can be alternately formed in conjunction with the sorting operation.

In the game machine C2, the integrated member is formed to be displaceable between a first state position and a second state position, and in a state in which the integrated member is displaced to the first state position, the distribution means is shifted to the first state position. 1 branch passage is arranged at a position where the distribution destination is, and the flowing state changing means is arranged at a position for regulating the flow of game balls in the first branch passage, and the integral member is displaced to the second state position. In the state, the distribution means is arranged at a position where the second branch passage is the distribution destination, and the flow state changing means is arranged at a position allowing the game balls to flow down in the first branch passage. Gaming machine C3.

According to the game machine C3, in addition to the effects of the game machine C2, the integrated member is formed to be displaceable between the first state position and the second state position, and when the integrated member is displaced to the first state position, , the distributing means is arranged at the position where the first branch path is the distribution destination, the flow state changing means is arranged at the position for restricting the flow of the game balls in the first branch path, and the integrated member is displaced to the second state position. In this state, the distribution means is arranged at a position where the second branch passage is the distribution destination, and the flow-down state changing means is arranged at a position allowing the game balls to flow down in the first branch passage. By displacing at two positions (first state position and second state position), in addition to the operation of distributing the game ball flowing down the downflow passage to either the first branch passage or the second branch passage, the first branch passage It is possible to form an operation to temporarily stop (store) the flow of distributed game balls and an operation to make the stopped (stored) game balls flow (release), and these storage and release operations can be performed. , can be formed alternately in conjunction with the sorting operation. That is, it is possible to simplify the structure, reduce the product cost, and improve the operational reliability.

In the game machine C3, the integrated member is rotatably formed, and at least the flowing-down state changing means is formed so as to be able to appear and withdraw with respect to the first branch passage. A game machine C4 characterized in that it is formed in an arc-shaped curved shape centering on the rotation axis of the integrated member while restricting the flow of the integrated member.

According to the game machine C4, in addition to the effects of the game machine C3, the integral member is formed rotatably, and at least the flow state changing means is formed so as to be able to appear and disappear with respect to the first branch passage. Since it is formed in an arc-shaped curved shape centered on the rotation axis of the integrated member, the inner wall of the first branch passage for the appearance and disappearance of the flow state changing means It is possible to reduce the area of the hole opened to the

The gaming machine C5 in the gaming machine C4 is characterized in that the flowing-down state changing means is arranged in a posture in which the upstream side of the first branch passage is concave.

According to the game machine C5, in addition to the effects of the game machine C4, the flow state changing means is arranged in a posture in which the upstream side of the first branch passage is concave, so that the flow state change to the first branch passage. In the initial state when the means begins to protrude (that is, in a state in which only the tip side of the flow state changing means protrudes into the passage), the shape of the tip side of the flow state changing means is such that it is easy to regulate the flow of the game ball. It can be arranged in the direction, and the flow down of game balls distributed to the first branch passage can be easily regulated.

Further, in a state in which the flowing-down state changing means protrudes to the first branch passage to the maximum and restricts the flowing down of the game ball, the game ball can be stably held by the concave portion of the flowing-down state changing means, so that the rampage of the game ball can be suppressed. .

In game machine C4 or C5, biasing means for applying a biasing force to the integral member to bias the flowing state changing means in a direction in which the flowing state changing means protrudes into the first branch passage, A game machine C6 characterized in that the distance to the rotation axis of the integrated member is set larger than the distance from the sorting means to the rotation axis of the integrated member.

According to the gaming machine C6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C4 or C5, it is provided with an urging means for imparting an urging force to the integral member and urging the flowing-down state changing means in the direction of protruding into the first branch passage. Therefore, by utilizing this urging force, the integrated member can be easily maintained in a posture (that is, the first state position) in which the flow-down state changing means protrudes into the first branch passage.

In this case, in the game machine C6, since the distance from the flowing state changing means to the rotation axis of the integrated member is made larger than the distance from the sorting means to the rotation axis of the integrated member, the falling game balls collide. Since the distance from the rotation axis is large, even if the same impact force acts, the flow state changing means is likely to be retracted. By setting it in the direction to do so, it is possible to suppress the sinking of the flowing-down state changing means by the amount of the urging force.

In the game machine C6, the integrated member is rotated by its own weight in a direction in which the flowing state changing means protrudes into the first branch passage.

According to the game machine C7, in addition to the effects of the game machine C6, the integrated member rotates in the direction in which the flowing-down state changing means protrudes into the first branch passage by its own weight. The member can be easily maintained in a posture (that is, the first state position) in which the flow-down state changing means protrudes into the first branch passage. Therefore, when the game ball collides, it is possible to further suppress the sinking of the flowing-down state changing means by its own weight.

Further, even if the urging means falls off, the flowing-down state changing means maintains the posture of protruding into the first branch passage by the weight of the integral part, thereby preventing the game ball from flowing down to the first branch passage. can be suppressed.

In any one of the game machines C2 to C7, the distribution destination by the distribution means is the first branch passage, and the flow down of the game ball in the first branch passage is regulated by the flow state changing means, and the first The gaming machine C8 is characterized in that, in a state where a specified number of game balls are stored in the branch passage, game balls flowing down the flow passage are formed so as to flow down to the second branch passage.

According to the game machine C8, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines C2 to C7, the distribution destination by the distribution means is the first branch passage, and the flow of game balls in the first branch passage is controlled by the flow state changing means. When a specified number of game balls are stored in the first branch path, the game balls flowing down the flow-down path are formed to be able to flow down to the second branch path, so that the specified number or more of game balls flow down. When flowing down the passage, it is possible to suppress the game balls exceeding a prescribed number from remaining in the flow-down passage. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the displacement of the distribution means (the operation of setting the distribution destination to the second branch passage) from being hindered by the game balls stuck in the flow-down passage.

In the game machine C8, the inner wall of the flow path facing the second branch path is configured to store the game balls flowing down the flow path at the end of the specified number of game balls stored in the first branch path. A gaming machine C9 characterized in that it is formed so as to be able to guide a game ball to the side surface on the second branch path side.

According to the game machine C9, in addition to the effects of the game machine C8, the inner wall of the flow-down passage on the side facing the second branch passage allows the game balls flowing down the flow-down passage to reach the prescribed number stored in the first branch passage. Since the game balls at the end of the game balls are formed so as to be able to be guided to the side surface of the second branch passage side, the game balls flowing down the flow-down passage are caused to collide with the game balls at the end of the prescribed number of game balls. After that, it can be easily made to flow down to the second branch passage.

The game ball at the end of the specified number of game balls means a game ball located on the upstream side (on the side opposite to the flow state changing means). Further, when the prescribed number is 1, the last game ball means the game ball itself stored in the first branch passage.

In the game machine C8 or C9, the game machine C10 is characterized in that the flow direction of the downstream end of the flow passage is formed in a direction different from the flow direction of the upstream end of the first branch passage.

According to the gaming machine C10, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C8 or C9, the downstream end of the flow path is formed in a direction different from the flow direction of the upstream end of the first branch path. When the falling game ball collides with the last game ball of the specified number of game balls stored in the first branch passage, the direction of the repulsive force acting on the last game ball is changed to the direction of the first branch passage. It can be different from the downstream direction of the upstream end. As a result, it is possible to prevent the last game ball from jumping out of the upstream end of the first branch passage and flowing into the second branch passage due to the repulsive force at the time of collision.

In any one of game machines C2 to C10, the sorting means is formed so as to be able to appear in and out of the flow path or the first branch path, and its haunt position is in the flow direction at the downstream end of the flow path. A game machine C11 characterized in that it is an inner wall on an extension line of.

According to the game machine C11, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines C2 to C10, the sorting means is formed to be able to appear and disappear with respect to the downstream passage or the first branch passage, Since it is the inner wall on the extension line of the downstream end of the passage in the flow direction, the distribution means can be protruded at a position close to the game balls flowing down from the downstream end of the flow passage. Therefore, it is possible to shorten the time required from when the distributing means is started to protrude into the downstream passage or the first branch passage to when the game balls can be distributed. As a result, switching of distribution destinations by the distribution means can be performed more reliably.

In the gaming machine C11, the distribution means projects into the flow passage or the first branch passage to distribute game balls flowing down the flow passage to the second branch passage. A gaming machine C12 characterized in that the projecting direction of the means is set to the upstream end of the second branch passage.

According to the gaming machine C12, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C11, the sorting means protrudes into the downstream passage or the first branch passage, thereby sorting the game balls flowing down the downstream passage to the second branch passage. , and since the projecting direction of the distribution means is set in the direction pointing to the upstream end of the second branch passage, when the game ball flowing down the flow-down passage comes into contact with the distribution means in the middle of the projecting operation, can push such a game ball into the second branch passage along with the projecting action of the sorting means. As a result, the distribution to the second branch passage can be performed more reliably.

In any one of the game machines C1 to C12, the first branch passage is formed to be inclined downward toward the downstream, and the inner wall on the lower side in the gravity direction is formed so that the game ball can roll, and the flowing state The game machine C13 is characterized in that the change means is formed so as to be able to protrude into the first branch passage from the inner wall on the lower side in the direction of gravity.

According to the game machine C13, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines C1 to C12, the first branch passage is formed downwardly inclined toward the downstream, and the inner wall on the lower side in the direction of gravity allows the game ball to pass through. Since it is formed to be rotatable and the flowing-down state changing means is formed so as to be able to protrude into and out of the first branch passage from the inner wall on the lower side in the gravity direction, the game is started after the flowing-down state changing means is started to protrude into the first branch passage. It is possible to shorten the time required to reach a state in which the downflow of the ball can be regulated. As a result, the distribution destination of the distribution means is switched from the second branch passage to the first branch passage, and when the game ball is distributed to the first branch passage, the flow state changing means is used to regulate the flow of the game ball. Protrusion can be easily made in time.

In any one of the game machines C1 to C13, the flowing-down state changing means is formed so as to be able to appear and withdraw with respect to the first branch passage, and at least in a state in which it protrudes to the first branch passage to the maximum, it moves in the projecting direction. A game machine C14 characterized in that a force component is applied from a game ball to said flowing state changing means.

According to the game machine C14, in any one of the game machines C1 to C13, the flowing-down state changing means is formed so as to be able to appear and withdraw with respect to the first branch passage, and at least when it protrudes to the first branch passage to the maximum, it protrudes. Since the force component in the direction of movement is applied from the game ball to the flowing-down state changing means, when the game ball distributed to the first branch passage is restricted from flowing down, the impact caused by the collision of the game ball causes the game ball to flow down. It is possible to suppress the immersion of the state changing means. Therefore, it is possible to easily regulate the flow of the game ball.

<Regarding the Concept of the Invention Taking the Lower Displacement Unit 400 as an Example>
A game machine comprising a base member, a base member displaceably arranged on one side of the base member, and a displacement member arranged displaceably on the base member, wherein the base member accompanies displacement of the displacement member. The game machine D1 is characterized by comprising suppressing means for suppressing reaction of members.

Here, a game machine is known that includes a base member, a base member displaceably arranged on one side of the base member, and a displacement member displaceably arranged on the base member (for example, , JP 2015-029849). According to this gaming machine, in addition to the effect of displacing the base member between a protruding position where the base member protrudes into the game area and is visible to the player, and a retracted position where it retreats from the game area, the base member is displaced. In the state of being arranged at the extended position, an effect of displacing the displacement member can be performed.

However, in the above-described conventional game machine, one side of the base member is displaceably disposed on the base member, so when the displacement member is displaced, the base member rattles with respect to the base member with the one side as the fulcrum. There is a problem that it is easy to generate

On the other hand, according to the game machine D1, since the suppressing means for suppressing the reaction of the base member due to the displacement of the displacement member is provided, the occurrence of looseness of the base member with respect to the base member when the displacement member is displaced is suppressed. can do.

The reaction force associated with the displacement of the displacement member may be, for example, the force generated by the change in the center of gravity associated with the displacement of the displacement member, or the action of the inertial force associated with the increase or decrease in displacement speed (change in acceleration) of the displacement member. , and those generated with the reaction force when the displacement member is displaced and the game ball is ejected are exemplified.

In the game machine D1, the suppressing means includes an arrangement member displaceably arranged on the base member, the displacement member is formed so as to be capable of holding and ejecting a game ball, and the arrangement member is A gaming machine D2 characterized by being formed so as to be displaceable when a game ball is ejected from the displacing member.

According to the game machine D2, in addition to the effects of the game machine D1, the suppressing means includes an arrangement member displaceably arranged on the base member, and the displacement member is formed so as to be capable of holding and ejecting game balls. Since the disposing member is formed to be displaceable when the game ball is ejected from the displacing member, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of rattling of the base member with respect to the base member. That is, when a game ball is shot from the displacement member, the position of the center of gravity of the base member is changed by the weight of the game ball. When a configuration in which the mounting member is displaced is adopted, it is possible to suppress rattling of the base member due to a change in the position of the center of gravity. Also, when a game ball is shot from the displacement member, the base member receives a reaction accompanying the shooting of the game ball. When employed, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of rattling of the base member due to the reaction.

The game machine D3 is characterized in that, in the game machine D1 or D2, when the displacement member is displaced, a reverse member is displaced having at least a displacement component in a direction opposite to the displacement direction of the displacement member.

According to the game machine D3, in addition to the effects of the game machine D1 or D2, when the displacement member is displaced, a reverse member is displaced having at least a displacement component in the direction opposite to the displacement direction of the displacement member. Since it is provided, it is possible to reduce the change in the center-of-gravity position of the base member due to the displacement of the displacement member by the displacement of the reverse member. As a result, rattling of the base member due to changes in the position of the center of gravity can be suppressed.

If the displacement of the opposite member is started when the displacement of the displacement member is started, at least a part of the inertial forces of both can be canceled out. As a result, rattling of the base member when the displacement member is displaced from the stopped state can be easily suppressed.

The game machine D2 or D3 is characterized by comprising a transmission mechanism for transmitting the displacement of the displacement member to the arrangement member or (and) the reverse member to displace the arrangement member or (and) the reverse member. game machine D4.

According to the game machine D4, in addition to the effects of the game machine D2 or D3, a transmission mechanism for transmitting the displacement of the displacement member to the arrangement member or (and) the reverse member to displace the arrangement member or (and) the reverse member , there is no need to provide separate drive means for displacing the disposing member and/or the reverse member. That is, the driving means for displacing the displacement member can be used also as the driving means for displacing the arrangement member and/or the reverse member. Therefore, the weight of the base member can be reduced accordingly, and rattling can be easily suppressed.

In addition, since the arrangement or (and) the inverse member can be displaced in mechanical synchronization with the displacement of the displacement member, for example, the position of the displacement member can be detected by a sensor device, and the position of the displacement member can be arranged according to the detection result. It is possible to eliminate the need for control to drive the member and/or the reverse member by the driving means, thereby reducing the product cost and increasing the reliability of the displacement operation of the displacement member and/or the reverse member with respect to the displacement member. can be ensured.

In any one of the game machines D1 to D4, the displacement member has a mode in which displacement starts from a second position, and a mode in which displacement starts from a first position closer to one side of the base member than the second position. , and at least in a state where the base member is arranged at a predetermined position with respect to the base member, the game machine D5 starts to be displaced from the first position.

Here, when the displacement member is displaced from the stopped state, the change in acceleration is maximized, so the base member is likely to rattle due to the influence of inertial force.

On the other hand, according to the game machine D5, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines D1 to D4, the displacement member has a mode in which the displacement starts from the second position, and a state in which at least the base member is arranged at a predetermined position with respect to the base member (for example, the base member protrudes into the game area and is displaced from the player In the visible overhang position), the displacement starts from the first position, so rattling of the base member can be suppressed. That is, the first position is closer to one side of the base member than the second position. The member can be brought closer to the fulcrum at which the member rattles with respect to the base member, so that the base member is less likely to be affected by the inertial force when the displacement member is displaced from the stopped state. As a result, rattling of the base member can be easily suppressed.

A gaming machine D5 comprising a pinion gear arranged on the base member and a rack member having a rack gear meshed with the pinion gear, wherein the displacement member is arranged on the rack member. Machine D6.

According to the game machine D6, in addition to the effects of the game machine D5, the pinion gear arranged on the base member and the rack member formed with the rack gear meshing with the pinion gear are provided, and the rack member is provided with the displacement member. is disposed, when starting the displacement of the displacement member from the first position, not only the weight of the rack member but also the weight of the rack member is applied to one side of the base member (the base member It can be kept close to the fulcrum when rattling). As a result, rattling of the base member when the displacement member is displaced from the stopped state can be easily suppressed.

In the game machine D6, a game machine D7 is characterized in that a displacement direction when the displacement member starts to be displaced from the first position is a direction away from one side of the base member.

According to the gaming machine D7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D6, the displacement direction when the displacement member starts to be displaced from the first position is the direction away from one side of the base member. , the rack member can be brought closer to one side of the base member. That is, in order for the displacement member (rack member) to be displaced in a direction away from one side of the base member, the rack member should be based on the portion on the rack gear side with which the pinion gear meshes after the displacement of the displacement member is started. It will be directed to one side of the member. Therefore, the weight of the rack member can be kept closer to one side of the base member (the fulcrum when the base member rattles with respect to the base member). It is possible to easily suppress rattling of the base member.

In any one of game machines D1 to D7, a support structure that supports one side of the base member on the base member so as to be displaceable, and a drive mechanism that drives the base member supported by the support structure, The displacement member is formed so as to be capable of holding and ejecting a game ball, and the drive mechanism is restricting means for restricting the displacement of the base member in the direction of reaction when the game ball is ejected from the displacement member. A gaming machine D8 characterized by comprising:

According to the game machine D8, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines D1 to D7, the support structure that displaceably supports one side of the base member on the base member and the base member supported by the support structure are driven. The displacement member is formed so as to be capable of holding and ejecting the game ball, and the drive mechanism is configured to displace the base member in the direction of reaction when the game ball is ejected from the displacement member. Since the restricting means for restricting is provided, it is possible to suppress the base member from being displaced with respect to the base member due to reaction. As a result, rattling of the base member can be suppressed.

<Regarding the Concept of the Invention Using the Rotation Unit 700 as an Example>
In a game machine having a rotary member which is rotatably formed and whose outer peripheral surface is arranged so as to be visible to a player, a displacement member is provided which is displaceably arranged on the outer peripheral surface of the rotary member. Characteristic game machine E1.

Here, there is known a game machine provided with a spinning drum member which is rotatably formed and whose outer peripheral surface is arranged so as to be visible to the player (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2009-119140). In this game machine, the spinning drum member is formed in a cylindrical shape, and the display (pattern) on the outer peripheral surface is made visible to the player while rotating the spinning drum member or stopping the spinning drum member. However, in the above-described conventional game machine, it is only possible to create an effect mode in which the display on the outer peripheral surface is visually recognized by the player as the reel member rotates or stops. was insufficient.

On the other hand, according to the game machine E1, since the displacement member is provided displaceably on the outer peripheral surface of the spinning drum member, the display of the outer peripheral surface is displayed to the player as the spinning drum member rotates or stops. In addition to the visually recognizable presentation mode, the presentation mode in which the displacement member is displaced can be formed, so that the presentation mode can be changed accordingly, and the presentation effect can be enhanced.

It should be noted that the rotary drum member does not need to have a circular cross-sectional shape taken along a plane perpendicular to its axis of rotation, and may have a polygonal shape, an elliptical shape, or a combination thereof. Therefore, the outer peripheral surface of the drum member may not be a peripheral surface, but may be a flat surface, a curved surface, or a combination thereof.

In the gaming machine E1, the displacement member is formed to be displaceable between at least a first position and a second position, and at the first position, a part of the outer peripheral surface of the reel member is formed by the displacement member. A game machine E2, wherein at least a portion of the displacement member protrudes radially outward of the rotary member at the second position.

According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E1, when the displacement member is displaced to the first position, a part of the outer peripheral surface of the rotation drum member is formed by the displacement member. The outer shape can be made smaller, and the space required for rotating the drum member can be made smaller accordingly. On the other hand, when the displacement member is displaced to the second position, at least a part of the displacement member protrudes radially outward of the reel member, so that the displacement of the displacement member can be easily visually recognized by the player, resulting in a presentation effect. can increase Further, for example, by rotating the rotary member while the displacement member is arranged at the first position, and by arranging (displacing) the displacement member at the second position when the rotation of the rotary member is stopped, A portion (displacement member) visually recognized as the outer peripheral surface of the drum member can be formed to protrude outward in the radial direction of the drum member, thereby increasing interest.

In the gaming machine E2, light emitting means for emitting light is provided, the reel member is formed with an internal space, the light emitting means is disposed in the internal space, and the displacement member is the second light emitting means. A gaming machine E3 characterized in that when displaced to the position, the outer peripheral surface of the spinning drum member is opened, and the internal space communicates with the outside.

According to the game machine E3, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine E2, the light emitting means for emitting light is provided. When the displacement member is displaced to the second position, the outer peripheral surface of the rotating drum member is opened and the internal space is communicated with the outside. is displaced to the first position, it is possible to block the emission to the outside. As a result, the performance effect can be enhanced.

A gaming machine E4 comprising any one of the gaming machines E1 to E3, comprising driving means for generating a driving force, and transmission means for transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the reel member and the displacement member. .

Here, in order to form the rotary member rotatably and displaceably displace the displacement member on the rotary member, driving means is required for each of the rotary member and the displacement member, which increases the product cost. increase. Further, if the drive means for displacing the displacement member is mounted on the rotary member, the weight of the rotary member increases, making it difficult to smoothly start or stop the rotation of the rotary member.

On the other hand, according to the game machine E4, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines E1 to E3, a driving means for generating a driving force and the driving force of the driving means are applied to the reel member and the displacement member. Since the transmission means for transmitting is provided, it is possible to perform both the rotation of the rotary member and the displacement of the displacement member by using one driving means. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the product cost. Further, since it is not necessary to mount a driving means for displacing the displacement member on the rotating drum member, the weight of the rotating drum member can be reduced, and the rotation of the rotating drum member can be smoothly started or stopped.

In the gaming machine E4, the drive means is formed to be capable of generating a rotational driving force, and the transmission means includes rotation-side transmission means for transmitting the rotational driving force of the drive means to the rotating drum member; displacement-side transmission means for transmitting the rotational driving force to the displacement member; and transmission of the rotational driving force to either the rotation-side transmission means or the displacement-side transmission means in accordance with the direction of rotation of the rotational driving force of the driving means. A game machine E5 characterized by comprising a one-way clutch mechanism for interrupting transmission to the other side.

According to the game machine E5, in addition to the effects of the game machine E4, the driving means is formed to be capable of generating a rotational driving force, and the transmission means is a rotation side transmission for transmitting the rotational driving force of the driving means to the reel member. means, displacement-side transmission means for transmitting the rotational driving force of the driving means to the displacement member, and transmission of the rotational driving force to either the rotation-side transmission means or the displacement-side transmission means in accordance with the direction of rotation of the rotational driving force of the driving means. In addition, since a one-way clutch mechanism that cuts off transmission to the other side is provided, it is possible to switch the driven object (rotary member or displacement member) driven by the rotational driving force simply by switching the rotational direction of the driving means. That is, according to the rotation direction of the driving means, it is possible to switch between the rotation of the rotary member and the stop of the rotation, and the displacement of the displacement member and the stop of the displacement. It can be simplified.

In the gaming machine E5, the rotation-side transmission means includes a gear train forming part or all of a transmission path for transmitting the rotational driving force of the driving means to the rotary drum member, and one gear in the gear train. A gaming machine E6 characterized by comprising a meshing load gear.

Here, in a structure that uses a one-way clutch mechanism to switch the driven object (rotary member or displacement member) according to the rotation direction of the driving means, when the transmission of the driving force from the driving means is interrupted, It becomes free to rotate or displace in the direction it was driven by the driving force. Therefore, for example, when the driven object of the driving means is switched from the rotating drum member to the displacement member, and the transmission of the driving force is cut off, the rotating drum member becomes rotatable and continues to rotate (rotate) due to the inertial force. There is a risk that it will be

On the other hand, according to the game machine E6, in addition to the effects of the game machine E5, the rotation-side transmission means has a gear train forming part or all of the transmission path for transmitting the rotational driving force of the drive means to the rotary member. and a load gear that meshes with one of the gear trains. Therefore, even if the transmission of the rotational driving force from the driving means is interrupted, the load (resistance ) can be used to suppress the continuation of the rotation of the drum member.

The gaming machine E7, wherein the game machine E5 or E6 comprises a reverse rotation restricting means for restricting rotation of the rotary member in a direction opposite to a direction in which the rotary member is rotated by the rotational driving force of the driving means. .

According to the gaming machine E7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E5 or E6, reverse rotation restricting means for restricting rotation of the rotary member in the direction opposite to the direction in which it is rotated by the rotational driving force of the driving means is provided. Since it is provided, for example, it is possible to suppress reverse rotation of the reel member due to deviation of the center of gravity position of the reel member, collision of a game ball, or the like.

In the game machine E2 or E3, the rotating drum member is formed to have an internal space, and when the displacement member is displaced to the second position, the outer peripheral surface of the rotating drum member is opened to open the internal space. is connected to the game area.

According to the gaming machine E8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E2 or E3, the rotary member is formed to have an internal space, and when the displacement member is displaced to the second position, the outer peripheral surface of the rotary member is opened, and the internal space is communicated with the game area, so that the game balls flowing down the game area flow into the internal space of the spinning drum member, or the game balls in the internal space of the spinning drum member flow out to the game area. can be made Further, when the displacement member is displaced to the first position, the outer peripheral surface of the drum member is closed, thereby blocking the inflow and outflow of game balls between the internal space and the game area. As a result, the performance effect can be enhanced.

In the gaming machine E8, one side of the displacement member is rotatably supported by the rotary drum member, and when the displacement member is displaced to the second position, the other side opposite to the one side is the game machine. A game machine E9 characterized by being projected to an area.

According to the gaming machine E9, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E8, one side of the displacement member is rotatably pivotally supported by the drum member, and when the displacement member is displaced to the second position, the displacement member moves to the opposite side to the one side. Since the other side is projected to the game area, the game ball flowing down the game area can be received by the upper surface of the displacement member. Therefore, the game ball flowing down the game area can be easily made to flow into the internal space of the reel member by using the displacement member.

In the game machine E9, the game machine E10 is characterized in that when the displacement member is displaced to the second position, the upper surface thereof is inclined downward from the other side toward the one side.

According to the gaming machine E10, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E9, when the displacement member is displaced to the second position, the upper surface of the displacement member is inclined downward from the other side to the one side, so that the game area is expanded. After receiving the dropped game ball on the upper surface of the displacement member, the received game ball can be guided (rolled) along the downward slope of the upper surface of the displacement member to the internal space of the rotating drum member. Therefore, the game ball flowing down the game area can be easily made to flow into the internal space of the reel member by using the displacement member.

A game machine E11 in the game machine E9 or E10, further comprising displacement setting means for restricting or permitting the displacement of the displacement member in accordance with the rotational position of the reel member.

According to the gaming machine E11, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E9 or E10, the displacement setting means for restricting or permitting the displacement of the displacement member according to the rotational position of the reel member is provided. Interference with other members around the drum member can be suppressed.

In any one of the game machines E9 to E11, a rotation restricting means for restricting rotation of the reel member is provided, and the rotation restricting member is such that the displacement member is displaced to the second position, and the other side of the displacement member is displaced to the second position. A game machine E12 characterized in that the rotation of the reel member is regulated when the game machine extends into the game area.

According to the game machine E12, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines E9 to E11, it is provided with rotation restricting means for restricting the rotation of the reel member, and the rotation restricting member is displaced to the second position. When the other side of the displacement member protrudes into the game area, the rotation of the rotating drum member is regulated, so that the rotating drum member is rotated in a state in which the displacing member is projected, and is positioned on the rotation locus. Interference of the displacement member with other members can be suppressed. In addition, it is possible to suppress rotation of the rotating drum member due to the load acting when the displacement member receives the game ball flowing down the game area and the weight of the game ball rolling on the upper surface of the displacement member.

<Regarding the Concept of the Invention Using the Rotation Unit 700 as an Example>
In a game machine provided with a spinning drum member which is rotatably formed and whose outer peripheral surface is arranged so as to be visible to a player, the spinning drum member has an internal space formed therein and an internal space which is visible to the outside. and a communication port through which a game ball can pass.

Here, there is known a game machine provided with a spinning drum member which is rotatably formed and whose outer peripheral surface is arranged so as to be visible to the player (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2009-119140). According to this game machine, the spinning drum member is formed in a cylindrical shape, and the display (pattern) on the outer peripheral surface is made visible to the player while rotating the spinning drum member or stopping the spinning drum member. be able to. However, in the above-described conventional game machine, there is a problem that the spinning drum member is used only as a member for holding a display on the outer peripheral surface for the player to see, and the use of the spinning drum member is insufficient. rice field. That is, the reel member is formed relatively large because it is necessary to maintain a display that can be visually recognized by the player. Therefore, while the space occupied by the drum member increases, the portion other than the outer peripheral surface is not utilized.

On the other hand, according to the game machine F1, the spinning drum member has an internal space formed therein and a communication port that communicates the internal space with the outside and is formed so that a game ball can pass therethrough. , the game ball flowing down the game area can flow into or out of the internal space through the communication port. Therefore, the internal space of the spinning drum member, which is a dead space, can be made to function as a storage space for game balls or a ball-throwing passage, and the spinning drum member can be utilized accordingly.

In addition, the communication port may be formed only at one place of the rotating drum member, or may be formed at two or more places. When the communication port is formed only in one place, the communication port is formed in the outer peripheral surface of the rotary member. As a result, the position of the communication port can be moved up and down according to the rotational position of the drum member, and the game ball is caused to flow into or out of the internal space through the communication port (the communication port faces upward). At the same time, the game balls can flow into the internal space, and the game balls in the internal space can flow out when the communication port faces downward.

Also, the rotary drum member does not need to have a circular cross-sectional shape taken along a plane perpendicular to its axis of rotation, and may have a polygonal shape, an elliptical shape, or a combination thereof. Therefore, the outer peripheral surface of the drum member may not be a peripheral surface, but may be a flat surface, a curved surface, or a combination thereof.

A gaming machine F2 characterized in that, in the gaming machine F1, the communication port comprises a first communication port and a second communication port formed at a position different from the first communication port.

According to the game machine F2, in addition to the effects of the game machine F1, the communication port includes the first communication port and the second communication port formed at a position different from the first communication port. One of the communication port and the second communication port is used as an inflow port for inflowing game balls from the outside into the internal space, and the other of the first communication port and the second communication port is used as an outflow port for outflowing game balls from the internal space to the outside. can be In other words, the spinning drum member can be used as a ball-throwing path for game balls without rotating the spinning drum member (maintaining it in a stopped state). It should be noted that, while the drum member is being rotated, the drum member may be utilized as a ball feeding passage.

In the gaming machine F2, the first communication port is formed in the outer peripheral surface of the spinning drum member and is formed as an inflow port for allowing game balls flowing down the game area to flow into the internal space, and the second communication port is A game machine F3, characterized in that it is formed in an end face of the rotary drum member in the rotation axis direction, and is formed as an outflow port through which game balls flow out from the internal space to a game area.

According to the game machine F3, in addition to the effects of the game machine F2, the first communication port is formed on the outer peripheral surface of the reel member and is formed as an inlet for allowing the game balls flowing down the game area to flow into the internal space. , the second communication port is formed in the end face of the rotating drum member in the direction of the rotating shaft, and is formed as an outflow port through which game balls flow out from the internal space to the game area. The inflow can be easily visually recognized by the player, and the game ball can be discharged while the spinning drum member is maintained in a stopped state.

That is, since the outer peripheral surface of the spinning drum member is arranged so as to be visible to the player, the first communication port (inflow port) is formed in the outer peripheral surface, so that the player can visually recognize the inflow of the game ball. You can make it easier. On the other hand, when the second communication port is formed on the outer peripheral surface of the drum member, when the drum member is displaced to the rotational position where the communication port is upward, the game ball cannot flow out from the internal space. Since the second communication port (outflow port) is formed in the end face of the rotating drum member in the direction of the rotating shaft, it is possible to form a state in which the game ball can flow out from the internal space regardless of the rotating position of the rotating drum member.

In any one of the game machines F1 to F3, a displacement member is provided displaceably on the outer peripheral surface of the reel member, and when the displacement member is displaced to a first position, the communication port is displaced. A gaming machine F4 characterized in that the communication port is shielded by a member, and the communication port is opened when the displacement member is displaced to the second position.

According to the game machine F4, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines F1 to F3, a displacement member is provided displaceably on the outer peripheral surface of the reel member, and the displacement member is displaced to the first position. Then, the communication port is blocked by the displacement member, and when the displacement member is displaced to the second position, the communication port is opened. You can switch.

In the game machine F4, the communication port is formed in the outer peripheral surface of the drum member, one side of the displacement member is rotatably supported by the drum member, and the displacement member is at the second position. The game machine F5 is characterized in that, when displaced, the other side opposite to the one side projects into the game area.

According to the game machine F5, in addition to the effects of the game machine E4, one side of the displacement member is rotatably supported by the rotary drum member, and when the displacement member is displaced to the second position, the displacement member is shifted to the opposite side to the one side. Since the other side is projected to the game area, the game ball flowing down the game area can be received by the upper surface of the displacement member. Therefore, for example, when the communication port is formed as an inflow port, it is possible to make it easier for the game ball flowing down the game area to flow into the internal space of the reel member using the displacement member.

In the gaming machine F5, the gaming machine F6 is characterized in that one side of the displacement member is positioned forward of the other side in the rotational direction of the rotary member.

According to the gaming machine F6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F5, one side of the displacement member is positioned forward of the other side in the rotation direction of the rotary member, so that when the rotary member is rotated, Even if the displacement member interferes with the members arranged around the rotating drum member, the force generated by such interference can act in the direction of closing the displacement member (displacing it to the first position). That is, it is possible to prevent the displacement member from interfering with other members and projecting (displaced to the second position) when the rotary drum member rotates. In addition, it is possible to prevent the displacement member from engaging with another member and hindering the rotation of the rotary member.

In any one of the gaming machines F1 to F6, a base member on which the spinning drum member is rotatably disposed; A gaming machine F7 characterized by comprising a fixed member which is non-rotatable with respect to the game machine F7.

According to the gaming machine F7, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines F1 to F6, the base member on which the spinning drum member is rotatably disposed, and the inner space of the spinning drum member supported by the base member Since it is provided with a fixed member that is arranged in and is non-rotatable with respect to the rotating drum member, the game ball that has flowed into the internal space is held by the fixed member or rolled on the fixed member toward the outflow port. In addition, it is possible to suppress the game ball from running wild in the internal space or staying in the internal space due to the hindrance of rolling of the game ball with the rotation of the drum member.

A game machine F8 is characterized in that, in any one of the game machines F4 to F6, it comprises displacement setting means for restricting or permitting the displacement of the displacement member in accordance with the rotational position of the rotary member.

According to the game machine F8, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines F4 to F6, it is provided with a displacement setting means for restricting or permitting the displacement of the displacement member according to the rotational position of the rotary member. It is possible to suppress the displaced displacement member from interfering with other members around the drum member.

In the gaming machine F5 or F6, a rotation restricting means for restricting rotation of the reel member is provided, and the rotation restricting member is such that the displacement member is displaced to the second position and the other side of the displacement member is moved to the game area. A game machine F9 is characterized in that the rotation of the reel member is restricted when it is extended.

According to the gaming machine F9, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F5 or F6, it is provided with rotation restricting means for restricting the rotation of the reel member. When the other side protrudes into the game area, the rotation of the rotating drum member is regulated, so that the rotating drum member is rotated in a state in which the displacement member protrudes, and other members positioned on the rotation trajectory are rotated. interference of the displacement member with the In addition, it is possible to suppress rotation of the rotating drum member due to the load acting when the displacement member receives the game ball flowing down the game area and the weight of the game ball rolling on the upper surface of the displacement member.

In the gaming machine F3, a light emitting means that is capable of emitting light and is arranged in the internal space of the spinning drum member, and the second communication port that is an end face of the spinning drum member in the rotation axis direction are formed. A gaming machine F10 comprising an end face formed on the opposite side and an opening formed on the opposite end face, and an electrical connection line of the light emitting means is wired through the opening.

According to the game machine F10, in addition to the effects of the game machine F3, an opening is formed in the end surface of the rotary member in the direction of the rotation axis, which is opposite to the end surface where the second communication port is formed. Since the electrical connection line of the light emitting means is wired through the opening, it is possible to easily secure the space that can be used for each of the second communication port and the opening. As a result, it is possible to smoothly flow out the game ball through the second communication port, and to facilitate the wiring work to the opening of the electrical connection line. In addition, since the second communication port and the opening can be spaced as far as possible, it is possible to easily suppress interference between the game ball rolling in the internal space to the second communication port and the electrical connection line.

<Regarding the Concept of the Invention Using the Rotation Unit 700 as an Example>
A first member and a second member that are formed to be displaceable, wherein the first member covers at least a portion of the second member in an invisible manner; In a game machine formed to be displaceable between a retracted position that reduces an area that covers the second member invisibly, the first member is displaced to the retracted position, and the second member A game machine G1 characterized in that it is formed so as to be able to regulate the displacement of.

Here, a displaceable first member and a second member are provided, the first member covering at least a part of the second member invisibly, and a state arranged at the covering position. A game machine is known that is formed to be displaceable between a retracted position that reduces the area that covers the second member invisibly than the second member (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-029849). According to this gaming machine, the second member is exposed by displacing the first member to the retracted position from a state in which the first member is arranged at the covering position and the second member is invisible to the player. It is possible to perform an effect that is visually recognized by the player.

However, in the conventional game machine described above, since the second member is formed to be displaceable, when the first member is displaced to the retracted position and the second member is exposed, the second member is displaced. There is a risk that Therefore, there is a problem that the player cannot visually recognize the second member in a proper state, and the presentation effect is lowered.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine G1, the first member is formed so as to be able to regulate the displacement of the second member when it is displaced to the retracted position. can be visually recognized, and the production effect can be secured. That is, when performing the effect of displacing the first member to the retracted position and exposing the second member, the displacement of the first member to the retracted position, which is unavoidable for the effect, is performed by moving the second member. Used as a means of regulating displacement. Therefore, it is not necessary to separately provide a mechanism for restricting the displacement of the second member or perform control, and the structure can be simplified accordingly.

In the game machine G1, the game machine G2 is characterized in that the second member is formed to be rotatable and the center of gravity of the second member is eccentric from the center of rotation.

According to the game machine G2, in addition to the effects of the game machine G1, the second member is formed rotatably and the center of gravity is eccentric from the center of rotation, so the degree of freedom in designing the second member is increased. can increase That is, the second member does not need to have a shape in which the center of gravity is located at the center of rotation, and for example, a shape asymmetrical with respect to the rotation axis can be adopted, so that the presentation effect of the second member can be enhanced. . On the other hand, if the center of gravity of the second member is eccentric in this way, the second member may be rotated (rotated) around the center of rotation by its own weight. Therefore, the configuration in which the first member displaced to the retracted position is formed so as to be capable of regulating the displacement of the second member is particularly effective, thereby allowing the player to visually recognize the second member in an appropriate state. It is possible to ensure the performance effect.

In the game machine G1 or G2, a displacement member disposed displaceably on the second member is provided, and the displacement member is displaceable in a state in which at least the first member is displaced to the retracted position. A gaming machine G3 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine G1 or G2, a displacement member disposed displaceably on the second member is provided, and at least the first member of the displacement member is displaced to the retracted position. Therefore, when the first member is displaced to the retracted position and the second member is exposed, the presentation effect can be enhanced by further displacing the displacement member. can be done. On the other hand, if the displacement member is displaced when the second member is exposed, the position of the center of gravity may move along with the displacement, causing the second member to rotate (rotate). Therefore, the configuration in which the first member displaced to the retracted position is formed so as to be capable of regulating the displacement of the second member is particularly effective, thereby allowing the player to visually recognize the second member in an appropriate state. It is possible to ensure the performance effect.

In the gaming machine G3, the second member has an outer peripheral surface thereof arranged so as to be visible to the player, and the displacement member has one side rotatably supported by the outer peripheral surface of the second member, and the one side A gaming machine G4 characterized in that the other side opposite to is formed so as to be able to protrude into the game area.

According to the game machine G4, in addition to the effects of the game machine G3, the outer peripheral surface of the second member is arranged so that the player can see it, and one side of the displacement member is rotatable on the outer peripheral surface of the second member. , and the other side opposite to the one side is formed so as to be able to protrude into the game area. Therefore, for example, when the inflow port of the game ball is formed in the second member, it is possible to facilitate the flow of the game ball flowing down the game area into the inflow port by using the displacement member. . In this case, if the game ball flowing down the game area is received by the displacement member, the second member may be rotated by the load acting at that time or the weight of the game ball rolling on the upper surface of the displacement member. Therefore, the configuration in which the first member displaced to the retracted position is formed so as to be able to regulate the displacement of the second member is particularly effective, thereby causing the displacement member to protrude at a predetermined position in the game area. can be easily maintained.

In the gaming machine G4, the first member is arranged in the game area facing the outer peripheral surface of the second member at the covering position, and outside the game area at the retracted position. A gaming machine G5 characterized by being arranged.

According to the game machine G5, in addition to the effects of the game machine G4, the first member is arranged in the game area while facing the outer peripheral surface of the second member in the covering position, so that the game flows down the game area. It is possible to prevent the ball from colliding with the second member and rotating the second member. In particular, when the rotation position of the second member is a rotation position that directs the displacement member toward the game area, the game ball flowing down the game area collides with the displacement member, and the displacement member is released (tension issued) can be suppressed.

In addition, since the first member is arranged outside the area of the game area at the retracted position, the displacement of the first member to the retracted position can secure a space for the displacement member to protrude into the game area. . Therefore, the outer peripheral surface of the second member can be brought closer to the game area side (player side) by that amount, making it easier for the player to visually recognize the displacement member.

In the game machine G5, the first member is rotatable around a rotation axis substantially parallel to the rotation axis of the second member, and is shaped like a plate curved along the outer peripheral surface of the second member. A game machine G6 characterized by:

According to the game machine G6, in addition to the effects of the game machine G5, the first member is formed rotatably around a rotation axis substantially parallel to the rotation axis of the second member, and the outer peripheral surface of the second member Since it is formed in a plate-like shape that curves along the .theta. Therefore, the space for arranging other members can be secured accordingly. In addition, since the first member is formed in such a curved shape, the game balls flowing down the game area are prevented from being stopped on the first member arranged at the covering position, and the game balls are smoothly played. can flow down.

A game machine G7 in any one of the game machines G3 to G6, characterized by comprising driving means for generating a driving force, and transmission means for transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the second member and the displacement member. .

Here, in order to form the second member rotatably and displaceably displace the displacement member on the second member, driving means is required for each of the second member and the displacement member, which increases the product cost. increase. Moreover, if the driving means for displacing the displacement member is mounted on the second member, the weight of the second member increases, making it difficult to smoothly start or stop the rotation of the second member.

On the other hand, according to the game machine G7, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines G3 to G6, a driving means for generating a driving force and the driving force of the driving means are applied to the second member and the displacement member. Since the transmission means for transmitting is provided, it is possible to perform both the rotation of the second member and the displacement of the displacement member by using one driving means. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the product cost. Moreover, since it is not necessary to mount the driving means for displacing the displacement member on the second member, the weight of the second member can be reduced, and the rotation of the second member can be smoothly started or stopped.

A gaming machine G8 in the gaming machine G7, further comprising coupling means for coupling the first member and the displacement member to link the displacement of the displacement member with the displacement of the first member.

According to the game machine G8, in addition to the effects of the game machine G7, the connection means for connecting the first member and the displacement member and interlocking the displacement of the displacement member with the displacement of the first member is provided. The driving means for displacing the first displacement member can also be used as the driving means for displacing the first displacement member. In this case, when the displacement member and the first member are displaced by the driving force of separate driving means, the displacement member and the first member may interfere with each other if a control failure occurs. Since the first member can be mechanically connected to synchronize their displacements, interference between the displacement member and the first member can be reliably suppressed.

<Regarding the Concept of the Invention Using the Rotation Unit 700 as an Example>
A game machine comprising driving means for generating a driving force, a displacement member displaced by the driving force of the driving means, and transmission means for transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the displacement member, wherein the transmission means is , a first member, a second member located closer to the displacement member than the first member in the transmission path of the driving force, and an engaging member disposed between the first member and the second member; and when the first member is displaced in one direction with respect to the second member, the engaging member engages with the first member and the second member to transmit the driving force. and the second member is displaced in the one direction prior to the first member in a predetermined section of the displacement section of the displacement member.

A game machine is known that includes a driving means for generating a driving force, a displacement member displaced by the driving force of the driving means, and a transmission means for transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the displacement member. (for example, JP-A-2015-029849). However, in the above-described conventional game machine, the state of transmission of the driving force from the driving means to the displacement member by the transmission means is always constant. It is displaced at the displacement speed, and the displacement mode of such a displacement member cannot be changed. Therefore, there is a problem that the performance effect of the performance accompanying the displacement of the displacement member is insufficient.

The displacement speed of the displacement member can be changed by increasing or decreasing the driving speed of the driving means. In order to obtain the speed, it is necessary to arrange a sensor device for detecting the position of the displacement member, and to control the output of the driving means according to the detection result of the sensor device, which leads to an increase in product cost and control cost. . In addition, the structure and control become complicated, resulting in a decrease in reliability.

On the other hand, according to the game machine H1, the transmission means includes a first member, a second member positioned closer to the displacement member than the first member in the transmission path of the driving force, and the first member and the second member. and an engaging member disposed between the members, the engaging member engaging the first member and the second member when the first member is displaced in one direction with respect to the second member. As a result, the driving force is transmitted and the transmission of the driving force is cut off, and the second member is displaced in one direction ahead of the first member in a predetermined section of the displacement section of the displacement member. Therefore, regardless of the driving state of the driving means, the displacement speed of the displacement member in the predetermined section can be made faster than the displacement speed of the displacement member in other sections. Therefore, it is possible to change the displacement mode of the displacement member and enhance the effect of the presentation associated with the displacement of the displacement member.

Further, according to the game machine H1, regardless of the driving state of the driving means, the second member can be caused to precede the first member in one direction. The driving means can be driven at a constant driving speed, and there is no need to increase or decrease the driving speed of the driving means in the middle of the displacement section of the displacement member (ie depending on the predetermined section or another section). As a result, the control can be simplified, the control cost can be reduced, and the operational reliability can be improved. Alternatively, the driving of the driving means can be stopped in a predetermined section, in which case energy consumption can be suppressed.

Further, according to the game machine H1, in the driving state in which the first member is displaced in the other direction with respect to the two members, the engagement of the engaging member is released and the transmission of the driving force is interrupted. The displacement member can be placed in a stopped state (non-driving state), and the driving force of the driving means in such a driving state can be used as a driving force for driving other members. That is, by switching the driving direction of the driving means, the displacement member and the other member can be displaced.

The transmission means is formed so that when the first member is displaced in the other direction with respect to the two members, the engagement of the engaging member is released and the transmission of the driving force is interrupted. It may be something that is done.

In the gaming machine H1, the displacement member is rotatably formed, and its center of gravity position is eccentric from the center of rotation. A gaming machine H2 characterized in that it is formed to be operable in a displacing direction.

According to the game machine H2, in addition to the effects of the game machine H1, the displacement member is rotatably formed, the center of gravity of the displacement member is eccentric from the center of rotation, and the weight of the displacement member increases in a predetermined section. Since it is formed so as to be capable of displacing the two members in one direction, the weight of the displacement member can be used to displace the second member in one direction ahead of the first member. . That is, the displacement speed of the displacement member in a predetermined section can be made faster than the displacement speed of the displacement member in other sections. As a result, the displacement mode of the displacement member can be varied, and the effect of the presentation associated with the displacement of the displacement member can be enhanced.

For example, when the displacement member is formed so as to be capable of repeating 360-degree rotation about its rotation axis, the displacement speed (rotational speed) of the displacement member in a predetermined section is the same as that of the displacement member in other sections. A mode in which the displacement speed (rotational speed) is faster, that is, a rotation mode in which the rotational speed is increased or decreased during one rotation, can be repeatedly performed.

In the gaming machine H2, the transmission means includes a main body portion that is rotationally driven by the second member and a crank member that has a pin portion projecting from the main body portion and positioned eccentrically from the center of rotation of the main body portion; an arm member having a sliding groove formed at one end thereof through which the pin portion of the crank member is slidably inserted and an intermediate portion of which is rotatably supported; A gaming machine H3 characterized by being connected to a member.

According to the game machine H3, in addition to the effects of the game machine H2, the transmission means includes the main body portion that is rotationally driven by the second member, and the transmission means that protrudes from the main body portion and is positioned eccentrically from the rotation center of the main body portion. Since it comprises a crank member having a pin portion, and an arm member having a slide groove formed on one end side through which the pin portion of the crank member is slidably inserted and an intermediate portion rotatably supported, By rotating the crank member by the second member and sliding the pin member along the slide groove, the other end side of the arm member can be reciprocated. In this case, since the other end of the arm member is connected to the displacement member, the displacement member can reciprocate between the first position and the second position in accordance with the reciprocating motion of the other end of the arm member. . That is, the displacement direction of the displacement member can be switched without switching the driving direction of the driving means.

In the game machine H3, the displacement member is reciprocated between a first position and a second position in accordance with reciprocation of the other end of the arm member, and is displaced from the first position to the second position. and while being displaced from the second position to the first position, the direction in which the weight of the displacement member acts on the second member is different from that of the second member. A game machine H4 characterized in that the direction of displacing the second member is changed from the direction of displacement to the direction of displacing the second member in the one direction.

According to the gaming machine H4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine H3, the displacement member is reciprocated between the first position and the second position in accordance with the reciprocating motion of the other end of the arm member. to the second position and during the displacement from the second position to the first position, the direction in which the weight of the displacement member acts on the second member Since the direction of displacing the second member in the other direction is changed to the direction of displacing the second member in one direction, when the displacing member is reciprocated, it can be displaced in any direction from the middle of the displacement. The displacement speed of the displacement member can be increased. As a result, the displacement mode of the displacement member can be varied, and the effect of the presentation associated with the displacement of the displacement member can be enhanced.

For example, the displacement member is reciprocated between an overhanging position (first position) where the displacement member can be visually recognized by the player, and a retracted position (second position) where the overhanging position is retracted. In operation, when the displacement member is extended from the retracted position to the overhang position, the displacement member is moved at a constant displacement speed halfway, and the displacement speed of the displacement member is increased from the middle to vigorously move the displacement member. When retracting the displacement member from the overhanging position to the overhanging position, the displacement member is displaced at a constant displacement speed until the middle, and the displacement speed of the displacement member is increased from the middle. By doing so, the displacement member can be immediately retracted to the retracted position.

In the gaming machine H1, the displacement member is slidably displaceable, and is inclined downward in the direction of the slide displacement in the predetermined section, so that the weight of the displacement member moves the second member. A game machine H5 characterized by being formed to be operable in the direction of displacement in the one direction.

According to the game machine H5, in addition to the effects of the game machine H1, the displacement member is formed to be slidably displaceable, and is inclined downward in the direction of the slide displacement in a predetermined section, thereby increasing the weight of the displacement member. Since the second member is formed to act in the direction of displacing the second member in one direction, the weight of the displacement member is used to displace the second member in one direction ahead of the first member. be able to. That is, the displacement speed of the displacement member in a predetermined section can be made faster than the displacement speed of the displacement member in other sections. As a result, the displacement mode of the displacement member can be varied, and the effect of the presentation associated with the displacement of the displacement member can be enhanced.

A game machine H6 characterized in that, in any one of the game machines H2 to H5, the displacement member is formed so as to be capable of holding a game ball at least in the predetermined section.

According to the game machine H6, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines H2 to H5, the displacement member is formed to be able to hold the game ball at least in a predetermined section, so that the displacement member holds the game ball. In this state, the weight of the displacement member as a whole can be increased by the weight of the game ball, and the displacement speed of the displacement member in a predetermined section can be increased. In addition, the weight of the displacement member as a whole is made different depending on whether the displacement member holds a game ball or not, or according to the number of game balls held. be able to. Thereby, the displacement speed of the displacement member can be varied in each case. As a result, the displacement mode of the displacement member can be varied, and the effect of the presentation associated with the displacement of the displacement member can be enhanced.

In any one of the game machines H2 to H6, the displacement member includes a receiving portion for receiving a game ball flowing down the game area, and at least in the predetermined section, when the receiving portion receives the game ball, the game ball is received by the receiving portion. A game machine H7 characterized in that a force acting on the displacement member from the second member can act in a direction of displacing the second member in the one direction.

According to the game machine H7, in any one of the game machines H2 to H6, the displacement member includes a receiving portion that receives the game ball flowing down the game area, and at least in a predetermined section, when the receiving portion receives the game ball Since the force acting on the displacement member from the game ball is formed to act in the direction of displacing the second member in one direction, when the receiving part receives the game ball, the kinetic energy of the game ball can be used to increase the displacement speed of the displacement member in a predetermined section. In addition, the force acting on the displacement member is made different depending on whether the receiving part is receiving the game ball, when it is not receiving the game ball, or according to the falling speed (magnitude of kinetic energy) of the game ball when receiving it. be able to. Thereby, the displacement speed of the displacement member can be varied in each case. As a result, the displacement mode of the displacement member can be varied, and the effect of the presentation associated with the displacement of the displacement member can be enhanced.

The game ball that flows down the game area is not limited to the game ball that moves along the direction of gravity on the front surface of the game board, but also includes the game ball that moves in a direction different from the direction of gravity. Game balls that move in a direction different from the direction of gravity include, for example, game balls that collide with nails, tulips, accessories, etc. A game ball that moves in a direction different from the direction of gravity is exemplified.

In the game machine H6 or H7, the transmission means comprises a gear train forming part or all of the transmission path of the driving force, and a load gear meshed with one gear of the gear train. A game machine H8 characterized by.

According to the gaming machine H8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine H6 or H7, the transmission means includes a gear train forming part or all of the driving force transmission path and one gear in the gear train. Since the load gear is provided, when the game ball is held by the displacement member or received by the receiving part in a predetermined section, the weight or kinetic energy of the game ball is used. to displace the second member in one direction ahead of the first member (that is, the displacement speed of the displacement member in a predetermined section is made faster than the displacement speed of the displacement member in other sections), If the game ball is not held by the displacement member or the game ball is not received by the receiving portion, the load (resistance) when rotating the load gear is used to force the second member against the first member. Precise displacement in one direction (that is, increasing the displacement speed of the displacement member in a predetermined section) can be suppressed.

That is, when the game ball is not held by the displacement member or the receiving portion does not receive the game ball, the displacement speed of the displacement member in a predetermined section becomes faster than the displacement speed of the displacement member in other sections. Only when the game ball is held by the displacement member or the receiving part receives the game ball, the displacement speed of the displacement member in a predetermined section is set higher than the displacement speed of the displacement member in other sections It is possible to easily form a mode of speeding up.

In any one of the game machines A1 to A14, B1 to B8, C1 to C14, D1 to D8, E1 to E12, F1 to F10, G1 to G8 and H1 to H8, the game machine is a slot machine. Game machine K1 to play. Among them, the basic configuration of the slot machine is "provided with variable display means for displaying the identification information in a fixed manner after dynamically displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of identification information, As a result, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has passed, and the stop time and a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the definite identification information of is the specific identification information. In this case, typical examples of game media include coins and medals.

In any one of game machines A1 to A14, B1 to B8, C1 to C14, D1 to D8, E1 to E12, F1 to F10, G1 to G8 and H1 to H8, the game machine is a pachinko game machine. A game machine K2. Above all, the basic configuration of a pachinko game machine is provided with an operating handle, and in response to the operation of the operating handle, balls are shot into a predetermined game area, and the balls are ejected into actuating openings arranged at predetermined positions in the game area. For example, the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is determined and stopped after a predetermined period of time, on the condition that winning a prize (or passing through an activation opening) is a necessary condition. In addition, when a special game state occurs, a variable prize winning device (specific prize winning port) arranged at a predetermined position in the game area is opened in a predetermined manner to allow the balls to win, and a value corresponding to the number of winning balls is provided. Values (including not only prize balls but also data written to magnetic cards, etc.) can be given.

In any of gaming machines A1 to A14, B1 to B8, C1 to C14, D1 to D8, E1 to E12, F1 to F10, G1 to G8 and H1 to H8, the gaming machine comprises a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. A gaming machine K3 characterized by being a fusion. Among them, the basic configuration of the integrated game machine is "provided with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of identification information, and an operation means for starting (such as an operation lever) The identification information starts to change due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has passed. a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stop is the specific identification information; the ball is used as a game medium; A gaming machine configured to require a predetermined number of balls at the start of dynamic display, and to pay out a large number of balls at the occurrence of a special game state.
<Others>
Among game machines such as pachinko machines, there is known a game machine including a reel member which is rotatably formed and whose outer peripheral surface is arranged so as to be visible to the player (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2009. -119140).
However, the game machine described above has a problem that the presentation effect is insufficient.
The present technical idea has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and an object thereof is to provide a game machine capable of enhancing the performance effect.
<Means>
In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine of Technical Concept 1 is provided with a spinning drum member which is formed rotatably and whose outer peripheral surface is arranged so as to be visible to the player. A displacement member is provided so as to be displaceable on the outer peripheral surface.
The gaming machine according to technical idea 2 is the gaming machine according to technical idea 1, wherein the displacement member is formed to be displaceable between at least a first position and a second position, and at the first position, the spinning drum A portion of the outer peripheral surface of the member is formed by the displacement member, and at the second position, at least a portion of the displacement member protrudes radially outward of the rotary member.
The gaming machine according to technical idea 3 is the gaming machine according to technical idea 2, wherein the gaming machine according to technical idea 2 includes light emitting means for emitting light, and the spinning drum member is formed to have an internal space, and the internal space contains the When the light emitting means is provided and the displacement member is displaced to the second position, the outer peripheral surface of the rotary member is opened and the internal space communicates with the outside.
<effect>
According to the gaming machine described in technical idea 1, the performance effect can be enhanced.
According to the game machine described in technical idea 2, in addition to the effects of the game machine described in technical idea 1, it is possible to enhance interest.
According to the gaming machine described in technical idea 3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in technical idea 2, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect.

10 pachinko machine 410 base member 411f collection port (collection member)
422 cam member (part of support structure)
430 link member (part of support structure)
4441g engagement wall (insertion member)
460 Transmission mechanism 2464 Movable rack (reverse member)
465 transmission gear (pinion gear)
466 rack (rack member)
467 ball receiving part (displacement member)
3468 First link member (reverse member)
470 base member (base member)
471a Standing wall (wall part)
481b1 recessed portion 492 displacement member (restricting means)
520 base plate (second base member)
525 rolling part (passage member)
525b projection (resistance means)
540 Distributing member (restricting means, distributing means, integral member)
540a leg (protrusion)
541 regulating plate (first retractable part, sorting means)
542 storage plate (second haunting part, flow state changing means)
7710 displacement member 7713 ball receiving member (receiving portion)
7720 transmission member (transmission means)
7721 rotating member (main body)
7722 drive pin (pin part)
7723 Arm member 7723a Driven groove (sliding groove)
730 left transmission member (rotation side transmission means, second member)
731 transmission mechanism (one-way clutch mechanism)
731a transmission gear (part of gear train)
731b transmission gear (part of gear train)
731c transmission gear (part of gear train)
731d transmission gear (part of gear train)
731e, 7730 load gear (load gear)
740 right transmission member (displacement side transmission means, first member)
741 rotating member (crank member)
741a Protrusion (pin portion)
742 Arm member 742b First sliding groove (sliding groove)
760 box member (lid member)
770 Lid member (displacement member, first member)
780 rotation restricting member (displacement restricting means)
800 rotating body (rotating member, second member)
810 base plate (fixing member)
811b Communication port (opening)
812b communication port (second communication port)
820 LED board (light emitting means)
831 opening (first communication port)
870 opening/closing member (displacement member)
871 Protrusion (part of displacement setting means, part of connecting means)
892 sliding groove (part of displacement setting means, part of connecting means)
KR1 1st throwing path (downstream path)
KR2 2nd throw path (2nd branch passage)
KR3 3rd throw path (1st branch passage)
SP4 biasing spring (biasing means)
KM4 drive motor (driving means)
OW1 one-way clutch (engagement means)

Claims (3)

In a gaming machine comprising a spinning drum member which is rotatably formed and whose outer peripheral surface is arranged so as to be visible to a player,
A gaming machine comprising a displacement member disposed displaceably on an outer peripheral surface of the reel member. The displacement member is formed to be displaceable between at least a first position and a second position. At the first position, a part of the outer peripheral surface of the rotary drum member is formed by the displacement member, and at the second position. 2. A game machine according to claim 1, wherein at least a part of said displacement member protrudes radially outward of said rotary member. A light emitting means for emitting light is provided, the rotating drum member is formed with an inner space, the light emitting means is arranged in the inner space, and the displacement member is displaced to the second position. 3. A gaming machine according to claim 2, wherein said outer peripheral surface of said rotating drum member is opened and said internal space communicates with the outside.

Images